Home

1127117 - [PROJECT.TOC] - Performance Heating & Plumbing

1. SD 02 Shop Drawings Group I Technical Data Package G Group IV Technical Data Package G Group V Technical Data Package G SD 03 Product Data Group I Technical Data Package G Group Technical Data Package G h n Group IV Technical Data Package G Group V Technical Data Package G SD 05 Design Data Group I Technical Data Package G SD 06 Test Reports Group Technical Data Package G Group IV Technical Data Package G SD 07 Certificates Group I Technical Data Package G Technical Specialists G SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions Group I Technical Data Package G 3 DELIVERY OF TECHNICAL DATA AND COMPUTER SOFTWARE All items of computer software and technical data including technical data which relates to computer software which is specifically identified in this specification shall be delivered in accordance with the CONTRACT CLAUSES SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS and in accordance with the Contract Data Requirements List CDRL DD FORM 1423 which is attached to and thereby made a part of this contract All data delivered shall be identified by reference to the particular specification paragraph against which it is furnished 3 1 Group I Technical Data Package Submit Group 1 Technica
2. SECTION 32 12 19 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 2 iL MATERIALS alist Bituminous Material Provide bituminous material conforming to AASHTO M 226 or ASTM D946 D946M or ASTM D946 AnolASTM D3381 D3381M Grade MS 2 3b 42 Aggregates Provide aggregates consisting of crushed stone crushed slag crushed gravel screenings sand and mineral filler The portion of these materials retained on the No 8 sieve is known as coarse aggregate the portion passing the No 8 sieve and retained on the No 200 sieve is fine aggregate and the portion passing the No 200 sieve is mineral filler The aggregate when blended shall conform to the gradation shown in TABLE I at the end of this section when tested in accordance with ASTM C117 and ASTM C136 ol Det Coarse Aggregates Provide coarse aggregates consisting of clean sound durable particles meeting the following requirements a Percentage of loss shall not exceed 40 after 500 revolutions as determined in accordance with ASTM C131 b Percentage of loss shall not exceed 18 after five cycles performed in accordance with ASTM C88 using magnesium sulfate c The dry weight of crushed slag shall not be less than 75 pcf as determined in accordance with ASTM C29 C29M d Crushed aggregate retained on the No 4 sieve and each coarser sieve shall contain at least 75 percent by weight of crushed pieces having one or more fractured faces with
3. Naval Facilities Engineering Command WORK ORDER NO 1127117 APPROPRIATION O amp MN Repairs to Submarine A School BQ 534 Project Manager Civil Structural Interior Fire Protection Plumbing Mechanical Electrical Lead Engineer Nancy Wroten NAVFAC ML NEIPT Date 11JUNE2012 For Commander NAVFAC Engineering Director Northeast IPT Capital At Naval Submarine Base New London CT VOLUME III of III Division 26 Division 34 SUBMITTED BY NAVFAC ML NEIPT Bldg 2144 9742 Maryland Ave Norfolk Naval Station Norfolk Virginia PREPARED BY Roger Schalge NAVFAC ML NEIPT Vince Hill PE NAVAC ML NEIPT Brian Felker PE NAVAFAC ML NEIPT Alison Roan NAVAC ML NEIPT Patrick Bakaj PE NAVFAC ML Joe Smith PE NAVAC ML NEIPT Joe Smith PE NAVAC ML NEIPT Chris Vidal PE NAVAFAC ML NEIPT APPROVED BY Mid Atlantic James E Donahue Improvements R A James E Donahi Submarine A School BQ 534 T1277 DIVISION 00 01 15 DIVISION 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 11 14 20 30 32 32 33 35 35 42 45 50 57 58 62 74 75 78 78 78 00 00 00 00 01 LT 00 26 40 00 00 00 19 00 35 19 00 00 23 24 DIVISION 02 02 02 02 82 83 84 85 16 13 16 00 DIVISION 03 30 00 DIVISION 05 05 05 05 05 05 12 40 50 5I 51 52 00
4. Electrical tests Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low resistance ohmmeter if applicable Perform insulation resistance test of each current transformer and its secondary wiring Perform a polarity test of each current transformer Perform a ratio verification test Watthour Meter Visual and mechanical inspection 1 Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings Inspect physical and mechanical condition Verify tightness of electrical connections SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 16 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 b Electrical tests 3 7 1 4 Calibrate watthour meters according to manufacturer s published data Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face of meter where applicable Verify that current transformer secondary circuits are intact Grounding System a Visual and mechanical inspection T3 Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and specifications b Electrical tests 3T 2 Perform ground impedance measurements utilizing the fall of potential method On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods perform tests after interconnections are complete On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected Take measurements in normally dry weather not less than 48 hours after rainfall Use a portable ground testing megger in accordance with manufacturer s inst
5. SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 14 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 3 6 1 Cast In Place Concrete Cast in place concrete work shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 6 2 Sealing When the installation is complete the Contractor shall seal all entries into the equipment enclosure with an approved sealing method Seals shall be of sufficient strength and durability to protect all energized live parts of the equipment from rodents insects or other foreign matter of FIELD QUALITY CONTROL oT Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests Perform in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests performed in accordance with NETA ATS Fey Ae ine Pad Mounted Transformers a Visual and mechanical inspection 1 Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings 2 Inspect physical and mechanical condition Check for damaged or cracked insulators and leaks 3 Inspect anchorage alignment and grounding 4 Verify the presence of PCB content labeling 5 Verify the bushings and transformer interiors are clean 6 Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low resistance ohmmeter verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method or performing thermographic survey 7 Verify correct liquid lev
6. Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 pneumatic hole punchers or rock breakers also large boulders buried masonry or concrete other than pavement exceedingl 2 cubic yard in volume Removal of hard material will not be considered rock excavation because of intermittent drilling and blasting that is performed merely to increase production Ve 2 37 Unstable Material Unstable material are too wet to properly support the utility pipe conduit or appurtenant structure 1 2 8 Select Granular Material 1 2 8 1 General Requirements Select granular material consist of materials classified as GW GP SW SP by ASTM D 2487 where indicated The liquid limit of such material must not exceed 35 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318 The plasticity index must not be greater than 12 percent when tested in accordance with ASTM D 4318 and not more than 35 percent by weight may be finer than No 200 sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM D 1140 Provide a minimum coefficient of permeability of 0 002 feet per minute when tested in accordance with ASTM D 2434 1 2 9 Initial Backfill Material Initial backfill consists of select granular material or satisfactory materials free from rocks 8 inches or larger in any dimension or free from rocks of such size as recommended by the pipe manufacturer whichever is smaller When the pipe is coated or wrapped for corrosion protection free the initial backfill material of stones larger than 3 i
7. b Telecommunications Bonding Conductors Provide main telecommunications service equipment ground consisting of separate bonding conductor for telecommunications between the TMGB and readily accessible grounding connection of the electrical service Grounding and bonding conductors should not be placed in ferrous metallic conduit If it is necessary to place grounding and bonding conductors in ferrous metallic conduit that exceeds3 feet in length the conductors shall be bonded to each end of the conduit using a grounding bushing or a No 6 AWG conductor minimum c Telecommunications Grounding Connections Telecommunications grounding connections to the TMGB shall utilize listed compression two hole lugs exothermic welding suitable and equivalent one hole non twisting lugs or other irreversible compression type connections All metallic pathways cabinets and racks for telecommunications cabling and interconnecting hardware located within the same room or space as the TMGB shall be bonded to the TMGB In a metal frame structural steel building where the steel framework is readily accessible within the room each TMGB shall be bonded to the vertical steel metal frame using a minimum No 6 AWG conductor Where the metal frame is external to the room and readily accessible the metal frame shall be bonded to the TGB or TMGB with a minimum No 6 AWG conductor When practicable because of shorter distances and where horizontal steel members a
8. ASTM C117 2004 Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75 um No 200 Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing ASTM C127 2007 Standard Test Method for Density Relative Density Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate ASTM C128 2007a Standard Test Method for Density Relative Density Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate ASTM C131 2006 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine ASTM C136 2006 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates ASTM C183 2008 Standard Practice for Sampling and the Amount of Testing of Hydraulic Cement ASTM C206 2003 R 2009 Standard Specification for Finishing Hydrated Lime ASTM C29 C29M 2009 Standard Test Method for Bulk Density Unit Weight and Voids in Aggregate ASTM C88 2005 Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate ASTM D 1250 2008 Standard Guide for Use of the Petroleum Measurement Tables ASTM D 140 D 140M 2009 Standard Practice for Sampling Bituminous Materials ASTM D 242 D 242M 2009 Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures ASTM D 4791 2010 Flat Particles Elongated Particles or Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate ASTM D 75 D 75M 2009 Standard Practice for Sampling SECTION 32 12 19 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 11271
9. ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM A641 A641M 2009a Standard Specification for Zinc Coated Galvanized Carbon Steel Wire ASTM E 2129 2005 Standard Practice for Data Collection for Sustainability Assessment of Building Products CALIFORNIA ENERGY COMMISSION CEC CEC Title 24 1978 R 2005 California s Energy Efficiency Standards for Residential and Nonresidential Buildings GREEN SEAL GS GC 12 1997 Occupancy Sensors ILLUMINATING ENGINEERING SOCIETY OF NORTH AMERICA IESNA IESNA HB 9 2000 Errata 2004 Errata 2005 Errata 2006 IES Lighting Handbook INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE IEEE 100 2000 Archived The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms IEEE C2 2012 National Electrical Safety Code IEEE C62 41 1 2002 R 2008 Guide on the Surges Environment in Low Voltage 1000 V and Less AC Power Circuits IEEE C62 41 2 2002 Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low Voltage 1000 V and Less AC Power Circuits SECTION 26 51 00 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA ANSI C78 1381 1998 American National Standard for Electric Lamps 250 Watt 70 Watt M85 Metal Halide Lamps ANSI C78 901 2005 American National Standard for Electric Lamps Single Base Fluorescent Lamps Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics ANSI C82 4 2002 American National Standard for Ballasts for High Intensity Dis
10. End of Section SECTION 26 23 00 Page 14 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 26 27 14 00 20 ELECTRICITY METERING 02 11 PART 1 GENERAL alee 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE IEEE C2 2012 National Electrical Safety Code IEEE C37 90 1 2002 Errata 2003 Errata 2004 Standard for Surge Withstand Capability SWC Tests for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus IEEE C57 13 2008 Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers IEEE Stds Dictionary 2009 IEEE Standards Dictionary Glossary of Terms amp Definitions INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION NETA NETA ATS 2009 Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems INTERNATIONAL ELECTROTECHNICAL COMMISSION IEC IEC 60687 1992 Alternating Current Static Watt Hour Meters for Active Energy Classes 0 2 S and 0 5 S IEC 62053 22 2003 Electricity Metering Equipment a c Particular Requirements Part 22 Static Meters for Active Energy Classes 0 2 S and 0 5 S Ed 1 0 NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA ANSI C12 1 2008 Electric Meters Code for Electricity Metering ANSI C12 18 2006 Protocol Specification for ANSI Type 2 Optical P
11. SECTION 26 27 14 00 20 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 PART 2 PRODUCTS Ziel ELECTRICITY METERS AND ACCESSORIES Provide meter s and connect the meter s to the existing AMI DAS The contractor shall use the existing government laptop computers to configure the meter using existing software loaded on the computer The contractor will not be allowed to modify any software or add any additional software to the computer Alternatively the government will configure the meter s which must be compatible with the existing system using existing software Contract shall insure that the meter s will transmit the specified data to the DAS The current meters being used by Naval SUBASE New London CT are Nexus 1272 Za Lsd Physical and Common Requirements a Provide metering system components in accordance with the Metering System Schedule shown in this specification Provide Meter configuration template b Replace all existing meter bases For socket arrangements use meter and base form of 9S unless installation specific limitations require the use of a different form type For panelboards switchboards and switchgear match the existing installation with the new meter base c Meter shall have NEMA 3Renclosure for surface mounting with bottom or rear penetrations d Surge withstand capability shall conform to IEEE C37 90 1 e Use 12 SIS XHHW or equivalent wiring with ring lugs for all meter connections Color code
12. Submarine A School BQ 534 V2 7A within each cabinet panel or unit so that it does not interfere with the wiring or terminals Maintain existing color code scheme where connecting to existing equipment 2 2 10 Fire Alarm Control Panel FACP Provide a complete control panel fully enclosed in a lockable steel enclosure as specified herein Operations required for testing or for normal care and maintenance of the systems shall be performed from the front of the enclosure If more than a single unit is required at a location to form a complete control panel the unit enclosures shall match exactly Each control unit shall provide power supervision control and logic for the entire system utilizing solid state modular components internally mounted and arranged for easy access Each control unit shall be suitable for operation on a 120 volt 60 hertz normal building power supply Provide each panel with supervisory functions for power failure internal component placement and operation Visual indication of alarm supervisory or trouble initiation on the fire alarm control panel shall be by liquid crystal display or similar means with a minimum of 80 characters of which at least 32 are field changeable 22 Ou Cabinet Install control panel components in cabinets large enough to accommodate all components and also to allow ample gutter space for interconnection of panels as well as field wiring The enclosure shall be identified by an
13. The publications are referred to in the text by the ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM A167 ASTM D 1535 ASTM D 877 ASTM D 92 ASTM D 97 FM GLOBAL FM FM APP GUIDE IEEE IEEE IEEE IEEE IEEE INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL 100 386 C2 C37 47 C57 12 00 1999 R 2009 Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate Sheet and Strip 2008e1 Specifying Color by the Munsell System 2002 R 2007 Standard Test Method for Dielectric Breakdown Voltage of Insulating Liquids Using Disk Electrodes 2005a R 2010 Standard Test Method for Flash and Fire Points by Cleveland Open Cup Tester 2011 Pour Point of Petroleum Products updated on line Approval Guide http www approvalguide com AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE 2000 Archived The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms 2006 Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems Above 600V 2012 National Electrical Safety Code 2000 Standard for High Voltage Current Limiting Type Distribution Class Fuses and Fuse Disconnecting Switches 2010 Standard General Requirements for Liquid Immersed Distribution Power and Regulating Transformers SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 IEEE C57 12 28 2005 Standard for Pad Mounted Equipment Enclosure Integrity IEEE C57 12 29 2005 Standard for Pad Mounted Equipment Enclo
14. arrives at th IAW UFC 04 030 01 implemented to decrease lighting d periods of inactivity leve s by Data Base access pedestal function within ACDB the to determine cardholder access privileges as well as to keep a log of all transactions op ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 24 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 The PACS solution shall be in compliance with HSPD 12 FIPS 201 and DTM 09 012 To comply with HSPD 12 the following shall be adhered to The PACS shall be required to interface with the Navy Access Control Management System NACMS via the SEIWG JGS To insure compliance IAW OMB Memorandum M 05 24 only card readers that are shown in the GSA Federal Supply Schedule 70 Special Item Number SIN 132 62 HSPD 12 Product and Service Components shall be used http fips20lep cio gov apl php The PACS solution shall be able to process information from any of the authorized credentials Common Access Card CAC using the contactless chip capability Teslin card e g retiree and dependent Navy Commercial Access Control System NCACS Locally managed visitor cards Other contactless FIPS 201 compliant credentials TWIC The Navy Physical Access Control System NPACS shall serve as the foundation for the site PACS NPACS consists of a client server architecture with the servers located at Navy
15. permission from the Government 3 3 Group III Technical Data Package Submit Test Plan for the Factory Acceptance Test Factory Acceptance Test Report Contractor Fie Contractor Fi ld Test Test Plans before th days before th scheduled start scheduled st ld Test Report of all Submit the Factory Acceptance Test Data Package within 60 Current th t sign 1127117 days of Notice Site Conditions ificantly a that d pport Ead the Ce factory acceptance tart of the Contractor Field Tests t Report and Contract t without writ Test a minimum of affect e specification the those site changes or urrent Site Do not correct ten Plan for and 30 days tests and 15 tor Field Test Report no more than 1 week after the completion of each test 3 4 Group IV Technical Data Package bmit the Su of Group IV Technical Performance Verification Test Data Package 3 OQ days prior to the start Submit the Performance Verification Test Report no more than 1 week after the Submit an in Opera struc a on 8 2 by 11 b ACP Processing and Control database on 8 1 2 by 11 paper Cx the Commissioning Report no more completion of the Endurance Test tor s Manual fully explaining all than 2 weeks aft The data pa
16. www wbdg org ccb browse_cat php 0 29 amp c 4 SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 11 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 change 1 UFC 3 580 01 06 22 2007 Telecommunications Building Cabling Systems Planning and Design UFC 3 580 10 07 14 20 od Navy and Marine Corps Internet NMCI Standard Construction Practices with Changes 1 3 UFC 4 010 01 01722720 oO DoD Minimum Antiterrorism Standards for Buildings with change 1 UFC 4 020 01 09 711 20 oO 00 DoD Security Engineering Facilities Planning Manual UFC 4 022 01 05 25 2005 Security Engineering Entry Control Facilities Access Control Points UFC 4 022 10 23 2006 Security Engineering Electronic O1NF Security Systems with change 1 UFC 4 022 03 06 14 2007 Security Engineering Fences Gates and Facilities le ry Q HA gt 030 01 12 21 2007 Sustainable Development op ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 12 Submarine A School BQ 534 4 3 DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVY 9 1127117 4 3 1 DoN Instructions NUMBER DATE TITLE CNICIN
17. 00 13 00 33 00 DIVISION 06 10 00 06 41 16 06 61 16 00 01 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 02 00 00 00 03 05 06 00 DIVISION 07 20 10 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS LIST OF DRAWINGS GENERAL REQUIREMENTS SUMMARY OF WORK WORK RESTRICTIONS PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS PROJECT SCHEDULE NETWORK ANALYSIS SCHEDULES NAS SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES GOVERNMENTAL SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT OURCES FOR REFERENCE PUBLICATIONS UALITY CONTROL MPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES AND CONTROLS MPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS OJECT IDENTIFICATION ECYCLED RECOVERED MATERIALS CONSTRUCTION AND DEMOLITION WASTE MANAGEMENT STARTING AND ADJUSTING CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA FACILITY ELECTRONIC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE SUPPORT INFORMATION eOMSI o m m S Q T T P R EXISTING CONDITIONS ENGINEERING CONTROL OF ASBESTOS CONTAINING MATERIALS LEAD IN CONSTRUCTION HANDLING OF LIGHTING BALLASTS AND LAMPS CONTAINING PCBs AND MERCURY MOLD REMEDIATION CONCRETE CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE METALS STRUCTURAL STEEL COLD FORMED METAL FRAMING MISCELLANEOUS METAL FABRICATIONS METAL STAIRS METAL LADDERS METAL RAILINGS WOOD PLASTICS AND COMPOSITES 10 ROUGH CARPENTRY LAMINATE CLAD ARCHITECTURAL CASEWORK
18. Compact backfill to top of pipe to 95 percent of ASTM D 698 maximum density Provide plastic piping with bedding to spring line of pipe Provide materials as follows a Class I Angular 0 25 to 1 5 inch graded stone including a number of fill materials that have regional significance such as coral slag cinders crushed stone and crushed shells b Class II Coarse sands and gravels with maximum particle size of 1 5 inch including various graded sands and gravels containing small percentages of fines generally granular and noncohesive either wet or dry Soil Types GW GP SW and SP are included in this class as specified in ASTM D 2487 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 9 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 c Clean coarse grained sand classified as SW or SP in accordance with Section 31 23 00 00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL as indicated d Clean coarsely graded natural gravel crushed stone or a combination thereof identified as GW or GP in accordance with Section 31 23 00 00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL for bedding and backfill as indicated Do not exceed maximum particle size of 3 inch 3 5 1 4 Final Backfill Fill the remainder of the trench except for special materials for roadways railroads and airfields with satisfactory material Place backfill material and compact as follows a Roadways Railroads and Airfields Place backfill up to the required elevation as specified Do not permit water flooding or jetting methods of c
19. PROTECTION Do not permit vehicular traffic including heavy equipment on pavement until surface temperature has cooled to at least 120 degrees F Measure surface temperature by approved surface thermometers or other satisfactory methods End of Section SECTION 32 12 17 Page 17 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 32 12 19 BITUMINOUS BINDER AND WEARING COURSES CENTRAL PLANT COLD MIX 08 08 PART 1 GENERAL Lal UNIT PRICES Fadi Measurement The amount paid for will be the number of 2 000 pound tons of bituminous mixture called for in the bid schedule and used in the accepted work Weigh bituminous treated material after mixing no deduction will be made for the weight of bituminous material in the mixture a ep Loe Correctional Factor for Aggregates Used The quantities of bituminous mixtures called for in the bid schedule are based on aggregates having an apparent specific gravity of 2 65 as determined in accordance with ASTM C127 and ASTM C128 A correction in the tonnage of bituminous mixtures shall be made to compensate for the difference in square yards of completed pavement obtained from the tonnage of mixtures used in the project when the specific gravities of aggregates used are more than 2 70 or less than 2 60 The tonnage paid for will be the number of tons used proportionately corrected for specific gravities using 2 65 as base correctional factor ded ts Pe Bituminous Material Unit The bitumin
20. Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL UL 1971 2002 Reprint Oct 2008 Signaling Devices for the Hearing Impaired UL 228 2006 Reprint Nov 2008 Door Closers Holders With or Without Integral Smoke Detectors UL 268 2009 Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Systems UL 464 2009 Reprint Jan 2011 Standard for Audible Signal Appliances UL Electrical Constructn 2009 Electrical Construction Equipment Directory UL Fire Prot Dir 2011 Fire Protection Equipment Directory 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 26 00 00 00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to this section with the additions and modifications specified herein 1 3 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 1 3 1 Scope This work includes designing and providing a new complete analog addressable fire alarm system as described herein and on the contract drawings for the building The system shall include wiring raceways pull boxes terminal cabinets outlet and mounting boxes control equipment alarm and supervisory signal initiating devices alarm notification appliances supervising station fire alarm system transmitter and other accessories and miscellaneous items required for a complete operating system even though each item is not specifically mentioned or described Provide system complete and ready for operation Equipment materials
21. Underground Installation 2006 5 46 kV Shielded Power Cable for Use in the Transmission and Distribution of Electric Energy NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2011 TIA 11 1 Errata 2011 National Electrical Code TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION TIA TIA 758 2004a Customer Owned Outside Plant Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard U S DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE USDA RUS Bull 1751F 644 2002 Underground Plant Construction UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL UL 1072 UL 1242 UL 467 UL 486A 486B UL 510 2006 Reprint Aug 2011 Medium Voltage Power Cables 2006 Reprint Jul 2007 Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit Steel 2007 Grounding and Bonding Equipment 2003 Reprint Feb 2010 Wire Connectors 2005 Reprint Apr 2008 Polyvinyl SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 UL UL 3 Chloride Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape 514A 2004 Reprint Apr 2010 Metallic Outlet Boxes 514B 2004 Reprint Nov 2009 Conduit Tubing and Cable Fittings 6 2007 reprint Nov 2010 Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit Steel 651 2005 Reprint Mar 2010 Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings 83 2008 Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables 854 2004 Reprint Oct 2007 Standard for Service Entrance Cables DEFINITIONS Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and
22. a Ballast shall comply with UL 935 NEMA ANSLG C82 11 NFPA 70 and CEC Title 24 unless specified otherwise Ballast shall be 100 percent electronic high frequency type with no magnetic core and coil components Ballast shall provide transient immunity as recommended by IEEE C62 41 1 and IEEE C62 41 2 Ballast shall be designed for the wattage of the lamps used in the indicated application Ballasts shall be designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected b Power factor shall be 0 95 minimum c Ballast shall operate at a frequency of 20 000 Hertz minimum Ballast shall be compatible with and not cause interference with the operation of occupancy sensors or other infrared control systems Provide ballasts operating at or above 40 000 Hertz where available d Ballast shall have light regulation of plus or minus 10 percent lumen output with a plus or minus 10 percent input voltage regulation Ballast shall have 10 percent flicker maximum using any compatible lamp e Ballast factor shall be between 0 85 minimum and 1 00 maximum Current crest factor shall be 1 7 maximum f Ballast shall be UL listed Class P with a sound rating of A SECTION 26 51 00 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Ballast shall have circuit diagrams and lamp connections displayed on the ballast Ballasts shall be instant start unless otherwise indicated Ballasts shall be programmed start where indicated In
23. and Circuit Breaker Enclosures 2001 Reprint Apr 2010 Attachment Plugs and Receptacles 2004 Reprint Jul 2010 Surface Metal Raceways and Fittings 2007 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment Non environmental Considerations 2008 Reprint Mar 2010 Specialty Transformers 1999 Reprint Apr 2010 Industrial Control Equipment 2005 Reprint Apr 2008 Polyvinyl Chloride Polyethylene and Rubber Insulating Tape 2004 Reprint Apr 2010 Metallic Outlet Boxes 2004 Reprint Nov 2009 Conduit Tubing and Cable Fittings 1996 Reprint May 2011 Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes Flush Device Boxes and Covers 2003 Reprint Aug 2008 Nonmetallic Surface Raceways and Fittings 2007 reprint Nov 2010 Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit Steel 2005 Reprint Mar 2010 Standard for Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings 2009 Reprint Sep 2010 Standard for Panelboards 2007 Electrical Metallic Tubing Steel 2001 Reprint Oct 2009 Standard for Cord Sets and Power Supply Cords 2008 Thermoplastic Insulated Wires and Cables 2004 Reprint Oct 2007 Standard for Service Entrance Cables 2006 Reference Standard for Service SECTION 26 20 00 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Equipment UL 870 2008 Standard for Wireways Auxiliary Gutters and Associated Fittings UL 943 2006 Reprint May 2010 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters UL 984 1996 Reprint Sep 2005 Hermetic Refrigerant
24. and equipment located outdoors shall be ANSI Dark Gray Provide manufacturer s coatings for touch up work and as specified in paragraph FIELD APPLIED PAINTING SECTION 26 20 00 Page 20 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 28 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 2 28 1 Transformer Factory Tests Submittal shall include routine NEMA ST 20 transformer test results on each transformer and also contain the results of NEMA design and prototype tests that were made on transformers electrically and mechanically equal to those specified PART 3 EXECUTION Sl INSTALLATION Electrical installations including weatherproof and hazardous locations and ducts plenums and other air handling spaces shall conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and to requirements specified herein cet ee Underground Service Underground service conductors and associated conduit shall be continuous from service entrance equipment to outdoor power system connection Sb Service Entrance Identification Service entrance disconnect devices switches and enclosures shall be labeled and identified as such ore eee ae L Labels Wherever work results in service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure as permitted by NFPA 70 each enclosure new and existing shall be labeled as one of several enclosures containing service entrance disconnect devices Label at minimum shall indicate number of service disconnect devices housed by enclosure and shall
25. and wiring diagram b Submit detail drawings for each major component to include manufacturer s descriptive and technical literature catalog cuts and installation instructions 4 2 UL Listing or Label Submit proof of compliance Label of or listing in UL Electrical Constructn is acceptable evidence In lieu of label or listing submit written certificate from an approved nationally recognized testing organization equipped to perform such services stating that items have been tested and conform to requirements and testing methods of Underwriters Laboratories 5 SITE CONDITIONS Contractor will become familiar with details of the work verify dimensions in the field and advise Contracting Officer of discrepancies before performing work Deviations from contract drawings will not be made without prior approval of Contracting Officer SECTION 26 41 00 00 20 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 iL MATERIALS Do not use a combination of materials that forms an electrolytic couple of such nature that corrosion is accelerated in presence of moisture unless moisture is permanently excluded from the junction of such metals Where unusual conditions exist which would cause corrosion of conductors provide conductors with protective coatings or oversize conductors Where mechanical hazard is involved increase conductor size to compensate for hazard or protect conductors by covering them with molding or t
26. installation workmanship inspection and testing shall be in strict accordance with the required and advisory provisions of NFPA 72 except as modified herein The system layout on the drawings show the intent of coverage and are shown in suggested locations Final quantity layout and coordination is the responsibility of the Contractor Each remote fire alarm control unit shall be powered from a wiring riser specifically for that use or from a local emergency power panel located on the same floor as the remote fire alarm control unit 1 4 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for information only When used a designation following the G designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES Provide six complete sets of submittals Partial submittals will not be acceptable and will be returned without review The Naval Facilities Engineering Command MIDLANT Fire Protection Engineer will review and approve submittals SD 02 Shop Drawings Provide point to point wiring diagrams showing the points of connection and terminals used for electrical field connections in the system including interconnections between the equipment or systems which are supervised or controlled by the system Diagrams shall show connections from field
27. manuals are furnished to the Contracting Officer and the following are provided at the job site 1 The systems manufacturer s technical representative 2 Marked up red line drawings of the system as actually installed SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 21 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 Megger test results 4 Loop resistance test results 5 Complete program printout including input output addresses The final tests shall be witnessed by the Naval Facilities Engineering Command MIDLANT Fire Protection Engineer At this time any and all required tests shall be repeated at their discretion Following acceptance of the system as built drawings and O amp M manuals shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer for review and acceptance In existing buildings the transfer of devices from the existing system to the new system and the permission to begin demolition of the old fire alarm system will not be permitted until the as built drawings and O amp M manuals are received 3 6 2 Minimum System Tests Test the system in accordance with the procedures outlined in NFPA 72 The required tests are as follows a Verify the absence of unwanted voltages between circuit conductors and ground The tests shall be accomplished at the preliminary test with results available at the final system test b Verify that the control unit is in the normal condition as detailed in the manufacturer s O amp M manual c Test each initiating and indi
28. or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS 3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Upon completion of installation verify that equipment is properly installed connected and adjusted Conduct an operating test to show that equipment operates in accordance with requirements of this section a Electronic Dimming Ballast Test for full range of dimming capability Observe for visually detectable flicker over full dimming range 352 Occupancy Sensor Test sensors for proper operation Observe for light control over entire area being covered End of Section SECTION 26 51 00 Page 17 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM 08 11 PART 1 GENERAL alee 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM D 709 2001 R 2007 Laminated Thermosetting Materials INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE IEEE 100 2000 Archived The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION ICEA ICEA S 90 661 2008 Category 3 5 amp 5e Individually Unshielded Twisted Pair Indoor Cables for Use in General Purpose and LAN Communications Wiring Systems Technical Requirements N
29. shall be located outside on the secondary side of the pad mounted transformer Stand Mounted Adjacent to Transformer STAND in Metering Systems Schedule Meter base shall be mounted on a structural steel pole approximately 4 feet from the transformer pad This can be used for multiple meters associated with a single transformers Building Mounted BLDG in Metering Systems Schedule Meter base shall be mounted on the side of the existing building near the service entrance Panel Mounted PNL in Metering Systems Schedule Meter shall be mounted where directed Commercial meter pedestal PED in Metering Systems Schedule COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACES Meter shall have two way communication with the existing data acquisition system DAS Provide a communications interface utilizing Refer to Section for the communication interface requirements for these meters Provide interfacing software if a meter is used that is different than the existing meters at the Activity to ensure compatibility within the metering system SECTION 26 27 14 00 20 Page 9 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Connect to the AMI network utilizing a fiber optic link to the closest connection point Provide Ziad SPARE PARTS 2 4 METERING SYSTEM SCHEDULE PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 INSTALLATION Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 NFPA 70 National Electrical Code and to the requirements specified herein Provide new equipment and m
30. tandem type steel wheel rollers The number type and weight of rollers shall be sufficient to compact the mixture to the required density without detrimentally affecting the compacted material Rollers shall be suitable for rolling hot mix bituminous pavements and capable of reversing without backlash Pneumatic tired rollers shall be capable of being operated both forward and backward without turning on the mat and without loosening the surface being rolled Equip rollers with suitable devices and apparatus to keep the rolling surfaces wet and prevent adherence of bituminous mixture Vibratory rollers especially designed for bituminous concrete compaction may be used provided rollers do not impair stability of pavement structure and underlying layers Repair depressions in pavement surfaces resulting from use of vibratory rollers Rollers shall be self propelled single or dual vibrating drums and steel drive wheels as applicable equipped with variable amplitude and separate controls for energy and propulsion 1364223 Hand Tampers Minimum weight of 25 pounds with a tamping face of not more than 50 square inches SECTION 32 12 17 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 1 6 2 4 Mechanical Hand Tampers Commercial type operated by pneumatic pressure or by internal combustion PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 AGGREGATES Grade and proportion aggregates and filler so that combined mineral aggregate conforms to specified grading QoL Coarse
31. 0 14 and 0 20 gallons square yard The trial application rates may be modified if approved by the Contracting Officer Additional trial applications may be made if warranted by pavement surface conditions Use the rate which has been satisfactorily applied without leaving an excess of asphalt residue on the surface and has been approved for the fog seal 5 2 Application Inspection Inspect application of fog seal for uniformity During application take 4 sample for each 500 square yards of surface area to receive emulsified asphalt Weigh samples to determine conformance with application rate 5 3 Inspection Reports Furnish a written report citing climatic temperature during application of fog seal emulsion temperature during application and rate of emulsion application 5 4 Application Following preparation of the surface apply the water diluted asphalt emulsion at the rate determined from the trial application Maintain application temperature of emulsified asphalt between 75 and 160 degrees F To obtain uniform application of the fog seal at the junction of previous and subsequent applications spread building paper on the surface of the applied material for a sufficient distance back from the ends of each application so that flow from the spray bar may be started and stopped on the paper and so that all sprayers will operate at full force Immediately after application remove and properly dispose of the building paper Trea
32. 10 Provide a socket mounted electronic programmable outdoor watthour meter surface mounted flush against the side of the low voltage compartment as indicated Meter shall either be programmed at the factory or shall be programmed in the field When field programming is performed turn field programming device over to the Contracting Officer at completion of project Meter shall be coordinated to system requirements 1 Design Provide meter designed for use on a 3 phase 4 wire 208Y 120 volt system with 3 current transformers Include necessary KYZ pulse initiation hardware to comply with the Advanced Meter Infrastructure AMI program requirements as specified in Section 26 27 14 00 20 ELECTRICITY METERING 2 Coordination Provide meter coordinated with ratios of current transformers and transformer secondary voltage 3 Class 20 Form 9S Accuracy plus or minus 1 0 percent Finish Class II 4 Cover Polycarbonate and lockable to prevent tampering and unauthorized removal SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 5 Kilowatt hour Register five digit electronic programmable type 6 Demand Register a Provide solid state b Meter reading multiplier Indicate multiplier on the meter face c Demand interval length shall be programmed for 60minutes with rolling demand up to six subintervals per interval 7 Meter fusing Provide a fuse block mounted in a meter box enclosure containing one fuse pe
33. 22 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT FLOW VRF MULTI SPLIT AIR CONDITIONING AND HEAT PUMP EQUIPMENT ELECTRICAL 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING THREE PHASE PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM SWITCHBOARDS 20 ELECTRICITY METERING VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS 20 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM INTERIOR LIGHTING COMMUNICATIONS BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY 20 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM EARTHWORK EARTHWORK GEOTEXTILES USED AS FILTERS EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS BITUMINOUS SEAL AND FOG COATS COLD MILLING OF BITUMINOUS PAVEMENTS SEALING OF CRACKS IN BITUMINOUS PAVEMENTS BITUMINOUS TACK AND PRIME COATS HOT MIX BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT BITUMINOUS BINDER AND WEARING COURSES CENTRAL PLANT COLD MIX CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS 20 PAVEMENT MARKINGS SEEDING UTILITIES 30 WATER UTILITY METERING 40 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 30 NATURAL GAS METERING 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 DIVISION 34 TRANSPORTATION 34 41 26 00 10 ACCESS CONTROL POINT CONTROL SYSTEM End of Project Table of Contents PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 26 00 00 00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 07 06 PART 1 GENERAL alee 1 REFERENCES The public
34. 3 4 to 2 inches wide shall be sandblasted waterblasted wire brushed and cleaned using compressed air 314 Large Cracks Cracks that are greater than 2 inches wide shall be repaired using pothole repair techniques instead of sealing S72 Existing Sealant Removal Cut loose the in place sealant from both crack faces and to a depth shown on the drawings using a concrete saw or hand tools as specified in paragraph EQUIPMENT Depth shall be sufficient to accommodate any backup material that is required to maintain the depth of new sealant to be installed Prior to further cleaning operations remove all old loose sealant remaining in the crack opening by blowing with compressed air S153 Routing Perform routing of the cracks using a rotary router with a bit that is at least 1 8 inch wider than the nominal width of the crack to remove all residual old sealant resealing oxidized pavement and any loose aggregate in the crack wall Sie n4 Sawing Perform sawing of the cracks using a power driving concrete saw as specified in paragraph EQUIPMENT Stiffen the blade as necessary with suitable dummy or used blades or washers Immediately following the Sawing operation clean the crack opening using a water jet to remove all saw cuttings and debris S15 Sandblasting Sandblast clean the crack faces and the pavement surfaces extending a minimum of 1 2 inch from the crack edges Use a multiple pass technique until the surfaces are fre
35. 41 26 00 10 ACCESS CONTROL POINT CONTROL SYSTEM AUTOMATED VERTICAL LIFT ARM GATE i 1 SCOPE This specification documents the performance requirements for Automated Vehicle Gates Low Volume AVG L to be installed at U S Navy installations as part of the Anti Terrorism Force Protection AT FP Ashore Program The AVG L specified herein includes automated vehicular gates for Privately Owned Vehicles POV Government Owned Vehicles GOV and may include commercial vehicles when specified in the Performance Work Statement PWS at perimeter Entry Control Points ECPs and interior security enclave ECPs that allow POV or GOV entry on a low volume basis less than 60 vehicles per hour Commercial Vehicle Inspection System CVIS ECPs High Volume Gate ECPs and Automated Pedestrian Turnstiles APT are unique systems outside the scope of this specification The requirements documented herein apply to all installations Any site specific requirements or variances determined as part of the design phase shall be documented by the performing contractor in accordance with the Request for Proposal RFP 2 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
36. 64 3 2 2 4 1 munications within the ECP shall have the following attribute fixed signs shall be provided and have the attributes listed in 3 2 2 4 65 35 2 26 4 All communications within the ECP shall have the following attribute Pavement markings shall be provided IAW MUTCD 3 2 2 4 A communications within the ECP shall have the following attribute Barrier signals to notify users when it is safe to proceed through the AVG L Bo 2s Za A All communications within the ECP shall have the following attributes shall provide a Public Address system within the ECP allowing security personnel to provide verbal instruction to occupants within the ECP All communications within the ECP shall have the following attribute 2 way communications intercom ability between the vehicle operator and security personnel shall be provided A intercoms within the ECP shall have the attributes described in section A SEZA Situational Awareness within the E ection 3 2 2 5 Bi 2h 26 ak he Sentry interface shall have the attributes listed in section 3 2 2 6 1 The PSIM interface shall have the attributes described in section Se lee wO52 3 shall have the attributes described in s T SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 45 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117
37. A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 32 01 17 16 SEALING OF CRACKS IN BITUMINOUS PAVEMENTS 08 08 PART 1 GENERAL ae iL REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM C509 2006 R 2011 Elastomeric Cellular Preformed Gasket and Sealing Material ASTM D 6690 2007 Standard Specification for Joint and Crack Sealants Hot Applied for Concrete and Asphalt Pavements ASTM D 789 2007e1 Determination of Relative Viscosity and Moisture Content of Polyamide PA 2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Machines tools and equipment used in the performance of the work required by this section shall be approved before the work is started and shall be maintained in satisfactory condition at all times 21 Routing Equipment Provide routing equipment which is a self powered machine operating a power driven tool or bit specifically designed for routing bituminous pavements The bit shall rotate about a vertical axis at sufficient speed to cut a smooth vertical walled reservoir in the pavement surface and shall maintain accurate cutting without damaging the sides or top edges of the reservoir Provide a router capable of following the trace of the crack without deviation The use of rotary impact routing devices will not be permitted for cleaning cracks may be permitted if vertica
38. AND SUPPORTS MSS SP 58 as required by MSS SP 69 SECTION 33 51 13 00 30 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 6 WELDING FILLER METAL ASME B31 8 227 PIPE THREAD TAPE Antiseize and sealant tape of polytetrafluoroethylene PTFE 2 8 BOLTING BOLTS AND NUTS Stainless steel bolting ASTM A193 A193M Grade B8M or B8MA Type 316 for bolts and ASTM A194 A194M Grade 8M Type 316 for nuts Dimensions of bolts studs and nuts shall conform with ASME B18 2 1 and ASME B18 2 2 with coarse threads conforming to ASME B1 1 with Class 2A fit for bolts and studs and Class 2B fit for nuts Bolts or bolt studs shall extend through the nuts and may have reduced shanks of a diameter not less than the diameter at root of threads Bolts shall have American Standard regular square or heavy hexagon heads nuts shall be American Standard heavy semifinished hexagonal 2 9 GASKETS Fluorinated elastomer compatible with flange faces 2 10 IDENTIFICATION FOR ABOVEGROUND PIPING INTERIOR MIL STD 101 for legends and type and size of characters For pipes 3 4 inch OD and larger provide printed legends to identify contents of pipes and arrows to show direction of flow Color code label backgrounds to signify levels of hazard Make labels of plastic sheet with pressure sensitive adhesive suitable for the intended application For pipes smaller than 3 4 inch OD provide brass identification tags 1 1 2 inches in diameter with legends in depressed blac
39. Aggregates ASTM D 692 D 692M except as modified herein At least 75 percent by weight of aggregate retained on the No 4 sieve shall have two or more fractured faces Percentage of wear Los Angeles test except for slag shall not exceed 40 in accordance with ASTM C131 Weight of slag shall not be less than 70 pounds per cubic foot Soundness test is required in accordance with ASTM C88 after 5 cycles loss shall not be more than 12 percent when tested with sodium sulfate or 18 percent when tested with magnesium sulfate 2 152 Fine Aggregate ASTM D 1073 except as modified herein Fine aggregate shall be produced by crushing stone slag or gravel that meets requirements for wear and soundness specified for coarse aggregate Where necessary to obtain the gradation of aggregate blend or workability natural sand may be used Quantity of natural sand to be added shall be approved by the Contracting Officer and shall not exceed 15 percent of weight of coarse and fine aggregate and material passing the No 200sieve 2 1 3 Mineral Filler Nonplastic material meeting the requirements of ASTM D 242 D 242M 2 1 4 Aggregate Gradation The combined aggregate gradation shall conform to gradations specified in Table I when tested in accordance with ASTM C136 and ASTM C117 and shall not vary from the low limit on one sieve to the high limit on the adjacent sieve or vice versa but grade uniformly from coarse to fine Table I Aggregate G
40. B16 3 2010 Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 150 and 300 ASME B16 33 2002 R 2007 Manually Operated Metallic Gas Valves for Use in Gas Piping Systems Up to 125 psi Sizes NPS 1 2 NPS 2 ASME B16 38 2007 Large Metallic Valves for Gas Distribution Manually Operated NPS 2 1 2 to 12 125 psig Maximum ASME B16 39 2009 Standard for Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions Classes 150 250 and 300 ASME B16 5 2009 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings NPS 1 2 Through NPS 24 Metric Inch Standard SECTION 33 51 13 00 30 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 ASME B16 9 2007 Standard for Factory Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings ASME B18 2 1 2010 Square and Hex Bolts and Screws Inch Series ASME B18 2 2 2010 Standard for Square and Hex Nuts ASME B31 8 2010 Supplement 2010 Gas Transmission and Distribution Piping Systems ASME BPVC SEC VIII D1 2007 Addenda 2008 Addenda 2009 BPVC Section VIII Rules for Construction of Pressure Vessels Division 1 ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM A193 A193M 2011 Standard Specification for Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High Temperature Service and Other Special Purpose Applications ASTM A194 A194M 2010a Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High Pressure or High Temperature Service or Both ASTM A53 A53M 2010 Standard Specification for Pipe Steel Black and Hot Dipped Zinc Coated Welded and Se
41. Chambers or cages with turbines that have revolving spindles shall have removable bearings for such spindles Chambers or cages with stationary spindles on which the turbines revolve shall provide rigid centrally located fastenings for the spindles The spindles shall be removable The main line section chambers or cages shall be interchangeable in all meters of the same size make and model a Bypass Chamber The bypass chamber shall be a type covered by an approved AWWA Standard The chamber shall be a self contained unit firmly seated and easily removed from the case and shall not be cast as part of the outer case The chamber shall be secured in position in the outer case so that any slight distortion of the case which might occur under 150 psi pressure will not affect the accuracy of the meter SECTION 33 12 33 00 30 Page 10 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 10 11 12 13 14 15 Aili d 3 Turbine Measuring Turbines and Discs Measuring turbines that have revolving spindles shall rotate on spindles supported by bushings or replaceable bearings Turbines that rotate on stationary spindles shall also have bushings or replaceable bearings The plates of disc pistons whether flat or conical shall have metal reinforcements or shall be equipped with thrust rollers Magnetic Coupled Drives When intermediate gear trains are located in the water compartment of the main or bypass section of the meter t
42. Gradation ASTM C136 b Mineral Filler Content ASTM D 546 c Abrasion ASTM C131 for wear Los Angeles test Perform one test initially prior to incorporation into the work and each time the source is changed SECTION 32 12 17 Page 15 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 55202 Bituminous Mix Tests Test one sample for each 500 tons or fraction thereof of the uncompacted mix for extraction in accordance with ASTM D2172 D2172M perform a sieve analysis on each extraction sample in accordance with ASTM C136 and ASTM C117 Test one sample for each 500 tons or fraction thereof for Stability and flow in accordance with ASTM D 1559 Test one sample for each material blend for Tensile Strength Ratio in accordance with ASTM D 4867 D 4867M 3 5 2 3 Pavement Courses Perform the following tests a Density For each 500 tons of bituminous mixture placed determine the representative laboratory density by averaging the density of four laboratory specimens prepared in accordance with ASTM D 1559 Samples for laboratory specimens shall be taken from trucks delivering mixture to the site record in a manner approved by the Contracting Officer the project areas represented by the laboratory densities From each representative area recorded determine field density of pavement by averaging densities of 4 inch diameter cores obtained from binder and wearing courses take one core for each 2000 square yards or fraction thereof of course placed Det
43. Information Assurance IA Implementation DoDI 8510 01 11 28 2007 Department of Defense Information Assurance Certification and Accreditation Process DIACAP 28 Nov 07 4 2 4 DoD Standards NUMBER DATE TITLE MIL STD 461F 12 10 2007 Requirements for the Control of Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics of Subsystems and Equipment D 464A 12 19 2002 Electromagnetic Environmental Effects Requirements for Systems D 810G 10 31 2008 Environmental Engineering Considerations and Laboratory Tests change notice 3 http www dtic mil whs directives gt http www dtic mil whs directives 6 http www dtic mil whs directives S ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 10 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 MIL STD 882D 02 10 2000 System Safety 4 2 5 Other DoD Handbooks Manuals and References NUMBER DATE TITLE DoD O 02 2004 Protection of DoD Personnel and 2000 12 H Activities against Acts of Terrorism and Political Turbulence DTM 09 12 12 2 20 Inte
44. OVERLAPPING AND SEAMING Dan L Overlapping The overlap of geotextile rolls shall be 24 inches Appropriate measures will be taken to insure required overlap exists after cushion placement 5 2 Sewn Seams High strength thread should be used such that seam test should conform to ASTM D 4884 The thread shall meet the chemical ultraviolet and physical requirements of the geotextile and the color shall be different from that of the geotextile The seam strength shall be equal to the strength required for the geotextile in the direction across the seam Overlapping J type seams are preferable over prayer type seams as the overlapping geotextile reduces the chance of openings to occur at the seam Double sewing shall be used specially for field seams to provide a safety factor against undetected missed stitches End of Section SECTION 31 05 22 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 32 01 13 BITUMINOUS SEAL AND FOG COATS 08 08 PART 1 GENERAL T 1 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES Measure the quantities of bituminous material and aggregate used in the accepted work and to be paid for provided that the measured quantities are not more than 10 percent over the specified application rate Any amount of bituminous material and aggregate more than 10 percent over the specified application rate for each application will be deducted from the measured quantities except for irregular areas where hand spray
45. Operation shall cease during rainfall except for waterblasting and removal of previously applied chemicals Waterblasting shall cease where surface water accumulation alters the effectiveness of material removal 18 QUALIFICATIONS The Contractor shall submit documentation certifying that pertinent personnel are qualified for equipment operation and handling of chemicals PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS Provide materials conforming to the requirements specified herein 2 051 Paints for Roads and Streets CID A A 2886 color as indicated 22142 Reflective Media for Roads and Streets FS TT B 1325 Type I Gradation A eel 3 PREFORMED TAPE The preformed tape shall be an adherent reflectorized strip in accordance with ASTM D 4505 Type I or IV Class optional PART 3 EXECUTION Seal SURFACE PREPARATION Allow new pavement surfaces to cure for a period of not less than 30 days before application of marking materials Thoroughly clean surfaces to be marked before application of the paint Remove dust dirt and other granular surface deposits by sweeping blowing with compressed air rinsing with water or a combination of these methods as required Remove rubber deposits existing paint markings residual curing compounds and other SECTION 32 17 23 00 20 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 7A coatings adhering to the pavement by water blasting or approved chemical removal method For Portland Cement Concrete pavement grindin
46. PLACE CONCRETE Provide concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE In addition provide concrete for encasement of underground ducts with 3000 psi minimum 28 day compressive strength Concrete associated with electrical work for other than encasement of underground ducts shall be 4000 psi minimum 28 day compressive strength unless specified otherwise 2 14 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES Provide precast concrete underground structures or standard type cast in place manhole types as indicated conforming to ASTM C857 and ASTM C478 Top walls and bottom shall consist of reinforced concrete Walls and bottom shall be of monolithic concrete construction Locate duct entrances and windows near the corners of structures to facilitate cable racking Covers shall fit the frames without undue play Form steel and iron to shape and size with sharp lines and angles Castings shall be free from warp and blow holes that may impair strength or appearance Exposed metal shall have a smooth finish and sharp lines and arises Provide necessary lugs rabbets and brackets Set pulling in irons and other built in items in place before depositing concrete Install a pulling in iron in the wall opposite each duct line entrance Cable racks including rack arms and insulators shall be adequate to accommodate the cable 2 14 1 Cast In Place Concrete Structures Concrete shall conform to Section 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE Construct walls
47. Policy on Geometric Design of Highways and Streets 5th Edition SDDCTEA PAM 55 14 2011 Traffic Engineering for Better Signs and Markings http www tea army mil pubs nr do d pmd PAM 55 14 pdf SDDCTEA PAM 55 15 2009 Traffic and Safety Engineering for Better Entry Control Facilitieshttp www tea army mil pubs nr dod pmd PAM 55 15 2009 pdf SDDCTEA PAM 2008 Better Military Traffic Ww ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 14 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 sorly Engineering ITE 2070 2005 Institute of Transportation Engineers Advanced Transportation Control NTCIP 9001 V4 National Transportation Communications for ITS Protocols http www ntcip org 4 5 CABLING STANDARDS NUMBER DATE TITLE SO IEC 11801 International Standard for Structured Cabling Systems CENELEC EN European Cabling Standard 50173 TIA EIA 568 B Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard TIA EIA 569 A Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces J STD 607 A Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications uv ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 15 Submarine A School BQ 534 5 REQUIRED PERFORMANCE 5 1 SYSTEM DESCRIPTIO
48. R 2007 Adm 1 2008 Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure U S FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION FCC FCC Part 68 Connection of Terminal Equipment to the Telephone Network 47 CFR 68 UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL UL 1286 2008 Reprint Jan 2011 Office Furnishings UL 1863 2004 Reprint Aug 2008 Communication Circuit Accessories UL 444 2008 Reprint Apr 2010 Communications Cables UL 467 2007 Grounding and Bonding Equipment UL 514C 1996 Reprint May 2011 Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes Flush Device Boxes and Covers UL 969 1995 Reprint Nov 2008 Standard for Marking and Labeling Systems 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM apply to this section with additions and modifications specified herein SECTION 27 10 00 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Tx 3 DEFINITIONS Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in this specification shall be as defined in TIA 568 C 1 TIA 568 C 2 TIA 568 C 3 TIA 569 TIA EIA 606 and IEEE 100 and herein 2341 Campus Distributor CD A distributor from which the campus backbone cabling emanates International expression for main cross connect MC ae Building Distributor BD A distributor in which the building backbone cables terminate and at which connections to the campus backbone cables may be made International expression for intermediate cross connect
49. The finished surface of the surface course shall not deviate more than 1 8 inch from the 12 foot straightedge or from the template Correct surface irregularities exceeding those specified as directed SECTION 32 12 19 Page 9 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 10 1 2 Other Than Roads and Streets The surface of the finished pavement shall be checked longitudinally and transversely with a 12 foot straightedge The finished surface of the finished pavement shall not deviate more than 1 4 inch from the 12 foot straightedge Correct surface irregularities exceeding tolerances specified as directed 3 db JOINTS Joints shall present the same texture density and smoothness as other sections of the course Joints between old and new pavements or between successive days work shall be made carefully to insure continuous bond between old and new sections of the course Contact surfaces of previously constructed pavements shall be painted with a thin uniform coat of bituminous material conforming to Section 32 12 10 BITUMINOUS TACK AND PRIME COATS just before the fresh mixture is placed 3 11 1 Transverse Joints Pass the roller over the unprotected end of the freshly laid mixture only when the laying of the course is discontinued The edge of the previously laid course shall be cut back to expose an even vertical surface for the full thickness of the course The fresh mixture shall be raked against the joints thoroughly tamped
50. Turbine Type 2 Inch Size meters provided hereunder shall be Class II in line horizontal axis high velocity type and shall fully conform to the requirements of AWWA C701 except as otherwise specified herein The 2 inch turbine meter shall have oval flanged ends and shall be supplied with one companion flange gaskets and with bolts and nuts as specified herein a Materials 1 3 Cases All turbine main cases shall be bronze No exceptions will be allowed Register Box Rings and Lids Register box rings and lids shall be made of a cast copper alloy containing not less than 75 percent copper forged or die cast copper alloy containing not less than 57 percent copper or a suitable synthetic polymer Measuring Cages or Chambers Measuring cages or chambers shall be SECTION 33 12 33 00 30 Page 11 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 8 made of a copper alloy containing not less than 84 percent copper and suitable amounts of tin lead and zinc or of a suitable synthetic polymer Measuring Turbines Pistons and Discs Turbines pistons and discs shall be made of vulcanized hard rubber or a suitable synthetic polymer with specific gravity approximately equal to that of water They shall have sufficient dimensional stability to retain operating clearances at working temperatures of up to 27 degrees Centigrade and not warp or deform when exposed to operating temperatures of 37 degrees Centigrade Disc and Turbi
51. a routine basis in lieu of third party calibration include the following a Maintain up to date instrument calibration instructions and procedures for each test instrument b Identify the third party laboratory calibrated instrument to verify that calibrating standard is met hee Design Tests IEEE C57 12 00 states that design tests are made only on representative apparatus to substantiate the ratings assigned to all other apparatus of basically the same design Submit design test reports complete with test data explanations formulas and results in the same submittal package as the catalog data and drawings for the specified transformer s Design tests shall have been performed in accordance with IEEE C57 12 90 prior to the award of this contract a Tests shall be certified and signed by a registered professional engineer b Temperature rise Basically the same design for the temperature rise test means a pad mounted transformer with the same coil construction such as wire wound primary and sheet wound secondary the same kVA the same cooling type ONAN the same temperature rise rating and the same insulating liquid as the transformer specified c Lightning impulse Basically the same design for the lightning impulse dielectric test means a pad mounted transformer with the same BIL the same coil construction such as wire wound primary and sheet wound secondary and a tap changer if specified Design
52. addition to requirements of Data Package 5 include the requirements of paragraphs TELECOMMUNICATIONS DRAWINGS TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACE DRAWINGS and RECORD DOCUMENTATION Ensure that these drawings and documents depict the as built configuration 1 10 2 Record Documentation Provide T5 drawings including documentation on cables and termination hardware in accordance with TIA EIA 606 T5 drawings shall include schedules to show information for cut overs and cable plant management patch panel layouts and cover plate assignments cross connect information and connecting terminal layout as a minimum T5 drawings shall be provided in hard copy format Provide the following T5 drawing documentation as a minimum a Cables A record of installed cable shall be provided in accordance with TIA EIA 606 The cable records shall include the required data fields for each cable and complete end to end circuit report for each complete circuit from the assigned outlet to the entry facility in accordance with TIA EIA 606 Include manufacture date of cable with submittal b Termination Hardware A record of installed patch panels cross connect points distribution frames terminating block arrangements and type and outlets shall be provided in accordance with TIA EIA 606 Documentation shall include the required data fields as a minimum in accordance with TIA EIA 606 PART 2 PRODUCTS Qe COMPONENTS Comments shall be UL or third party certified Where
53. advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer Equipment materials installation and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated 6 5 Standard Products Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2 year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2 year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be products of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section 6 5 1 Alternative Qualifications Products having less than a 2 year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000
54. aggregate mineral filler if required and asphalt material The aggregate fractions shall be sized handled in separate size groups and combined in such proportions that the resulting mixture meets the grading requirements of the job mix formula JMF No hot mix asphalt for payment shall be produced until a JMF has been approved The hot mix asphalt shall be designed using procedures contained in AI MS 02 and the criteria shown in Table II If the Tensile Strength Ratio TSR of the composite mixture as determined by ASTM D 4867 D 4867M is less than 75 the aggregates shall be rejected or the asphalt mixture treated with an approved anti stripping agent The amount of anti stripping agent added shall be sufficient to produce a TSR of not less than 75 If an antistrip agent is required it shall be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost ode JMF Requirements The job mix formula shall be submitted in writing by the Contractor for approval at least 14 days prior to the start of the test section and shall include as a minimum a Percent passing each sieve size b Percent of asphalt cement c Percent of each aggregate and mineral filler to be used d Asphalt viscosity grade penetration grade or performance grade e Number of blows of hammer per side of molded specimen f Laboratory mixing temperature g Lab compaction temperature h Temperature viscosity relationship of the asphalt cement i Plot of the combined
55. aggregate to cover the distributor load of bituminous material shall be on trucks at the site of the work No bituminous material shall be down more than 3 minutes before it is covered with aggregate Spreading shall be done uniformly with aggregate spreading equipment Trucks spreading aggregate shall be operated backwards covering the bituminous material ahead of the truck wheels Areas having insufficient cover shall be lightly recovered with additional aggregate by hand during the operations whenever necessary 3 2 6 Rolling and Brooming Begin rolling operations immediately following the application of cover aggregate Perform rolling using pneumatic tired rollers Operate the rollers at a speed that will not displace the aggregate Continue rolling until the aggregate is uniformly distributed and keyed into the bituminous material All surplus aggregate shall be swept off the surface and removed not less than 24 hours nor more than 4 days after rolling is completed 33 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL SEAL COAT cen L Tests Perform field tests in sufficient numbers to assure that the specifications are being met Submit copies of the test results within 24 hours of the completion of the test Submit certified copies of the aggregate test results not less than 30 days before the material is required in the work and certified copies of the bituminous materials test reports indicating compliance with applicable specified requirements not less tha
56. an area of each face equal to at least 75 percent of the smallest midsectional area of the piece When two fractures are contiguous the angle between planes or fractures shall be at least 30 degrees to count as two fractured faces e Particle shape of crushed aggregates shall be essentially cubical The quantity of flat and elongated particles in any sieve size shall not exceed 20 percent by weight when determined in accordance with ASTM D 4791 2 1 2 2 Fine Aggregate Provide fine aggregate consisting of clean sound durable particles of natural sand crushed stone slag or gravel that meets the requirements for abrasion resistance and soundness specified for coarse aggregate Fine aggregate produced by crushing gravel shall have at least 90 percent by weight of crushed particles having two or more fractured faces in the portion retained on the No 30 sieve on Eee Mineral Filler Mineral filler shall conform to ASTM D 242 D 242M SECTION 32 12 19 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 3 Hydrated Lime Hydrated lime shall conform to ASTM C206 2 1 4 Liquefiers The use of liquefiers as anti stripping agent is subject to prior approval by the Contracting Officer 2in2 JOB MIX FORMULA JMF Do not produce bituminous mixtures until a JMF has been determined by the Contractor and approved by the Contracting Officer Submit the job mix formula at least 30 days before it is to be used notification on the selection of aggre
57. and Fittings ASTM A 746 2003 Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Gravity Sewer Pipe ASTM A 849 2000 R 2005 Standard Specification for Post Applied Coatings Pavings and Linings for Corrugated Steel Sewer and Drainage Pipe ASTM C 564 2003a Standard Specification for Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings ASTM D 2321 2005 Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other Gravity Flow Applications ASTM D 2680 2001 Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile Butadiene Styrene ABS and Poly Vinyl Chloride PVC Composite Sewer Piping SECTION 33 40 00 00 40 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 ASTM D 2855 1996 R 2002 Standard Practice for Making Solvent Cemented Joints with Poly Vinyl Chloride PVC Pipe and Fittings ASTM D 3034 2006 Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings ASTM D 3212 1996a R 2003e1 Standard Specification for Joints for Drain and Sewer Plastic Pipes Using Flexible Elastomeric Seals ASTM F 1417 1992 R 2005 Standard Test Method for Installation Acceptance of Plastic Gravity Sewer Lines Using Low Pressure Air L2 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 02 Shop Drawing
58. and characteristic curves SD 06 Test Reports 600 volt wiring test G Grounding system test G Transformer tests G Ground fault receptacle test G SD 07 Certificates Fuses G SD 09 Manufacturer s Field Reports Transformer factory tests SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Electrical Systems Data Package 5 G Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE LaL Fuses Submit coordination data as specified in paragraph FUSES of this section va Regulatory Requirements In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of Similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer Equipment materials installation and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated SECTION 26 20 00 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Ls 4 3 Standard Products Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to
59. and mark the conductors as follows Red Phase A CT C1 Orange Phase B CT C2 Brown Phase C CT C3 Gray with white stripe neutral current return CO Black Phase A voltage V1 Yellow Phase B voltage V2 Blue Phase C voltage V3 White Neutral voltage AaNAHRAUFWNE 2 1 2 Potential Transformer Requirements a Meter shall be capable of connection to the service voltage phases and magnitude being monitored If the meter is not rated for the service voltage provide suitable potential transformers to send an acceptable voltage to the meter b Voltage input shall be optically isolated to 2500 volts DC from signal and communications outputs Components shall meet or exceed IEEE C37 90 1 c Provide one fuse per phase Class RK type to protect the voltage input to the meter Size fuses as recommended by the meter manufacturer Fusing shall either be inside the secondary compartment of the transformer or inside the same enclosure as the CT shorting device SECTION 26 27 14 00 20 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 eke 3 Current Transformer Requirements Current transformer shall be installed with a rating as shown in the schedule Current transformers shall have an Accuracy Class of 0 3 witha maximum error of plus minus 0 3 percent at 5 0 amperes when operating within the specified rating factor Current transformers shall be solid core bracket mounted for new installations using ring tongu
60. and smaller diameter shall be solid except that conductors for remote control alarm and signal circuits classes 1 2 and 3 shall be stranded unless specifically indicated otherwise Conductor sizes and capacities shown are based on copper unless indicated otherwise All conductors shall be copper aan E Equipment Manufacturer Requirements When manufacturer s equipment requires copper conductors at the terminations or requires copper conductors to be provided between components of equipment provide copper conductors or splices splice boxes and other work required to satisfy manufacturer s requirements 16 Wa 2 Minimum Conductor Sizes Minimum size for branch circuits shall be No 12 AWG for Class 1 remote control and signal circuits No 14 AWG for Class 2 low energy remote control and signal circuits No 16 AWG and for Class 3 low energy remote control alarm and signal circuits No 22 AWG SECTION 26 20 00 Page 9 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Zi 6 2 Color Coding Provide for service feeder branch control and signaling circuit conductors Color shall be green for grounding conductors and white for neutrals except where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same raceway or box other neutrals shall be white with a different colored not green stripe for each Color of ungrounded conductors in different voltage systems shall be as follows a 208 120 volt three phase 1 Phase A blac
61. and then rolled 3 11 2 Longitudinal Joints When the edges of the longitudinal joints are irregular honeycombed or poorly compacted all unsatisfactory sections of the joint shall be cut back to expose an even vertical surface for the full thickness of the course Where required fresh mixture shall be raked against the joint thoroughly tamped and then rolled 3 212 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL AND TESTING 3o L2 Testing Perform field tests in sufficient numbers to assure that the specifications are being met Testing is the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be performed by an approved commercial laboratory The following number of tests if performed at the appropriate time will be the minimum acceptable for each type of operation 3125 esd Gradation Perform a minimum of one gradation test for every 100 ton of aggregate used in the mixture with a minimum of three gradations for each day s run When the source of materials is changed or deficiencies are found the gradation shall be replaced and the material already placed shall be retested to determine the extent of the unacceptable material Replace all in place unacceptable material at no additional expense to the Government 3 ak2 E2 Abrasion Resistance Perform abrasion resistance tests in accordance with ASTM C131 to ensure that the aggregates have a percentage of wear not exceeding 40 percent after 500 revolutions One test shall be performed for every
62. at varying rates for not less than 192 consecutive hours at an average effectiveness SECTION 26 29 23 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 level of 9998 to demonstrate proper functioning of the complete PCS Continue the test on a day to day basis until performance standard is met During the endurance test the contractor shall not be allowed in the building The system shall respond as designed 3 33 DEMONSTRATION 32351 Training Coordinate training requirements with the Contracting Officer Soiled Instructions to Government Personnel Provide the services of competent instructors who will give full instruction to designated personnel in operation maintenance calibration configuration and programming of the complete control system Orient the training specifically to the system installed Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with the subject matter they are to teach The Government personnel designated to attend the training will have a high school education or equivalent The number of training days of instruction furnished shall be as specified A training day is defined as eight hours of instruction including two 15 minute breaks and excluding lunch time Monday through Friday Provide a training manual for each student at each training phase which describes in detail the material included in each training program Provide one additional copy for archiving Provide equipment and materials required for classroom trai
63. bid opening The 2 year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2 year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be products of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section AeL Alternative Qualifications Products having less than a 2 year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturers factory or laboratory tests is furnished A Sek Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used unless specified otherwise 9 MAINTENANCE Dell Electrical Systems Submit operation and maintenance manuals for electrical systems that provide basic data relating to the design operation and maintenance of the electrical distribution system for the building This shall include a Single line diagram of the as built building electrical system b Schematic diagram of electrical control system other than HVAC covered elsewhere c Manufacturers operating and maintenance manuals on active electrica
64. calendar days prior to proposed testing for approval The tests shall conform to NEMA ICS 1 NEMA ICS 7 and all manufacturer s safety regulations The Government reserves the right to witness all tests and review any documentation The contractor shall inform the Government at least 14 working days prior to the dates of testing Contractor shall provide video tapes if available of all training provided to the Government for subsequent use in training new personnel All training aids texts and expendable support material for a self sufficient presentation shall be provided the amount of which to be determined by the contracting officer 3 2 2 Performance Verification Tests Performance Verification Test plan shall provide the step by step procedure required to establish formal verification of the performance of the VFD Compliance with the specification requirements shall be verified by inspections review of critical data demonstrations and tests The Government reserves the right to witness all tests review data and request other such additional inspections and repeat tests as necessary to ensure that the system and provided services conform to the stated requirements The contractor shall inform the Government 14 calendar days prior to the date the test is to be conducted 3 2 3 Endurance Test Immediately upon completion of the performance verification test the endurance test shall commence The system shall be operated
65. certificates or affidavits Submit duplicate copies of the mill certificate or affidavit signed by a legally authorized official from the company manufacturing the geotextile The mill certificate or affidavit shall attest that the geotextile meets the chemical physical and manufacturing requirements stated in this specification 1 4 SHIPMENT HANDLING AND STORAGE DA Shipment and Storage Only approved geotextile rolls shall be delivered to the project site All geotextile shall be labeled shipped stored and handled in accordance with ASTM D 4873 No hooks tongs or other sharp instruments shall be used for handling geotextile PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS 2 01 Geotextile 2k sb General The geotextile shall be a non woven pervious sheet of plastic yarn as defined by ASTM D 123 The geotextile shall equal or exceed the minimum average roll values listed in TABLE 1 MINIMUM PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DRAINAGE GEOTEXTILE Strength values indicated in the table are for the weaker principal direction TABLE 1 MINIMUM PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DRAINAGE GEOTEXTILE PROPERTY UNITS ACCEPTABLE VALUES TEST METHOD GRAP STRENGTH bo i ee ASTM D 4632 SEAM STRENGTH bo me Cs ASTM D 4632 PUNCTURE 40000 ASTM D 4833 TRAPEZOID TEAR pet ee 20 ASTM D 4533 PERMEABILITY em see 5ks ASTM D 4491 APPARENT OPENING 000 SIZE U S SIEVE 120 ASTM D 4751 PERMITTIVITY E R O ASTM D 4491 ULTRAVIOLET SECTION 31 05 22 Page 3 Submarine A
66. conform with the requirements of Section 26 00 00 00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Nameplates internal to enclosures shall be manufacturer s standard with the exception that they must be permanent SECTION 26 29 23 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 25 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 20 Sisk VFD Factory Test Plan To ensure quality each VFD shall be subject to a series of in plant quality control inspections before approval for shipment from the manufacturer s facilities Provide test plans and test reports PART 3 EXECUTION Sok INSTALLATION Per NEMA ICS 3 1 install equipment in accordance with the approved manufacturer s printed installation drawings instructions wiring diagrams and as indicated on project drawings and the approved shop drawings A field representative of the drive manufacturer shall supervise the installation of all equipment and wiring 3 2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Specified products shall be tested as a system for conformance to specification requirements prior to scheduling the acceptance tests Contractor shall conduct performance verification tests in the presence of Government representative observing and documenting complete compliance of the system to the specifications Contractor shall submit a signed copy of the test results certifying proper system operation before scheduling tests 3261 VFD Test A proposed test plan shall be submitted to the contracting officer at least 28
67. course shall not vary more than 1 4 inch in 10 feet variations in the wearing course shall not vary more than 1 8 inch in 10 feet Correct each portion of the pavement showing irregularities greater than that specified d Finished Grades Finish grades of each course placed shall not vary from the finish elevations profiles and cross sections indicated by more than 1 2 inch Finished surface of the final wearing course will be tested by the Contracting Officer by running lines of levels at intervals of 25 feet longitudinally and transversely to determine elevations of completed pavement Within 45 days after completion of SECTION 32 12 17 Page 16 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 6 final placement the Contracting Officer will inform the Contractor in writing of paved areas that fail to meet the final grades indicated within the specified tolerances Correct deficient paved areas by removing existing work and replacing with new materials that meet the specifications Skin patching for correcting low areas is prohibited Finish Surface Texture of Wearing Course Visually check final surface texture for uniformity and reasonable compactness and tightness Final wearing course with a surface texture having undesirable irregularities such as segregation cavities pulls or tears checking excessive exposure of coarse aggregates sand streaks indentations ripples or lack of uniformity shall be removed and replaced with new materials
68. days Maximum size of aggregate shall be 1 1 2 inches Submit copies of certified delivery tickets for all concrete used in the construction sdra Air Content Mixtures shall have air content by volume of concrete of 5 to 7 percent based on measurements made immediately after discharge from the mixer 1 2 Slump The concrete slump shall be 2 inches plus or minus 1 inch where determined in accordance with ASTM C143 C143M 2 CONCRETE CURING MATERIALS 2201 Impervious Sheet Materials Impervious sheet materials shall conform to ASTM C171 type optional except that polyethylene film if used shall be white opaque 22 2 Burlap Burlap shall conform to AASHTO M 182 PAE White Pigmented Membrane Forming Curing Compound White pigmented membrane forming curing compound shall conform to ASTM C309 Type 2 23 CONCRETE PROTECTION MATERIALS Concrete protection materials shall be a linseed oil mixture of equal parts by volume of linseed oil and either mineral spirits naphtha or turpentine At the option of the Contractor commercially prepared linseed oil mixtures formulated specifically for application to concrete to provide protection against the action of deicing chemicals may be used except that emulsified mixtures are not acceptable SECTION 32 16 13 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 4 JOINT FILLER STRIPS Dras A Contraction Joint Filler for Curb and Gutter Contraction joint filler for curb and gutt
69. devices c Interface Device An addressable device which interconnects hard wired systems or devices to an analog addressable system d Fire Alarm Control Unit A control panel remote from the fire alarm control panel that receives inputs from automatic and manual fire alarm devices may supply power to detection devices and interface devices may provide transfer of power to the notification appliances may provide transfer of condition to relays or devices connected to the control unit and reports to and receives signals from the fire alarm control panel e Fire Alarm Control Panel FACP A master control panel having the features of a fire alarm control unit and to which fire alarm control units are interconnected The panel has central processing memory input and output terminals f Terminal Cabinet A steel cabinet with locking hinge mounted door in which terminal strips are securely mounted 2 2 2 System Operation The system shall be a complete supervised noncoded analog addressable fire alarm system conforming to NFPA 72 The system shall have an interconnected riser loop or network having Class A supervision that shall not be located in the same room or shaft The return portion of the loop shall be remote from the supply portion of the loop The system shall operate in the alarm mode upon actuation of any alarm initiating device The system shall remain in the alarm mode until initiating device s are reset and the f
70. downward direction 3 1 4 14 Directional Changes in Conduit Runs Make changes in direction of runs with symmetrical bends or cast metal fittings Make field made bends and offsets with hickey or conduit bending machine Do not install crushed or deformed conduits Avoid trapped conduits Prevent plaster dirt or trash from lodging in conduits boxes fittings and equipment during construction Free clogged conduits of obstructions SECTION 26 20 00 Page 24 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 1 4 15 Locknuts and Bushings Fasten conduits to sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by NFPA 70 where insulated bushings are used and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box otherwise use at least minimum single locknut and bushing Locknuts shall have sharp edges for digging into wall of metal enclosures Install bushings on ends of conduits and provide insulating type where required by NFPA 70 3 1 4 16 Flexible Connections Provide flexible steel conduit between 3 and 6 feet in length for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures for equipment subject to vibration noise transmission or movement and for motors Install flexible conduit to allow 20 percent slack Minimum flexible steel conduit size shall be 1 2 inch diameter Provide liquidtight flexible conduit in wet and damp locations for equipment subject to vibration noise transmission movement or motors Provide se
71. driver to proceed and Security not If after 60 seconds the vehicle does not exit the access pedestal area a Lane Blocked alarm is generated ified Drop arm is lowered as soon as vehicle clears the access pedestal Vehicle leav nd 4 use 2 vehicle previous transac System detects passback violation s ID card on pedestal for 2 vehicle to uses first ID card within 5 minutes of tion F Alarm is generated and Security notified Security must 5 2 FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION 5 2 1 System Design Concept assess and rectify All AVG L projects shall be designed around a common interoperable architectur The number type and placement of AVG L components shall be tailored to each location based upon existing infrastructure constraints Items N commercial D I local restrictions and other design The AVG L system design shall primarily consist of integrated Commercial Off the Shelf COTS Non Developmental or Government furnished components based on L standards and interfaces at a TRL of greater than or equal to 8 SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 19 Submarine A School BQ 534 The AVG L design shall be modular and scalable to facilitat reconfig urations This applies not only to t components and items that make up a complete five system modules as shown in section 3 2 2 AVG L deploy
72. electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE 100 In the text of this section the words conduit and duct are used interchangeably and have the same meaning In the text of this section medium voltage cable splices and medium voltage cable joints are used interchangeably and have the same meaning SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 02 Shop Drawings Precast underground structures G SD 03 Product Data Medium voltage cable G Medium voltage cable joints G Medium voltage cable terminations G Live end caps G Precast concrete structures G SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Sealing Material Pulling In Irons G Handhole frames and covers G Composite fiberglass handholes G Cable supports racks arms and insulators G The study shall be submitted with protective device equipment submittals No time extension or similar contract modifications will be granted for work arising out of the requirements for this study Approval of protective devices proposed shall be based on recommendations of this study The Government shall not be held responsible for any changes to equipment device ratings settings or additi
73. equipment or materials are specified to conform to industry and technical society reference standards of the organizations submit proof of such compliance The label or listing by the specified organization will be acceptable evidence of compliance In lieu of the label or listing submit a certificate from an independent testing organization competent to perform testing and approved by the Contracting Officer The certificate shall state that the item has been tested in accordance with the specified organization s test methods and that the item complies with the specified organization s reference standard Provide a complete system of SECTION 27 10 00 Page 9 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 telecommunications cabling and pathway components using star topology Provide support structures and pathways complete with outlets cables connecting hardware and telecommunications cabinets racks Cabling and interconnecting hardware and components for telecommunications systems shall be UL listed or third party independent testing laboratory certified and shall comply with NFPA 70 and conform to the requirements specified herein 2 2 TELECOMMUNICATIONS PATHWAY Provide telecommunications pathways in accordance with TIA 569 and as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Provide system furniture pathways in accordance with UL 1286 223 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING Cabling shall be UL listed for the application and shall comp
74. funded by local programs or the Military Construction Navy MCON program and must be coordinated through the regional local Facilities Engineering Command Team Lead FECTL in accordance with NAVFAC AT FP Business Management System BMS processes Facilities construction projects may be required for illumination signs aesthetics power data cables and guard vehicle shelter construction fencing or other facility modifications Standards for DoD facilities construction and interfaces can be found in the Unified Facilities Guide Specifications UFGS and Criteria These can be accessed electronically at http www wbdgq org ccb browse cat php 0 29 amp c 4 5 3 5 Traffic Management The design of each AVG L shall be based upon SDDCTEA approved current usage analysis and planned infrastructure modifications on and off the installation The contractor shall conduct usage analysis in the pre design phase in cases where current usage data does not exist The contractor shall also provide post installation usage pattern data and analysis demonstrating that the installed system does not create hazards on or off the installation The contractor shall anticipate the requirement to develop install and maintain signage and striping to facilitate use of the ECPs The contractor shall integrate existing and required signs and signals in the design Specific requirements shall be derived from loc
75. ground of the appropriate value for the particular equipment being grounded If the specified ground resistance is not met an additional ground rod shall be provided in accordance with the requirements of NFPA 70 placed not less than 6 feet from the first rod Should the resultant combined resistance exceed the specified resistance measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall the Contracting Officer shall be notified immediately 3 15 2 Grounding Connections Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible by exothermic weld or compression connector a Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturer s written recommendations Welds which are puffed up or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds b Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure Tools and dies shall be as recommended by the manufacturer An embossing die code or other SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 23 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 standard method shall provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire 3 15 3 Grounding Conductors Provide bare grounding conductors except where installed in conduit with associated phase conductors Ground cable sheaths cable shields conduit and equipment with
76. hosting facilities and accessible via PSNet All PACS field panels and readers will connect to the NPACS servers Remote administration and monitoring will be accomplished via client applications running on dedicated PCs or as a HTML enabled application The system design shall include badging registration station s The PWS will identify the responsible party s and location s for the administration of the local cardholder population as well as issuing locally managed access cards The existing local ACDB may be initially populated by a one time download from existing databases These badging registration stations shall have the following attributes The badging registration station shall have the ability to read all cards used by the system as defined above Database entries for locally issued cards shall contain at a minimum all information required by the JGS interface Database entries shall perform data entry validation to insure duplicate records misspellings and other data entry errors are minimized The badging registration station s shall also be used to upload all valid credentials and associated PACS Personal Identification Numbers PINs into the locally managed ACDB The badging registration stations will not have the ability to print or produce locally issued cards Ww ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 25 Submarine A School BQ 534 ALPR appli
77. hours exclusive of the manufacturers factory or laboratory tests is furnished xO 2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used unless specified otherwise ol DELIVERY AND STORAGE Provide protection from weather moisture extreme heat and cold dirt dust and other contaminants for telecommunications cabling and equipment placed in storage 8 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Connecting hardware shall be rated for operation under ambient conditions of 32 to 140 degrees F and in the range of 0 to 95 percent relative humidity noncondensing SECTION 27 10 00 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 1 9 WARRANTY The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract 1 10 MAINTENANCE 1 10 1 Operation and Maintenance Manuals Commercial off the shelf manuals shall be furnished for operation installation configuration and maintenance of products provided as a part of the telecommunications cabling and pathway system Data Package 5 Submit operations and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein not later than 2 months prior to the date of beneficial occupancy In
78. identification tags may be used Apply labels or tags to finished paint at intervals of not more than 50 feet Provide two copies of the piping identification code framed under glass and install where directed S223 Wrapping Where connection to existing steel line is made underground tape wrap new steel transition fittings and exposed existing pipe having damaged coating Clean pipe to bare metal Initially stretch first layer of tape to conform to the surface while spirally half lapping Apply a second layer half lapped and spiraled as the first layer but with spirals perpendicular to first wrapping Use 10 mil minimum thick polyethylene tape In lieu of tape wrap heat shrinkable 10 mil minimum thick polyethylene sleeve may be used SECTION 33 51 13 00 30 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 1 3 Regulators and Valves Seed Sie Pressure Regulator Provide plug cock or ball valve ahead of regulator Install regulator outside of building and 18 inches aboveground on riser Install regulator inside building and extend a full size vent line from relief outlet on regulator to a point outside of building Install gas meter in conjunction with pressure regulator On outlet side of regulator meter provide a union and a 3 8 inch gage tap with plug 3 1 3 2 Stop Valve and Shutoff Valve Provide stop valve on service branch at connection to main and shut off valve on riser outside of building 3 1 4 Pipe Sleeves Comply
79. in accordance with ASTM D 4354 Procedure Method A Factory seams shall be sampled at the frequency specified in ASTM D 4884 222 Site Verification and Testing Samples shall be collected at approved locations upon delivery to the site at the request of the Contracting Officer Samples shall be tested to verify that the geotextile meets the requirements specified in TABLE 1 MINIMUM PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DRAINAGE GEOTEXTILE Samples shall be identified by manufacturers name type of geotextile lot number roll number and machine direction Testing shall be performed at an approved laboratory Test results from the lot under review shall be submitted and approved prior to deployment of that lot of geotextile Rolls which are sampled shall be immediately rewrapped in their protective covering PART 3 EXECUTION Zal SURFACE PREPARATION Surface on which the geotextile will be placed shall be prepared to a relatively smooth surface condition in accordance with the applicable portion of this specification and shall be free from obstruction debris depressions erosion feature or vegetation Any irregularities will be removed so as to insure continuous intimate contact of the geotextile with all the surface Any loose material soft or low density pockets of material will be removed erosion features such as rills gullies etc must be graded out of the surface before geotextile placement 3 2 INSTALLATION OF THE GEOTEXTILE 3
80. inches draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth sand and gravel then immediately install conduit plugs 3 6 4 Jacking and Drilling Under Roads and Structures Conduits to be installed under existing paved areas which are not to be disturbed and under roads and railroad tracks shall be zinc coated rigid steel jacked into place Where ducts are jacked under existing pavement rigid steel conduit will be installed because of its strength To protect the corrosion resistant conduit coating predrilling or installing conduit inside a larger iron pipe sleeve jack and sleeve is required For crossings of existing railroads and airfield pavements greater than 50 feet in length the predrilling method or the jack and sleeve method will be used Separators or spacing blocks shall be made of steel concrete plastic or a combination of these materials placed not farther apart than 4 feet on centers 3 6 5 Galvanized Conduit Concrete Penetrations Galvanized conduits which penetrate concrete slabs pavement and walls in wet locations shall be PVC coated and shall extend from at least 2 inches within the concrete to the first coupling or fitting outside the concrete minimum of 6 inches from penetration 3 6 6 Multiple Conduits Separate multiple conduits by a minimum distance of 2 1 2 inches except that light and power conduits shall be separated from control signal and telephone conduits by a
81. indicated in MIX DESIGN section of this specification ASPHALT CEMENT BINDER MIX DESIGN SD 06 Test Reports Specific gravity test of asphalt Coarse aggregate tests Weight of slag test Percent of crushed pieces in gravel Fine aggregate tests Specific gravity of mineral filler Bituminous mixture tests Aggregates tests Bituminous mix tests Pavement courses Submit in accordance with paragraph entitled Mock Up Test Section 3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ZL Safety Requirements Provide adequate and safe stairways with handrails to the mixer platform and safe and protected ladders or other means for accessibility to plant operations Guard equipment and exposed steam or other high temperature SECTION 32 12 17 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Lis lines or cover with a suitable type of insulation 3 2 Required Data Job mix formula shall show the following a Source and proportions percent by weight of each ingredient of the mixture b Correct gradation the percentages passing each size sieve listed in the specifications for the mixture to be used for the aggregate and mineral filler from each separate source and from each different size to be used in the mixture and for the composite mixture c Amount of material passing the No 200 sieve determined by dry sieving d Number of blows of hammer compaction per side of molded specimen e Temperature viscosity relationship of the asphalt cement f Stability flow pe
82. install a gate valve and a back flow prevention device on the fire hydrant tap The Contractor shall furnish all equipment material and labor required to obtain and deliver water from the designated fire hydrant to the work area s 1 5 7 Marking Removal Equipment Equipment shall be mounted on rubber tires and shall be capable of removing markings from the pavement without damaging the pavement surface or joint sealant Waterblasting equipment shall be capable of producing an adjustable pressurized stream of water Sandblasting equipment shall include an air compressor hoses and nozzles The compressor shall be equipped with traps to maintain the air free of oil and water a eo wee re Shotblasting Equipment Shotblasting equipment shall be capable of producing an adjustable depth of removal of marking and pavement Each unit shall be self cleaning and self contained shall be able to confine dust and debris from the operation and shall be capable of recycling the abrasive for reuse 1 D722 Chemical Equipment Chemical equipment shall be capable of application and removal of chemicals from the pavement surface and shall leave only non toxic biodegradable residue 1 528 Traffic Controls Suitable warning signs shall be placed near the beginning of the worksite and well ahead of the worksite for alerting approaching traffic from both directions Small markers shall be placed along newly painted lines or freshly placed raised markers to
83. lighting fixtures shall be minimum 4 inches square or octagonal except that smaller boxes may be installed as required by fixture configurations as approved Boxes for use in masonry block or tile walls shall be square cornered tile type or standard boxes having square cornered tile type covers Provide gaskets for cast metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with outside of exterior surfaces Provide separate boxes for flush or recessed fixtures when required by fixture terminal operating temperature fixtures shall be readily removable for access to boxes unless ceiling access panels are provided Support boxes and pendants for surface mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings independently of ceiling supports Fasten boxes and supports with wood screws on wood with bolts and expansion shields on concrete or brick with toggle bolts on hollow masonry units and with machine screws or welded studs on steel In open overhead spaces cast boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support support sheet metal boxes directly from building structure or by bar hangers Where bar hangers are used attach bar to raceways on opposite sides of box and support raceway with approved type fastener maximum 24 inches from box When penetrating reinforced concrete members avoid cutting reinforcing steel Pa eee rag l Boxes Boxes for use with raceway systems shall be minimum 1 1 2 inch
84. manufacturer shall be permanently impressed on the lid of the register box The serial number of the meter shall be imprinted on the lid c Detail Design 1 Main Case All meters shall have an outer case with separate removable measuring chambers Cases shall not be repaired in any manner The inlet and outlet shall have a common axis Connection flanges shall be parallel External Case Screw Bolts Nuts and Washers All external screws bolts cap bolts nuts and washers shall be designed for easy removal after lengthy service Main Case Connections All main case connections shall be flanged The bolt holes shall comply with AWWA C702 a 2 Inch Meters The flanges for 2 inch meters shall be oval The drilling of oval flanges shall be on the horizontal axis b Meters Larger than 2 Inch The flanges for 3 inch 4 inch and 6 inch meters shall be the round type faced and drilled and shall conform to ASME B16 1 for bronze pipe flange Class 125 Companion Flanges Companion flanges of the same size and type as the meter flanges shall be provided and gaskets nuts and bolts shall be provided Round companion flanges shall be faced drilled and tapped in accordance with ASME B1 20 1 and shall conform to ASME B16 1 for cast iron pipe flange Class 125 All companion flanges shall comply with AWWA C702 for drilling diameter and thickness specifications Tapped Bosses All meters shall be provided with tapped bosses in t
85. markings Inspect cabling terminations in SECTION 27 10 00 Page 14 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 telecommunications rooms and at workstations to confirm color code for T568A or T568B pin assignments and inspect cabling connections to confirm compliance with TIA 568 C 1 TIA 568 C 2 TIA 568 C 3 Visually confirm Category 6 marking of outlets cover plates outlet connectors and patch panels 3 Bi de Verification Tests UTP backbone copper cabling shall be tested for DC loop resistance shorts opens intermittent faults and polarity between conductors and between conductors and shield if cable has overall shield Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks Test cables after termination but prior to being cross connected 3 552 603 Performance Tests Perform testing for each outlet and MUTOA as follows a Perform Category 6 link tests in accordance with TIA 568 C 1 and TIA 568 C 2 Tests shall include wire map length insertion loss NEXT PSNEXT ELFEXT PSELFEXT return loss propagation delay and delay skew Be Baky Final Verification Tests Perform verification tests for UTP systems after the complete telecommunications cabling and workstation outlet connectors are installed a Voice Tests These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point Go off hook and listen and receive a dial tone If a test number is available make a
86. normally open and one spare normally closed auxiliary contact Provide controllers for motors rated 1 hp and above with electronic phase voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase loss undervoltage and overvoltage Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay Magnetic type motor controllers shall have undervoltage protection when used with momentary contact pushbutton stations or switches and shall have undervoltage release when used with maintained contact pushbutton stations or switches When used with pressure float or similar automatic type or maintained contact switch controller shall have hand off automatic selector switch Connections to selector switch shall be such that only normal automatic regulatory control devices are bypassed when switch is in hand position Safety control devices such as low and high pressure cutouts high temperature cutouts and motor overload protective devices shall be connected in motor control circuit in hand and automatic positions Control circuit connections to hand off automatic selector switch or to more than one automatic regulatory control device shall be made in accordance with indicated or manufacturer s approved wiring diagram For each motor not in sight of controller or where controller disconnecting means is not in sight of motor location and driven machinery location controller disconnecting means shall be capable of being locked in o
87. of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section 1 6 4 1 Alternative Qualifications Products having less than a 2 year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturers factory or laboratory tests is furnished 1 6 4 2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used unless specified otherwise 1 6 4 3 Energy Efficiency Comply with National Energy Policy Act and Energy Star requirements for lighting products Submit documentation for Energy Star qualifications for equipment provided under this section Submit data indicating lumens per watt efficiency and color rendition index of light source ales WARRANTY The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render Satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract A Fo Electronic Ballast Warranty Furnish the electronic ballast manufacturer s warranty The warranty period shall not be less than 5 years from the date of manufacture of the electronic ballast Ballast assembly in the lighting fixture transportation and on site storage shall not exceed 12 months thereby permitting 4 years of t
88. on a footing of cast in place concrete except that precast concrete base sections may be used for precast concrete manhole risers Concrete block shall conform to ASTM C139 and Section 04 20 00 MASONRY 2 14 2 Precast Concrete Structures Risers and Tops In lieu of cast in place Contractors at their option may provide precast concrete underground structures subject to the requirements specified SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 13 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 7 LA below Precast units shall be the product of a manufacturer regularly engaged in the manufacture of precast concrete products including precast manholes 2 14 2 1 General Precast concrete structures shall have the same accessories and facilities as required for cast in place structures Likewise precast structures shall have plan area and clear heights not less than those of cast in place structures Concrete materials and methods of construction shall be the same as for cast in place concrete construction as modified herein Slope in floor may be omitted provided precast sections are poured in reinforced steel forms Concrete for precast work shall have a 28 day compressive strength of not less than 4000 psi Structures may be precast to the design and details indicated for cast in place construction precast monolithically and placed as a unit or structures may be assembled sections designed and produced by the manufacturer in accordance with the requirements specified Struc
89. or in place prior to being placed in service Provide method for easy connection of heater to external power source Provide temporary reliable external power source if commercial power at rated voltage is not available on site 2 2 6 Terminal Boards Provide with engraved plastic terminal strips and screw type terminals for external wiring between components and for internal wiring between removable assemblies Terminal boards associated with current transformers shall be short circuiting type Terminate conductors for current transformers with ring tongue lugs Terminal board identification shall be identical in similar units External wiring shall be color coded consistently for similar terminal boards SECTION 26 23 00 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 2227 Wire Marking Mark control and metering conductors at each end Provide factory installed white plastic tubing heat stamped with black block type letters on factory installed wiring On field installed wiring provide white preprinted polyvinyl chloride PVC sleeves heat stamped with black block type letters Each sleeve shall contain a single letter or number shall be elliptically shaped to securely grip the wire and shall be keyed in such a manner to ensure alignment with adjacent sleeves Provide specific wire markings using the appropriate combination of individual sleeves Each wire marker shall indicate the device or equipment including specific term
90. organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment and software on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract ot SYSTEM DESCRIPTION aT ek System Requirements Electricity metering consisting of meters and associated equipment will be used to record the electricity consumption and other values as described in the requirements that follow and as shown on the drawings Communication system requirements are contained in a separate specification section as identified in paragraph entitled Communications Interfaces Twa Selection Criteria Metering components and software are part of a system that includes the physical meter data recorder function and communications method Every building site identified shall include sufficient metering components to measure the electrical parameters identified and to store and communicate the values as required Contractor shall verify that the electricity meter installed on any building site is compatible with the base wide metering system with respect to the types of meters selected and the method used to program the meters for initial use Software and meter programming tools are necessary to set up the meters described by this specification New software tools different from the meter programming methods currently used by base personnel will require separate approval for use
91. pH of Soils U S DEPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE USDA AMS Seed Act 1940 R 1988 R 1998 Federal Seed Act DOA SSIR 42 1996 Soil Survey Investigation Report No 42 Soil Survey Laboratory Methods Manual Version 3 0 a2 DEFINITIONS 2 Stand of Turf 95 percent ground cover of the established species 3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK and Section 32 05 33 LANDSCAPE ESTABLISHMENT applies to this section for pesticide use and plant establishment requirements with additions and modifications herein 4 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 03 Product Data Wood cellulose fiber mulch Fertilizer Include physical characteristics and recommendations SD 06 Test Reports Topsoil composition tests reports and recommendations SECTION 32 92 19 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SD 07 Certificates State certification and approval for seed SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions Erosion Control Materials eS DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 5 Delivery p ieeo ee be Seed Protection Protect from drying out and from contamination during delivery on site storage and handling Ta Sala Fertilizer Delivery Deliver to the site in original unopened containers bearing manufacturer s chemi
92. plant produced mixtures waste the mix and withdraw the aggregates in the hot bins immediately and return to the respective stockpiles for drum dryer mixer plants waste the mix including that in surge or storage bins that is affected by free moisture 3 1 4 Transportation of Bituminous Mixtures Transport bituminous material from the mixing plant to the paving site in trucks having tight clean smooth beds that have been coated with a minimum amount of concentrated solution of hydrated lime and water or other approved coating to prevent adhesion of the mixture to the truck Petroleum products will not be permitted for coating truck If air temperature is less than 60 degrees F or if haul time is greater than 30 minutes cover each load with canvas or other approved material of ample size to protect the mixture from the loss of heat Make deliveries so that the spreading and rolling of all the mixture prepared for one day s run can be completed during daylight unless adequate approved artificial lighting is provided Deliver mixture to area to be paved so that the temperature at the time of dumping into the spreader is within the range specified herein Reject loads that are below minimum temperature that have crusts of cold unworkable material or that have been wet excessively by rain Hauling over freshly laid material is prohibited 3 025 Surface Preparation of Underlying Course Prior to the laying of the asphalt concret
93. setting when the transformer is de energized Provide four 2 5 percent full capacity taps two above and two below rated primary voltage Tap changers shall clearly indicate which tap setting is in use e Minimum tested percent impedance at 85 degrees C shall not be less than the following values 5 32 for units rated 750kVA and above SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 9 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 f Audible sound levels shall comply with the following kVA DECIBELS MAX 750 57 g Transformer shall include lifting lugs and provisions for jacking under base The transformer base construction shall be suitable for using rollers or skidding in any direction Provide transformer top with an access handhole Transformer shall have its kVA rating conspicuously displayed using 3 inch high yellow letters on its enclosure The transformer shall have an insulated low voltage neutral bushing with NEMA spade terminal and with removable ground strap Daria L Specified Transformer Efficiencies Provide transformer efficiency calculations utilizing the actual no load and load loss values obtained during the routine tests performed on the actual transformer s prepared for this project No load losses NLL shall be referenced at 20 degrees C Load losses LL shall be referenced at 55 degrees C and at 50 percent of the nameplate load The transformer is not acceptable if the calculated transformer efficiency is less than the efficiency indicate
94. shall be ivory thermoplastic Wiring terminals shall be screw type side wired Contacts shall be silver cadmium and contact arm shall be one piece copper alloy Switches shall be rated quiet type ac only 120 277 volts with current rating and number of poles indicated 19342 Switch with Red Pilot Handle NEMA WD 1 Provide pilot lights that are integrally constructed as a part of the switch s handle The pilot light shall be red and shall illuminate whenever the switch is closed or on The pilot lighted switch shall be rated 20 amps and 120 volts or 277 volts as indicated Provide the circuit s neutral conductor to each switch with a pilot light 9 3 Breakers Used as Switches For 120 and 277 Volt fluorescent fixtures mark breakers SWD in accordance with UL 489 9 4 Disconnect Switches NEMA KS 1 Provide heavy duty type switches where indicated where switches are rated higher than 240 volts and for double throw switches Fused switches shall utilize Class R fuseholders and fuses unless indicated otherwise Switches serving as motor disconnect means shall be horsepower rated Provide switches in NEMA 1 3R enclosure as indicated per NEMA ICS 6 10 FUSES NEMA FU 1 Provide complete set of fuses for each fusible switch Time current characteristics curves of fuses serving motors or connected in series with circuit breakers or other circuit protective devices shall be SECTION 26 20 00 Page 11 Submarine A Sch
95. success of bond of reflective media new paint marking and the pavement surface vacuum cured surface of new marking after a seven 7 day dry time Inspect newly applied markings for signs of bond failure based on visual inspection and comparison to results from Test Stripe Demonstration paragraph 3 5 1 Reflective Media and Coating Bond Verification Within seven 7 days after pavement marking application use industrial vacuum to sweep new markings Visually inspect the pavement markings and the material captured by the vacuum Verify that no significant loss of reflective media has occurred to the pavement marking due to the vacuum cleaning 335 2 Reflective Media and Coating Application Verification Use a wet film thickness gauge to measure the application of wet paint Use a microscope or magnifying glass to evaluate the embedment of glass beads in the paint Verify the glass bead embedment with approximately 50 percent of the beads embedded and 50 percent of the beads exposed End of Section SECTION 32 17 23 00 20 Page 9 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 32 92 19 SEEDING 10 06 PART 1 GENERAL alee 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM D 4427 2007 Peat Samples by Laboratory Testing ASTM D 4972 2001 R 2007
96. suitable for the type diameter insulation class and level and materials of the cable terminated Do not use separate parts of copper or copper alloy in contact with aluminum alloy parts in the construction or installation of the terminator 2 641 Cold Shrink Type Terminator shall be a one piece design utilizing the manufacturer s latest technology where high dielectric constant capacitive stress control is integrated within a skirted insulator made of silicone rubber Termination shall not require heat or flame for installation Termination kit shall contain all necessary materials except for the lugs Termination shall be designed for installation in low or highly contaminated indoor and outdoor locations and shall resist ultraviolet rays and oxidative decomposition 2 6 2 Heat Shrinkable Type Terminator shall consist of a uniform cross section heat shrinkable polymeric construction stress relief tubing and environmentally sealed outer covering that is nontracking resists heavy atmospheric contaminants SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 11 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 ultra violet rays and oxidative decomposition Provide heat shrinkable sheds or skirts of the same material Termination shall be designed for installation in low or highly contaminated indoor or outdoor locations 2 6 3 Separable Insulated Connector Type IEEE 386 Provide connector with steel reinforced hook stick eye grounding eye test point
97. surfaces to which the seal coat is to be applied 1 3 6 Scales Use scales of sufficient size and capacity to accommodate all trucks hauling aggregates in the job All scales shall be tested and approved by an inspector of the state inspection bureau charged with scales inspection within the State in which the project is located If an official of the inspection bureau is not available test the scales in accordance with the State specifications in the presence of the Contracting Officer Keep the necessary number of standard weights on hand at all times for testing the SECTION 32 01 13 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 scales 1 37 Weighhouse Provide a weatherproof weighhouse constructed in a manner that will afford adequate protection for the recording devices on the scales of a suitable size with one sliding window facing the scales platform one end window and a desk type area at least 2 feet wide by 6 feet long 1 3 8 Storage Tanks Provide tanks capable of heating the bituminous material under effective and positive control at all times to the required temperature Accomplish heating by steam coils hot oil or electricity Affix to the tank an armored thermometer with a range from 100 to 300 degrees F so that the temperature of the bituminous material may be read at all times 735 9 Power Rollers Provide self propelled tandem and three wheel type rollers weighing not less than 5 tons and suitab
98. temperature when dumped into the spreader will be rejected Adjust spreader and regulate speed so that the surface of the course is smooth and continuous without tears and pulling and of such depth that when compacted the surface conforms with the cross section grade and contour indicated Unless otherwise directed begin the placing along the centerline of areas to be paved on a crowned section or on the high side of areas with a one way slope Place mixture in consecutive adjacent strips having a minimum width of 10 feet except where the edge lanes require strips less than 10 feet to complete the area Construct longitudinal joints and edges to true line markings Establish lines parallel to the centerline of the area to be paved and place string lines coinciding with the established lines for the spreading machine to follow Provide the number and location of the lines needed to accomplish proper grade control When specified grade and smoothness requirements can be met for initial lane construction by use of an approved long ski type device of not less than 30 feet in length and for subsequent lane construction by use of a short ski or shoe in place string lines for grade control may be omitted Place mixture as nearly continuous as possible and adjust the speed of placing as needed to permit proper rolling 22 Shoveling Raking and Tamping After Machine Spreading Shovelers and rakers shall follow the spreading machine Add o
99. temperatures shall be above 50 degrees F at the time of application of joint sealing material Excess material on exposed surfaces of the concrete shall be removed immediately and concrete surfaces cleaned 4 CURING AND PROTECTION 4 1 General Requirements Protect concrete against loss of moisture and rapid temperature changes for at least 7 days from the beginning of the curing operation Protect unhardened concrete from rain and flowing water All equipment needed for adequate curing and protection of the concrete shall be on hand and ready for use before actual concrete placement begins Protection shall be provided as necessary to prevent cracking of the pavement due to temperature changes during the curing period SECTION 32 16 13 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 4 1 1 Mat Method The entire exposed surface shall be covered with 2 or more layers of burlap Mats shall overlap each other at least 6 inches The mat shall be thoroughly wetted with water prior to placing on concrete surface and shall be kept continuously in a saturated condition and in intimate contact with concrete for not less than 7 days Sta 2 Backfilling After curing debris shall be removed and the area adjoining the concrete shall be backfilled graded and compacted to conform to the surrounding area in accordance with lines and grades indicated 3 4 3 Protection Completed concrete shall be protected from damage until accept
100. the ES at the to testing by the Government SOVT or one SOVT for each system can be used The SOVT will be conducted by the Con ative and FECTL or another Government The Contractor will are demonstrated to s Government representa by signing the SOVT d noted in the SOVT alo the discrepancy anda been resolved the co Government representa Equipment that is ins a specific system e a testing plan to doc wn tive ite personnel ocument An ng with requ resolution ntractor th tive will si date e site talled by th g telephon es A ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 39 conduct ensuring system operational capabilit and FECTL or another who will certify successful completion y system discrepancies will ired action needed to resolve Once the discrepancy has and the FECTL or another gn off on the resolution e Contractor that is not part time zone clock ument proper operation and site acceptance Cractor end to end ties be of shall have Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Table 2 System Requirements Verification Matrix Verification Method reg aa Description The AVG L sha have the ability to be configured and operated locally as well as from a remote location The AVG L shal have 3 modes of operation Automated Manual and Closed During bi directional or lane re
101. the cable manufacturer s recommendations 33 CABLE INSTALLATION PLAN AND PROCEDURE The Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer an installation manual or set of instructions which addresses such aspects as cable construction insulation type cable diameter bending radius cable temperature limits for installation lubricants coefficient of friction conduit cleaning storage procedures moisture seals testing for and purging moisture maximum allowable pulling tension and maximum allowable sidewall bearing SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 16 Submarine A School BQ 534 V2 7A pressure The Contractor shall then prepare a checklist of significant requirements which shall be submitted along with the manufacturers instructions in accordance with SUBMITTALS Cable shall be installed strictly in accordance with the cable manufacturer s recommendations and the approved installation plan 3 4 UNDERGROUND FEEDERS SUPPLYING BUILDINGS Terminate underground feeders supplying building at a point 5 feet outside the building and projections thereof except that conductors shall be continuous to the terminating point indicated Coordinate connections of the feeders to the service entrance equipment with Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Conduit shall be PVC Type EPC 40 from the supply equipment to a point 5 feet outside the building and projections thereof Protect ends of underground conduit with plastic plugs until connecti
102. the following sections The Contractor shall verify that the metering system installed on any building site is compatible with the facility wide communication and meter reading protocol system PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 2 1 WATER METERS 1 1 Physical and Common Requirements a Metering system components shall be installed according to the Metering System Schedule shown in this specification on the drawings b Meter shall be rated for use at temperatures from 40 degrees Centigrade to 70 degrees Centigrade c Surge withstand shall conform to IEEE C37 90 1 Dis Cold Water Meters Displacement Type 5 8 inch x 3 4 inch 1l inch 1 1 2 inch 2 inch Size Small meters shall be as follows or shall be approved equivalents Positive displacement meters provided hereunder shall be full size nutating disc magnetic drive sealed register cold water meters and shall fully comply with the requirements of AWWA C700 unless otherwise specified hereunder No oscillating piston style meters will be accepted a Materials 1 Cases 5 8 Inch x 3 4 Inch l1 Inch 1 1 2 Inch The main case of the meter shall be cast all bronze bottom caps shall be cast all bronze excepting register boxes and register box lids which shall be bronze or an approved plastic material as specified in AWWA C700 Meter cases constructed of plastic will not be accepted 2 Cases 2 Inch The main case of the meter shall be cast all bronze including bottom cap
103. the materials Do not apply sealant if moisture is observed in the crack PART 2 PRODUCTS Zak SEALANTS Provide sealants conforming to ASTM D 6690 Type II 2 2 BACKUP MATERIALS Provide backup material that is a compressible nonshrinking nonstaining nonabsorptive material and nonreactive with the crack sealant The melting point of the backing material shall be at least 5 degrees F greater than the maximum pouring temperature of the sealant being used when tested in accordance with ASTM D 789 The material shall have a water absorption of not more than 5 percent by weight when tested in accordance with ASTM C509 The backup material shall be 25 percent plus or minus 5 percent larger in diameter than the nominal width of the crack PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION OF CRACKS Immediately before the installation of the crack sealant thoroughly clean the cracks to remove oxidized pavement loose aggregate and foreign debris The preparation shall be as follows 3 2 Leal Cracks EE de TD Hairline Cracks Cracks that are less than 1 4 inch wide do not need to be sealed SECTION 32 0117 16 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 lvl Small Cracks Cracks that are 1 4 to 3 4 inch wide shall be routed to a nominal width 1 8 inch greater than the existing nominal width and to a depth not less than 3 4 inch sandblasted waterblasted wire brushed and cleaned using compressed air 3 3 Medium Cracks Cracks that are
104. the requirements shall be in the PWS Z N D Guard Shack Canopy SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 49 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Visitor Credentials Blank Visitor Cards for those not authorized for a CAC or Teslin card SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 50 Submarine A School BQ 534 Unit s Software CI Gate Automation Software SW Enclave Performance Specification Source CFE GE D D D CFI D TB TB TB 1 TB L a Unit Networks s eT A ONE NET Facility Mods GF CFE fal G E GFE E E A Security lighting at each gate Surface modifications to Approach Zones Component Connection to power grid Fence modifications for Vehicle Trap FE FE FE FE GFE Not required if sufficient Navy AT FP Ashore compliant Bi NOTE 1 system component already installed for Appendix C and PWS 1127117 Govt Org CNIC N6 Notes Advanced Traffic Control Software ePACS compliant PACS Software if ePACS is not available at the time of the install Navy AT FP Sensor NAVFAC Integration System Specification Only provided if Installation of AVG L is required to interface with installed PSIM Govt Org aa aaa Govt Org NAVFAC NAVFAC NAVFAC This will be annotated in Portion of PSNet that connects AVG L components for projects in CONUS and US Territories OC
105. the voltage drop at the most remote appliance on each notification appliance circuit Seek INSTRUCTION OF GOVERNMENT EMPLOYEES Equipment manufacturer shall provide 3 days on site Training shall allow for classroom instruction as well as individual hands on programming troubleshooting and diagnostics exercises training shall occur within 6 months of system acceptance Sia Pad Instructor Include in the project the services of an instructor who shall have received specific training from the manufacturer for the training of other persons regarding the inspection testing and maintenance of the system provided The instructor shall train the Government employees designated by the Contracting Officer in the care adjustment maintenance and operation of the fire alarm and fire detection system 8 762 Qualifications Each instructor shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of this installation The instructor shall be trained in operating theory as well as in practical O amp M work 3 7 3 Required Instruction Time Provide 16 hours of instruction after final acceptance of the system The instruction shall be given during regular working hours on such dates and times as are selected by the Contracting Officer The instruction may be divided into two or more periods at the discretion of the Contracting Officer The training shall allow for rescheduling for unforeseen maintenance and or fire department responses End of Sec
106. timber as removed from Government property as directed by the Contracting Officer End of Section SECTION 31 00 00 Page 12 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 31 05 22 GEOTEXTILES USED AS FILTERS 04 06 PART 1 GENERAL ae iL REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM D 123 2003 Terminology Relating to Textiles ASTM D 4354 1999 R 2004 Sampling of Geosynthetics for Testing ASTM D 4355 2007 Deterioration of Geotextiles from Exposure to Light Moisture and Heat ina Xenon Arc Type Apparatus ASTM D 4491 1999a R 2004e1 Water Permeability of Geotextiles by Permittivity ASTM D 4533 2004 Trapezoid Tearing Strength of Geotextiles ASTM D 4632 1991 R 2003 Grab Breaking Load and Elongation of Geotextiles ASTM D 4751 2004 Determining Apparent Opening Size of a Geotextile ASTM D 4833 2000e1 Index Puncture Resistance of Geotextiles Geomembranes and Related Products ASTM D 4873 2002 Identification Storage and Handling of Geosynthetic Rolls and Samples ASTM D 4884 1996 R 2003 Strength of Sewn or Thermally Bonded Seams of Geotextiles U S ARMY CORPS OF ENGINEERS USACE EM 1110 2 1601 1994 Change 1 Hydraulic Design of Flood Control Channels SECTION 31 05 22 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1
107. to power sources including power supplies and grounding i Details of surge protection device installation j Intrusion Detection System block diagram and sensor layout k Over speed wrong way and vehicle presence detector locations and sensor detection patterns l Traffic signals and traffic signal supports m Communications speeds and protocol descriptions n CD ROM CD RW DVD RW drive speed and protocol descriptions o Alarm response time p Command response time q Start up operations including system and database backup operations r Expansion capability and method of implementation s Sample copy of sequence of events report t Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS Calculations u Design calculations for traffic signal supports 3 2 Group II Technical Data Package SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 Submit Group to performance of sheets findings conditions Conditions Do or writ report Proceed Prepare and submit to the Government documenting site conditions differ from the design drawings or conditions to be installed Provi tional requirements to su Technical the system ten funci a report of and a cost es not perform any field work un is approved by the Government any deficienci S timate to correct identified in the repor
108. transformers and related accessories are specified in Section 33 71 02 00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 262 THREE PHASE PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS IEEE C57 12 34 IEEE C57 12 28 and as specified herein 25201 Compartments The high and low voltage compartments shall be separated by steel isolating barriers extending the full height and depth of the compartments Compartment doors hinged lift off type with stop in open position and three point latching Qi Qcdve dL High Voltage Dead Front High voltage compartment shall contain the incoming line insulated SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 high voltage load break connectors bushing well inserts feed thru inserts six high voltage bushing wells configured for loop feed application load break switch handle s access to oil immersed fuses dead front surge arresters tap changer handle connector parking stands and ground pad a Insulated high voltage load break connectors IEEE 386 rated 15 kv 95 kV BIL Current rating 200 amperes rms continuous Short time rating 10 000 amperes rms symmetrical for a time duration of 0 17 seconds Connector shall have a steel reinforced hook stick eye grounding eye test point and arc quenching contact material b Bushing well inserts and feed thru inserts IEEE 386 200 amperes 15 kV Class Provide a bushing well insert for each bushing well unless ind
109. with TIA EIA 604 3 with zirconia ceramic alignment sleeves as indicated Provide dust cover for adapters Optical fiber adapters shall comply with TIA 455 21 for 500 mating cycles i543 Optical Fiber Connectors Provide in accordance with TIA 455 21 5 4 Cover Plates Telecommunications cover plates shall comply with UL 514C and TIA 568 C 1 TIA 568 C 2 TIA 568 C 3 flush design constructed of high impact thermoplastic material ivory in color Provide labeling in accordance with the paragraph LABELING in this section 6 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS Provide in accordance with UL 467 TIA J STD 607 and NFPA 70 Components shall be identified as required by TIA EIA 606 Provide ground rods bonding conductors and grounding busbars as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM al FIRESTOPPING MATERIAL Provide as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 8 MANUFACTURER S NAMEPLATE Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer s name address model number and serial number securely affixed ina conspicuous place the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable 9 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES ASTM D 709 Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure relay switch and device as specified or as indicated on the drawings Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and when applicable the position Nameplates shall be melamin
110. with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING Where piping penetrates concrete or masonry wall floor or firewall provide pipe sleeve poured or grouted in place Make sleeve of steel or cast iron pipe of such size to provide 1 4 inch or more annular clearance around pipe Extend sleeve through wall or slab and terminate flush with both surfaces Pack annular space with oakum and caulk at ends with silicone construction sealant 3p L5 Piping Hangers and Supports Selection fabrication and installation of piping hangers and supports shall conform with MSS SP 69 and MSS SP 89 unless otherwise indicated Provide seismic restraints in accordance with SMACNA 1650 3 2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 32 1 Metal Welding Inspection Inspect for compliance with NFPA 54 and ASME B31 8 Replace repair and then re inspect defective welds 373 PROTECTIVE COVERING FOR ABOVEGROUND PIPING SYSTEMS Apply finish painting conforming to the applicable paragraphs of Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS and as follows for Ferrous Surfaces touch up shop primed surfaces with ferrous metal primer of the same type paint as the shop primer Solvent clean surfaces that have not been shop primed in accordance with SSPC SP 1 Mechanically clean surfaces that contain loose rust loose mill scale and other foreign substances by power wire brushing in accordance with SSPC SP 3 or brush off blast clean in accordance with SSPC SP 7 NACE No 4 and primed with ferrous metal primer in ac
111. 00 20 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 3 a3 FIELD TESTING INSPECTION AND DEMONSTRATIONS 341 Sampling and Testing As soon as the paint materials are available for sampling obtain by random selection from the sealed containers two quart samples of each batch in the presence of the Contracting Officer Accomplish adequate mixing prior to sampling to ensure a uniform representative sample A batch is defined as that quantity of material processed by the manufacturer at one time and identified by number on the label Clearly identify samples by designated name specification number batch number project contract number intended use and quantity involved Test samples by an approved laboratory If a sample fails to meet specification replace the material in the area represented by the samples and retest the replacement material as specified above Submit copy of the test results to the Contracting Officer Include in the report of test results a listing of any specification requirements not verified by the test laboratory 3 2 Inspection Examine material at the job site to determine that it is the material referenced in the report of test results or certificate of compliance A certificate of compliance shall be accompanied by test results substantiating conformance to the specified requirements pce Surface Preparations and Application Procedures Surface preparations and application procedures will be ex
112. 04 Samples Geotextile If requested submit geotextile samples for testing to determine compliance with the requirements in this specification When required submit samples a minimum of 30 days prior to the beginning of installation of the same textile Upon delivery of the geotextile submit duplicate copies of the written certificate of compliance signed by a legally authorized official of the manufacturer The certificate shall state that the geotextile shipped to the site meets the chemical requirements and exceeds the minimum average roll value listed in TABLE 1 MINIMUM PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DRAINAGE GEOTEXTILE Upon request supply quality control and quality assurance tests for the geotextile All samples provided shall be from the same production lot as will be supplied for the contract and shall be the full manufactured width of the geotextile by at least 10 feet long except that samples for seam strength may be a full width sample folded over and the edges stitched for a length of at least 5 feet Samples submitted for testing shall be identified by manufacturers lot designation For needle punched geotextile the manufacturer shall certify that the geotextile has been inspected using SECTION 31 05 22 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 permanent on line metal detectors and does not contain any needles SD 07 Certificates Geotextile All brands of geotextile and all seams to be used will be accepted on the basis of mill
113. 1 1 and IEEE C62 41 2 IEEE 519 Control panel shall have surge protection included within the panel to protect the unit from damaging transient voltage surges Surge arrestor shall be mounted near the incoming power source and properly wired to all three phases and ground Fuses shall not be used for surge protection 1 3 2 2 Sensor and Control Wiring Surge Protection I O functions as specified shall be protected against surges induced on control and sensor wiring installed outdoors and as shown The inputs and outputs shall be tested in both normal mode and common mode using the following two waveforms a A 10 microsecond by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes b An 8 microsecond by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes SECTION 26 29 23 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 T 4 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 02 Shop Drawings Schematic diagrams G G Interconnecting diagrams G G Installation drawings G G Submit drawings for government approval prior to equipment construction or integration Modifications to original drawings made during installation shall be immediately recorded for
114. 100 ton of aggregate placed SECTION 32 12 19 Page 10 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 422 153 Soundness Test Perform soundness tests as specified by ASTM C88 to ensure that the aggregates have a weight loss not greater than 18 percent when subjected to five cycles of the magnesium sulfate test One test shall be performed for every 100 tons of aggregate placed 3 12 1 4 Smoothness Take measurements for deviation from grade and cross section shown in successive positions parallel to the road centerline with a 12 foot straightedge The surface of each course shall be checked transversely with a 12 foot straightedge placed perpendicular to the road centerline at 24 foot intervals 3 12 1 5 Thickness Determine the thickness of the pavement every 60 feet along the finished surface Measurements shall be made in 3 inch diameter test holes penetrating the pavement The holes shall be refilled to conform to these specifications 3s 2 16 Bitumen Content Samples of finished plant mixture shall be taken and tested for each 100 tons or fraction thereof to determine if bitumen content is in accordance with ASTM D2172 D2172M and conforms to the specified requirements 3 12 2 Bituminous Material Sample Obtain a sample of the bituminous material used under the supervision of the Contracting Officer The sample will be retained by the Government Fer PROTECTION OF PAVEMENT Maintain the pavement in a satisfacto
115. 120 volts having automatically wound spring mechanism or capacitor to maintain accurate time for a minimum of 15 hours following power failure Provide time switch with a manual on off bypass switch Housing for the time switch shall be surface mounted NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6 9 PHOTOCELL SWITCH UL 773 or UL 773A hermetically sealed cadmium sulfide or silicon diode type cell rated 120 volts ac 60 Hz with single throw contacts Switch shall turn on at or below 3 footcandles and off at 2 to 10 footcandles A time delay shall prevent accidental switching from transient light sources Provide switch a Integral to the luminaire rated 1000W minimum Provide a directional lens in front of the cell to prevent fixed light sources from creating a turnoff condition b Ina U V stabilized polycarbonate housing with swivel arm and adjustable window slide rated 1800 VA minimum c In a high impact resistant noncorroding and nonconductive molded plastic housing with a locking type receptacle conforming to NEMA C136 10 rated 1800 VA minimum d In a cast weatherproof aluminum housing with adjustable window slide rated 1800 VA minimum 10 POWER HOOK FIXTURE HANGERS Provide UL listed assembly including through wired power hook housing interlocking plug and receptacle power cord and fixture support loop Power hook housing shall be cast aluminum having two 3 4 inch threaded hubs Support hook shall have safety s
116. 127117 a a 1 2 UNIT PRICES 2 Geotextiles e dl Payment Payment will be made at the contract unit price and will constitute full compensation to the Contractor for providing all plant labor material and equipment and performing all operations necessary for the complete and satisfactory installation of the geotextile The following items are included in the contract unit price for Geotextiles and will not be counted a second time in the process of determining the extent of geotextile placed Material and associated equipment and operation used in laps seams or extra length securing pins and associated material equipment and operations and material and associated equipment and operations used to provide cushioning layer of sand or gravel or both to permit increase in allowable drop height of stone No payment will be made for geotextiles replaced because of waste contamination damage repair or due to Contractor fault or negligence eB L2 Measurement Installed geotextiles will be measured for payment in place to the nearest 10 square feet of protected area as delineated in the drawings oD is Unit of Measure Unit of measure 10 square feet wd SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD
117. 17 Aggregates ASTM D2172 D2172M 2011 Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous Paving Mixtures ASTM D3381 D3381M 2009a Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction ASTM D946 D946M 2009a Penetration Graded Asphalt Cement for Use in Pavement Construction 13 3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Av ol General Requirements All plant equipment machines and tools used in the work shall be subject to approval and maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times Provide equipment that is adequate for placing the bituminous mixtures at a rate equal to the plant output and that is capable of producing the required compaction meeting grade controls thickness control and smoothness requirements as set forth herein 13 3522 Mixing Plant The mixing plant shall be an automatic or semi automatic controlled commercially manufactured unit designed and operated to consistently produce a mixture within the job mix formula JMF e338 Rollers Provide rollers which are self propelled weigh not less than 10 tons and have a maximum contact pressure of 90 psi Wheels on the roller shall be equipped with adjustable scrapers and water sprinkling apparatus to keep the wheels and prevent the adherence of bituminous material Use a sufficient number of rollers on the work so that one roller will be in continuous operation for 1 hour on each 100 square yards of completed pavement operating at a speed of not more than 3 mp
118. 2 1 2 Planting Dates Planting Season Planting Dates Season 1 April June Season 2 August October Temporary Seeding 2 1 3 Seed Purity Min Min Percent Max Botanical Common Percent Germination Percent Name Name Pure Seed and Hard Seed Weed Seed 2 1 4 Seed Mixture by Weight Planting Season Variety Percent by Weight Season 1 Season 2 Temporary Seeding Proportion seed mixtures by weight Temporary seeding must later be replaced by Season 1 Season 2 plantings for a permanent stand of grass The same requirements of turf establishment for Season 1 Season 2 apply for temporary seeding PPA TOPSOIL 2 2 1 Off Site Topsoil Conform to requirements specified in paragraph entitled Composition Additional topsoil shall be furnished by the Contractor obtained from topsoil borrow areas indicated SECTION 32 92 19 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 22 2 Composition Containing from 5 to 10 percent organic matter as determined by the topsoil composition tests of the Organic Carbon 6A Chemical Analysis Method described in DOA SSIR 42 Maximum particle size 3 4 inch with maximum 3 percent retained on 1 4 inch screen The pH shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D 4972 Topsoil shall be free of sticks stones roots and other debris and objectionable materials Other components shall conform to
119. 2 1 General The geotextile shall be placed in the manner and at the locations shown At the time of installation the geotextile shall be rejected if it has defects rips holes flaws deterioration or damage incurred during manufacture transportation or storage 3 2 2 Placement The geotextile shall be placed with the long dimension parallel to the trench and laid smooth and free of tension stress folds wrinkles or creases The strips shall be placed to provide a minimum width of 24 inches of overlap for each joint The placement procedure requires that the length of the geotextile be approximately 10 percent greater than the slope length The Contractor shall adjust the actual length of the geotextile used based on initial installation experience Temporary pinning of the geotextile to help hold it in place until the bedding layer is placed shall be allowed The temporary pins shall be removed as the bedding granular material is placed to relieve high tensile stress which may occur during placement of material on the geotextile Design protection of riprap should be in compliance with EM 1110 2 1601 Trimming shall be performed in such a manner that the geotextile shall not be damaged in any way SECTION 31 05 22 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 PEC PROTECTION The geotextile shall be protected at all times during construction from contamination by surface runoff and any geotextile so contaminated shall be
120. 2 kV and above shall have a semiconducting conductor shield a semiconducting insulation shield and an overall copper tape shield for each phase 2 55 Neutrals Neutral conductors of shall be copper employing the same insulation and jacket materials as phase conductors except that a 600 volt insulation rating is acceptable 2 5 6 Jackets Cables shall be provided with a LLDPEPVC jacket Direct buried cables shall be rated for direct burial Provide type UD cables with an overall jacket Provide PVC jackets with a separator that prevents contact when underlying semiconducting insulating shield Zs MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE TERMINATIONS IEEE 48 Class 1 of the molded elastomer prestretched elastomer or heat shrinkable elastomer Acceptable elastomers are track resistant silicone rubber or track resistant ethylene propylene compounds such as ethylene propylene rubber or ethylene propylene diene monomer Separable insulated connectors may be used for apparatus terminations when such apparatus is provided with suitable bushings Terminations where required shall be provided with mounting brackets suitable for the intended installation and with grounding provisions for the cable shielding metallic sheath or armor Terminations shall be provided in a kit including skirts stress control terminator ground clamp connectors lugs and complete instructions for assembly and installation Terminations shall be the product of one manufacturer
121. 3kV rms peak 35 kV 33kV rms peak 3 18 1 2 Grounding System a Visual and mechanical inspection Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and specifications b Electrical tests Perform ground impedance measurements utilizing the fall of potential method in accordance with IEEE 81 On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods perform tests after interconnections are complete On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected Take measurements in normally dry weather not less than 48 hours after rainfall Use a portable megohmmeter tester in accordance with manufacturer s instructions to test each ground or group of grounds The instrument shall be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test 3 18 2 Follow Up Verification Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 26 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 condition and properly performing the intended function As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract the Contracting Officer shall be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times of checking and testing End of Section SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 27 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 34
122. 4 2 Over speed and Wrong way detection Include descriptions of the security strategy for detecting potential threat vehicles the coverage and operation of the sensors and the man machine interfaces for over speed and wrong way alarms 3 4 3 Traffic Control Plan for the Maintenance of Traffic During Construction Provide a Traffic Control Plan for maintenance of traffic during construction per Section 08C of EM 385 1 1 3 4 4 Traffic Control Plan During Active Vehicle Barrier Maintenance Describe plans for taking one or more active barriers out of service for maintenance or testing purposes while other barriers at the ACP remain in service AS a minimum include requirements for traffic signal indications and for temporary passive barriers and signage e g Type 3 passive barriers per MUTCD Include both short term less than an hour and long term plans n ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 3 4 5 Application Software Where an application software installed on a compute ved provide the default manufacturer s sta is invol software CDs se the inst data spe be the s operatio that is installation package on CD CDs Provide a parate from the default sof alled software with all cu cific for the installed sys tware the comple stom changes and tem The software ame as that of the system u sed when i
123. 4791 A flat particle is one having a ratio of width to thickness greater than 3 an elongated particle is one having a ratio of length to width greater than Bie 265 103 Weight Loss The percent weight loss shall not exceed 40 after 500 revolutions as determined in accordance with ASTM C131 Qa Friable Particles The amount of friable particles shall not exceed 0 1 percent of the total weight of aggregate sample when tested in accordance with ASTM C142 C142M 24 gt Crushed Slag The dry weight of crushed slag shall not be less than 75 pcf as determined in accordance with ASTM C29 C29M 222 Fine Aggregate Fine aggregate shall consist of clean sound durable particles of crushed stone durable particles of crushed stone slag or gravel The aggregate shall meet its requirements for stripping abrasion resistance and percent friable particles as specified for coarse aggregate E3 ANTISTRIPPING AGENT The use of antistripping agent is subject to prior approval by the Contracting Officer 4 EMULSIFIED ASPHALT FOR FOG SEAL Emulsified asphalt for Fog Seal shall conform to ASTM D 977 for anionic and ASTM D 2397 for cationic materials Submit in accordance with paragraph titled Sample Application for approval and selection of one of the trial application rates 5 WATER Provide fresh clean and potable water PART 3 EXECUTION 3 al PREPARATION OF SURFACE Repair damaged surface and fill cracks before starting wor
124. 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 d Meter shall comply with IEC 60687 certified by a qualified 3rd party test laboratory Provide socket mounted or panel mounted meters as indicated on the meter schedule 2 For meter replacement projects meter shall match the existing installation Meter shall be a Class 20 transformer rated design Use Class 200 meters for direct current reading without current transformers for applications with an expected load less than 200 amperes where indicated Meter shall be rated for use at temperature from minus 40 degrees Centigrade to plus 70 degrees Centigrade The meters shall have an electronic demand recording register and shall be secondary reading as indicated The register shall be used to indicate maximum kilowatt demand as well as cumulative or continuously cumulative demand Demand shall be measured on a block interval basis and shall be capable of a 5 to 60 minute interval and initially set to a 15 minute interval It shall have provisions to be programmed to calculate demand on a rolling interval basis Meter readings shall be true RMS The meter electronic register shall be of modular design with non volatile data storage Downloading meter stored data shall be capable via an optical port Recording capability of data storage with a minimum capability of 89 days of 15 minute 2 channel interval data The meter shall be capable of providing at least 2 KYZ pulse outputs dry cont
125. 71 02 00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION paragraph entitled Grounding Connections 3 2 4 Grounding and Bonding Equipment UL 467 except as indicated or specified otherwise 333 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES Install and connect equipment furnished under this section as indicated on project drawings the approved shop drawings and as specified herein Bohn Switchboard ANSI NEMA PB 2 1 Ba d 2 Field Applied Painting Where field painting of enclosures is required to correct damage to the manufacturer s factory applied coatings provide manufacturer s recommended coatings and apply in accordance with manufacturer s instructions 3 3 3 Galvanizing Repair Repair damage to galvanized coatings using ASTM A780 A780M zinc rich paint for galvanizing damaged by handling transporting cutting welding or bolting Do not heat surfaces that repair paint has been applied to 3 3 4 Field Fabricated Nameplate Mounting Provide number location and letter designation of nameplates as indicated Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet metal screws or two rivets 3 4 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES 3 4 1 Interior Location Mount switchboard on concrete slab Unless otherwise indicated the slab shall be at least 4 inches thick The top of the concrete slab shall be approximately 4 inches above finished floor Edges above floor shall have 1 2 inch chamfer The slab shall be of adequate size t
126. AND HANDLING LGL Mineral Aggregates Deliver mineral aggregates to the site and stockpile them in such a manner to preclude fracturing of aggregate particles segregation contamination or intermingling of different materials in the stockpiles or cold feed hoppers Before stockpiling material the storage areas should be cleared drained and leveled Deliver and store mineral filler in a manner to preclude exposure to moisture or other detrimental conditions 1 6 2 Bituminous Materials Submit certified copies of the bituminous material manufacturer s test reports indicating compliance with applicable specified requirements not less than 30 days before the material is required in the work Maintain bituminous materials at appropriate temperature during storage but do not heat them by application of direct flame to walls of storage tanks or transfer lines Thoroughly clean storage tanks transfer lines and weigh bucket before a different type or grade of bitumen is introduced into the system The asphalt cement shall be heated sufficiently to allow satisfactory pumping of the material however the storage temperature shall be maintained below 300 degrees F 17 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Construct bituminous courses only when the base course or existing pavement is dry and when the weather is not foggy or rainy Unless otherwise directed such courses shall not be constructed when the atmospheric temperature is below 60 degrees F
127. ARDS AND SWITCHGEAR Section 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM SECTION 26 00 00 00 20 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Section 33 71 02 00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 1 3 DEFINITIONS a Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE 100 b The technical sections referred to herein are those specification sections that describe products installation procedures and equipment operations and that refer to this section for detailed description of submittal types C The technical paragraphs referred to herein are those paragraphs in PART 2 PRODUCTS and PART 3 EXECUTION of the technical sections that describe products systems installation procedures equipment and test methods 1 4 ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS Electrical characteristics for this project shall be 13 8 kV primary three phase three wire 60 Hz and 208Y 120 volts secondary three phase four wire Final connections to the power distribution system at the existing pad mount trasformer location using the existing primary feeders shall be made by the Contractor 1 5 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTALS INFORMATION Submittals required in other sections that refer to this section must conform to the following additional requirements as applicable TeSa 1 Shop Drawings SD 02 Include wiring dia
128. ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM C143 C143M 2010 Standard Test Method for Slump of Hydraulic Cement Concrete ASTM C171 2007 Standard Specification for Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete ASTM C172 C172M 2010 Standard Practice for Sampling Freshly Mixed Concrete ASTM C173 C173M 2010b Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Volumetric Method ASTM C231 C231M 2010 Standard Test Method for Air Content of Freshly Mixed Concrete by the Pressure Method ASTM C309 2011 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete ASTM C31 C31M 2010 Standard Practice for Making and Curing Concrete Test Specimens in the Field ASTM C920 2011 Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants ASTM D 1751 2004 R 2008 Standard Specification for Preformed Expansion Joint Filler for Concrete Paving and Structural Construction Nonextruding and Resilient Bituminous Types ASTM D 1752 2004a R 2008 Standard Specification for Preformed Sponge Rubber Cork and Recycled PVC Expansion SECTION 32 16 13 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 ASTM D5893 D5893M 2010 Cold Applied Single Component Chemically Curing Silicone Joint Sealant for Portland Cement Concrete Pavements L2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1 2 1 General Requirements Provide plant equipment machines and tools used in the work subject to approval and maintained in a satisfactory working condition a
129. ATIONAL ELECTRICAL CONTRACTORS ASSOCIATION NECA NECA BICSI 568 2006 Standard for Installing Building Telecommunications Cabling NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA ANSI NEMA WC 66 2001 Errata 2003 Performance Standard for Category 6 and Category 7 100 Ohm Shielded and Unshielded Twisted Pairs NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2011 TIA 11 1 Errata 2011 National Electrical Code TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION TIA TIA J STD 607 2002a Commercial Building Grounding Earthing and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications TIA 1152 2009 Requirements for Field Test Instruments and Measurements for Balanced Twisted Pair Cabling TIA 455 21 1988a R 2002 FOTP 21 Mating SECTION 27 10 00 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Durability of Fiber Optic Interconnecting Devices TIA 568 C 0 2009 Add 1 2010 Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises TIA 568 C 1 2009 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard TIA 568 C 2 2009 Errata 2010 Balanced Twisted Pair Telecommunications Cabling and Components Standards TIA 568 C 3 2008 Corrections 2008 Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard TIA 569 2004b Add 1 2009 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces TIA EIA 604 3 2000b Fiber Optic Connector Intermateability Standard FOCIS Type SC and SC APC FOCIS 3 TIA EIA 606 2002a Errata 2007
130. ATS Test Values SD 07 Certificates Transformer Efficiencies G Submit certification including supporting calculations from the manufacturer indicating conformance with the paragraph entitled Specified Transformer Efficiencies SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 I SD 09 Manufacturer s Field Reports Pad mounted transformer design tests G Pad mounted transformerroutine and other tests G SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Transformer s Data Package 5 G Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein SD 11 Closeout Submittals Transformer test schedule G Submit report of test results as specified by paragraph entitled Field Quality Control 4 1 Government Submittal Review Code CIEE NAVFAC Mid Atlantic NE IPT Naval Facilities Engineering Command will review and approve all submittals in this section requiring Government approval 4 2 Reduced Submittal Requirements Transformers designed and manufactured by ABB in Jefferson City MO by Cooper Power Systems in Waukesha WI by ERMCO in Dyersburg TN or by Howard Industries in Laurel MS need not submit the entire submittal package requirements of this contract Instead the following items shall be submitted a A certification signed by the manufacturer stating that the technical requirements of this specification shall be met b An outline draw
131. After 15 minutes examine the plastic wrap for any visible moisture accumulation inside the plastic Do not begin marking operations until the test can be performed with no visible moisture accumulation inside the plastic wrap 3242 Rate of Application 3 422 201 Nonreflective Markings Apply paint evenly to the pavement surface to be coated at a rate of 105 plus or minus 5 square feet per gallon 3225 3 Painting Apply paint pneumatically with approved equipment at rate of coverage specified herein Provide guidelines and templates as necessary to control paint application Take special precautions in marking numbers letters and symbols Manually paint numbers letters and symbols Sharply outline all edges of markings The maximum drying time requirements of the paint specifications will be strictly enforced to prevent undue softening of bitumen and pickup displacement or discoloration by tires of traffic Discontinue painting operations if there is a deficiency in drying of the markings until cause of the slow drying is determined and corrected 3 2 4 Reflective Media Application of reflective media shall immediately follow the application of paint Accomplish drop on application of the glass spheres to ensure even distribution at the specified rate of coverage Should there be malfunction of either paint applicator or reflective media dispenser discontinue operations until deficiency is corrected SECTION 32 17 23
132. Be Coordinated With Refer to the following sections for related work and coordination Section 21 13 13 00 20 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM FIRE PROTECTION Section 23 00 00 AIR SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION VENTILATION AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS Section 14 21 23 ELECTRIC TRACTION PASSENGER ELEVATORS for additional work related to elevators Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING for additional work related to firestopping 2 1 3 Manufacturer Qualifications Components shall be of current design and shall be in regular and recurrent production at the time of installation Provide design materials and devices for a protected premises fire alarm system complete conforming to NFPA 72 except as otherwise or additionally specified herein 2 62 INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM DESIGN 2 2 1 Definitions Wherever mentioned in this specification or on the drawings the equipment devices and functions shall be defined as follows SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 T1277 a Analog Addressable System A system in which multiple signals are transmitted via the same conduction path to a remote fire alarm control unit and fire alarm control panel decoded and separated so that each signal will initiate the specified response b Hard Wired System A system in which alarm and supervisory initiating devices are directly connected through individual dedicated conductors to a central control panel without the use of analog addressable circuits or
133. ED CEILINGS eh Sol Wires ASTM A641 A641M galvanized regular coating soft temper 0 1055 inches in diameter 12 gage ESZ Rods Threaded steel rods 3 16 inch diameter zinc or cadmium coated 16 EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION 16 1 Manufacturer s Nameplate Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer s name address model number and serial number securely affixed ina conspicuous place the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable 16 2 Labels Provide labeled luminaires in accordance with UL 1598 requirements All luminaires shall be clearly marked for operation of specific lamps and ballasts according to proper lamp type The following lamp characteristics shall be noted in the format Use Only wx a Lamp diameter code T 4 T 5 T 8 T 12 tube configuration twin quad triple base type and nominal wattage for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires b Lamp type wattage bulb type ED17 BD56 etc and coating clear or coated for HID luminaires c Start type preheat rapid start instant start for fluorescent and compact fluorescent luminaires SECTION 26 51 00 Page 14 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 7A d ANSI ballast type M98 M57 etc for HID luminaires e Correlated color temperature CCT and color rendering index CRI for all luminaires All markings related to lamp type shall be clear and located to be readily visible to service per
134. ERGROUND STRUCTURES Fireproof arc proof wire and cables which will carry current at 2200 volts or more in underground structures SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 22 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3314 1 Fireproofing Tape Tightly wrap strips of fireproofing tape around each cable spirally in half lapped wrapping Install tape in accordance with manufacturer s instructions 3 14 2 Tape Wrap Tape wrap metallic sheathed or metallic armored cables without a nonmetallic protective covering over the sheath or armor prior to application of fireproofing Wrap shall be in the form of two tightly applied half lapped layers of a pressure sensitive 10 mil thick plastic tape and shall extend not less than one inch into the duct Even out irregularities of the cable such as at splices with insulation putty before applying tape 3 225 GROUNDING SYSTEMS Provide grounding system as indicated in accordance with NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 and as specified herein Noncurrent carrying metallic parts associated with electrical equipment shall have a maximum resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding the following values Pad mounted transformers without protective fences 5 ohms Ground in manholes 5 ohms Grounding other metal enclosures of primary voltage electrical and electrically operated equipment 5 ohms 3 15 1 Grounding Electrodes Provide cone pointed driven ground rods driven full depth plus 6 inches installed to provide an earth
135. FPA 90A and in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations 2 2 6 3 Smoke Sensor Testing Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with manufacturer s recommended calibrated test method Submit smoke sensor testing procedures for approval 252457 Electric Power Be Qe Tel Primary Power Provide primary power for the FACP from the normal AC service to the building from the existing FACP location Power shall be 120 VAC service transformed through a two winding isolation type transformer and rectified to low voltage DC for operation of circuits and devices Make the service connection for the FACP at the at the existing FACP location Provide appropriate equipment to protect against power surges Provide a separate NEMA 1 general purpose enclosure for the circuit breaker The circuit breaker enclosure shall be painted red marked FIRE ALARM SYSTEM provided with a red and white engraved plastic sign permanently affixed to the face of the switch and provided with a lockable handle or cover 2 2 8 Emergency Power Supply Provide for system operation in the event of primary power source failure Transfer from normal to auxiliary secondary power or restoration from auxiliary to normal power shall be automatic and shall not cause transmission of a false alarm 2255 8 Batteries Provide sealed maintenance free sealed lead acid batteries as the source for emergency power to the FACP Batteries shall contain suspended elec
136. Ground Impedance and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System IEEE C2 2012 National Electrical Safety Code SECTION 26 23 00 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 IEEE C57 12 28 2005 Standard for Pad Mounted Equipment Enclosure Integrity INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION NETA NETA ATS 2009 Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA ANSI NEMA PB 2 1 2007 General Instructions for Proper Handling Installation Operation and Maintenance of Deadfront Distribution Switchboards Rated 600 V or Less NEMA ICS 6 1993 R 2006 Enclosures NEMA LI 1 1998 Industrial Laminating Thermosetting Products NEMA PB 2 2006 Deadfront Distribution Switchboards NEMA ST 20 1992 R 1997 Standard for Dry Type Transformers for General Applications NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2011 TIA 11 1 Errata 2011 National Electrical Code UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL UL 467 2007 Grounding and Bonding Equipment UL 489 2009 Reprint Jun 2011 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Molded Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures UL 891 2005 Switchboards 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING applies to this section with the additions and modifications specified herein 1 3 DEFINITIONS a Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electr
137. IATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS AASHTO AASHTO M 82 1975 R 2008 Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt Medium Curing Type SECTION 32 01 13 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 AASHTO T 40 2002 R 2006 Sampling Bituminous Materials ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM C131 2006 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine ASTM C136 2006 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates ASTM C142 C142M 2010 Standard Test Method for Clay Lumps and Friable Particles in Aggregates ASTM C29 C29M 2009 Standard Test Method for Bulk Density Unit Weight and Voids in Aggregate ASTM D 140 D 140M 2009 Standard Practice for Sampling Bituminous Materials ASTM D 2397 2005 Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt ASTM D 2995 1999 R 2009 Determining Application Rate of Bituminous Distributors ASTM D 3625 1996 R 2005 Standard Practice for Effect of Water on Bituminous Coated Aggregate Using Boiling Water ASTM D 4791 2010 Flat Particles Elongated Particles or Flat and Elongated Particles in Coarse Aggregate ASTM D 633 1997 R 2005 Volume Correction Table for Road Tar ASTM D 75 D 75M 2009 Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates ASTM D 977 2005 Emulsified Asphalt U S FEDERAL HIGHWAY ADMINISTRATION FHWA MUTCD 2009 Manual of Uniform
138. IC 6363 Floor Distributor FD A distributor used to connect horizontal cable and cabling subsystems or equipment International expression for horizontal cross connect HC 3 4 Telecommunications Room TR An enclosed space for housing telecommunications equipment cable terminations and cross connects The room is the recognized cross connect between the backbone cable and the horizontal cabling 13 25 Entrance Facility EF Telecommunications An entrance to the building for both private and public network service cables including wireless including the entrance point at the building wall and continuing to the equipment room 3 6 Equipment Room ER Telecommunications An environmentally controlled centralized space for telecommunications equipment that serves the occupants of a building Equipment housed therein is considered distinct from a telecommunications room because of the nature of its complexity 3 7 Open Cable Cabling that is not run in a raceway as defined by NFPA 70 This refers to cabling that is open to the space in which the cable has been installed and is therefore exposed to the environmental conditions associated with that space 3 8 Open Office A floor space division provided by furniture moveable partitions or other means instead of by building walls 3 9 Pathway A physical infrastructure utilized for the placement and routing of telecommunications cable SECTION 27 10 00
139. LIST unit Govt Hardware CI Source Notes Org Card Reader Keypad me 1 per ingress lane Access Control System Server SEE NOTE 1 DB Server SEE PACS Database Server Transaction Cameras The ability to capture driver image and front and back car detail to include license plate Situation Awareness Cameras As required to monitor area o ECP and within ehicle traps B o Site specific interior gate is K4 rated Digital Video Recorder DVR qee PACS reader Arm H H w u 1 per ingress lane includes motors and control systems Vehicle Denial 1 per lane Barrier Vehicle Detectors Used for traffic control and safety H Ww HH w H wW Traffic Control Site specific Signals and Signs Gate Automation Advanced Traffic Control Located at Base Security Visitor Badging Workstation Office and or Pass amp ID SEE NOTE 1 H w D n Credential Data Input Reader Keypad At Base Security and or Pass amp ID locations on base to assist with database populating SEE NOTE 1 Intercom System w Camera 1 at the card reader per lane 1 in the vehicle trap per lane 1 master location TBD Network Routers System Interface to PSNI CAC Teslin NCACS Credentials Credentials for Active Civilian Retired Dependent Select Contractors If required
140. Microphone inputs shall be of the low impedance balanced line type Both microphone and tone generator input shall be operational on any amplifier SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 16 Submarine A School BQ 534 T1277 PEPA a ES Tone Generator The tone generator shall be of the modular plug in type with securely attached labels to identify the component as a tone generator and to identify the specific tone it produces The tone generator shall produce a slow whoop tone which shall slowly ascend from low 500 hertz to high 1200 hertz and shall be constantly repeated until interrupted by either the digitalized voice message the microphone input or the alarm silence mode as specified Each slow whoop cycle shall last approximately 4 seconds The tone generator shall be single channel with an automatic backup generator per channel such that failure of the primary tone generator causes the backup generator to automatically take over the functions of the failed unit and also causes transfer of the common trouble relay 2 025 Lie Protection Circuits Each amplifier shall be constantly supervised for any condition which could render the amplifier inoperable at its maximum output Failure of any component shall cause automatic transfer to a designated backup amplifier illumination of a visual amplifier trouble indicator on the control panel appropriate logging of the condition on the system printer and other actions for trouble conditions
141. Motor Compressors 1 2 DEFINITIONS Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE 100 te SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 02 Shop Drawings Panelboards G Transformers G Busway G Motor control centers G Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location layout and arrangement control panels accessories piping ductwork and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation maintenance and replacement of operating equipment devices Wireways G Marking strips drawings G SD 03 Product Data Receptacles G Circuit breakers G Switches G SECTION 26 20 00 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 L Tis Enclosed circuit breakers G Motor controllers G Manual motor starters G CATV outlets G Telecommunications Grounding Busbar Surge protective devices G Submittals shall include performance
142. N 5 1 1 Background Perimeter security and access control are important the AT FP Ashore posture at Navy installations around The automation of ECPs for perimeters and enclaves is investment in improving access control at Navy Installations The principal incentives for this investment are to reduce operating costs through manpower reductions and to improve security through improved identity management 5 1 2 System Operational Concept Recent advancements in the technology of automated gates and ID 1127117 t components of the world a primary card authentication will allow the U S Navy to remov from gates of convenience through the design provides the sam of an unmanned automated gate that security or greater than manned gates AVG L is designed for operation at low volu sentries and implementation level of This gate design titled me gates of convenience The basic design for the AVG L includes provisions for manning the gate during peak traffic hours 2 4 hours maximum per work day to facilitate traffic inflow outflow at At all other times and weekends holidays the AVG L will operate in the automated unmanned mode of operation rush hours for use at Naval Installation Main Gates Swe 2d Operational Modes It is not intended The AVG L shall have the ability to be configured and operated locally as w
143. ND THREE PHASE WYE CONNECTED SYSTEMS Each phase to neutral L N Neutral to ground N G Phase to ground L G Surge protective devices at the service entrance shall have a minimum surge current rating of 80 000 amperes per mode minimum The maximum line to neutral L N Suppressed Voltage Rating SVR shall be 500V for 208Y 120V three phase system The minimum MCOV Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage rating shall be 300 150V for 208Y 120V three phase system EMI RFI filtering shall be provided for each mode with the capability to attenuate high frequency noise Minimum attenuation shall be 20db 2 27 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH Electrical equipment shall have factory applied painting systems which shall as a minimum meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion resistance test and the additional requirements as specified herein Interior and exterior steel surfaces of equipment enclosures shall be thoroughly cleaned and then receive a rust inhibitive phosphatizing or equivalent treatment prior to painting Exterior surfaces shall be free from holes seams dents weld marks loose scale or other imperfections Interior surfaces shall receive not less than one coat of corrosion resisting paint in accordance with the manufacturer s standard practice Exterior surfaces shall be primed filled where necessary and given not less than two coats baked enamel with semigloss finish Equipment located indoors shall be ANSI Light Gray
144. NTRANCE FLOOR MATS CONVEYING EQUIPMENT ELECTRIC TRACTION PASSENGER ELEVATORS FIRE SUPPRESSION 20 WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEM FIRE PROTECTION PLUMBING PLUMBING GENERAL PURPOSE CURED IN PLACE PIPE CIPP LINING PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION SUMP PUMPS PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 DIVISION 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 23 00 03 05 05 07 08 09 09 11 23 81 00 00 15 93 00 00 23 53 25 00 28 00 00 13 00 10 DIVISION 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 26 00 08 12 20 23 27 29 41 51 00 00 TO 00 00 14 23 00 00 DIVISION 27 10 00 00 10 00 00 27 DIVISION 28 28 31 63 DIVISION 31 00 00 31 05 22 DIVISION 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 32 01 01 01 12 T2 12 16 17 92 T3 16 L73 10 17 19 13 23 19 DIVISION 33 33 33 33 12 40 51 71 33 3 00 13 00 02 00 31 32 17 16 00 33 00 00 00 HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING AIR SUPPLY DISTRIBUTION VENTILATION AND EXHAUST SYSTEMS 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS COMMON PIPING FOR HVAC TESTING ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC THERMAL INSULATION FOR MECHANICAL SYSTEMS 10 COMMISSIONING OF HVAC SYSTEMS 20 BACnet DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR HVAC 20 SPACE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS FACILITY GAS PIPING REFRIGERANT PIPING
145. No 6 AWG Ground other noncurrent carrying metal parts and equipment frames of metal enclosed equipment Ground metallic frames and covers of handholes and pull boxes with a braided copper ground strap with equivalent ampacity of No 6 AWG Provide direct connections to the grounding conductor with 600 v insulated full size conductor for each grounded neutral of each feeder circuit which is spliced within the manhole 3 15 4 Ground Cable Crossing Expansion Joints Protect ground cables crossing expansion joints or similar separations in structures and pavements by use of approved devices or methods of installation which provide the necessary slack in the cable across the joint to permit movement Use stranded or other approved flexible copper cable across such separations 33 L525 Manhole Grounding Loop a 4 0 AWG grounding conductor around the interior perimeter approximately 12 inches above finished floor Secure the conductor to the manhole walls at intervals not exceeding 36 inches Connect the conductor to the manhole grounding electrode with 4 0 AWG conductor Connect all incoming 4 0 grounding conductors to the ground loop adjacent to the point of entry into the manhole Bond the ground loop to all cable shields metal cable racks and other metal equipment with a minimum 6 AWG conductor 3 16 EXCAVATING BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING Provide in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 31 23 00 00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL31 00 00 EARTH
146. OLTAGE CABLE TERMINATIONS Make terminations in accordance with the written instruction of the termination kit manufacturer 3 12 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE JOINTS Provide power cable joints splices suitable for continuous immersion in water Make joints only in accessible locations in manholes or handholes by using materials and methods in accordance with the written instructions of the joint kit manufacturer S c1D 21 Joints in Shielded Cables Cover the joined area with metallic tape or material like the original cable shield and connect it to the cable shield on each side of the splice Provide a bare copper ground connection brought out ina watertight manner and grounded to the manhole grounding loop as part of the splice installation Ground conductors connections and rods shall be as specified elsewhere in this section Wire shall be trained to the sides of the enclosure to prevent interference with the working area 32503 CABLE END CAPS Cable ends shall be sealed at all times with coated heat shrinkable end caps Cables ends shall be sealed when the cable is delivered to the job site while the cable is stored and during installation of the cable The caps shall remain in place until the cable is spliced or terminated Sealing compounds and tape are not acceptable substitutes for heat shrinkable end caps Cable which is not sealed in the specified manner at all times will be rejected 3 14 FIREPROOFING OF CABLES IN UND
147. ON ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2011 TIA 11 1 Errata 2011 National Electrical Code U S DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE DOD MIL STD 461 2007 Rev F Requirements for the Control of Electromagnetic Interference Characteristics of Subsystems and Equipment SECTION 26 29 23 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 U S NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION NARA 47 CFR 15 Radio Frequency Devices UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL UL 489 2009 Reprint Jun 2011 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Molded Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures UL 508C 2002 Reprint Nov 2010 Power Conversion Equipment 1 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 26 00 00 00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM apply to this section with additions and modifications specified herein 13 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1364 Performance Requirements 13 21 Electromagnetic Interference Suppression Computing devices as defined by 47 CFR 15 MIL STD 461 rules and regulations shall be certified to comply with the requirements for class A computing devices and labeled as set forth in part 15 1 35 0 2 Electromechanical and Electrical Components Electrical and electromechanical components of the Variable Frequency Drive VFD shall not cause electromagnetic interference to adjacent electrical or electromechanical equipment while in operation 1 3 2 Electrical Requirements 153 24 Power Line Surge Protection IEEE C62 4
148. ONUS Network that connects AVG L components for projects in non US territories OCONUS Site Specific Asphalt or concrete apron and curb modifications Site Specific Site Specific Site Specific To meet system environmental requirements other ECPs ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 5l Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 End of Section SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 52
149. Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 T 4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION The building telecommunications cabling and pathway system shall include permanently installed backbone and horizontal cabling horizontal and backbone pathways service entrance facilities work area pathways telecommunications outlet assemblies conduit raceway and hardware for splicing terminating and interconnecting cabling necessary to transport telephone and data including LAN between equipment items in a building The horizontal system shall be wired in a star topology from the telecommunications work area to the floor distributor or campus distributor at the center or hub of the star The backbone cabling and pathway system includes intrabuilding and interbuilding interconnecting cabling pathway and terminal hardware The intrabuilding backbone provides connectivity from the floor distributors to the building distributors or to the campus distributor and from the building distributors to the campus distributor as required The backbone system shall be wired in a star topology with the campus distributor at the center or hub of the star Provide telecommunications pathway systems referenced herein as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 5 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval The following shall be submitte
150. Parameters Performance parameters are used to determine how well a system or capability is meeting the expectations of the Community of Interest COI The minimum confidence level for parameter verification shall be at the 80th percentile unless otherwise specified 5 4 2 Key System Attributes KSA Key System Attributes KSA are another subset of the performance parameters of a system or capability KSAS are a prioritized list of the most important attributes that characterize the desired system or capability Most KSAs are assigned by CNIC through the annual publication of the Ashore Installation Force Protection Program Execution Guidance Other parameters and attributes are derived from other technical sources All AVG L systems shall comply with the KSAs listed in Table 1 Table 1 CNIC Approved AVG L Performance Parameters Key System Attribute KSA Threshold AVG L shall satisfy the DoD mandated Net ready KPP Probability of Detection of unauthorized personnel attempting to 3o Restricted Area Vehicle Pd2 0 95 Operational Availability A A 2 0 90 o Accurately Validate Credential Rate AVCR gt Limit read time to lt 5 seconds AVER ed Mean Time To Repair MTTR MTTR lt 90 min MTBM 2 500 hrs operating time Time to update local database after local Within Installation data entry T lt 7 seconds Shall be able to d
151. Pressure tests shall be performed at a pressure of 10 pounds per square inch psi for 24 hours Cement or corrugated metal pipes joined straight shall withstand 10 psi for 24 hours without failure When test is completed test sections shall be angled and retested at 10 psi for an additional 24 hours Ca oe ee Low Pressure Air Test of Conduit Acceptance tests for installed ferrous and plastic piping shall be in accordance with ASTM F 1417 End of Section SECTION 33 40 00 00 40 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 33 51 13 00 30 NATURAL GAS METERING 05 10 PART 1 GENERAL ae 1 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 23 03 00 00 20 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to this section with additions and modifications specified herein 52 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only AMERICAN GAS ASSOCIATION AGA AGA ANSI B109 1 2000 Diaphragm Type Gas Displacement Meters Under 500 cubic ft hour Capacity AMERICAN SOCIETY OF CIVIL ENGINEERS ASCE ASCE 25 06 2008 Earthquake Activated Automatic Gas Shutoff Devices ASME INTERNATIONAL ASME ASME B1 1 2003 R 2008 Unified Inch Screw Threads UN and UNR Thread Form ASME B1 20 1 1983 R 2006 Pipe Threads General Purpose Inch ASME B16 11 2009 Forged Fittings Socket Welding and Threaded ASME
152. Qi 3ie1 Cast Iron Soil Pipe CISP and Fittings Pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with ASTM A 74 service weight with bell and spigot ends Diss Cast Iron Soil Pipe Joints Joints shall be in accordance with AWWA C111 A21 11 push on type Gaskets shall be in accordance with ASTM C 564 neoprene type 2 3 3 Ductile Iron Pipe and Fittings Pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM A 746 Fittings shall be in accordance with AWWA C110 A21 10 for 3 to 48 inch 2 3 4 Ductile Iron Pipe Joints Joints shall be in accordance with AWWA C111 A21 11 push on type Gaskets shall be in accordance with ASTM C 564 neoprene type SECTION 33 40 00 00 40 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 325 Plastic Piping Seed LiL Acrylonitrile Butadene Styrene ABS Composite Pipe Pipe and fittings shall be in accordance with ASTM D 2680 s352 ABS Composite Pipe Joints Solvent cement and primer shall be in accordance with ASTM D 2680 Se oes Type PSM Poly Vinyl Chloride PVC Pipe Pipe shall be in accordance with ASTM D 3034 SDR 35 up to 15 inch diameter Pipe ends made for joints shall be solvent cement type 236564 PVC Pipe Joints Joints shall be in accordance with ASTM D 3212 push on type Solvent cement shall be in accordance with ASTM D 2855 PART 3 EXECUTION 3 sl EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL Excavation backfill and removal of unsatisfactory materials shall be in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK 2 GRADING G
153. R Shore Installation Process Handbook version 3 0 COMSPAWAR M 3090 2A 06 01 2009 FRCB Handbook 4 4 INDUSTRY STANDARDS NUMBER DATE H ITLE NFPA 70 20 ational Electrical Code ttp www nfpa org NFPA TOE 2009 lectrical Safety in the Workplace NFPA 730 2011 uide for Premises Security NFPA 731 2011 tandard for the Installation of lectronic Premises Security Systems H JQS Z ASIS FPSM 2009 Facilities Physical Security Measures Guideline http www asisonline org quidelin es published htm RaCM 1 0 1 18 2 oO Recording and Content Management Specification Version 1 la http www psialliance org index h tml ASTM F2656 07 2007 American Society for Testing and Measurement ASTM Standard Test Method for Vehicle Crash Testing of Perimeter Barriers http www astm org standards F265 6 htm 108 FHWA HRT 06 October 2006 United States Department of Transportation US DoT Federal Highway Administration Traffic Detector Handbook 3 Edition MUTCI 2009 United States Department of Transportation US DoT Federal Highway Administration Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices MUTCD http mutcd fhwa dot gov kno_200 htm WO Book AASHTO Green 2004 A
154. S 835 3100 Aerobic SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Aquatic Biodegradation EPA 821 R 02 012 2002 Methods for Measuring the Acute Toxicity of Effluents and Receiving Waters to Freshwater and Marine Organisms U S NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION NARA 10 CFR 431 Energy Efficiency Program for Certain Commercial and Industrial Equipment UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL UL 467 2007 Grounding and Bonding Equipment ilis 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING applies to this section with the additions and modifications specified herein L3 DEFINITIONS Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE 100 1 4 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 02 Shop Drawings Pad mounted transformer drawings G SD 03 Product Data Pad mounted transformers G Submittal shall include manufacturer s information for each component device insulating fluid and accessory provided with the transformer SD 06 Test Reports Acceptance checks and tests G Submittal shall include acceptance criteria and limits for each test in accordance with NETA
155. SOLID POLYMER SOLID SURFACING FABRICATIONS THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION PROJECT TABLE OF CONTENTS Page 1 07 21 23 07 22 00 07 52 00 07 60 00 07 81 00 07 84 00 07 92 00 DIVISION 08 11 13 08 14 00 08 41 13 08 51 13 08 71 00 08 81 00 08 91 00 DIVISION 09 22 00 09 29 00 09 30 00 09 51 00 09 65 00 09 66 23 09 67 23 09 68 00 09 72 00 09 90 00 DIVISION 10 14 02 10 21 13 10 26 13 10 28 13 10 44 16 DIVISION 12 24 13 12 48 13 DIVISION 14 21 23 DIVISION 21 13 13 DIVISION 22 00 00 22 05 83 22 07 19 22 14 29 08 09 00 13 10 12 13 14 21 00 22 63 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 LOOSE FILL THERMAL INSULATION ROOF AND DECK INSULATION MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING FLASHING AND SHEET METAL SPRAY APPLIED FIREPROOFING FIRESTOPPING JOINT SEALANTS OPENINGS STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES WOOD DOORS ALUMINUM FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS ALUMINUM WINDOWS DOOR HARDWARE GLAZING METAL WALL AND DOOR LOUVERS FINISHES SUPPORTS FOR PLASTER AND GYPSUM BOARD GYPSUM BOARD CERAMIC TILE QUARRY TILE AND PAVER TILE ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS RESILIENT FLOORING 22 RESINOUS EPOXY TERRAZZO FLOORING STANDARD RESINOUS FLOORING CARPET WALL COVERINGS PAINTS AND COATINGS SPECIALTIES INTERIOR SIGNAGE TOILET AND SHOWER COMPARTMENTS WALL AND CORNER GUARDS TOILET ACCESSORIES FIRE EXTINGUISHERS FURNISHINGS ROLLER WINDOW SHADES E
156. ST Navy Shore Installation Emergency 3440 17 Management Program Manual DoDI 6055 1 01 13 2 DoD Installation Emergency 009 Management IEM Program NAVNETWARCOMI Policy and Procedures for the NST 12271 1 Fleet Readiness Certification Board FRCB Process OPNAVINST 07 19 2 Electromagnetic Environmental 2400 20F 007 Effects E3 and Spectrum Supportability Policy and Procedures OPNAVINST Operational Availability Handbook 3000 12A OPNAVINST 12 10 1 Navy Physical Security 5530 14C 998 OPNAVINST Navy Physical Security and Law 5530 14E Enforcement Manual SECNAVINST 11 2006 DON use of commercial Wireless 207981 Local Area Network WLAN devices services and Technologies SECNAVINST 10 06 2 DoN Personnel Security Program 5510 30 006 SECNAVINST 10 06 2 DoN Information Security Program 5510 36A 006 SECNAVINST DON Privacy Program 52 1 1 3 DF SECNAVINST 01 18 2 DoN Information Assurance Policy 5239 3A 008 4 3 2 DON Manuals NUMBER DATE TITLE SECNAV M DON Information Assurance Program 5239 1 SECNAV M DON Personnel Security Program 5510 30 SECNAV M DON Information Security Program 5510 36 4 3 3 Other DoN Handbooks Manuals and References NUMBER DATE TITLE N A MM ICD Test and Certification http doni daps dla mil default aspx 10 http doni daps dla mil default aspx S ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 13 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Plan SIPH ver 3 0 10 20 2009 SPAWA
157. STM C183 for mineral filler and AASHTO T 40 or ASTM D 140 D 140M for bituminous material 2 3 3 Initial Sampling and Testing 2 34327 Source of Aggregates Sources from which aggregates are to be obtained shall be selected and notification thereof furnished the Contracting Officer within 15 days of the award of the contract Tests for the evaluation of aggregates shall be made by an approved commercial laboratory at no expense to the Government Tests for determining the suitability of aggregate shall include but not limited to gradation in accordance with ASTM C136 abrasion resistance in accordance with ASTM C131 and soundness in accordance with ASTM C88 SECTION 32 12 19 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Did ice Source of Bituminous Materials Sources from which bituminous materials are to be obtained shall be selected and notification thereof furnished the Contracting Officer within 15 days after the award of the contract PART 3 EXECUTION Fel SURFACE PREPARATION FaLa Base Course Clean the surface of the base course of loose and foreign material Correct ruts or soft yielding spots areas having inadequate compaction and deviations of surface from requirements specified for the base course by loosening affected areas removing unsatisfactory material adding approved material where required reshaping and recompacting to line and grade to specified density requirements Spray the surface with bituminous material c
158. School BQ 534 1127117 TABLE 1 MINIMUM PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DRAINAGE GEOTEXTILE DEGRADATION Percent 50 AT 500 Hrs 50 AT 500 Hrs ASTM D 4355 2 1 1 2 Geotextile Fiber Fibers used in the manufacturing of the geotextile shall consist of a long chain synthetic polymer composed of at least 85 percent by weight of polyolefins polyesters or polamides Stabilizers and or inhibitors shall be added to the base polymer if necessary to make the filaments resistant to deterioration caused by ultraviolet light and heat exposure Reclaimed or recycled fibers or polymer shall not be added to the formulation Geotextile shall be formed into a network such that the filaments or yarns retain dimensional stability relative to each other including the edges The edges of the geotextile shall be finished to prevent the outer fiber from pulling away from the geotextile 2 1 2 Seams The seams of the geotextile shall be sewn with thread of a material meeting the chemical requirements given above for geotextile yarn or shall be bonded by cementing or by heat The sheets of geotextile shall be attached at the factory or another approved location if necessary to form sections not less than 10 feet wide Seams shall be tested in accordance with method ASTM D 4884 The strength of the seam shall be not less than 90 percent of the required grab tensile strength of the unaged geotextile in any principal direction 2 1 3 Securing Pins The geotextile sha
159. School BQ 534 1127117 al Spear eee Description Zod nd interfaces at a TRL of greater than 3 he AVG L system design shall primarily r equal to 8 he AVG L design shall be modular and scalable to facilitate reconfigurations o accommodate the possible expansion of he system a underground conduits and aceways shall include a second uplicate pathway E consist of integrated Commercial Off the Shelf COTS Non Developmental Items NDI or Government furnished components based on commercial standards a o T m oO he second duplicate pathway shall be nused and have a pull string installed to allow for future growth All dedicated electrical and communications circuits shall be sized to allow for 100 percent growth The AVG L implementation shall integrate with existing government networks PACS CCTV subsystems and components when directed by the PWS AVG L ECPs shal outbound lanes Each lane shall have a vehicle trap consisting of a series of gate openings nd closings that only allows the ntended vehicle and it s passengers ccess a i a The ECP shall be able of processing no less than 60 vehicles per hour with 90 vehicles per hour being the objective T d he drop arm shall have the attribute escribed in section 3 2 2 2 The containment gate shall have the attributes described in section 3 2 2 2 he final denial barrier shall ttributes des
160. School BQ 534 VT 7A serrated surface Remove loose disintegrated rock and thin strata Do not disturb the bottom of the excavation when concrete or masonry is to be placed in an excavated area Do not excavate to the final grade level until just before the concrete or masonry is to be placed Where pile foundations are to be used stop the excavation of each pit at an elevation 1 foot above the base of the footing as specified before piles are driven After the pile driving has been completed remove loose and displaced material and complete excavation leaving a smooth solid undisturbed surface to receive the concrete or masonry 3 1 2 Drainage Provide for the collection and disposal of surface and subsurface water encountered during construction Completely drain construction site during periods of construction to keep soil materials sufficiently dry When unsuitable working platforms for equipment operation and unsuitable soil support for subsequent construction features develop remove unsuitable material and provide new soil material as specified herein It is the responsibility of the Contractor to assess the soil and ground water conditions presented by the plans and specifications and to employ necessary measures to permit construction to proceed 33143 Trench Excavation Requirements Excavate the trench as recommended by the manufacturer of the pipe to be installed Slope trench walls below the top of the pipe or make vert
161. T 8 U shaped fluorescent lamp 31 watts maximum 2600 initial lumens minimum 3500 K 75 CRI minimum 20 000 hours average rated life 1 625 inch leg spacing Compact fluorescent lamps shall be CRI 80 minimum 3500 K 10 000 hours average rated life and as follows 1 T 4 twin tube rated as indicated 2 T 4 double twin tube rated 13 watts 900 initial lumens minimum and 26 watts 1800 initial lumens minimum as indicated Average rated life is based on 3 hours operating per start eek Compact Fluorescent Fixtures Compact fluorescent fixtures shall be manufactured specifically for compact fluorescent lamps with ballasts integral to the fixture Providing assemblies designed to retrofit incandescent fixtures is prohibited except when specifically indicated for renovation of existing fixtures Fixtures shall use lamps as indicated with a minimum CRI of 80 SECTION 26 51 00 Page 9 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Dodoo Bare Bulb Retrofits Replace 40 watt incandescent bulbs 495 lumens with 11 to 14 watt compact fluorescent bulbs 45 lumens per watt Replace 60 watt incandescent bulbs 900 lumens with 15 to 19 watt compact fluorescent bulbs 60 lumens per watt Replace 75 watt incandescent bulbs 1200 lumens with 20 to 25 watt compact fluorescent bulbs 60 lumens per watt Replace 100 watt incandescent bulbs 1750 lumens with 29 watt or greater compact fluorescent bulbs 60 lumens per wa
162. TION 32 92 19 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 PART 3 EXECUTION Seah PREPARATION 36 1 EXTENT OF WORK Provide soil preparation including soil conditioners as required fertilizing seeding and surface topdressing of all newly graded finished earth surfaces unless indicated otherwise and at all areas inside or outside the limits of construction that are disturbed by the Contractor s operations Soden Topsoil Provide 4 inches of off site topsoil to meet indicated finish grade After areas have been brought to indicated finish grade incorporate fertilizer into soil a minimum depth of 4 inches by disking harrowing tilling or other method approved by the Contracting Officer Remove debris and stones larger than 3 4 inch in any dimension remaining on the surface after finish grading Correct irregularities in finish surfaces to eliminate depressions Protect finished topsoil areas from damage by vehicular or pedestrian traffic 3 10152 Fertilizer Application Rates Apply fertilizer at rates as determined by laboratory soil analysis of the soils at the job site For bidding purposes only apply at rates for the following Synthetic Fertilizer pounds per acre pounds per 1000 square feet Hydroseeding Fertilizer pounds per acre pounds per 1000 square feet 3 2 SEEDING 3 5251 Seed Application Seasons and Conditions Immediately before seeding restore soil to proper grade Do not seed when
163. Traffic Control Devices STATE OF CONNECTICUT DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION Les SYSTEM DESCRIPTION kessi Equipment Plant and Tools Equipment plant and tools used in the work are subject to approval and shall be maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times Provide equipment which is adequate and has the capability of producing the SECTION 32 01 13 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 T1277 results specified Provide calibrated equipment such as asphalt distributors scales batching equipment spreaders and similar equipment that has been recalibrated by an approved calibration laboratory within 12 months prior to commencing work Submit an equipment list with calibration reports 123 2 Bituminous Distributors Provide distributors that have pneumatic tires of sufficient size and number to prevent rutting shoving or otherwise damaging any part of the pavement structure Design and equip the distributor to distribute the bituminous material in a uniform double or triple lap at the specified temperature at readily determined and controlled rates from 0 05 to 2 0 gallons square yard with a pressure range of 25 to 75 psi with an allowable variation from the specified rate of not more than plus or minus 5 percent and at variable widths Include in the distributor equipment a separate power unit for the bitumen pump full circulation spray bars tachometer pressure gauges volume measuring devices adequate heaters for heati
164. UTION 3 ak INSTALLATION OF FIRE ALARM INITIATING AND INDICATING DEVICES a FACP Locate the FACP where indicated on the drawings Surface mount the enclosure with the top of the cabinet 6 feet above the finished floor or center the cabinet at 5 feet whichever is lower Conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors their labels their circuits and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the FACP SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 19 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 b Manual Stations Locate manual stations as required by NFPA 101 and NFPA 72 and where shown on the drawings Mount stations so that their operating handles are 4 feet above the finished floor Mount stations so they are located no farther than 5 feet from the exit door they serve measured horizontally c Notification Appliance Devices Locate notification appliance devices as required by NFPA 72 and where shown on the drawings Mount assemblies on walls 80 inches above the finished floor or 6 inches below the ceiling whichever is lower Ceiling mounted speakers shall conform to NFPA 72 d Smoke Sensors Locate sensors as required by NFPA 72 and their listings and as shown on the drawings on a 4 inch mounting box Sensors located on the ceiling shall be installed not less than 4 inches from a side wall to the near edge Those located on the wall shall have the top of the sensor at least 4 inches below the ceiling but not more
165. WORK 3 16 1 Reconditioning of Surfaces 36d Unpaved Surfaces Restore to their original elevation and condition unpaved surfaces disturbed during installation of duct Preserve sod and topsoil removed during excavation and reinstall after backfilling is completed Replace sod that is damaged by sod of quality equal to that removed When the surface is disturbed in a newly seeded area re seed the restored surface with the same quantity and formula of seed as that used in the original seeding and provide topsoiling fertilizing liming seeding sodding sprigging or mulching Provide work in accordance with Section 32 92 19 SEEDING and Section 32 93 00 EXTERIOR PLANTS 3 16 1 2 Paving Repairs Where trenches pits or other excavations are made in existing roadways and other areas of pavement where surface treatment of any kind exists restore such surface treatment or pavement the same thickness and in the same kind as previously existed except as otherwise specified and to match and tie into the adjacent and surrounding existing surfaces SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 24 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Sy L7 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE Provide concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE Fe ge ee Concrete Slabs for Equipment Unless otherwise indicated the slab shall be at least 8 inches thick reinforced with a 6 by 6 W2 9 by W2 9 mesh placed uniformly 4 inches from the top of the slab S
166. a Reflective media for roads and streets Paints for roads and streets High Build Acrylic Coating HBAC G Thermoplastic compound Raised Pavement Markers and Adhesive Equipment G Lists of proposed equipment including descriptive data and notifications of proposed Contractor actions as specified in this section List of removal equipment shall include descriptive data indicating area of coverage per pass pressure adjustment range SECTION 32 17 23 00 20 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 T tank and flow capacities and safety precautions required for the equipment operation Qualifications Documentation on personnel qualifications as specified SD 06 Test Reports Reflective media for roads and streets Paints for roads and streets High Build Acrylic Coating HBAC G Thermoplastic compound Raised Pavement Markers and Adhesive Certified reports from sampling and testing made in accordance with paragraph entitled Sampling and Testing prior to the use of the materials at the jobsite Testing shall be performed in an approved independent laboratory SD 07 Certificates Reflective media for roads and streets Paints for roads and streets Volatile Organic Compound VOC Certificate stating that the proposed pavement marking paint meets the VOC regulations of the local Air Pollution Control District having jurisdiction over the geographical area in which the project is located Thermoplastic compound C
167. acts Default initial configuration unless identified otherwise by base personnel shall be First channel kWh Second channel kVARh KYZ output 1 kWh KYZ output 2 kVARhH Ye ww wH 1 2 3 4 All meters shall have identical features available in accordance with this specification The meter schedule identifies which features shall be activated at each meter location Enable switches for Time of Use TOU pulse and load profile measurement module at the factory Meter shall have an optical port on front of meter capable of speeds from 9600 to a minimum of 19 2k baud and shall be initially set at 9600 baud Optical device shall be compatible with ANSI C12 18 Meters shall be 120 480 volts auto ranging Provide blank tag fixed to the meter faceplate for the addition of the meter multiplier which will be the product of the current transformer ratio and will be filled in by base personnel on the job site The meter s nameplate shall include SECTION 26 27 14 00 20 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Meter ID number Rated voltage Current class Metering form Test amperes Frequency Catalog number Manufacturing date ANAHRAUAWNE p On switchboard style installations provide switchboard case with disconnect means for meter removal incorporating short circuiting of current transformer circuits q Meter covers shall be polycarbonate resins with an optical port and reset Backup battery shall be ea
168. age ACCESS DENIED Please Exit 52d 43 Invalid ID card access is denied Event Sequence 1 Vehicle enters Credential Zone 2 Vehicle presence is detected via vehicle presence sensor 3 Access pedestal displays and annunciates message Present I D Card 4 Driver presents authorized I D card to Reader 5 System determines that the I D card is not valid 6 Access pedestal displays message ACCESS DENIED TRY AGAIN Vehicle trap Gate remains closed 7 The user will be allowed 3 attempts in total or an elapsed time not to exceed 12 seconds 8 On the 3 failed attempt the access pedestal displays message ACCESS DENIED Please Exit Vehicle trap Gate remains closed 5 1 2 1 4 4 Gate Crash Event Sequence 1 Vehicle enters Credential Zone 2 Vehicle presence is detected via vehicle presence sensor 3 Access pedestal displays and annunciates message Present I D Card 4 Vehicle proceeds through vehicle presence sensor without presenting a credential and crashes through drop arm 5 Alarm is generated and Security notified 6 Security must assess and rectify Side 2elede5 Vehicle A valid Tailgated by Vehicle B invalid Event Sequence 1 Vehicle enters Credential Zone 2 Access pedestal displays and annunciates message Please wait 3 Vehicle presence is detected via vehicle presence sensor 4 Access pedestal displays and annunciates message Present I D Card SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 18 Submar
169. aggregate SECTION 32 12 17 Page 9 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 ea 2 Adjustments to JMF The JMF for each mixture shall be in effect until a new formula is approved in writing by the Contracting Officer Should a change in sources of any materials be made a new mix design shall be performed and a new JMF approved before the new material is used The Contractor will be allowed to adjust the JMF within the limits specified below to optimize mix volumetric properties Adjustments to the JMF shall be limited to plus or minus 3 percent on the 1 2 inch No 4 and No 8 sieves plus or minus 1 0 percent on the No 200 sieve and plus or minus 0 40 percent binder content If adjustments are needed that exceed these limits a new mix design shall be developed Tolerances given above may permit the aggregate grading to be outside the limits shown in Table I this is acceptable 4 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL Employ a commercial laboratory approved by the Contracting Officer to perform testing The laboratory used to develop the JMF and the laboratory used to perform all sampling and testing shall meet the requirements of ASTM D 3666 A certification signed by the manager of the laboratory stating that it meets these requirements or clearly listing all deficiencies shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer prior to the start of construction The certification shall contain as a minimum a Qualifications of personnel laboratory manag
170. aim to any classification or volume of material to be paid for other than that allowed by the Contracting Officer for the areas of work in which such deposits occur 26 43 BLASTING Blasting will not be permitted al CRITERIA FOR BIDDING Base bids on the following criteria a Surface elevations are as indicated SECTION 31 00 00 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 abe b Pipes or other artificial obstructions except those indicated will not be encountered c Ground water elevations indicated by the boring log were those existing at the time subsurface investigations were made and do not necessarily represent ground water elevation at the time of construction d Hard materials and rock will be encountered in 30 percent of the excavations at 2 feet below existing surface elevations 8 DEWATERING WORK PLAN Submit procedures for accomplishing dewatering work PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 Pant DETECTION WIRE FOR NON METALLIC PIPING Insulate a single strand solid copper detection wire with a minimum of 12 AWG 2 MATERIAL FOR RIP RAP 2 1 Bedding Material Provide bedding material consisting of sand gravel or crushed rock well graded or poorly graded with a maximum particle size of 2 inch Compose material of tough durable particles PART 3 EXECUTION 3 si GENERAL EXCAVATION Perform excavation of every type of material encountered within the limits of the project to the lines grades and el
171. al bus shall be rated 100 percent of the main bus continuous current rating Phase bus bars shall be insulated with an epoxy finish coating powder providing a minimum breakdown voltage of 16 000 volts per ASTM D 149 E223 Main Section The main section shall consist of an individually mounted molded case circuit breaker 2 2 4 Distribution Sections The distribution section shall consist of molded case circuit breakers as indicated 222 aS Combination Sections Combination sections shall consist of molded case circuit breakers for the branch devices as indicated 2 2 6 Handles Handles for individually mounted devices shall be of the same design and method of external operation Label handles prominently to indicate device ampere rating color coded for device type Identify ON OFF indication by SECTION 26 23 00 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 T1277 handle position and by prominent marking 2 2 3 Protective Device Provide main and branch protective devices as indicated Ds Qi Brad Molded Case Circuit Breaker UL 489 UL listed and labeled 100 percent rated stationary 120 Vac low voltage molded case circuit breaker with a short circuit current rating of as indicated at 208 volts Breaker frame size shall be as indicated Series rated circuit breakers are unacceptable 2 2 4 Electronic Trip Units Equip main and distribution breakers as indicated with a solid state tripping system consisting of three current
172. al cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment Lat Cabling Install UTP telecommunications cabling system as detailed in TIA 568 C 1 TIA 568 C 2 TIA 568 C 3 Screw terminals shall not be used except where specifically indicated on plans Use an approved insulation displacement connection IDC tool kit for copper cable terminations Do not exceed manufacturers cable pull tensions for copper and optical fiber cables Provide a device to monitor cable pull tensions Do not exceed 25 pounds pull tension for four pair copper cables Do not chafe or damage outer jacket materials Use only lubricants approved by cable manufacturer Do not over cinch cables or crush cables with staples For UTP cable bend radii shall not be less than four times the cable diameter Cables shall be terminated no cable shall contain unterminated elements Cables shall not be spliced Label cabling in accordance with paragraph LABELING in this section Pay ore eres Backbone Cable a Copper Backbone Cable Install intrabuilding backbone copper cable in indicated pathways between the campus distributor located in the telecommunications entrance facility or room the building distributors and the floor distributors located in telecommunications rooms and telecommunications equipment rooms as indicated on drawings b Optical fiber Backbone Cable Install intrabuilding backbone optical fiber in i
173. al coordination Federal State and local codes usage pattern analysis and installation specific requirements SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 33 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 5 3 6 Government Furnished Equipment GFE to be incorporated in the AVG L design is annotated in Appendix 1 of this specification The government understands that each system insta to the basic design and encourages re use of any pre existing llation will require site specific modifications systems and components identified during the pre proposal site survey The design package contr actor shall annotate all GFE in the installation 5 3 7 System Security System components and software shall be protected through physical network and software security measures They shall have All E Al of DoD Any wir with Do FIPS 14 the following attributes exterior components and cables shall be enclosed in a tamper resis less tant housing or conduit approved by the National lectrical Manufacturer s Association NEMA information systems shall comply with the requirements Directive 8500 1E devices used in the AVG L design shall comply Q 2 s D Directive 8100 2 and the encryption standards in op ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 34 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 5 4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE 5 4 1 Performance
174. all be transmitted by magnetic couplings Measuring Chambers The measuring chambers shall be self contained units smoothly finished firmly seated and easily removed from the main cases and shall not be cast as part of the main cases The measuring chambers shall be so secured in the main cases that the accuracy of the meter will not be affected by any distortion of the cases that might occur when operating with a pressure less than 150 psi Discs Discs shall be smoothly finished disc plated whether flat or conical shall be either reinforced or equipped with thrust rollers Discs may be one piece or composed of a plate with two half balls The disc spindles shall be fastened securely The disc nutations shall not exceed the quantities listed in AWWA C700 SECTION 33 12 33 00 30 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 8 Strainers All meters shall be provided with strainer screens installed in the meter Strainer screens shall be rigid fit snugly be easy to remove and have an effective straining area at least double that of the main case inlet 9 Seal Wire Holes Register box screws and inlet and outlet coupling nuts if provided shall be drilled for seal wires Seal wire holes shall not be less than 3 32 inch in diameter 10 Registration Accuracy Meters shall meet the following requirements for accuracy with water of a temperature of less than 27 degrees Centigrade a Normal Flow Limits At any rate of flow w
175. all meet the requirements of paragraph CONTROL CIRCUIT TERMINAL BLOCKS above b Load Type Load terminal blocks rated not less than 600 volts and of adequate capacity shall be provided for the conductors for NEMA Size 3 and smaller motor controllers and for other power circuits except those for feeder tap units The terminals shall be of either the stud type with contact nuts and locking nuts or of the removable screw type having length and space for at least two indented terminals of the size required on the conductors to be terminated For conductors rated more than 50 amperes screws shall have hexagonal heads Conducting parts between connected terminals shall have adequate contact surface and cross section to operate without overheating Each connected terminal shall have the circuit designation or wire number placed on or near the terminal in permanent contrasting color 2015 63 Control Circuits Control circuits shall have maximum voltage of 120 volts derived from control transformer in same enclosure Transformers shall conform to UL 506 as applicable Transformers other than transformers in bridge circuits shall have primaries wound for voltage available and secondaries wound for correct control circuit voltage Size transformers so that 80 percent of rated capacity equals connected load Provide disconnect switch on primary Side Provide fuses in each ungrounded primary feeder One secondary lead shall be fused other shall be ground
176. alled at each end that meet the following waveforms 1 A 10 microsecond by 1000 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 10 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 of 1500 volts and a peak current of 60 amperes 2 An 8 microsecond by 20 microsecond waveform with a peak voltage of 1000 volts and a peak current of 500 amperes Protection shall be provided at the equipment Additional triple electrode gas surge protectors rated for the application shall be installed on each wireline circuit within 3 feet of the building cable entrance Fuses shall not be used for surge protection 2 aD Addressable Interface Devices The addressable interface AI device shall provide an addressable input interface to the FACP for monitoring normally open or normally closed contact devices such as waterflow switches valve supervisory switches fire pump monitoring independent smoke detection systems relays for output function actuation etc 2 6 Smoke Sensors 2 6 1 Photoelectric Smoke Sensors Provide addressable photoelectric smoke sensors as follows a Provide analog addressable photoelectric smoke sensors utilizing the photoelectric light scattering principle for operation in accordance with UL 268 Smoke sensors shall be listed for use with the fire alarm control panel b Provide self restoring type sensors which do not require any readjustment after actuation at the FACP to restore them to normal o
177. allic Conduit a PVC Schedule 40 and PVC Schedule 80 1 Do not use in areas where subject to severe physical damage including but not limited to mechanical equipment rooms electrical equipment rooms hospitals power plants missile magazines and other such areas 2 Do not use in hazardous classified areas 3 Do not use in fire pump rooms 4 Do not use in penetrating fire rated walls or partitions or fire rated floors SECTION 26 20 00 Page 22 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 5 Do not use above grade except where allowed in this section for rising through floor slab or indicated otherwise 6 Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High altitude Electromagnetic Pulse HEMP 8 Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High altitude Electromagnetic Pulse HEMP 3 1 4 4 Restrictions Applicable to Flexible Conduit Use only as specified in paragraph FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High altitude Electromagnetic Pulse HEMP 3210435 Service Entrance Conduit Overhead Rigid steel or IMC from service entrance to service entrance fitting or weatherhead outside building 3 1 4 6 Service Entrance Conduit Underground PVC Type EPC 40 galvanized rigid steel or steel IMC Underground portion shall be encased in minimum of 3 inches of concrete and shall be installed minimum 18
178. amined by the Contracting Officer to determine conformance with the requirements specified Approve each separate operation prior to initiation of subsequent operations aie eet eres Surface Preparation Demonstration Prior to surface preparation demonstrate surface preparation using the proposed materials methods and equipment according to the procedures outlined in Section 32 01 11 51 Prepare areas large enough to determine cleanliness and rate of cleaning E E Test Stripe Demonstration Prior to paint application demonstrate test stripe application within the work area using the proposed materials and equipment Apply separate test stripes in each of the line widths and configurations required herein using the proposed equipment The test stripes shall be long enough to determine the proper speed and operating pressures for the vehicle s and machinery but not less than 50 feet long ih Bx 3 Application Rate Demonstration During the Test Stripe Demonstration demonstrate compliance with the application rates specified herein Document the equipment speed and operating pressures required to meet the specified rates in each configuration of the equipment and provide a copy of the documentation to the Contracting Officer or authorized representative days prior to proceeding with the work SECTION 32 17 23 00 20 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 3 3 4 Retroreflective Value Demonstration After the test str
179. amless MANUFACTURERS STANDARDIZATION SOCIETY OF THE VALVE AND FITTINGS INDUSTRY MSS MSS SP 58 2009 Pipe Hangers and Supports Materials Design and Manufacture Selection Application and Installation MSS SP 69 2003 Pipe Hangers and Supports Selection and Application ANSI Approved American National Standard MSS SP 89 2003 Pipe Hangers and Supports Fabrication and Installation Practices MASTER PAINTERS INSTITUTE MPI MPI 9 Oct 2009 Exterior Alkyd Gloss MPI Gloss Level 6 NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 54 2009 TIA 10 3 National Fuel Gas Code SHEET METAL AND AIR CONDITIONING CONTRACTORS NATIONAL ASSOCIATION SMACNA SMACNA 1650 2008 Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems 2nd Edition SECTION 33 51 13 00 30 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 THE SOCIETY FOR PROTECTIVE COATINGS SSPC SSPC Paint 25 1997 E 2004 Zinc Oxide Alkyd Linseed Oil Primer for Use Over Hand Cleaned Steel Type I and Type II SSPC SP 1 1982 E 2004 Solvent Cleaning SSPC SP 3 1982 E 2004 Power Tool Cleaning SSPC SP 7 NACE No 4 2007 Brush Off Blast Cleaning U S DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE DOD MIL STD 101 1970 Rev B Color Code for Pipelines amp for Compressed Gas Cylinders U S NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION NARA 49 CFR 192 Transportation of Natural and Other Gas by Pipeline Minimum Federal Safety Standards 49 CFR 195 Transportation of Haza
180. amper switches G Electromagnetic door holders G SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Smoke sensor testing procedures G Submit data on proposed equipment including but not limited to the items listed above Include UL or FM listing cards for equipment provided SD 06 Test Reports Furnish preliminary test results to the Contracting Officer Include the control panel and initiating and indicating devices a unique identifier for each device with an indication of test results and signature of the factory trained technician of the control panel manufacturer and equipment installer With reports on preliminary tests include printer information SD 07 Certificates Qualifications of installer SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM Data Package 5 Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Record drawing software SD 11 Closeout Submittals Prepare and submit to the Contracting Officer six sets of detailed as built drawings The drawings shall include complete wiring diagrams showing connections between devices and equipment both factory and field wired Include a riser diagram and drawings showing the as built location of devices and equipment The drawings shall show the system as installed including deviations from both the project drawings and the approved shop drawings The drawings shall be prepared on uniform sized mylar sheets not les
181. and arc quenching contact material Provide connectors of the loadbreak or deadbreak type as indicated of suitable construction for the application and the type of cable connected and that include cable shield adaptors Provide external clamping points and test points a 200 Ampere loadbreak connector ratings Voltage 15 kV 95 kV BIL Short time rating 10 000 rms symmetrical amperes b 600 Ampere deadbreak connector ratings Voltage 15 kV 95 kV BIL Short time rating 25 000 rms symmetrical amperes Connectors shall have 200 ampere bushing interface for surge arresters 2e MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE JOINTS Provide joints splices in accordance with IEEE 404 suitable for the rated voltage insulation level insulation type and construction of the cable Joints shall be certified by the manufacturer for waterproof submersible applications Upon request supply manufacturer s design qualification test report in accordance with IEEE 404 Connectors for joint shall be tin plated electrolytic copper having ends tapered and having center stops to equalize cable insertion Provide Hnad Taped Splicing Joints 2 8 TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING Provide telecommunications cabling in accordance with Section 33 82 00 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTSIDE PLANT OSP 2 9 LIVE END CAPS Provide live end caps using a kit including a heat shrinkable tube and a high dielectric strength polymeric plug overlapping the conductor End cap shall conform to applicabl
182. andard Test Method for Density of Hydraulic Cement ASTM C29 C29M 2009 Standard Test Method for Bulk Density Unit Weight and Voids in Aggregate ASTM C88 2005 Standard Test Method for Soundness of Aggregates by Use of Sodium Sulfate or Magnesium Sulfate SECTION 32 12 17 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 ASTM D ASTM D ASTM D ASTM D ASTM D ASTM D ASTM D ASTM D ASTM D ASTM D ASTM D ASTM D ASTM D 1073 1188 140 D 140M 1559 242 D 242M 2726 4867 D 4867M 546 692 D 692M 70 75 D 75M 854 995 ASTM D2041 D2041M ASTM D2172 D2172M ASTM D979 D979M bs 2 SUBMITTALS 1127117 2007 Fine Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures 2007e1 Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Compacted Bituminous Mixtures Using Paraffin Coated Specimens 2009 Standard Practice for Sampling Bituminous Materials 1989 Resistance to Plastic Flow of Bituminous Mixtures Using Marshall Apparatus 2009 Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures 2010 Bulk Specific Gravity and Density of Non Absorptive Compacted Bituminous Mixtures 2009 Effect of Moisture on Asphalt Concrete Paving Mixtures 2010 Sieve Analysis of Mineral Filler for Bituminous Paving Mixtures 2009 Coarse Aggregate for Bituminous Paving Mixtures 2009e1 Specific Gravity and Density of Semi Solid Bituminous Materials Pycnometer Method 2009 Standard Practice for Sampling Aggreg
183. any deficiencies in appearance will be identified Areas which exhibit excessive cracking discoloration form marks or tool marks or which are otherwise inconsistent with the overall appearances of the work shall be removed and replaced End of Section SECTION 32 16 13 Page 9 1127117 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 32 17 23 00 20 PAVEMENT MARKINGS 04 06 PART 1 GENERAL alee 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM D 4505 2005 Preformed Retroflective Pavement Marking Tape for Extended Service Life INTERNATIONAL CONCRETE REPAIR INSTITUTE ICRI ICRI 03732 1997 Selecting and Specifying Concrete Surface Preparation for Sealers Coatings and Polymer Overlays U S GENERAL SERVICES ADMINISTRATION GSA CID A A 2886 Rev A Paint Traffic Solvent Based FS TT B 1325 Rev D Beads Glass Spheres Retro Reflective Metric ae SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for information only or as otherwise designated When used a designation following the G designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 03 Product Dat
184. applicable End of Section SECTION 26 20 00 Page 32 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 26 23 00 SWITCHBOARDS 07 06 PART 1 GENERAL alee 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM A123 A123M 2009 Standard Specification for Zinc Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings on Iron and Steel Products ASTM A153 A153M 2009 Standard Specification for Zinc Coating Hot Dip on Iron and Steel Hardware ASTM A167 1999 R 2009 Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat Resisting Chromium Nickel Steel Plate Sheet and Strip ASTM A653 A653M 2010 Standard Specification for Steel Sheet Zinc Coated Galvanized or Zinc Iron Alloy Coated Galvannealed by the Hot Dip Process ASTM A780 A780M 2009 Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Uncoated Areas of Hot Dip Galvanized Coatings ASTM D 149 2009 Dielectric Breakdown Voltage and Dielectric Strength of Solid Electrical Insulating Materials at Commercial Power Frequencies ASTM D 1535 2008e1 Specifying Color by the Munsell System ASTM D 709 2001 R 2007 Laminated Thermosetting Materials INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE IEEE 100 2000 Archived The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms IEEE 81 1983 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity
185. application to start and stop the prime coat on the paper and to ensure that all sprayers will operate at full force on the surface to be treated Immediately after application remove and destroy the building paper 3 4 3 Tack Coat Apply tack coat at the locations shown on the drawings Apply the tack coat when the surface to be treated is dry Immediately following the preparation of the surface for treatment apply the bituminous material by means of the bituminous distributor within the limits of temperature specified herein and at a rate as specified above in paragraph APPLICATION RATE Apply the bituminous material so that uniform distribution is obtained over the entire surface to be treated Treat lightly coated areas and spots missed by the distributor with the bituminous material Following the application of bituminous material allow the surface to cure without being disturbed for period of time necessary to permit setting of the tack coat Apply the bituminous tack coat only as far in advance of the placing of the overlying layer as required for that day s operation Maintain and protect the treated surface from damage until the succeeding course of pavement is placed 3 5 CURING PERIOD Following application of the bituminous material and prior to application of the succeeding layer of pavement allow the bituminous coat to cure and to obtain evaporation of any volatiles or moisture Maintain the coated surface until the succ
186. as specified 23212 Manual Stations Provide metal or plastic semi flush mounted double action addressable manual stations which are not subject to operation by jarring or vibration Stations shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor Stations which require the replacement of any portion of the device after activation are not permitted Stations shall be finished in fire engine red with molded raised lettering operating instructions of contrasting color The use of a key or wrench shall be required to reset the station 252 13 Notification Appliances 2 2213 51 Fire Alarm Speakers a Provide fire alarm speakers conforming to UL 464 having a minimum of three tap settings and separate terminations for each in and out connection Tap settings shall include taps of 1 4 1 2 and 1 watt Speakers shall utilize the 1 2 watt tap in the system Speakers shall have an output rating of 84 dBA at 10 feet as determined by the reverberant room test data on peak output as determined in an anechoic chamber is not suitable Speakers shall be capable of installation on standard 4 inch square electrical boxes Where speakers and strobes are provided in the same location they may be combined into a single wall mounted unit Speaker housing should be white and say Alert in lieu of Fire b Provide speaker mounting plates constructed of cold rolled steel having a minimum thickness of 16 gage and equipped with mounting holes and other openi
187. aterials and approved equipment to demonstrate the proposed sealing of all cracks of the project Following the completion of the test section and before any other crack is sealed inspect the test section to determine that the materials and installation meet the requirements specified If materials or installation do not meet requirements remove the materials and reclean and reseal the cracks at no cost to the Government When the test section meets the requirements it may be incorporated into the permanent work and paid for at the contract unit price per linear foot for sealing items scheduled Seal all other cracks in the manner approved for sealing the test section SECTION 32 0117 16 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 25 CLEANUP Upon completion of the project remove unused materials from the site and leave the pavement in a clean condition 6 QUALITY CONTROL PROVISIONS SEL Crack Cleaning Provide quality control provisions during the crack cleaning process to correct improper equipment and cleaning techniques that damage the bituminous pavement in any manner Cleaned cracks shall be approved prior to installation of the crack sealant 042 Crack Seal Application Equipment Inspect the application equipment to ensure conformance to temperature requirements and proper installation Evidences of bubbling improper installing and failing to cure or set will cause to suspend operations until causes of th
188. aterials unless indicated or specified otherwise x re Fae Existing Condition Survey The Contractor shall perform a field survey including inspection of all existing equipment resulting clearances and new equipment locations intended to be incorporated into the system and furnish an existing conditions report to the Government The report shall identify those items that are non workable as defined in the contract documents The Contractor shall be held responsible for repairs and modifications necessary to make the system perform as required 3 We TT Existing Meter Sockets In some cases the existing meter sockets will have to be replaced to accommodate the new electrical meters An existing socket is considered unacceptable for any of the following conditions a It is a non ANSI form factor meter socket b It is weathered beyond the point of being safe to reuse c It is installed incorrectly such as a non weather resistant enclosure installed outdoors d It is not the correct form factor for the existing electrical service 3 14 152 Existing Installations As part of the existing condition survey the following applies for installations with existing meters a Replace any meters that do not comply with this section b If CTs are installed verify that they comply with this section If they do not comply replace them with CTs that comply with this section One CT per phase is required for wye connecte
189. ates 2010 Specific Gravity of Soil Solids by Water Pycnometer 1995b R 2002 Mixing Plants for Hot Mixed Hot Laid Bituminous Paving Mixtures 2011 Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity and Density of Bituminous Paving Mixtures 2011 Quantitative Extraction of Bitumen from Bituminous Paving Mixtures 2011 Sampling Bituminous Paving Mixtures Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 32 12 17 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 ae ale SD 04 Samples Bituminous pavement SD 05 Design Data Job mix formula Submit a job mix formula prepared specifically for this project for approval prior to preparing and placing the bituminous mixture Design mix using procedures contained in Chapter V Marshall Method of Mix Design of AI MS 02 Formulas shall indicate physical properties of the mixes as shown by tests made by a commercial laboratory approved by the Contracting Officer using materials identical to those to be provided on this project Submit formulas with material samples Job mix formula for each mixture shall be in effect until modified in writing by the Contractor and approved by the Contracting Officer Provide a new job mix formula for each source change Submittal shall include all tests
190. ating b Plastic to Plastic Manufacturer s standard bolt on PVC to PE plastic tapping saddle tee UL listed for gas service rated for 100 psig and O ring seals Manufacturer s standard slip on PE mechanical coupling molded with stainless steel ring support O ring seals and rated for 150 psig gas service Manufacturer s standard fused tapping SECTION 33 51 13 00 30 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 PE to PE tee assembly with shut off feature 2ed VALVES ABOVEGROUND Provide lockable valves where indicated 26301 Shutoff Valves Sizes Larger Than 2 Inches Cast iron or steel body ball valve with flanged ends in accordance with ASME B16 38 Provide PTFE seats Cast iron body plug valve in accordance with ASME B16 38 nonlubricated wedge mechanism or tapered lift plug and flanged ends 2ed a2 Shutoff Valves Sizes 2 Inches and Smaller Steel body ball valve in accordance with ASME B16 33 full port pattern reinforced PTFE seals threaded ends and PTFE seat Steel body plug valve in accordance with ASME B16 33 straightway taper plug regular pattern with a port opening at least equal to the internal pipe area or round port full bore pattern non lubricated PTFE packing flat or square head stem with lever operator 125 psig rating threaded ends 2 3 3 Pressure Regulator Self contained with spring loaded diaphragm pressure regulator psig to inches water reduction pressure operating range as required for the pre
191. ation schedule G Completed meter data schedule G Meter configuration template G Contractor shall fill in the meter configuration template and SECTION 26 27 14 00 20 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 submit to the Activity for concurrence Meter configuration report G The meter configuration report shall be submitted as a Technical Data Package SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Electricity Meters and Accessories Data Package 5 G Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein SD 11 Closeout Submittals System functional verification G 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 4 1 Installation Drawings Drawings shall be provided in hard copy and electronic format and shall include but not be limited to the following a Wiring diagrams with terminals identified of kilowatt advancedmeter current transformers potential transformers protocol modules communications interfaces Ethernet connections telephone lines For each typical meter installation provide a diagram b One line diagram including meters switch es current transformers potential transformers protocol modules communications interfaces Ethernet connections telephone outlets and fuses For each typical meter installation provide a diagram 1 4 2 Standard Products Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production
192. ations listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM D 709 2001 R 2007 Laminated Thermosetting Materials INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE IEEE 100 2000 Archived The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms IEEE C2 2012 National Electrical Safety Code IEEE C57 12 28 2005 Standard for Pad Mounted Equipment Enclosure Integrity IEEE C57 12 29 2005 Standard for Pad Mounted Equipment Enclosure Integrity for Coastal Environments NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA NEMA 250 2008 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 1000 Volts Maximum NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2011 TIA 11 1 Errata 2011 National Electrical Code 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS This section applies to certain sections of Division 02 EXISTING CONDITIONS Divisions 22 and 23 PLUMBING and HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING This section applies to all sections of Division 26 and 33 ELECTRICAL and UTILITIES of this project specification unless specified otherwise in the individual sections This section has been incorporated into and thus does not apply to and is not referenced in the following sections Section 26 12 19 10 THREE PHASE PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Section 26 23 00 SWITCHBO
193. atory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Standard Effort 12 400 ft lbf cu ft 600 SECTION 31 00 00 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 kN m cu m Tez DEFINITIONS 1 2 1 Satisfactory Materials Satisfactory materials comprise any materials classified by ASTM D 2487 as GW GP GM GP GM GW GM GC GP GC GM GC SW SP Satisfactory materials for grading comprise stones less than 8 inches except for fill material for pavements and railroads which comprise stones less than 3 inches in any dimension 17272 Unsatisfactory Materials Materials which do not comply with the requirements for satisfactory materials are unsatisfactory Unsatisfactory materials also include man made fills trash refuse backfills from previous construction and material classified as satisfactory which contains root and other organic matter or frozen material Notify the Contracting Officer when encountering any contaminated materials E Cohesionless and Cohesive Materials Cohesionless materials include materials classified in ASTM D 2487 as GW GP SW and SP Cohesive materials include materials classified as GC SC ML CL MH and CH Materials classified as GM and SM will be identified as cohesionless only when the fines are nonplastic Perform testing required for classifying materials in accordance with ASTM D 4318 ASTM C 136 ASTM D 422 and ASTM D 1140 1 2 4 Degree of Compaction Degree of compaction required except as note
194. aver is used for sidewalk placement the subgrade shall be true to grade prior to concrete placement and the thickness will be determined by measuring each edge of the completed slab 3 5 4 Surface Evaluation The finished surface of each category of the completed work shall be uniform in color and free of blemishes and form or tool marks SECTION 32 16 13 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 3 3x Biy 6 SURFACE DEFICIENCIES AND CORRECTIONS 6 21 Thickness Deficiency When measurements indicate that the completed concrete section is deficient in thickness by more than 1 4 inch the deficient section will be removed between regularly scheduled joints and replaced 6 2 High Areas In areas not meeting surface smoothness and plan grade requirements high areas shall be reduced either by rubbing the freshly finished concrete with carborundum brick and water when the concrete is less than 36 hours old or by grinding the hardened concrete with an approved surface grinding machine after the concrete is 36 hours old or more The area corrected by grinding the surface of the hardened concrete shall not exceed 5 percent of the area of any integral slab and the depth of grinding shall not exceed 1 4 inch Pavement areas requiring grade or surface smoothness corrections in excess of the limits specified above shall be removed and replaced 6 3 Appearance Exposed surfaces of the finished work will be inspected by the Government and
195. be submitted in accordance with paragraph entitled Plans of this section Proposed Schedules Methods Materials Equipment 3 BEDDING AND BACKFILL Bedding and backfill shall conform to Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK 4 DRAWINGS Contractor shall submit Coordination Drawings interferences for construction Details of catch basins and manholes shall be shown with proper elevations 5 PLANS A Work Plan shall be submitted when sewer flow is to be interrupted noting Proposed Schedules Methods Materials and Equipment SECTION 33 40 00 00 40 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 PART 2 PRODUCTS Zigak BONDING AND SEALING MATERIALS Qed Bituminous Coating and Sealing Coating shall be in accordance with ASTM A 849 Coating shall be in accordance with ASTM A 849 when using materials previously coal tar coated and for each uncoated ferrous piece used underground Cold Bituminous Mastic Sealer shall be in accordance with ASTM A 849 trowel consistency Bia dD Epoxy Bonding Epoxy adhesive shall be in accordance with AWWA C210 2 2 FILTER MATERIAL 221 Filter Fabric Fabric shall be in accordance with AASHTO M 288 and be water pervious made of polyester materials 2 2 2 Filter Aggregate Aggregate shall be clean gravel free from organic materials clay or other deleterious materials graded to the following minimal limits SIEVE SIZE PERCENT PASSING No 4 15 to 30 2 3 CONDUIT PIPING JOINTS FITTINGS AND GASKETS
196. bearing the seal of a registered professional engineer including a Material description i e f c and Fy b Manufacturer s printed assembly and installation instructions c Design calculations d Reinforcing shop drawings in accordance with ACI SP 66 e Plans and elevations showing opening and pulling in iron locations and details 4 2 Certificate of Competency for Cable Splicer Terminator Certification of the qualification of the cable splicer terminator shall be submitted for approval 30 days before splices or terminations are to be made in medium voltage 5 kV to 35 kV cables The certification shall include the training and experience of the individual on the specific type and classification of cable to be provided under this contract The certification shall indicate that the individual has had three or more years recent experience splicing and terminating medium voltage cables The certification shall also list a minimum of three splices terminations that have been in operation for more than one year In addition the individual may be required to perform a dummy or practice splice termination in the presence of the Contracting Officer before being approved as a qualified cable splicer If that additional requirement is imposed the Contractor shall provide short sections of the approved types of cables along with the approved type of splice termination kit and detailed manufacturer s instructions for the cable to be spliced Th
197. been inspected and approved The first inspection will be at the expense of the Government Costs incurred for any subsequent inspection will be charged to the Contractor Perform tests in sufficient numbers and at the location and times directed to ensure that the materials meet specified requirements 2531 Samples Take aggregate samples for laboratory tests in accordance with ASTM D 75 D 75M Take samples of bituminous material in accordance with AASHTO T 40 or ASTM D 140 D 140M 5 2 Aggregates Source Select sources from which aggregates are to be obtained and notify the Contracting Officer within 15 days after the award of the Contract Submit a 50 pound sample of aggregate for each aggregate size Perform tests for the evaluation of aggregates by using an approved commercial laboratory at no expense to the Government Tests for determining the suitability of aggregate shall include but not limited to gradation in accordance with ASTM C136 abrasion resistance in accordance with ASTM C131 clay lumps and friable particles in accordance with ASTM C142 C142M unit weight and voids in accordance with ASTM C29 C29M and flat and elongated particles in accordance with ASTM D 4791 The use of an antistripping agent is subject to approval by the Contracting Officer 5 3 Bituminous Material Source Select sources from which bituminous materials are to be obtained and notify the Contracting Officer within 15 days after the award of th
198. ber of false alarms Sh provide process driven event management o Shall use graphical workflow tools o Shall use locally configured and defined response plans o Shall allow for customized alarm displays Shall provide collaboration tools to allow interoperability and event management between multiple agencies Shall support Computer Aided Dispatch CAD integration Shall provide a means of automated and manual event escalation Shall create and maintain a database of all transact events that occur within the PSIM to include but not to the following User commands Alarm conditions Equipment failures Other transactions and events not specified Shall provide Software Development Kits SDKs and Application Programming Interfaces APIs o Provided to the Government allowing Government developed interfaces to new devices and applications ions and limited Gtict oo0o0o 0 5 2 2 6 Generators and Uninterruptable Power Supplies UPS Generators are not a part of this performance specification If required it will be the responsibility of the local Command to provide and maintain said generators Command provided generators shall be in compliance with section 6 10 2 of UFC 04 022 01 In the event of power loss the AVG L shall SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 30 Submarine A Schoo Ensure and lighting
199. bmarine A School BQ 534 1127117 f Manufacturer s repair parts list indicating sources of supply g Interface definition 3 4 8 Functional Design Manual The functional design manual shall identify the operational requirements for the system and explain the theory of operation design philosophy and specific functions A description of hardware and software functions interfaces and requirements shall be included for all system operating modes 3 4 9 Maintenance Manual The maintenance manual shall include descriptions of maintenance for all equipment including inspection periodic prevention maintenance include specific time intervals for each recommended preventative maintenance tasks fault diagnosis and repair or replacement of defective components 3 4 10 Training Documentation Lesson plans and training manuals for the training phases including type of training to be provided anda list of reference material shall be delivered for Government approval 3 4 11 Data Entry Enter all data needed to make the system operational Deliver the data to the Government on data entry forms utilizing data from the contract documents Contractor s field surveys and other pertinent information in the Contractor s possession required for complete installation of the database Identify and request from the Government any additional data needed to provide a complete and operational ACPCS Th
200. boards are permitted to group functional assemblies as devices provided that sufficient information is provided for government maintenance personnel to verify proper operation of the functional assemblies Ta 5 2 Interconnecting Diagrams Show interconnections between equipment assemblies and external interfaces including power and signal conductors Include for enclosures and external devices L53 Installation Drawings Show floor plan of each site with V F D s and motors indicated Indicate ventilation requirements adequate clearances and cable routes 1 5 4 Equipment Schedule Provide schedule of equipment supplied Schedule shall provide a cross reference between manufacturer data and identifiers indicated in shop drawings Schedule shall include the total quantity of each item of equipment supplied For complete assemblies such as VFD s provide the serial numbers of each assembly and a sub schedule of components within the assembly Provide recommended spare parts listing for each assembly or component 1 5 5 Installation instructions Provide installation instructions issued by the manufacturer of the equipment including notes and recommendations prior to shipment to the Site Provide operation instructions prior to acceptance testing 1 5 6 Factory Test Results Document test results and submit to government within 7 working days after completion of test 1 6 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Equipment deliver
201. both within the gate automation hardware as well as all connected devices via PSNet Sha provide fault tolerance with automated conflict resolution Shall provide for both hardware and software checksum operation prohibiting unauthorized changes to ECP automation Shall be capable of controlling all applicable devices within the ECP These shall include but are not limited to the following devices Drop arms Signal devices Access pedestal a Vehicle presenc wn sensors Dynamic message sign ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 23 Submarine A School BQ 534 5 2 2 2 1 Physical Layout The and the instal ed wi thin of the ECP shal the Sentry at the ECP enclosures installed as a part of the proper physical layout of the ECP is essential to efficient operation of the ECP following attributes Any AVG devices with the normal line of sigh Distribution boxes and ll not 1127117 the safe The ECP design shall contain interfere AVG shall have the following attributes o Wil be sized to fit into as small of a space as possible o Match existing base architectural requirements o Meet or exceed NEMA 4x requirements when installed outdoors or in harsh environments o Provide sufficient HVAC capabilities for all equipment installed within the enclosure o Be installed on a suitable foundation o Shall be lab
202. c distortion THD Shall be 25 percent maximum Input wattage 1 34 watts maximum when operating two F17T8 lamps SECTION 26 51 00 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 P A E T 5 Long Twin Tube Lamp Ballast as Total harmonic distortion THD Shall not be greater than 25 percent when operating one lamp 15 percent when operating two lamps Input wattage 1 45 watts maximum when operating one F40 T 5 lamps 2 74 watts maximum when operating two F40 T 5 lamps A single ballast may be used to serve multiple fixtures if they are continuously mounted and factory manufactured for that installation with an integral wireway Fluorescent Lamps T 8 rapid start low mercury lamps shall be rated 32 watts maximum 2800 initial lumens minimum CRI of 75 minimum color temperature of 3500 K and an average rated life of 20 000 hours Low mercury lamps shall have passed the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leachate Procedure TCLP for mercury by using the lamp sample preparation procedure described in NEMA LL 1 T 8 rapid start lamp 17 watt maximum nominal length of 24 inches 1300 initial lumens CRI of 75 minimum color temperature of 3500 K and an average rated life of 20 000 hours T 5 long twin tube fluorescent lamp 40 watts maximum 3500 K 22 6 inches maximum length 20 000 hours average rated life 3150 initial lumens CRI of 80 minimum 2G11 Type base 90 to 100 lumens watt depending on wattage
203. c off surfaces freshly treated with bituminous material Provide sufficient warning signs and barricades so that traffic will not travel over freshly treated surfaces End of Section SECTION 32 12 10 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 32 12 17 HOT MIX BITUMINOUS PAVEMENT 04 08 PART 1 GENERAL alee 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS AASHTO AASHTO M 320 2010 Standard Specification for Performance Graded Asphalt Binder AASHTO MP la 2004 Performance Graded Asphalt Binder ASPHALT INSTITUTE AT AI MS 02 1997 6th Ed Mix Design Methods ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM C117 2004 Standard Test Method for Materials Finer than 75 um No 200 Sieve in Mineral Aggregates by Washing ASTM C127 2007 Standard Test Method for Density Relative Density Specific Gravity and Absorption of Coarse Aggregate ASTM C128 2007a Standard Test Method for Density Relative Density Specific Gravity and Absorption of Fine Aggregate ASTM C131 2006 Standard Test Method for Resistance to Degradation of Small Size Coarse Aggregate by Abrasion and Impact in the Los Angeles Machine ASTM C136 2006 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates ASTM C188 2009 St
204. cable topics to be addressed consistent with meeting th propose alternatives standards cited herein if or cost effectiveness doc of In th th herein and shall Admin to th Governm uments in effect e event th ake a m is e design ent sh within opinion shall m informat thirty 30 of th objectives of is specification of a con e conten request trative Contracting Officer tracting Officer s Represen all provide written clarification to the Contractor days after receipt by a deviation from stan ated Con e Contractor requirements of this specifica ake a request for devia tion copy to the designated Systems Engin as necessary to flict be the program to the specification they would enhance system performance The most current issue of the fol on the date of the RFP for bids form the extent specified herein ts of this specification for clarification The Contra ould s and ctor sh lowing a part tween the documents referen th in writing tion ACO is with an t the ACO d in order t tion n ECTION 34 41 26 00 in writing to e ced e Contractor to the information copy ative COR The When in the ards or he Contractor the ACO with an ering Integrated 10 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 Process T the Contractor
205. cal analysis name trade name trademark and indication of conformance to state and federal laws Instead of containers fertilizer may be furnished in bulk with certificate indicating the above information 1 5 2 Storage 125 221 Seed Fertilizer Storage Store in cool dry locations away from contaminants 15622 Topsoil Prior to stockpiling topsoil treat growing vegetation with application of appropriate specified non selective herbicide Clear and grub existing vegetation three to four weeks prior to stockpiling topsoil 1 5 2 3 Handling Do not drop or dump materials from vehicles 1 6 TIME RESTRICTIONS AND PLANTING CONDITIONS Rk Restrictions Do not plant when the ground is frozen snow covered muddy or when air temperature exceeds 90 degrees Fahrenheit ae 37 TIME LIMITATIONS Es Tal Seed Apply seed within twenty four hours after seed bed preparation SECTION 32 92 19 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 PART 2 PRODUCTS Qe ck SEED 2d ed Classification Provide State approved seed of the latest season s crop delivered in original sealed packages bearing producer s guaranteed analysis for percentages of mixtures purity germination weedseed content and inert material Label in conformance with AMS Seed Act and applicable state seed laws Wet moldy or otherwise damaged seed will be rejected Field mixes will be acceptable when field mix is performed on site in the presence of the Contracting Officer
206. cal dimension Overall dimensions of the user interface card readers PIN pad intercom and drivers image capture shall be no more than 10 in height by 12 in width e When mounted 6 above the roadway the interface shall have the following attributes o Shall be no further than 23 5 from the vehicle operator when the vehicle is no more than 13 from the access pedestal o Shall require a total horizontal reach range of no more than 75 degrees 10 degrees behind the vehicle operator 65 degrees ahead of the vehicle operator o For single height pedestals the user interface shall be installed 47 to 49 from roadway to horizontal centerline of user interface with 48 being the desired height o For dual height pedestals the user interface shall be installed o 47 to 49 from roadway to horizontal centerline of lower user interface with 48 being the desired height o 91 to 93 from roadway to horizontal centerline of upper user interface with 92 being the desired height o Shall be accessible in all weather conditions o Shall provide a two way communications capability o Shall operate in all weather conditions o Shall provide the ability to read FIPS 201 compliant cards as well a Code 3 of 9 Code 39 linear bar code formats Access pedestal island will be designed to conform to UFC 04 022 01 SDDCTEA pamphlet 55 15 and AASHTO Green Book best practices The access pedestal area will have the followi
207. cal measure of maintainability 5 5 3 Mean Logistics Delay Time MLDT The average time a system is unavailable due to logistics system delays associated with the maintenance action 5 5 4 System Operational Availability A In general Operational Availability can be described by the equation A System Up Time Total Time Because AT FP systems have dramatically different operational profiles the measurement and interpretation of A varies from system to system For purposes of A measurement and analysis AT FP systems are divided into two classes defined in terms of the way system is used e Continuous use systems Systems that are nearly always in use on a daily basis Examples are surveillance cameras and CAC readers Intermittent use non continuous or on demand systems Systems that have relatively long periods of standby or inactivity between uses Examples are vehicle barricades and emergency generators AVG L installations are considered continuous use systems For continuous use systems mean calendar time between failures is identical to mean operating time between failures and use of MTBF in the A equation is consistent with the notion of measuring uptime in terms of calendar time This notion is critical since all downtime is measured in calendar time Therefore the following equation provides an acceptable approximation of A in terms of rel
208. cat tions along with ot to increas these applications will interface ication via an exchange of information over Personally ther future enabling th 1127117 technologies ffectiveness of tain the following attributes transaction data for a maximum of 30 Identifiable ELE Information e g biometrics will serve the PACS When deployed directly with the appl existing network protocols The PACS design shall con The ability to store days IAW DoN Regulations Capable of granting cardholder credent is i Allo o Card plus PIN l PACS access transactions validated against NACMS l allow for the entry of 4 O Shal Allo requ Deny entry based n a non operat access tial and PACS PIN upon non approved credentials tional mode based on a combination of or if gate w the Base to select cardholder validation requirements based on FPCON and local o Card Only Al requirements 6 digit PINs w the Base to quickly change the cardholder validation requirements irements at one or more readers based on local Be configured to deny the Passback of user credentials Comply with NFPA 731 Have a single card reader with the fol O O O Full sunlight readable 50 degree horizon Capable of operating degrees Fahrenheit lowing attributes color LCD d
209. cating device and circuit for proper operation and response at the control unit Smoke sensors shall be tested in accordance with manufacturer s recommended calibrated test method Testing of duct smoke detectors shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 72 d Test the system for specified functions in accordance with the contract drawings and specifications and the manufacturer s O amp M manual e Test both primary power and secondary power Verify by test the secondary power system is capable of operating the system for the time period and in the manner specified f Determine that the system is operable under trouble conditions as specified g Visually inspect wiring h Test the battery charger and batteries i Verify that software control and data files have been entered or programmed into the FACP Hard copy records of the software shall be provided to the Contracting Officer j Verify that red line drawings are accurate k Measure the current in circuits to ensure there is the calculated spare capacity for the circuits l Measure voltage readings for circuits to ensure that voltage drop is not excessive SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 22 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 m Disconnect the verification feature for smoke sensors during tests to minimize the amount of smoke needed to activate the sensor Testing of smoke sensors shall be conducted using real smoke The use of canned smoke is prohibited n Measure
210. cation las las 10 10 transaction ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 27 transactions of last 10 transaction Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 5 2 2 4 Communications and Signage The AVG L is intended to operate in a safe unmanned and automated configuration For this to occur clear and concise communications with the vehicle operator is required All communications within the ECP shall have the following attributes All efforts shall be made to inform the user of the actions they must perform during all stages of ECP operation o This notification shall be such that the user has sufficient time in which to prepare or perform the desired function without risk of injury or damage to the user the vehicle or the ECP o Be in compliance with the relevant State or local DoT MUTCD and SCCDTEA pamphlet 55 14 Dynamic Message Sign DMS shall be fully integrated and automated with the overall operation of the ECP o A DMS at the beginning of the approach zone to the ECP informing gate users of the mode of operation as well as other entrance criteria in effect o The DMS shall display Gate Open when the gate is in the manual or automatic modes This message shall be protected and not allowed to be modified by local personnel o The DMS shall display Gate Closed when the gate is in the Closed or when gate crash passback or
211. cations of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the five year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be products of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section All meters provided shall be manufactured by a registered ISO 9001 quality standard facility All specifications shall meet or exceed the latest revision of AWWA C702 1 4 3 Alternative Qualifications Products having less than a five year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 10 000 hours exclusive of the manufacturer s factory or laboratory tests is provided 1 4 4 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Data Products manufactured more than two years prior to date of delivery to the site shall not be used unless specified otherwise L5 WARRANTY The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract All meters shall carry the following published warranties a Meters shall be
212. ce Entrance Cables Service Entrance SE and Underground Service Entrance USE Cables UL 854 6 6 Cord Sets and Power Supply Cords UL 817 SECTION 26 20 00 Page 10 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 sh SPLICES AND TERMINATION COMPONENTS UL 486A 486B for wire connectors and UL 510 for insulating tapes Connectors for No 10 AWG and smaller diameter wires shall be insulated pressure type in accordance with UL 486A 486B or UL 486C twist on splicing connector Provide solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors 8 DEVICE PLATES Provide UL listed one piece device plates for outlets to suit the devices installed For metal outlet boxes plates on unfinished walls shall be of zinc coated sheet steel or cast metal having round or beveled edges For nonmetallic boxes and fittings other suitable plates may be provided Plates on finished walls shall be nylon or lexan minimum 0 03 inch wall thickness Plates shall be same color as receptacle or toggle switch with which they are mounted Screws shall be machine type with countersunk heads in color to match finish of plate Sectional type device plates will not be permitted Plates installed in wet locations shall be gasketed and UL listed for wet locations 9 SWITCHES 9 1 Toggle Switches NEMA WD 1 UL 20 single pole double pole three way totally enclosed with bodies of thermoplastic or thermoset plastic and mounting strap with grounding screw Handles
213. charge and Low Pressure Sodium LPS Lamps Multiple Supply Type ANSI ANSLG C78 43 2007 American National Standard for Electric Lamps Single Ended Metal Halide Lamps NEMA 250 2008 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 1000 Volts Maximum NEMA ANSLG C82 11 2011 American National Standard for High Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts Supplements NEMA C136 10 2010 American National Standard for Roadway and Area Lighting Equipment Locking Type Photocontrol Devices and Mating Receptacles Physical and Electrical Interchangeability and Testing NEMA ICS 2 2000 R 2005 Errata 2008 Standard for Controllers Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 V NEMA ICS 6 1993 R 2006 Enclosures NEMA LL 1 1997 R 2002 Procedures for Linear Fluorescent Lamp Sample Preparation and the TCLP Extraction NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 101 2012 Life Safety Code NFPA 70 2011 TIA 11 1 Errata 2011 National Electrical Code U S ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY EPA Energy Star 1992 R 2006 Energy Star Energy Efficiency Labeling System SECTION 26 51 00 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 ay Iy 1 ali ane UL UL UL 2 UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL 1029 1994 Reprint May 2011 High Intensity Discharge Lamp Ballasts 1598 2008 Reprint Jan 2010 Luminaires 20 2010 General Use Snap Switches 773 1995 Reprint Mar 2002 Standard for Plug In Locking Type Phot
214. cient distance back from the ends of each application so that flow through the spray bar may be started and stopped on the paper and so that all sprays will be operating at the proper pressure on the surface to be sealed Immediately after the application remove the building paper Properly treat with bituminous material spots missed by the distributor No smoking fires or flames other than the heaters that are a part of the equipment will be permitted within 25 feet of heating distributing and transferring operations of bituminous material other than bituminous emulsions 24 Aggregate Application Rate Spread the aggregate in the quantities shown in TABLE III The exact quantities within the range specified which may be varied to suit field conditions will be determined by the Contractor and approved by the Contracting Officer prior to use The aggregate weights shown in this table are those of aggregate having a specific gravity of 2 65 If the specific gravity of the aggregate to be used is less than 2 55 or greater than 2 75 make adjustments in the number of pounds of aggregate required per square yard to insure a constant volume of aggregate per square yard of treatment 2 5 Application of Aggregate Spread the specified quantity of cover aggregate uniformly over the bituminous material Before the bituminous material is applied sufficient SECTION 32 01 13 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117
215. city and emergency lamp operation with visual indication of malfunction The battery capacity test may be conducted by using a synthetic load c Manual test switch to simulate a discharge test cycle d Module shall have low voltage battery disconnect LVD and brown out protection circuit SECTION 26 51 00 Page 13 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 14 OCCUPANCY SENSORS UL listed Comply with GC 12 Occupancy sensors and power packs shall be designed to operate on the voltage indicated Sensors and power packs shall have circuitry that only allows load switching at or near zero current crossing of supply voltage Occupancy sensor mounting as indicated Sensor shall have an LED occupant detection indicator Sensor shall have adjustable sensitivity and adjustable delayed off time range of 5 minutes to 15 minutes Wall mounted sensors shall be ivory ceiling mounted sensors shall be white Ceiling mounted sensors shall have 360 degree coverage unless otherwise indicated c Ultrasonic Infrared Combination Sensor Occupancy detection to turn lights on requires both ultrasonic and infrared sensor detection Lights shall remain on if either the ultrasonic or infrared sensor detects movement Infrared sensor shall have lens selected for indicated usage and daylight filter to prevent short wavelength infrared interference Ultrasonic sensor frequency shall be crystal controlled ald SUPPORT HANGERS FOR LIGHTING FIXTURES IN SUSPEND
216. ckage shall contain procedures and tions for the operation of the system Color print of the graphical user interface inch paper including GUI test ter screens inch Control diagrams and programming flow charts showing complete control details of the active vehicle barriers traffic s system ignals d Computers and peripherals e ci User enrollment System start up and shutdown procedures g Use of system and application software n ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 4 and over speed and wrong way annunciation Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 h Recovery and restart procedures i Use of report generator and generation of reports j Data entry k Operator commands l Alarm and system messages and printing formats m System entry requirements n Test Plan for the Performance Verification Test o Test Plan for the Endurance Test p Performance Verification Test Report q Commissioning Report 3 4 1 Active Vehicle Barrier Controls Describe operation of barrier control modes barrier control switches barrier normal and emergency operation traffic signals warning beacons vehicle presence detectors and actuated traffic arms Include descriptions of security strategy for defeating a threat vehicle and the SDDC approved barrier safety system for protecting innocent vehicles from barrier operations 3
217. connect structural steel framework and water system at point of entrance by a ground connector Make connections to pipes by means of ground clamps with lugs Make connections to structural framework by means of nut and bolt or welding Make connections between columns and ground connections at bottom of steel columns Make ground connections to SECTION 26 41 00 00 20 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 grounds or ground loop runs from not less than one half of the columns distributed equally around perimeter of structure When no water system enter the structure run ground connections from steel columns distributed equally around the perimeter of the structure Bond metal doors windows gutters and similar metal installation to steel work of the building Provide a grounding electrode for each ground connection 3 2 4 Ramps and Covered Passageways Ramps and covered passageways which are in the zone of protection of a lightning protection system as defined by NFPA 780 need no additional lightning protection However ramps and covered passageways which are outside the zone of protection of a lightning protection system shall be provided with a lightning protection conforming to the requirements for lightning protection systems for buildings of similar construction Place a down conductor and a driven ground at one of the corners where the ramp connects to each building or structure Connect down conductor and driven ground to th
218. control traffic and prevent damage to newly painted surfaces or displacement of raised pavement markers Painting equipment shall be marked with large warning signs indicating slow moving painting equipment in operation 1 6 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC 1 6 1 Lighting When night operations are necessary all necessary lighting and equipment SECTION 32 17 23 00 20 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 shall be provided Lighting shall be directed or shaded to prevent interference with aircraft the air traffic control tower and other base operations All lighting and related equipment shall be capable of being removed from the runway within 15 minutes of notification of an emergency Night work must be coordinated with the Airfield Manager and approved in advance by the Contracting Officer or authorized representative The Government reserves the right to accept or reject night work on the day following night activities by the Contractor 1 6 2 Roads Streets and Parking Areas When traffic must be rerouted or controlled to accomplish the work the necessary warning signs flagpersons and related equipment for the safe passage of vehicles shall be provided Tez WEATHER LIMITATIONS FOR REMOVAL Pavement surface shall be free of snow ice or slush Surface temperature shall be at least 40 degrees F and rising at the beginning of operations except those involving shot or sand blasting Operation shall cease during thunderstorms
219. cordance with SSPC Paint 25 Finish primed surfaces with two coats of exterior alkyd paint conforming to MPI 9 End of Section SECTION 33 51 13 00 30 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 08 08 PART 1 GENERAL ae iL REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS AASHTO AASHTO M 198 2010 Standard Specification for Joints for Concrete Pipe Manholes and Precast Box Sections Using Preformed Flexible Joint Sealants AMERICAN CONCRETE INSTITUTE INTERNATIONAL ACT ACI SP 66 2004 ACI Detailing Manual ASSOCIATION OF EDISON ILLUMINATING COMPANIES AEIC AEIC CS8 2000 Extruded Dielectric Shielded Power Cables Rated 5 Through 46 kV ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM B1 2001 R 2007 Standard Specification for Hard Drawn Copper Wire ASTM B3 2001 R 2007 Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire ASTM B496 2004e1 R 2010 Standard Specification for Compact Round Concentric Lay Stranded Copper Conductors ASTM B8 2011 Standard Specification for Concentric Lay Stranded Copper Conductors Hard Medium Hard or Soft ASTM B800 2005 Standard Specification for 8000 Series Aluminum Alloy Wire for Electrical Purposes Annealed and I
220. covered lines or other existing work affected by the contract excavation until approval for backfill is granted by the Contracting Officer Report damage to utility lines or subsurface construction immediately to the Contracting Officer 3 2 OPENING AND DRAINAGE OF EXCAVATION The Contractor is responsible for notifying the Contracting Officer sufficiently in advance of the opening of any excavation or borrow pit to permit elevations and measurements of the undisturbed ground surface to be taken Except as otherwise permitted excavation areas providing adequate drainage Transport overburden and other spoil material to designated spoil areas or otherwise dispose of as directed Ensure that excavation of any area or dumping of spoil material results in minimum detrimental effects on natural environmental conditions 33 UTILIZATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIALS Dispose unsatisfactory materials removing from excavations into designated waste disposal or spoil areas Use satisfactory material removed from excavations insofar as practicable in the construction of fills embankments subgrades shoulders bedding as backfill and for similar purposes Do not waste any satisfactory excavated material without specific written authorization Dispose of satisfactory material authorized to be wasted in designated areas approved for surplus material storage or designated waste areas as directed Clear and grub newly designated waste areas on Government co
221. crew Fixture support loop shall be cast aluminum with provisions for accepting 3 4 inch threaded fixture stems Power cord shall include 16 inches of 3 conductor No 16 Type SO cord Assembly shall be rated 120 volts or 277 volts 15 amperes hd EXIT SIGNS UL 924 NFPA 70 and NFPA 101 Exit signs shall be self powered type Exit signs shall use no more than 5 watts Pee ee Self Powered LED Type Exit Signs Battery Backup Provide with automatic power failure device test switch pilot light and SECTION 26 51 00 Page 12 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 fully automatic high low trickle charger in a self contained power pack Battery shall be sealed electrolyte type shall operate unattended and require no maintenance including no additional water for a period of not less than 5 years LED exit sign shall have emergency run time of 1 1 2 hours minimum The light emitting diodes shall have rated lamp life of 70 000 hours minimum 2b 2 Remote Powered Exit Signs Provide remote ac dc exit signs with provisions for wiring to external ac and dc power sources Provide signs with a minimum of two ac lamps for normal illumination and a minimum of two dc lamps for emergency lighting 2 12 EMERGENCY LIGHTING EQUIPMENT UL 924 NFPA 70 and NFPA 101 Provide lamps in wattage indicated Ze Veo Emergency Lighting Unit Provide as indicated Emergency lighting units shall be rated for 12 volts except units having no remote mounted lamps and ha
222. cribed in section T a The Vehicle presence sensor shall have the attributes described in secti Iu 2e An T a T he access pedestal shall have ttributes described in section he access pedestal area shall attributes described in section 3 2 2 2 ECP Automation s described in secti POEA ECP Automation shall have the following attribute Shall be in compliance with the ATC 2070 02 03 specification SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 41 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Paragraph Verification Method Description ECP design shall contain the attributes described in section BD iL eee dys Distribution boxes and enclosures installed as a part of the AVG shall have the attributes described in section B26 242 ECP design shall contain the attributes described in section Se2V2e22 ECP lighting shall contain the attributes described in section FR a2 2 The PACS solution shall be in compliance with HSPD 12 FIPS 201 and DTM 09 012 The PACS shall be required to interface with the Navy Access Control Management System NACMS via the SEIWG JGS The JGS to PACS interface shall be developed such that a single presentation of the credential by the vehicle operator is all that is required to gain access through an ECP The PACS solution shall be able to process information from any of the authorized credentials Common Access Card CAC using the contactless chip capabil
223. ct directly to PSNet The AVG L design shall use existing network infrastructure when feasibl AVG L projects in non U S territories OCONUS shall use the ONE NET network vice PSNet SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 46 Submarine A School BQ 534 Koj ad WO n 101 eega 3 a323 SB 258 3432233 Zeed jia 1127117 Verification Method Description As such all networks and connected devices shall conform to all specifications and regulations as defined by NETWARCOM for PSNET connectivity hall meet all PSNet IA requirements The system s Information Assurance Networks shall be tested and baseline performance documented This baseline performance documentation shall be provided to the government during SOVT Data cables shall be in compliance with TIA EIA 568 B and UFC 3 580 01 All cabling shall conform to Publi Safety Network PSNet or ONE NE network standards for Continental States CONUS and Outside the Continental United States OCON installations United US Material for outdoor components shall be selected to prevent corrosion or deterioration All outdoor electronics shall be enclosed in lockable equipment cabinets that meet NEMA 4X requirements The contractor shall annotate all GFE in the installation design package System components and software shall be protected through physical ne
224. ction of all existing equipment resulting clearances and new equipment locations intended to be incorporated into the system and provide an existing conditions report to the Government The report shall identify those items that are non workable as defined in the contract documents The Contractor shall be held responsible for repairs or modifications necessary to make the system perform as required 31 2 Scheduling of Work and Outages The Contract clauses shall govern regarding permission for water power outages scheduling of work coordination with Government personnel and special working conditions 32 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING Where field painting of enclosures is required to correct damage to the manufacturer s factory applied coatings provide the manufacturer s recommended coatings and apply in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions 3 43 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 34 3 1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests a Meter Assembly 1 Visual and mechanical inspection a Compare equipment nameplate data with specification and approved shop drawings b Inspect physical and mechanical condition c Verify grounding of metering enclosure if required d Verify the presence of surge arresters 2 Electrical tests a Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face or meter where applicable b Prior to system acceptance the Contractor will demonstrate and confirm the meter is properly wired and
225. ctions electrically continuous Course roof conductors along contours of flat roofs ridges parapets and edges and where necessary over flat surfaces in such a way as to join each air terminal to all the rest Connect roof conductors surrounding tank tops decks flat surfaces and flat roofs to form a closed loop 3 1 3 Down Conductors Make down conductors electrically continuous from air terminals and roof conductors to grounding electrodes Course down conductors over outer extreme portions of the building such as corners with consideration given to location of ground connections and air terminals Provide each building or structure not less than two down conductors located as widely separated as practicable such as at diagonally opposite corners Rectangular structures having French flat or sawtooth roofs exceeding 250 feet in perimeter provide at least one additional down conductor for each 100 feet of perimeter or fraction thereof Install additional down conductors when necessary to avoid dead ends or branch conductors exceeding 16 feet in length ending at air terminals Equally and symmetrically spaced down conductors about the perimeter of the structure Protect conductors where necessary to prevent physical damage or displacement to the conductor Cee Wee Interconnection of Metallic Parts Connect metal doors windows and gutters directly to ground or down conductors using not smaller than No 6 copper conductor or equiva
226. ctrical distribution systems shall be performed as follows 3 2 L617 Workmanship Lay out work in advance Exercise care where cutting channeling chasing or drilling of floors walls partitions ceilings or other surfaces is necessary for proper installation support or anchorage of conduit raceways or other electrical work Repair damage to buildings piping and equipment using skilled craftsmen of trades involved S01 L722 Existing Concealed Wiring to be Removed Existing concealed wiring to be removed shall be disconnected from its source Remove conductors cut conduit flush with floor underside of floor and through walls and seal openings 3 1 1743 Removal of Existing Electrical Distribution System Removal of existing electrical distribution system equipment shall include equipment s associated wiring including conductors cables exposed conduit surface metal raceways boxes and fittings back to equipment s power source as indicated 31 ETA Continuation of Service Maintain continuity of existing circuits of equipment to remain Existing circuits of equipment shall remain energized Circuits which are to remain but were disturbed during demolition shall have circuits wiring and power restored back to original condition SECTION 26 20 00 Page 30 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 1 18 Watthour Meters ANSI C12 1 31519 Surge Protective Devices Connect the surge protective devices in parallel to the po
227. ctrical equipment rooms as indicated Noncurrent carrying metal parts of transformer neutrals and other electrical equipment shall be effectively grounded by bonding to the ground bus The ground bus shall be bonded to both the entrance ground and to a ground rod or rods as specified above having the upper ends terminating approximately 4 inches above the floor Connections and splices shall be of the brazed welded bolted or pressure connector type except that pressure connectors or bolted connections shall be used for connections to removable equipment 3 1 13 4 Resistance Maximum resistance to ground of grounding system shall not exceed 5 ohms under dry conditions Where resistance obtained exceeds 5 ohms contact Contracting Officer for further instructions 3e 1135 Telecommunications System Provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with the following a Telecommunications Grounding Busbars Provide a telecommunications main grounding busbar TMGB in the telecommunications entrance facility The TMGB shall be as close to the electrical service entrance grounding connection as practicable Telecommunications grounding busbars shall be installed to maintain clearances as required by NFPA 70 and shall be insulated from its support A minimum of 2 inches separation from the wall is recommended to allow access to the rear of the busbar and the mounting height shall be adjusted to accommodate overhead or underfloor cable routing
228. cuit breaker equipped Design shall be such that individual breakers can be removed without disturbing adjacent units or without loosening or removing supplemental insulation supplied as means of obtaining clearances as required by UL Specific breaker placement is required in panelboards to match the breaker placement indicated in the panelboard schedule on the drawings Use of Subfeed Breakers is not acceptable unless specifically indicated otherwise Main breaker shall be Separately mounted above or below branch breakers Where space only is indicated make provisions for future installation of breakers Directories shall indicate load served by each circuit in panelboard Directories shall also indicate source of service to panelboard e g Panel PA served from Panel MDP Provide new directories for existing panels modified by this project as indicated Type directories and mount in holder behind transparent protective covering Panelboards shall be listed and labeled for their intended use Panelboard shall have nameplates in accordance with paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES 2 12 1 Enclosure Enclosures shall meet the requirements of UL 50 All cabinets shall be fabricated from sheet steel of not less than No 10 gauge if flush mounted or mounted outdoors and not less than No 12 gauge if surface mounted indoors with full seam welded box ends Cabinets mounted outdoors or flush mounted shall be hot dipped galvanized a
229. d Operation of rollers shall be by competent and experienced operators Provide sufficient rollers for each spreading machine in operation on the job and to handle plant output In places not accessible to the rollers compact mixture thoroughly with hot hand tampers Skin patching of an area after compaction is prohibited Remove mixture that becomes mixed with foreign materials or is defective and replace with fresh mixture compacted to the density specified herein Roller shall pass over unprotected edge of the course only when laying of course is to be discontinued for such length of time as to permit mixture to become cold 3 4 JOINTS Joints shall present the same texture and smoothness as other portions of the course except permissible density at the joint may be up to 2 percent less than the specified course density Carefully make joints between old and new pavement or within new pavements in a manner to ensure a thorough and continuous bond between old and new sections of the course Vertical contact surfaces of previously constructed sections that are coated with dust sand or other objectionable material shall be painted with a thin uniform coat of emulsion or other approved bituminous material just before placing fresh mixture 3 4 1 Transverse Roller shall pass over unprotected end of freshly laid mixture only when laying of course is to be discontinued Except when an approved bulkhead is used cut back the edge of pre
230. d a designation following the G designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 26 51 00 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 Data drawings system specified SD 03 Product Data Fluorescent lighting fixtures G Fluorescent electronic ballasts Fluorescent lamps G High intensity discharge HID HID ballasts G Metal halide lamps G Lighting contactor G Photocell switch G Exit signs G Emergency lighting equipment G Occupancy sensors G Light Level Sensor G Local Regional Materials and reports shall employ the terminology and methods prescribed by the IESNA HB 9 as applicable G 1127117 classifications for the lighting lighting fixtures G Documentation indicating distance between manufacturing facility and the project site Indicate distance of raw material origin from the project site Indicate relative dollar value of local regional materials to total dollar value of products included in project SECTION 26 51 00 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Tx 1 Environmental Data Energy Efficiency SD 04 Samples Lighting fixtures complete with lamps and ballasts G SD 06 Test Reports Operating test Submit test results as stated in paragraph entitled Field Quality Control SD 10 Operation a
231. d oxidation of the mixture due to temporary storage discontinue use of surge bins or storage bins 1 2 6 12 6 Drum Dryer Mixer Do not use drum dryer mixer if specified requirements of the bituminous mixture or of the completed bituminous pavement course cannot be met If drum dryer mixer is prohibited use either batch or continuous mix plants meeting the specifications and producing a satisfactory mix 1 6 2 Paving Equipment 1 6 2 1 Spreading Equipment Self propelled electronically controlled type unless other equipment is authorized by the Contracting Officer Equip spreading equipment of the self propelled electronically controlled type with hoppers tamping or vibrating devices distributing screws electronically adjustable screeds and equalizing devices Capable of spreading hot bituminous mixtures without tearing shoving or gouging and to produce a finished surface of specified grade and smoothness Operate spreaders when laying mixture at variable speeds between 5 and 45 feet per minute Design spreader with a quick and efficient steering device a forward and reverse traveling speed and automatic devices to adjust to grade and confine the edges of the mixture to true lines The use of a spreader that leaves indented areas or other objectionable irregularities in the fresh laid mix during operations is prohibited 1 6 2 2 Rolling Equipment Self propelled pneumatic tired rollers supplemented by three wheel and
232. d for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates 2 UNIT PRICES 2 1 Measurement The quantity of milled pavement shall be the number of square yards completed and accepted as determined by the Contracting Officer The number of square yards of milled pavement shall be determined by measuring the length and width of the milled surface within the specified work area Measurement to determine the area shall be to the closest inch for width and the closest foot for length 2 2 Payment Payment will be to the nearest square yard No payment will be made for milling outside the specified area of work 3 EQUIPMENT TOOLS AND MACHINES Equipment tools and machines used in the performance of the work shall be maintained in a satisfactory working condition 2362 Cold Milling Machine The cold milling machine shall be a self propelled machine capable of milling the pavement to a specified depth and smoothness Pavement milling machine shall be capable of establishing grade control shall have means of controlling transverse slope and shall have effective means of controlling dust produced during the pavement milling operation The machine shall have the ability to remove the millings or cuttings from the pavement and load them into a truck The milling machine shall not cause damage to any part of the pavement structure that is not to be removed 3 lt 2 Cleaning Equipment Cleaning equipment shall be suitable for removing and c
233. d in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 02 Shop Drawings Telecommunications drawings G In addition to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES provide shop drawings in accordance with paragraph SHOP DRAWINGS SD 03 Product Data Telecommunications cabling backbone and horizontal G Telecommunications outlet connector assemblies Submittals shall include the manufacturer s name trade name place of manufacture and catalog model or number Include performance and characteristic curves Submittals shall also include applicable federal military industry and technical society publication references Should manufacturer s data require supplemental information for clarification the supplemental information shall be submitted as specified in paragraph REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS and as required in Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 27 10 00 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 T SD 06 Test Reports Telecommunications cabling testing G SD 07 Certificates Telecommunications Contractor Qualifications G Key Personnel Qualifications G Manufacturer Qualifications G Test plan G SD 09 Manufacturer s Field Reports Factory reel tests G SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Telecommunications cabling and pathway system Data Package 5 G SD 11 Closeout Submittals Record Documentation G 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 6 1 Shop Drawings In exception to Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES submitt
234. d in any enclosure cabinet mounting or junction box shall be connected to terminal blocks Mark each terminal in accordance with the wiring diagrams of the system Make connections with approved pressure type terminal blocks which are securely mounted The use of wire nuts or similar devices shall be prohibited QQ Terminal Cabinets Provide a terminal cabinet at the base of any circuit riser on each floor at each riser and where indicated on the drawings Terminal size shall be appropriate for the size of the wiring to be connected Conductor terminations shall be labeled and a drawing containing conductors their labels their circuits and their interconnection shall be permanently mounted in the terminal cabinet Minimum size is 8 inches high by 8 inches B23 Alarm Wiring Signaling line circuits and initiating device circuit field wiring shall be copper No 16 AWG size conductors at a minimum Notification appliance circuit conductors that contain audible alarm devices other than speakers shall be solid copper No 14 AWG size conductors at a minimum Speaker circuits shall be copper No 16 AWG size conductors at a minimum Wire size shall be sufficient to prevent voltage drop problems Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21 6 volts Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage Power wiring operating at 120 VAC minimum shall be No 12 AWG s
235. d in the KVA Efficiency table below That table is based on requirements contained within 10 CFR 431 Subpart K kVA EFFICIENCY percent 750 99 32 22263 Insulating Liquid a Less flammable transformer liquids NFPA 70 and FM APP GUIDE for less flammable liquids having a fire point not less than 300 degrees C tested per ASTM D 92 and a dielectric strength not less than 33 kV tested per ASTM D 877 Provide identification of transformer as non PCB and manufacturer s name and type of fluid on the nameplate The fluid shall be a biodegradable electrical insulating and cooling liquid classified by UL and approved by FM as less flammable fluids The fluid shall meet the following fluid properties 1 Pour point ASTM D 97 less than 15 degree C 2 Aquatic biodegradation EPA 712 C 98 075 100 percent 3 Trout toxicity OECD Test 203 zero mortality of EPA 821 R 02 012 pass 202351 Liquid Filled Transformer Nameplates Distribution transformers shall be provided with nameplate information in accordance with IEEE C57 12 00 and as modified or supplemented by this section SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 10 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 24 Corrosion Protection Bases and cabinets of transformers shall be corrosion resistant and shall be fabricated of stainless steel conforming to ASTM A167 Type 304 or 304L Base shall include any part of pad mounted transformer that is within 3 inches of concrete pad Paint en
236. d in the second sentence is expressed as a percentage of the maximum density obtained by the test procedure presented in ASTM D 1557 abbreviated as a percent of laboratory maximum density Since ASTM D 1557 applies only to soils that have 30 percent or less by weight of their particles retained on the 3 4 inch sieve express the degree of compaction for material having more than 30 percent by weight of their particles retained on the 3 4 inch sieve as a percentage of the maximum density in accordance with AASHTO T 180 and corrected with AASHTO T 224 To maintain the same percentage of coarse material use the remove and replace procedure as described in NOTE 8 of Paragraph 7 2 in AASHTO T 180 1 2 5 Hard Unyielding Materials Hard Unyielding materials comprise weathered rock dense consolidated deposits or conglomerate materials which are not included in the definition of rock with stones greater than 3 inches in any dimension or as defined by the pipe manufacturer whichever is smaller These materials usually require the use of heavy excavation equipment ripper teeth or jack hammers for removal 1 2 6 Rock Solid homogeneous interlocking crystalline material with firmly cemented laminated or foliated masses or conglomerate deposits neither of which can be removed without systematic drilling and blasting drilling and the use of expansion jacks or feather wedges or the use of backhoe mounted SECTION 31 00 00 Page 2
237. d systems c Install disconnect switches as specified in this section SECTION 26 27 14 00 20 Page 10 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 1 2 Scheduling of Work and Outages The Contract Clauses shall govern regarding permission for power outages scheduling of work coordination with Government personnel and special working conditions J313 Configuration Software The standard meter shall include the latest available version of firmware and software Meter shall either be programmed at the factory or shall be programmed in the field Meters shall have a password that shall be provided to the contracting officer upon project completion When field programming is performed turn field programming device over to the Contracting Officer at completion of project When interfacing software is used for a meter that is different than the existing meters in use at the Activity turn the software over to the Contracting Officer at completion of the project 2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Perform the following acceptance checks and tests on a random sample of 10 percent of the installed meters as designated by the Contracting Officer 2 1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests Perform in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests performed in accordance with NETA ATS a Meter Assembly 1 Visual and mechanical inspection a Compare equi
238. de common excavation with the satisfactory removal and disposal of all materials not classified as rock excavation 6 2 Rock Excavation Include rock excavation with blasting excavating grading disposing of material classified as rock and the satisfactory removal and disposal of boulders 1 2 cubic yard or more in volume solid rock rock material that is in ledges bedded deposits and unstratified masses which cannot be removed without systematic drilling and blasting firmly cemented conglomerate deposits possessing the characteristics of solid rock impossible to remove without systematic drilling and blasting and hard materials see Definitions Include the removal of any concrete or masonry structures except pavements exceeding 1 2 cubic yard in volume that may be encountered in the work in this classification If at any time during excavation the Contractor encounters material that may be classified as rock excavation uncover such material and notify the Contracting Officer The Contractor shall not proceed with the excavation of this material until the Contracting Officer has classified the materials as common excavation or rock excavation and has taken cross sections as required Failure on the part of the Contractor to uncover such material notify the Contracting Officer and allow ample time for classification and cross sectioning of the undisturbed surface of such material will cause the forfeiture of the Contractor s right of cl
239. de waterproof junctions and adequate shear transfer Seal joints watertight using preformed plastic strip conforming to AASHTO M 198 Type B Install sealing material in strict accordance with the sealant manufacturer s printed instructions Provide waterproofing at conduit duct entrances into structures and where access frame meets the top slab provide continuous grout seal 2 14 3 Handhole Frames and Covers Frames and covers of steel shall be welded by qualified welders in accordance with standard commercial practice Steel covers shall be rolled steel floor plate having an approved antislip surface Hinges shall be of stainless steel with bronze hinge pin 5 by 5 inches by approximately 3 16 inch thick without screw holes and shall be for full surface application by fillet welding Hinges shall have nonremovable pins and SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 14 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 five knuckles The surfaces of plates under hinges shall be true after the removal of raised antislip surface by grinding or other approved method 2 14 4 Brick for Manhole Collar Brick shall be sewer and manhole brick conforming to ASTM C32 Grade MS 2 14 5 Composite Fiberglass Handholes and Covers Provide handholes and covers of polymer concrete reinforced with heavy weave fiberglass 2215 CABLE SUPPORTS RACKS ARMS AND INSULATORS The metal portion of racks and arms shall be zinc coated after fabrication 2 4521 Cable Racks The wall b
240. degrees F at the time of mixing The temperature of the aggregate and mineral filler in the mixer shall not exceed 100 degree F when the bituminous material is added If slag aggregate is used the liquefier shall be sprayed over slag after coating with asphalt cement Aggregates and other ingredients shall be mixed for 35 seconds or longer as necessary to coat thoroughly all particles with bituminous material The finished mixture shall not vary from the approved JMF without prior approval of the Contracting Officer SECTION 32 12 19 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 4 TRANSPORTATION OF BITUMINOUS MIXTURES Transport mixtures to the site in trucks having tight clean smooth bodies Schedule deliveries so that the spreading and rolling of all mixtures delivered to the site can be completed during daylight unless approved artificial light is provided 3 5 PLACEMENT 3521 Thickness of Layer Spread the mixture in a layer not greater than 2 inches in thickness Allow each layer to cure at least 12 hours or longer if required to achieve proper curing before placing a succeeding layer 3 5 2 General Requirements for Use of Motor Grader When approved motor graders are used for spreading the mixture place the material on the roadbed in a windrow so that the proper amount of material is available to cover a predetermined width to the indicated compacted thickness The motor grader may be used to aerate the mixture b
241. devices to the FACP and remote fire alarm control units initiating circuits switches relays and terminals SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Provide plan view drawing showing device locations terminal cabinet locations junction boxes other related equipment conduit routing wire counts circuit identification in each conduit and circuit layouts for all floors Provide a complete description of the system operation in matrix format on the drawings Provide a complete list of device addresses and corresponding messages Include annotated catalog data in table format on the drawings showing manufacturer s name model voltage and catalog numbers for equipment and components Provide complete riser diagrams indicating the wiring sequence of devices and their connections to the control equipment Include a color code schedule for the wiring Include floor plans showing the locations of devices and equipment Battery power calculations Submit shop drawings not smaller than 24 by 36 inches Asa minimum the shop drawing submittal shall include the items listed above SD 03 Product Data Fire alarm control panel FACP G Terminal cabinets assemblies G Manual stations G Batteries G Battery chargers G Smoke sensors G Wiring and cable G Notification appliances G Addressable interface devices G Amplifiers G Tone generators G Digitalized voice generators G Waterflow detectors G T
242. e Contracting Officer reserves the right to require additional proof of competency or to reject the individual and call for certification of an alternate cable splicer 4 3 Cable Installer Qualifications Provide at least one onsite person in a supervisory position with a documentable level of competency and experience to supervise all cable pulling operations Provide a resume showing the cable installers experience in the last three years including a list of references complete with points of contact addresses and telephone numbers 4 4 Regulatory Requirements In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer Equipment materials installation and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 specified or indicated 1 4 5 Standard Products Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid open
243. e clean underlying course of foreign or objectionable matter with power blowers or power brooms supplemented by hand brooms and other cleaning methods where necessary During the placement of multiple lifts of bituminous concrete each succeeding lift of bituminous concrete shall have its underlying lift cleaned and provided with a bituminous tack coat if the time period between the placement of each lift of bituminous concrete exceeds 14 days or the underlying bituminous concrete has become dirty Remove grass and other vegetative growth from existing cracks and surfaces 3 1 6 Spraying of Contact Surfaces Spray contact surfaces of previously constructed pavement with a thin coat of bituminous materials to act as an anti stripping agent conforming to Section 32 12 21 BITUMINOUS ROAD MIX SURFACE COURSE Paint contact surfaces of structures with a thin coat of emulsion or other approved bituminous material prior to placing the bituminous mixture Tack coat the previously placed primed coats on base courses when surface has become excessively dirty and cannot be cleaned or when primed surface has cured to the extent that it has lost all bonding effect SECTION 32 12 17 Page 12 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 7A 3 3 2 PLACEMENT ead Machine Spreading The range of temperatures of the mixtures at the time of spreading shall be between 250 degrees F and 300 degrees F Bituminous concrete having temperatures less than minimum spreading
244. e contract From each source of supply submit a one gallon sample of bituminous material won 4 Equipment Calibration Furnish all equipment materials and labor necessary to calibrate the bituminous distributor and the aggregate spreader Perform all calibrations with the approved job materials and prior to applying the specified coatings to the prepared surface Perform calibration of the bituminous distributor in accordance with ASTM D 2995 Inspect all equipment prior to application of fog seal Perform work to calibrate tank and measuring devices of the distributor Perform inspection and calibration at the beginning of the work and at least once a day during construction 6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Deliver emulsified asphalt fog seal to the site in a homogenous and undamaged condition Inspect the materials for contamination and damage Unload and store the materials with a minimum of handling Protect stored aggregate from contamination and segregation Replace defective or damaged materials SECTION 32 01 13 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 1 7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Apply the coating when the existing surface is dry and when the weather is not foggy rainy or when the wind velocity will prevent the uniform application of the bitumen or aggregates Apply fog seal when atmospheric temperature is above 50 degrees F and rising or when pavement temperature is above 60 degrees F unless otherwis
245. e for connecting exposed water pipes 52 COMPONENTS oR Air Terminals Provide terminals in accordance with UL 96 except provide Class II for Class I and Class II applications Support air terminals more than 24 inches in length by suitable brace with guides not less than one half the height of the terminal 42 62 Ground Rods Provide ground rods made of copper clad steel conforming to conform to UL 467 Provide ground rods that are not less than 3 4 inch in diameter and 10 feet in length Do not mix ground rods of copper clad steel stainless steel galvanized ferrous or solid copper on the job SECTION 26 41 00 00 20 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 22a Connections and Terminations Provide connectors for splicing conductors that conform to UL 96 class as applicable Conductor connections can be made by clamps or welds including exothermic Provide style and size connectors required for the installation 2 4 Connector Fittings Provide connector fittings for end to end Tee or Y splices that conform to NFPA 780 aad Lightning Protection Components Provide bonding plates air terminal supports chimney bands clips and fasteners that conform to UL 96 classes as applicable PART 3 EXECUTION 3 sd INTEGRAL SYSTEM Lightning protection system consists of air terminals roof conductors down conductors ground connections grounding electrodes and ground loop conductor Electrically interc
246. e applied at ambient or material temperatures lower than 50 degrees F 3 5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Submit copies of all test reports within 24 hours of completion of the test 3 aBa L General Requirements Perform the inspection and tests described and meet the specified requirements for inspection details and frequency of testing Based upon the results of these inspections and tests take the action and submit SECTION 32 16 13 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 reports as required below and any additional tests to insure that the requirements of these specifications are met 3 5 2 Concrete Testing 3 53 21 Strength Testing Provide molded concrete specimens for strength tests Samples of concrete placed each day shall be taken not less than once a day nor less than once for every 250 cubic yards of concrete The samples for strength tests shall be taken in accordance with ASTM C172 C172M Cylinders for acceptance shall be molded in conformance with ASTM C31 C31M by an approved testing laboratory Each strength test result shall be the average of 2 test cylinders from the same concrete sample tested at 28 days unless otherwise specified or approved Concrete specified on the basis of compressive strength will be considered satisfactory if the averages of all sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed the specified strength and no individual strength test result falls below the specified strength by mo
247. e cables and roof conductors to the roof at upper and lower edges of roof and at intervals not to exceed 100 feet Bond down conductors to roof conductors and to lower edge of metal roof Where metal of roof is in small sections make connections between air terminals and down conductors to at least four sections of the metal roof Make connections electrically continuous and have a surface contact of at least 3 square inches 3525 2 Metal Roofs with Metal Walls Bond metal roof and metal walls so that they are electrically continuous and considered as one unit Connect air terminals to and make them electrically continuous with the metal roof as well as the roof down conductors Bond all roof conductors and down conductors to metal roof or metal walls at upper and lower edges at intervals not to exceed 100 feet Make all connections electrically continuous and have surface contact of at least 3 square inches EARNE Steel Frame Building Make the steel framework of the building electrically continuous Electrical continuity may be provided by bolting riveting or welding unless another specific method is indicated Connect air terminals to the structural steel framework at the ridge Provide short runs of conductors to join air terminals to the metal framework so that proper placing of air terminals is maintained Separate down conductors from air terminals to ground connections are not required Where water system enters the building securely
248. e completed forms shall be delivered to the Government for review and approval at least 30 days prior to the Contractor s scheduled need dates When the ACPCS database is to be populated in whole or in part from an existing or Government furnished electronic database demonstrate the field mapping scheme to correctly input the data 3 5 Group V Technical Data Package Provide the Group V Technical Data Package within 30 days after completing the Endurance Test The data package shall include 3 5 1 Group IV Manuals Submit finalized Group IV Manuals as specified in Group IV Technical Data Package bound in hardback loose leaf binders The draft copy used during site testing shall be updated with any changes required prior to final delivery of the manuals Each SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 manual s contents shall sha subcontractor installin include names servic sha be placed at beginning of each appen comp dur have a ing installation representative table of content the beginn letion of the endurance be addresses g equipment dix test shal The final copi identified on the cover and telephone numbers of each and systems for each item of equipment ts and tab sheets ing of each chapter a Ta Or sec 1127117 Each manual nd the nearest The manua
249. e deficiencies are determined and corrected 63 Crack Sealant Inspect the crack sealant for proper cure and set rating bonding to the bituminous pavement cohesive separation within the sealant reversion to liquid and entrapped air and voids Sealants exhibiting any of these deficiencies at any time prior to the final acceptance of the project shall be removed from the crack wasted and replaced as specified herein at no additional cost to the Government End of Section SECTION 32 0117 16 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 32 12 10 BITUMINOUS TACK AND PRIME COATS 08 08 PART 1 GENERAL ae T il UNIT PRICES 11 Measurement The bituminous material paid for will be the measured quantities used in the accepted work provided that the measured quantities are not 10 percent over the specified application rate Any amount of bituminous material more than 10 percent over the specified application rate for each application will be deducted from the measured quantities except for irregular areas where hand spraying of the bituminous material is necessary Express measured quantities in gallons at 60 degrees F Volumes measured at temperatures other than 60 degrees F shall be corrected using a coefficient of expansion of 0 00025 per degree F for asphalt emulsion walle 2 Payment The quantities of bituminous material determined as specified above will be paid for at the respective contrac
250. e directed PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 2 2 sL BITUMINOUS MATERIAL FOR SEAL COAT Bituminous material shall conform to AASHTO M 82 grade RC 800 52 AGGREGATE FOR SEAL COAT Provide aggregate consisting of crushed stone crushed gravel crushed slag sand and screenings The moisture content of the aggregate shall be not greater than 3 percent such that the aggregate will readily bond with the bituminous material Drying may be required as directed The aggregate shall conform to the gradation shown in TABLE I The aggregate gradation shall be allowed the tolerances given in TABLE II TABLE I AGGREGATE GRADATIONS Percent by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieves Gradation Sieve Size No 3 1 2 in 3 8 in No 4 100 No 8 10 40 No 16 0 10 No 50 0 5 TABLE II AGGREGATE GRADATION TOLERANCES Material Tolerances Aggregate passing the 3 8 in sieve Plus or minus and larger sieves 5 percent Aggregate passing the No 4 and Plus or minus smaller sieves 3 percent e A Coarse Aggregate Coarse aggregate shall consist of clean sound durable particles meeting the following requirements R A Film Retention The aggregate shall exhibit not less than 95 percent retention of bituminous film SECTION 32 01 13 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 SQ die Particle Shapes The quantity of flat and elongated particles on any sieve shall not exceed 20 percent by weight when determined in accordance with ASTM D
251. e ground loop or nearest ground connection of the building or structure Where buildings or structures and connecting ramps are clad with metal connect metal of the buildings or structures and metal of the ramp in a manner to ensure electrical continuity in order to avoid the possibility of a flash over or spark due to a difference in potential Make connections electrically continuous and have a surface contact area of at least 3 square inches 3 25 5 Tanks and Towers 3 52 5 al Wooden Tanks and Towers Electrically interconnect lightning protection system components such as air terminals ridge cables down conductors ground connections and grounds to form the shortest distance to ground without passing through any nonconducting parts of the structure Where the roof of the structure ends in a peak a single air terminal not less than 2 feethigh will be regarded as sufficient When structure does not end in a peak provide air terminals not less than 2 feet high at intervals not exceeding 25 feet along the perimeter of the structure When the tank or tower is an adjunct of a building near or touching the perimeter extend one of the down conductors directly to a ground connection and connect the other to lightning protection of the building When tank or tower is set well within the perimeter of the building connect both down conductors to lightning protection system of the building When height of the structure exceeds 100 feet cross co
252. e lugs for electrical connections Current transformers shall be accessible and the associated wiring shall be installed in an organized and neat workmanship arrangement Current transformers that are retrofitted onto existing switchgear busbar can be a busbar split core design Current transformers shall have 1 Insulation Class All 600 volt and below current transformers shall be rated 10 KV BIL 2 Frequency Nominal 60 Hz 3 Burden Burden class shall be selected for the load 4 Phase Angle Range 0 to 60 degrees Meter shall accept current input from standard instrument transformers 5A secondary current transformers Current inputs shall have a continuous rating in accordance with IEEE C57 13 Provide one single ratio current transformer for each phase per power transformer with characteristics listed in the following table Single Ratio Current Transformer Characteristics 24 kVA 750 Ts 4 Sec Volt CT Ratio RF Meter Acc Class 208Y 120 2000 5 1 0 0 3 thru B0 09 Meter Requirements Notwithstanding any other provision of this contract meters shall be no other product will be acceptable Electricity meters shall include the following features a b Cs Meter shall comply with ANSI C12 1 NEMA C12 19 and ANSI C12 20 Meter sockets shall comply with ANSI C12 7 Meter shall comply with IEC 62053 22 certified by a qualified third party test laboratory SECTION 26 27 14 00 20 Page
253. e of dust dirt old sealant residue or foreign debris that might prevent the sealant material from bonding to the asphalt pavement After final cleaning and immediately prior to sealing blow out the cracks with compressed air and leave them completely free of debris and water Ensure that sandblasting does not damage the pavement 3 126 Backup Material Use backup material on all cracks that have a depth greater than 3 4 inch Insert the backup material into the lower portion of the crack as shown on the drawings Ensure that the backup material is placed at the specified depth and is not stretched or twisted during installation SECTION 32 0117 16 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 1 7 Rate of Progress of Crack Preparation Limit the stages of crack preparation which include routing sandblasting of the crack faces air pressure cleaning and placing of the backup material to only that linear footage that can be sealed during the same day 342 PREPARATION OF SEALANT Do not heat hot poured sealants in excess of the safe heating temperature recommended by the manufacturer as shown on the sealant containers Withdraw and waste sealant that has been overheated or subjected to application temperatures for over 4 hours or that has remained in the applicator at the end of the day s operation 363 INSTALLATION OF SEALANT Submit manufacturer s instructions 30 _ days prior to the use of the material on the project Installa
254. e of transaction Time of transaction and Location of transaction The PACS design shall have the following attribute Shall be able to produce user requested reports of the Cardholder dossier including Cardholder info Links to stored SA video License plate image Drivers image Transaction information Date of last 10 transactions Time of last 10 transaction Location of last transaction 10 All communications within the ECP shal have the following attribute dispatch shall have the ability to effectively and efficiently communicate in a timel manner with the users of the ECP SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 44 1127117 Verification Method Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Be SEa Description 3 2 2 4 communications within the ECP shall ave the following attributes all fforts shall be made to inform the user f the actions they must perform during stages of ECP operation This notification shall be such that the user has sufficient time in which to prepare or perform the desired function without risk of injury or damage to the user the vehicle or the ECP 62 Bre 2is 254 communications within the ECP shall ve the following attribute all forts shall be made to inform the user the actions they must perform during stages of ECP operation Be in ompliance with the relevant State or local DoT MUTCD and SCCDTEA pamphlet 63 322 204 nmunications within the ECE he attributes described in
255. e plastic 0 125 inches thick white with black center core Surface shall be matte SECTION 27 10 00 Page 11 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 finish Corners shall be square Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2 5 inches Lettering shall be a minimum of 0 25 inches high normal block style 10 TESTS INSPECTIONS AND VERIFICATIONS 10 1 Factory Reel Tests Provide documentation of the testing and verification actions taken by manufacturer to confirm compliance with TIA 568 C 1 TIA 568 C 2 TIA 568 C 3 cables PART 3 EXECUTION 3 3 sL INSTALLATION Install telecommunications cabling and pathway systems including the horizontal and backbone cable pathway systems telecommunications outlet connector assemblies and associated hardware in accordance with NECA BICSI 568 TIA 568 C 1 TIA 568 C 2 TIA 568 C 3 TIA 569 NFPA 70 and UL standards as applicable Provide cabling in a star topology network Pathways and outlet boxes shall be installed as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Install telecommunications cabling with copper media in accordance with the following criteria to avoid potential electromagnetic interference between power and telecommunications equipment The interference ceiling shall not exceed 3 0 volts per meter measured over the usable bandwidth of the telecommunications cabling Cabling shall be run with horizontal and vertic
256. e portions of IEEE 48 2 10 TAPE 24 0 4 Insulating Tape UL 510 plastic insulating tape capable of performing in a continuous temperature environment of 80 degrees C 2m L2 Buried Warning and Identification Tape Provide detectable tape in accordance with Section 31 23 00 00 20 EXCAVATION AND FILL 2 10 3 Fireproofing Tape Provide tape composed of a flexible conformable unsupported intumescent elastomer Tape shall be not less than 030 inch thick noncorrosive to cable sheath self extinguishing noncombustible and shall not deteriorate SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 12 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 when subjected to oil water gases salt water sewage and fungus 2 11 PULL ROPE Shall be plastic or flat pull line bull line having a minimum tensile strength of 200 pounds 2 12 GROUNDING AND BONDING 2 12 1 Driven Ground Rods Provide copper clad steel ground rods conforming to UL 467 not less than 3 4 inch in diameter by 10 feet in length Sectional type rods may be used for rods 20 feet or longer 22 122 Grounding Conductors Stranded bare copper conductors shall conform to ASTM B8 Class B soft drawn unless otherwise indicated Solid bare copper conductors shall conform to ASTM B1 for sizes No 8 and smaller Insulated conductors shall be of the same material as phase conductors and green color coded except that conductors shall be rated no more than 600 volts Aluminum is not acceptable 2 es CAST IN
257. e sample will be retained by the Government 4 TRIAL APPLICATION SEAL COAT Prior to applying the seal coat place a test section at least 100 feet long by 20 feet wide using the approved job materials and roll them in accordance with the specified requirements Perform tests to determine the application rates of the bitumen and aggregate If the tests indicate that the seal coat test section does not conform to the specification requirements make necessary adjustments to the application equipment and to the spreading and rolling procedures and construct additional test sections for conformance to the specifications Where test sections do not conform to specification requirements remove seal coat at no expense to the Government no separate payment will be made for seal coat materials and labor either in placement or removal of any test section Perform quality control sampling and testing during construction as required in paragraph FIELD QUALITY CONTROL above s5 FOG SEAL APPLICATION Dal Sample Application Determine the required application rate from a sample installation Select an area of the prepared pavement at least 300 feet long and as wide as the distributor spray bar Dilute emulsified asphalt with an equal part of water or as recommended by the manufacturer Apply the water diluted asphalt emulsion in at least three test sections each a minimum of 100 feet long The trial applications shall be made at the rates of 0 08
258. e shall be retained for comparison against the remainder of the fixtures The sample may be used in the final fixture installation 6 3 Regulatory Requirements In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been SECTION 26 51 00 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 T1277 substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer Equipment materials installation and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated 1 6 4 Standard Products Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2 year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2 year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be products of a single manufacturer however the component parts
259. e wire designation used on the Contractor s schematic and connection diagrams The wire terminal point designations used on the Contractor s wiring diagrams and printed on terminal block marking strips may be according to the Contractor s standard practice however additional wire and cable designations for identification of remote external circuits shall be provided for the Government s wire designations Prints of the marking strips drawings submitted for approval will be so marked and returned to the Contractor for addition of the designations to the terminal strips and tracings along with any rearrangement of points required 1 10 Splices Make splices in accessible locations Make splices in conductors No 10 AWG and smaller diameter with insulated pressure type connector Make splices in conductors No 8 AWG and larger diameter with solderless connector and cover with insulation material equivalent to conductor insulation Post Ee tO ca Splices of Aluminum Conductors Make with solderless circumferential compression type aluminum bodied connectors UL listed for AL CU Remove surface oxides from aluminum conductors by wire brushing and immediately apply oxide inhibiting joint compound and insert in connector After joint is made wipe away excess SECTION 26 20 00 Page 27 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 joint compound and insulate splice ioe ee Covers and Device Plates Install with edges in continuous contact w
260. e with TIA EIA 606 that include telecommunications rooms plan views pathway layout cable tray racks ladder racks etc mechanical electrical layout and wall elevations Drawings shall show layout of applicable equipment including incoming cable stub or connector blocks building protector assembly outgoing cable connector blocks patch panels and equipment spaces and cabinet racks Drawings shall include a complete list of equipment and material equipment rack details proposed layout and anchorage of equipment and appurtenances and equipment relationship to other parts of the work including clearance for maintenance and operation Drawings may also be an enlargement of a congested area of T1 or T2 drawings 1 6 2 Telecommunications Qualifications Work under this section shall be performed by and the equipment shall be provided by the approved telecommunications contractor and key personnel Qualifications shall be provided for the telecommunications system contractor the telecommunications system installer and the supervisor if different from the installer A minimum of 30 days prior to installation submit documentation of the experience of the telecommunications contractor and of the key personnel EE l Telecommunications Contractor The telecommunications contractor shall be a firm which is regularly and professionally engaged in the business of the applications installation and testing of the specified telecommunication
261. ect the most expeditious route through the ECP im SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 43 Submarine A School BQ 534 Si 2e243 EPAIA PARAE S RS STARS egr A 7 3 2 2 4 Description he PACS design shall have the following ttribute Be able to produce card ransaction reports for all ECPs from ne centralized physical and software ocation These reports shall be based n card transactions at a given ECP and hall include all electronically rocessed card transactions regardl f the source of the transaction H TOTHNROHFOTAH he PACS design shall have the following attribute Shall be able to produce user requested reports Shall produce ECP traffic reports The report shall give traffic counts in 15 minutes bins Produce both a linear chart and tabular report The report shall also include the number and periods when the queue detection feature was enabled The PACS design shall have the following attribute shall be able to produce user requested reports Shall produce alarm reports with Links to stored SA video Transaction image from fixed camera associated with alarm Transaction information Alarm description Date of transaction Time of transaction and Location of transaction The PACS design shall have the following attribute shall produce access granted reports with Cardholder info Links to stored SA video License plate image Drivers image Transaction information Dat
262. ection of circuit neutral conductors Provide separate ground bus identified as equipment grounding bus per UL 67 for connecting grounding conductors bond to steel cabinet Die LEDS Circuit Breakers UL 489 thermal magnetic type solid state type having a minimum short circuit current rating equal to the short circuit current rating of the panelboard in which the circuit breaker shall be mounted Breaker terminals shall be UL listed as suitable for type of conductor provided Where indicated on the drawings provide circuit breakers with shunt trip devices Series rated circuit breakers and plug in circuit breakers are unacceptable 2 12 3 1 Multipole Breakers Provide common trip type with single operating handle Breaker design shall be such that overload in one pole automatically causes all poles to open Maintain phase sequence throughout each panel so that any three adjacent breaker poles are connected to Phases A B and C respectively 2 12 3 2 Circuit Breaker With GFI UL 943 and NFPA 70 Provide with push to test button visible indication of tripped condition and ability to detect and trip on current imbalance of 6 milliamperes or greater per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFI devices for personnel protection and 20 milliamperes or greater per requirements of UL 943 for Class B GFI per equipment protection 2 12 3 3 Circuit Breakers for HVAC Equipment Circuit breakers for HVAC equipment having motors group
263. ections for high resistance using low resistance ohmmeter verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method or performing thermographic survey 9 Confirm correct operation and sequencing of electrical and mechanical interlock systems 10 Clean switchboard 11 Inspect insulators for evidence of physical damage or contaminated surfaces 12 Verify correct barrier installation and operation 13 Exercise all active components 14 Inspect all mechanical indicating devices for correct operation 15 Verify that vents are clear 16 Test operation alignment and penetration of instrument SECTION 26 23 00 Page 11 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 Da T L7 transformer withdrawal disconnects Inspect control power transformers Electrical Tests 1 ar 2 Perform insulation resistance tests on each bus section Perform overpotential tests Perform insulation resistance test on control wiring Do not perform this test on wiring connected to solid state components Perform control wiring performance test Perform primary current injection tests on the entire current circuit in each section of assembly Verify operation of switchboard heaters Circuit Breakers Low Voltage Molded Case with Solid State Trips Bs Visual and Mechanical Inspection Iy 6 Compare nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings Inspec
264. ective panel 2 Transmission of a supervisory signal to the fire department s A trouble condition shall automatically initiate the following functions 1 Visual indication of the system trouble on the FACP and sound the audible alarm at the respective panel 2 Transmission of a trouble signal to the fire department t The maximum permissible elapsed time between the actuation of an initiating device and its indication at the FACP shall be 15 seconds u The maximum elapsed time between the occurrence of the trouble condition and its indication at the FACP shall not exceed 200 seconds 2 2 3 System Monitoring a Valves Each valve affecting the proper operation of a fire protection system including automatic sprinkler control valves standpipe control valves sprinkler service entrance valve valves at fire pumps and valves at backflow preventers whether supplied under this contract or existing shall be electrically monitored to ensure its proper position Each tamper switch shall be provided with a separate address 2 2 4 Overvoltage and Surge Protection a Signaling Line Circuit Surge Protection For systems having circuits located outdoors communications equipment shall be protected against surges induced on any signaling line circuit and shall comply with the applicable requirements of IEEE C62 41 1 and IEEE C62 41 2 Cables and conductors which serve as communications links shall have surge protection circuits inst
265. ed For designated systems as indicated provide backup power supply including transformers connected to Provide for automatic switchover and alarm upon failure of primary control circuit 2 15 4 Enclosures for Motor Controllers NEMA ICS 6 22 05 25 Multiple Speed Motor Controllers and Reversible Motor Controllers Across the line type electrically and mechanically interlocked Multiple speed controllers shall have compelling relays and shall be multiple button station type with pilot lights for each speed SECTION 26 20 00 Page 17 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 15 6 Pushbutton Stations Provide with start stop momentary contacts having one normally open and one normally closed set of contacts and red lights to indicate when motor is running Stations shall be heavy duty oil tight design 2 15 7 Pilot and Indicating Lights 2 16 MANUAL MOTOR STARTERS MOTOR RATED SWITCHES SingleDoubleThree pole designed for flush surface mounting with overload protection Bie M6 Pilot Lights Big L7 LOCKOUT REQUIREMENTS Provide disconnecting means capable of being locked out for machines and other equipment to prevent unexpected startup or release of stored energy in accordance with 29 CFR 1910 147 Mechanical isolation of machines and other equipment shall be in accordance with requirements of Division 23 Mechanical 2 18 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM Provide system of telecommunications wire supporting structures pathwa
266. ed Repair damaged concrete and clean concrete discolored during construction Concrete that is damaged shall be removed and reconstructed for the entire length between regularly scheduled joints Refinishing the damaged portion will not be acceptable Removed damaged portions shall be disposed of as directed 3 4 4 Protective Coating Protective coating of linseed oil mixture shall be applied to the exposed to view concrete surface after the curing period if concrete will be exposed to de icing chemicals within 6 weeks after placement Concrete to receive a protective coating shall be moist cured 3 45407 Application Curing and backfilling operation shall be completed prior to applying two coats of protective coating Concrete shall be surface dry and clean before each application Coverage shall be by spray application at not more than 50 square yards gallon for first application and not more than 70 square yards gallon for second application except that the number of applications and coverage for each application for commercially prepared mixture shall be in accordance with the manufacturer s instructions Coated surfaces shall be protected from vehicular and pedestrian traffic until dry 3 4 4 2 Precautions Protective coating shall not be heated by direct application of flame or electrical heaters and shall be protected from exposure to open flame sparks and fire adjacent to open containers or applicators Material shall not b
267. ed and placed in storage shall be stored with protection from the weather humidity and temperature variations dirt and dust or other contaminants 1 7 WARRANTY The complete system shall be warranted by the manufacturer for a period of one year or the contracted period of any extended warrantee agreed upon by SECTION 26 29 23 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 the contractor and the Government after successful completion of the acceptance test Any component failing to perform its function as specified and documented shall be repaired or replaced by the contractor at no additional cost to the Government Items repaired or replaced shall be warranted for an additional period of at least one year from the date that it becomes functional again as specified in the FAR CLAUSE 52 246 21 8 MAINTENANCE 8 1 Spare Parts Manufacturers provide spare parts in accordance with recommended spare parts list 8 2 Maintenance Support During the warranty period the Contractor shall provide on site on call maintenance services by Contractor s personnel on the following basis The service shall be on a per call basis with 36 hour response Contractor shall support the maintenance of all hardware and software of the system Various personnel of different expertise shall be sent on site depending on the nature of the maintenance service required Costs shall include travel local transportation living expenses and labor rates of the ser
268. ed plan drawings shall be a minimum of 11 by 17 inches in size using a minimum scale of 1 8 inch per foot except as specified otherwise Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location layout and arrangement control panels accessories piping ductwork and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation maintenance and replacement of operating equipment devices Submittals shall include the nameplate data size and capacity Submittals shall also include applicable federal military industry and technical society publication references Cake L Telecommunications Drawings Provide registered communications distribution designer RCDD approved drawings in accordance with TIA EIA 606 The identifier for each termination and cable shall appear on the drawings Drawings shall depict final telecommunications installed wiring system infrastructure in accordance with TIA EIA 606 The drawings should provide details required to prove that the distribution system shall properly support connectivity from the EF telecommunications and ER telecommunications CD s and FD s to the telecommunications work area outlets Provide a plastic laminated schematic of the a
269. edestal displays and annunciates message Enter PIN As Required 7 Access pedestal displays message Access Granted 8 Drop arm is raised 9 Drop arm barrier signal notifies driver to proceed LO If after 60 seconds the vehicle does not exit the access pedestal area a Lane Blocked alarm is generated and Security notified 11 Drop arm is lowered as soon as vehicle clears the access pedestal 5 1 2 1 4 2 Valid ID card Invalid PIN access is denied Event Sequence Ww ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 17 Submarine A School BO 534 1127117 1 Vehicle enters Credential Zone 2 Vehicle presence is detected via vehicle presence sensor 3 Access pedestal displays and annunciates message Present I D Card 4 Driver presents authorized I D card to Reader 5 System validates I D 6 Access pedestal displays and annunciates message Enter PIN As Required 7 System determines that driver s PIN is not valid 8 Access pedestal displays message ACCESS DENIED TRY AGAIN 9 Vehicle trap Gate remains closed 10 The user will be allowed 3 attempts in total or an elapsed time not to exceed 12 seconds 11 On the 3 failed attempt the access pedestal displays mess
270. eeding layer of pavement is placed by protecting the surface against damage and by repairing and recoating deficient areas Allow the prime coat to cure without being disturbed for a period of at least 48 hours or longer as may be necessary to attain penetration into the treated course Furnish and spread enough sand to effectively blot up and cure excess bituminous material 3 36 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Samples of the bituminous material used shall be obtained by the Contractor as directed under the supervision of the Contracting Officer The sample may be retained and tested by the Government at no cost to the Contractor Sal SAMPLING AND TESTING Submit copies of all test results for emulsified asphalt and bituminous materials within 24 hours of completion of tests Furnish certified copies of the manufacturer s test reports indicating temperature viscosity relationship for cutback asphalt compliance with applicable specified requirements not less than 30 days before the material is required in the work Perform sampling and testing by an approved commercial testing laboratory or by facilities furnished by the Contractor No work requiring testing will be permitted until the facilities have been inspected and SECTION 32 12 10 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 approved cc peey are Sampling The samples of bituminous material unless otherwise specified shall be in accordance with ASTM D 140 D 140M or AASHTO T 40 Sources
271. el compression type 2 8 Fittings for Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit NEMA TC 3 for PVC and UL 514B AES Liquid Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit UL 1660 SECTION 26 20 00 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 33 SURFACE RACEWAY eed Surface Metal Raceway UL 5 two piece painted steel totally enclosed snap cover type Alternate receptacles shall be wired on different circuits 232 Surface Nonmetallic Raceway UL 5A nonmetallic totally enclosed snap cover type Alternate receptacles shall be wired on different circuits 4 OUTLET BOXES AND COVERS UL 514A cadmium or zinc coated if ferrous metal UL 514C if nonmetallic Ae Outlet Boxes for Telecommunications System Provide standard type 4 inches square by 2 1 8 inches deep Outlet boxes for wall mounted telecommunications outlets shall be 4 by 2 1 8 by 2 1 8 inches deep Depth of boxes shall be large enough to allow manufacturers recommended conductor bend radii 5 CABINETS JUNCTION BOXES AND PULL BOXES Volume greater than 100 cubic inches UL 50 hot dip zinc coated if sheet steel 6 WIRES AND CABLES Wires and cables shall meet applicable requirements of NFPA 70 and UL for type of insulation jacket and conductor specified or indicated Wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used sbel Conductors Conductors No 8 AWG and larger diameter shall be stranded Conductors No 10 AWG
272. el in tanks and bushings 8 Verify that positive pressure is maintained on gas blanketed transformers 9 Perform specific inspections and mechanical tests as recommended by manufacturer 10 Verify de energized tap changer position is left as specified 11 Verify the presence of transformer surge arresters b Electrical tests 1 Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low resistance ohmmeter 2 Verify proper secondary voltage phase to phase and SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 15 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Beck gdje phase to neutral after energization and prior to loading Current Transformers Visual and mechanical inspection 1 Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings Inspect physical and mechanical condition Verify correct connection Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and secondary circuit wiring Verify the unit is clean Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low resistance ohmmeter verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method or performing thermographic survey Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections provide good contact Verify correct operation of transformer withdrawal mechanism and grounding operation Verify appropriate lubrication on moving current carrying parts and on moving and sliding surfaces
273. electrical work for other than encasement of underground ducts shall be 4000 psi minimum 28 day compressive strength unless specified otherwise All concrete shall conform to the requirements of Section 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE sel SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL wy grea Transformer Test Schedule The Government reserves the right to witness tests Provide transformer test schedule for tests to be performed at the manufacturer s test facility Submit required test schedule and location and notify the Contracting Officer 30 calendar days before scheduled test date Notify Contracting Officer 15 calendar days in advance of changes to scheduled date a Test Instrument Calibration SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 11 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 1 The manufacturer shall have a calibration program which assures that all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated accuracy 2 The accuracy shall be directly traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology 3 Instrument calibration frequency schedule shall not exceed 12 months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty equipment 4 Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment 5 Calibrating standard shall be of higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested 6 Keep up to date records that indicate dates and test results of instruments calibrated or tested For instruments calibrated by the manufacturer on
274. eled as AT FP Hand holes or Quazite boxes shall be embossed with AT FP All equipment intercoms access pedestals camera poles distribution boxes shall be installed on raised concrete islands At no time shall equipment be mounted directly to the roadway 5 2 2 2 2 Lighting Proper lighting of This is to new light of the ECP applies ECP ligh tin e Ligh val Comm Ligh Ol tin pamphlet 55 1 Lightin g of g ting shall of 80 ission on of chapter the ECP sh the ECP is required to no contain eae saf nsur or high Illuminati Ce as on the ECP shall g of th 5 a minimum of 50 Lux Energy Section levels Adaptive efficient C 4 2 4 2 ligh thin wit o Th th 5 2 The ECP nares e lighting shall ting shall be the ECP du ring extend access pedestal area shall the following attributes have a Color Rendering defined by the adhere to Chapter 7 of UFC 6 14 of UFC 4 022 01 and section 11 of SD be International operation t intended for existing lighting but only ting added to the ECP Index CRI 39305 DCTEA illuminated to lighting shall be used return to the appropriate PACS PACS performs the identity management The PACS uses an Access Control tim the vehicl
275. ell as from a remote location The AVG L 3 modes of operation Automated Manual and Closed operation shall be the primary mode of operation for the AVG L system 5 1 2 1 1 Automated Operation For low volume operation all gates begin in which denies access to the base When shall have Automated the closed position a vehicl nters the approach area of an ingress lane the driver will be required to present their approved credential along with the card reader However local CONOPS will change this to require a valid credential only The credentials shall be compared against the locally access control system database ACDB verify that a passback violation has not occurred their PACS PIN to have the ability to maintained for access righ ts and The ability to further validate the transaction against other authoritative data sources via the Joint Gatekeeper shall also be provided System JGS int terface If the credential is approved for access the vehicl shall be notified to proceed through the ECP wn ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 16 operator Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 If the credential is not approved for access the driver shall be directed via the access control reader on screen display to exit the ECP In the event that the credential cannot be authenticated
276. engraved laminated phenolic resin nameplate Lettering on the nameplate shall say Fire Alarm Control Panel and shall not be less than one inch high Provide prominent rigid plastic or metal identification plates for lamps circuits meters fuses and switches The cabinet shall be provided in a sturdy steel housing complete with back box hinged steel door with cylinder lock and surface mounting provisions 2 2 10 2 Control Modules Provide power and control modules to perform all functions of the FACP Provide audible signals to indicate any alarm supervisory or trouble condition The alarm signals shall be different from the trouble signal Connect circuit conductors entering or leaving the panel to screw type terminals with each terminal marked for identification Locate diodes and relays if any on screw terminals in the FACP Circuits operating at 24 VDC shall not operate at less than 21 6 volts Circuits operating at any other voltage shall not have a voltage drop exceeding 10 percent of nominal voltage 2 2103 Silencing Switches a Alarm Silencing Switch Provide an alarm silencing switch at the FACP which shall silence the audible signal but not affect the visual alarm indicator This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm b Supervisory Trouble Silencing Switch Provide supervisory and trouble Silencing switch which shall silence the audible trouble and supervisory signal but not extinguish the v
277. enter of fixture for wall mounted fixtures Obtain approval of the exact mounting for lighting fixtures on the job before commencing installation and where applicable after coordinating with the type style and pattern of the ceiling being installed Recessed and semi recessed fixtures shall be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires or straps or rods per fixture and located near each corner of each fixture Ceiling grid clips are not allowed as an alternative to independently supported light fixtures Round fixtures or fixtures smaller in size than the ceiling grid shall be independently supported from the building structure by a minimum of four wires or straps or rods per fixture spaced approximately equidistant around the fixture Do not support fixtures by ceiling acoustical panels Where fixtures of sizes less than the ceiling grid are indicated to be centered in the acoustical panel support such fixtures independently and provide at least two 3 4 inch metal channels spanning and secured to the ceiling tees for centering and aligning the fixture Provide wires or straps or rods for lighting fixture support in this section Lighting fixtures installed in suspended ceilings shall also comply with the requirements of Section 09 51 00 ACOUSTICAL SECTION 26 51 00 Page 15 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 CEILINGS 2153 Suspended Fixtures Suspended fixtures shall be provided with 45 degree swive
278. entify cable link in accordance with the paragraph LABELING in this section 3 1 4 3 Cables Unshielded twisted pair and fiber optic cables shall have a minimum of 12 inches of slack cable loosely coiled into the telecommunications outlet boxes Minimum manufacturer s bend radius for each type of cable shall not be exceeded 3 1 4 4 Pull Cords Pull cords shall be installed in conduit serving telecommunications outlets that do not have cable installed 3 1 5 Telecommunications Space Termination Install termination hardware required for Category 6 system An insulation displacement tool shall be used for terminating copper cable to insulation displacement connectors S416 Electrical Penetrations Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance rated wall partitions floors or ceilings as specified in Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING SECTION 27 10 00 Page 13 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Ze lT Grounding and Bonding Provide in accordance with TIA J STD 607 NFPA 70 and as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 32 LABELING Si Besa Labels Provide labeling in accordance with TIA EIA 606 Handwritten labeling is unacceptable Stenciled lettering for voice and data circuits shall be provided using thermal ink transfer process 342 x2 Cable Cables shall be labeled using color labels on both ends with identifiers in accordance with TIA EIA 606 3 2 3 Termination Hardware Worksta
279. er dielectric strength shall be minimum 400 volts per mil at 60 Hz and tensile strength shall be minimum 3500 psi 2 1 3 Plastic Conduit for Direct Burial UL 651 Schedule 80 2 1 4 Plastic Duct for Concrete Encasement NEMA TC 6 amp 8 and ASTM F 512 UL 651 EPC 40 PVC SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 flea Innerduct Provide corrugated or solid wall polyethylene PE or PVC innerducts with pullwire Size as indicated 1 6 Conduit Sealing Compound Compounds for sealing ducts and conduit shall have a putty like consistency workable with the hands at temperatures as low as 35 degrees F shall neither slump at a temperature of 300 degrees F nor harden materially when exposed to the air Compounds shall adhere to clean surfaces of fiber or plastic ducts metallic conduits or conduit coatings concrete masonry or lead any cable sheaths jackets covers or insulation materials and the common metals Compounds shall form a seal without dissolving noticeably changing characteristics or removing any of the ingredients Compounds shall have no injurious effect upon the hands of workmen or upon materials Inflatable bladders may be used as an option sL Fittings Pe oy eae Metal Fittings UL 514B 1 7 2 PVC Conduit Fittings UL 514B UL 651 vite bx Ds PVC Duct Fittings NEMA TC 9 kee Outlet Boxes for Steel Conduit Outlet boxes for use with rigid or flexible steel conduit sha
280. er supervising technician and testing technicians b A listing of equipment to be used in developing the job mix c A copy of the laboratory s quality control system d Evidence of participation in the AASHTO Materials Reference Laboratory AMRL program 4 1 Tests Perform testing in accordance with the following a Specific Gravity Test of Asphalt ASTM D 70 b Coarse Aggregate Tests 1 Bulk Specific Gravity ASTM C127 2 Abrasion Loss ASTM C131 3 Soundness Loss ASTM C88 c Weight of Slag Test ASTM C29 C29M d Percent of Crushed Pieces in Gravel Count by observation and weight e Fine Aggregate Tests 1 Bulk Specific Gravity ASTM C128 2 Soundness Loss ASTM C88 f Specific Gravity of Mineral Filler ASTM C188 or ASTM D 854 SECTION 32 12 17 Page 10 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 g Bituminous Mixture Tests 1 Bulk Specific Gravity ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726 2 Theoretical Maximum Specific Gravity ASTM D2041 D2041M 3 Tensile Strength Ratio ASTM D 4867 D 4867M 4 2 Specimens ASTM D 1559 for the making and testing of bituminous specimens with the following exceptions a Compaction Apply 50 blows for mix numbers 1 and 2 b Curves Plot curves for the binder and wearing courses to show the effect on the test properties of at least four different percentages of asphalt on the unit weight stability flow air voids and voids in mineral aggregate each point on the curves shall re
281. er of the pavement as directed 338 FINISHING Finish the surface of the top layer to grade and cross section shown Finished surface shall be uniform texture Light blading during rolling may be necessary for the finished surface to conform to the lines grades and cross sections Should the surface for any reason become rough corrugated uneven in texture or traffic marked prior to completion such unsatisfactory portion shall be scarified reworked relaid or replaced as directed Should any portion of the course when laid become watersoaked for any reason that portion shall be removed immediately and the mix placed in a windrow aerated and then spread shaped and rolled as specified 39 THICKNESS REQUIREMENTS The compacted thickness of the pavement shall be within 1 2 inch of the thickness indicated Where measured thickness of the pavement is more than 1 2 inch deficient correct such areas by scarifying adding new material of proper gradation reblading and recompacting as directed Where the measured thickness of the pavement is more than 1 2 inch thicker than indicated the pavement shall be considered as conforming to the specified thickness requirements 3 10 SURFACE SMOOTHNESS REQUIREMENTS 3 10 1 Finished Surfaces 3 10 11 Roads and Streets The surface of the finished pavement shall be checked longitudinally with a 12 foot straightedge and transversely with a template cut to the specified cross section
282. er shall consist of hard pressed fiberboard 2 4 2 Expansion Joint Filler Premolded Expansion joint filler premolded shall conform to ASTM D 1751 or ASTM D 1752 1 2 inch thick unless otherwise indicated 2e JOINT SEALANTS Joint sealant cold applied shall conform to ASTM C920 or ASTM D5893 D5893M 226 FORM WORK Design and construct form work to ensure that the finished concrete will conform accurately to the indicated dimensions lines and elevations and within the tolerances specified Forms shall be of wood or steel straight of sufficient strength to resist springing during depositing and consolidating concrete Wood forms shall be surfaced plank 2 inches nominal thickness straight and free from warp twist loose knots splits or other defects Wood forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet Radius bends may be formed with 3 4 inch boards laminated to the required thickness Steel forms shall be channel formed sections with a flat top surface and with welded braces at each end and at not less than two intermediate points Ends of steel forms shall be interlocking and self aligning Steel forms shall include flexible forms for radius forming corner forms form spreaders and fillers Steel forms shall have a nominal length of 10 feet with a minimum of 3 welded stake pockets per form Stake pins shall be solid steel rods with chamfered heads and pointed tips designed for use with steel forms 2 6 1 Sidewalk Forms Sidewa
283. erminated on adjacent terminal points 2715 2 Control Circuit Terminal Blocks NEMA ICS 4 Control circuit terminal blocks for control wiring shall be molded or fabricated type with barriers rated not less than 600 volts The terminals shall be removable binding fillister or washer head screw type or of the stud type with contact and locking nuts The terminals SECTION 26 20 00 Page 16 Submarine A School BQ 534 V2 7A shall be not less than No 10 in size and shall have sufficient length and space for connecting at least two indented terminals for 10 AWG conductors to each terminal The terminal arrangement shall be subject to the approval of the Contracting Officer and not less than four 4 spare terminals or 10 percent whichever is greater shall be provided on each block or group of blocks Modular pull apart terminal blocks will be acceptable provided they are of the channel or rail mounted type The Contractor shall submit data showing that the proposed alternate will accommodate the specified number of wires are of adequate current carrying capacity and are constructed to assure positive contact between current carrying parts 2 LOD Types of Terminal Blocks a Short Circuiting Type Short circuiting type terminal blocks shall be furnished for all current transformer secondary leads and shall have provision for shorting together all leads from each current transformer without first opening any circuit Terminal blocks sh
284. ermine density of laboratory prepared specimens and cored samples in accordance with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726 as applicable Separate pavement layers by sawing or other approved means Maximum allowable deficiency at any point excluding joints shall not be more than 2 percent less than the specified density for any course The average density of each course excluding joints shall be not less than the specified density Joint densities shall not be more than 2 percent less than specified course densities and are not included when calculating average course densities When the deficiency exceeds the specified tolerances correct each such representative area or areas by removing the deficient pavement and replacing with new pavement b Thickness Determine thickness of binder and wearing courses from samples taken for the field density test The maximum allowable deficiency at any point shall not be more than 1 4 inch less than the thickness for the indicated course Average thickness of course or of combined courses shall be not less than the indicated thickness Where a deficiency exceeds the specified tolerances correct each such representative area or areas by removing the deficient pavement and replacing with new pavement c Smoothness Straightedge test the compacted surface of binder and wearing courses as work progresses Apply straightedge parallel with and at right angles to the centerline after final rolling Unevenness of binder
285. ern entering the opposite wall while maintaining a minimum clear distance of 3 inches from any edge of the cast in place duct bank envelope or any individual duct Pulling in irons shall have a clear projection into the structure of approximately 4 inches and shall be designed to withstand a minimum pulling in load of 6000 pounds Irons shall be hot dipped galvanized after fabrication Bb G2 Cable Racks Arms and Insulators Cable racks arms and insulators shall be sufficient to accommodate the cables Racks in power manholes shall be spaced not more than 3 feet apart and each manhole wall shall be provided with a minimum of two racks Racks in signal manholes shall be spaced not more than 16 1 2 inches apart with the end rack being no further than 12 inches from the adjacent wall Methods of anchoring cable racks shall be as follows a Provide a 5 8 inch diameter by 5 inch long anchor bolt with 3 inch foot cast in structure wall with 2 inch protrusion of threaded portion of bolt into structure Provide 5 8 inch steel square head nut on each anchor bolt Coat threads of anchor bolts with suitable coating immediately prior to installing nuts b Provide concrete channel insert with a minimum load rating of 800 pounds per foot Insert channel shall be steel of the same length as vertical rack channel channel insert shall be cast flush in structure wall Provide 5 8 inch steel nuts in channel insert to receive 5 8 inch diameter by 3 inch lo
286. es 600 V Maximum NEMA MG 1 2009 Motors and Generators NEMA MG 10 2001 R 2007 Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Fixed Frequency Medium AC Squirrel Cage Polyphase Induction Motors NEMA MG 11 1977 R 2007 Energy Management Guide for Selection and Use of Single Phase Motors NEMA RN 1 2005 Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit NEMA ST 20 1992 R 1997 Standard for Dry Type Transformers for General Applications NEMA TC 2 2003 Standard for Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Conduit NEMA TC 3 2004 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Fittings for Use With Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing NEMA WD 1 1999 R 2005 R 2010 Standard for General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices NEMA WD 6 2002 R 2008 Wiring Devices Dimensions Specifications NEMA Z535 4 2007 Errata 2007 American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2011 TIA 11 1 Errata 2011 National Electrical Code NFPA 70E 2012 Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace SECTION 26 20 00 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 NFPA 780 2011 Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems TELECOMMUNICATIONS INDUSTRY ASSOCIATION TIA TIA J STD 607 2002a Commercial Building Grounding Earthing and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications TIA 568 C 1 2009 C
287. es and locations of at least three installations where the Contractor or the subcontractor referred to above has installed such systems Indicate the type and design of each system and certify that each system has performed satisfactorily in the manner intended for a period of not less than 18 months Submit names and phone numbers of points of contact at each site 1523 Record Drawing Software Furnish one set of floppy diskettes containing CAD based drawings in DXF format of as built drawings and schematics 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE Equipment and devices shall be compatible and operable with existing station fire alarm system and shall not impair reliability or operational functions of existing supervising station fire alarm system Existing supervising station fire alarm system is King Fisher 6 1 Regulatory Requirements Devices and equipment for fire alarm service shall be listed by UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM APP GUIDE SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 16711 Requirements for Fire Protection Service Equipment and material shall have been tested by UL and listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or approved by FM and listed in FM APP GUIDE Where the terms listed or approved appear in this specification they shall mean listed in UL Fire Prot Dir or FM APP GUIDE The omission of these terms under the description of any item of equipment described shall not be construed as waiving this requi
288. es deep except where shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved Boxes for other than lighting fixture outlets shall be minimum 4 inches square except that 4 by 2 inch boxes may be used where only one raceway enters outlet Telecommunications outlets shall be a minimum of 4 inches square by 2 1 8 inches deep Mount outlet boxes flush in finished walls BEZ Pull Boxes Construct of at least minimum size required by NFPA 70 of code gauge aluminum or galvanized sheet steel and compatible with nonmetallic raceway systems except where cast metal boxes are required in locations specified herein Provide boxes with screw fastened covers Where several feeders pass through common pull box tag feeders to indicate clearly electrical characteristics circuit number and panel designation abets Extension Rings Extension rings are not permitted for new construction Use only on existing boxes in concealed conduit systems where wall is furred out for new finish SECTION 26 20 00 Page 26 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 1 8 Mounting Heights Mount panelboards enclosed circuit breakers motor controller and disconnecting switches so height of operating handle at its highest position is maximum 78 inches above floor Mount lighting switches 48 inches above finished floor Mount receptacles and telecommunications outlets 18 inches above finished floor unless otherwise indicated Wall mounted telecommunicatio
289. etect vehicles ranging from licensed motorcycles and scooters to AASHTO True defined passenger vehicles Low Volume Operation vehicle through put 60 vehicles per hour 30 seconds to Emergency VENTCISOperatton retract all barriers Shall be able to operate with vehicles ranging from licensed motorcycles and scooters to AASHTO defined passenger vehicles Mean Time Between Maintenance MTBM True Meets Commercial Industrial Aesthetic Standards and compliant with base architectural plans and standards if applicable Commander Approval Security personnel can operate system while Satisfaction Rate2 wearing tactical cold weather gloves 0 80 Capacity of system to store SA video 2 30 days SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 35 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Probability that alarms associated with unauthorized entry attempts shall function properly Pa 5 5 LOGISTICS DEFINITIONS 5 5 1 Mean Time Between Failures MTBF For a particular interval the total functional life of a population of an item divided by the total number of failures within the population The definition holds for time rounds miles events or other measures of life unit 5 5 2 Mean Time To Repair MTTR The averag lapsed time to conduct corrective maintenance clock hours including testing times for fault detection isolation and verification of correction Mean Time to Repair is a basic techni
290. eter Companion flanges shall be faced drilled and tapped in conformance with ASME B1 20 1 Dimensions shall be those listed in AWWA C700 Companion flanges shall be cast iron Registers Registers shall be straight reading and shall read in 1000 gallon increments The register shall be equipped with a center sweep test hand with the test circle located on the periphery of the register and graduated in 100 equal parts with each tenth graduation being numbered Register construction shall conform to all applicable requirements of AWWA C700 Register Boxes The lid shall be recessed and shall overlap the register box in order to protect the lens The lens shall be held securely in place Intermediate Gear Trains Intermediate gear trains may be mounted on the measuring chamber in the upper main casing or when not exposed to water combined with or adjacent to the register gearing a Oil enclosed type Gear trains exposed to water shall be of the oil enclosed type shall have a separate housing or form housing with the main casing or measuring chamber and shall operate in a suitable lubricant b Magnetic coupled drives When intermediate gear trains are located in the water compartment of the meter the revolutions of the train output spindles shall be transmitted to the registers by means of magnetic couplings through the meter cases When the intermediate gear trains are located in the register compartments the disc nutations sh
291. ethod On systems consisting of interconnected ground rods perform tests after interconnections are complete On systems consisting of a single ground rod perform tests before any wire is connected Take measurements in normally dry weather not less than 48 hours after rainfall Use a portable ground testing megger in accordance with manufacturer s instructions to test each ground or group of grounds The instrument shall be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test 2 Submit the measured ground resistance of each ground rod and grounding system indicating the location of the rod and grounding system Include the test method and test setup i e pin location used to determine ground resistance and soil conditions at the time the measurements were made Bee Follow Up Verification Upon completion of acceptance checks settings and tests the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function Circuit breakers shall be tripped by operation of each protective device Test shall require each item to perform its function not less than three times As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract the Contracting Officer shall be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times for checks settings and tests
292. evations indicated and as specified Perform the grading in accordance with the typical sections shown and the tolerances specified in paragraph FINISHING Transport Satisfactory excavated materials and place in fill or embankment within the limits of the work Excavate unsatisfactory materials encountered within the limits of the work below grade and replace with satisfactory materials as directed Include such excavated material and the satisfactory material ordered as replacement in excavation Dispose surplus satisfactory excavated material not required for fill or embankment in areas approved for surplus material storage or designated waste areas Dispose unsatisfactory excavated material in designated waste or spoil areas During construction perform excavation and fill in a manner and sequence that will provide proper drainage at all times Excavate material required for fill or embankment in excess of that produced by excavation within the grading limits from other approved areas selected by the Contractor as specified ele dL Drainage Structures Make excavations to the lines grades and elevations shown or as directed Provide trenches and foundation pits of sufficient size to permit the placement and removal of forms for the full length and width of structure footings and foundations as shown Clean rock or other hard foundation material of loose debris and cut to a firm level stepped or SECTION 31 00 00 Page 6 Submarine A
293. final acceptance 3 5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 37 5 01 Grounding System Test Test the grounding system to ensure continuity and that resistance to ground is not in excess of 10 ohms Test the ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to the rod Tie the grounding system together and test for resistance to ground Make resistance measurements in dry weather not earlier than 48 hours after rainfall Include in the written report locations of ground rods resistance and soil conditions at the time that measurements were made Submit results of each test to the Contracting Officer 3 5 2 Lightning Protection System Inspection Make visual inspections to verify that there are no loose connections which may result in high resistance joints and that conductors and system components are securely fastened to their mounting surfaces and are protected against accidental mechanical displacement End of Section SECTION 26 41 00 00 20 Page 9 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 26 51 00 INTERIOR LIGHTING 07 07 PART 1 GENERAL alee 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only AMERICAN NATIONAL STANDARDS INSTITUTE ANST ANSI ANSLG C78 81 2010 American National Standard for Electric Lamps Double Capped Fluorescent Lamps Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics
294. for conformance with the plan grade requirements and will be tested for acceptance by the Contracting Officer by running lines of levels at intervals of 50 feet longitudinally and 50 feet transversely to determine the elevation of the completed pavement The Contractor shall correct variations from the designated grade line and elevation in excess of the plan grade requirements as directed Skin patching for correcting low areas will not be permitted The Contractor shall remove and replace the deficient low area Sufficient material shall be removed to allow at least 1 inch of asphalt concrete to be placed 3 3 2 Surface Smoothness Tests After completion of the final milling the finished milled surface will be tested by the Government with a straightedge Other approved devices may be used provided that when satisfactorily and properly operated such devices reveal all surface irregularities exceeding the tolerances specified Surface irregularities that depart from the testing edge by more than 1 4 inch shall be corrected Skin patching for correcting low areas will not be permitted The Contractor shall remove and replace the deficient low area Sufficient material shall be removed to allow at least 1 inch of asphalt concrete to be placed 3 4 REMOVAL OF MILLED MATERIAL Material that is removed shall be placed into traveling mixing plant for cold mix recycling End of Section SECTION 32 01 16 17 Page 3 Submarine
295. from which bituminous materials are to be obtained shall be selected and notification furnished the Contracting Officer within 15 days after the award of the contract B72 Calibration Test Furnish all equipment materials and labor necessary to calibrate the bituminous distributor Calibration shall be made with the approved job material and prior to applying the bituminous coat material to the prepared surface Calibrate the bituminous distributor in accordance with ASTM D 2995 3 7 3 Trial Applications Before providing the complete bituminous coat apply three lengths of at least 100 feet for the full width of the distributor bar to evaluate the amount of bituminous material that can be satisfactorily applied i ay et ee Tack Coat Trial Application Rate Unless otherwise authorized apply the trial application rate of bituminous tack coat materials in the amount of 0 05 gallons per square yard Other trial applications shall be made using various amounts of material as may be deemed necessary 3 7 32 Prime Coat Trial Application Rate Unless otherwise authorized apply the trial application rate of bituminous materials in the amount of 0 25 gallon per square yard Other trial applications shall be made using various amounts of material as may be deemed necessary 3 7 4 Sampling and Testing During Construction Perform quality control sampling and testing as required in paragraph FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3 8 TRAFFIC CONTROLS Keep traffi
296. fter fabrication Cabinets shall be painted in accordance with paragraph PAINTING Outdoor cabinets shall be of NEMA 3R raintight with conduit hubs welded to the cabinet Front edges of cabinets shall be form flanged or fitted with structural shapes welded or riveted to the sheet steel for supporting the panelboard front All cabinets shall be so fabricated that no part of any surface on the finished cabinet shall deviate from a true plane by more than 1 8 inch Holes shall be provided in the back of indoor surface mounted cabinets with outside spacers and inside stiffeners for mounting the cabinets with a 1 2 inch clear space between the back of the cabinet and the wall surface Flush doors shall be mounted on hinges that expose only the hinge roll to view when the door is closed Each door shall be fitted with a combined catch and lock except that doors over 24 inches long shall be provided with a three point latch having a knob with a T handle anda cylinder lock Two keys shall be provided with each lock and all locks shall be keyed alike Finished head cap screws shall be provided for mounting the panelboard fronts on the cabinets SECTION 26 20 00 Page 13 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 212552 Panelboard Buses Support bus bars on bases independent of circuit breakers Main buses and back pans shall be designed so that breakers may be changed without machining drilling or tapping Provide isolated neutral bus in each panel for conn
297. g light shot blasting and light scarification to a resulting profile equal to ICRI 03732 CSP 2 CSP 3 and CSP 4 respectively can be used in addition to water blasting to either remove existing coatings or for surface preparation on most pavements shot blasting shall not be used on airfield pavements due to the potential of Foreign Object Damage FOD to aircraft Scrub affected areas where oil or grease is present on old pavements to be marked with several applications of trisodium phosphate solution or other approved detergent or degreaser and rinse thoroughly after each application After cleaning oil soaked areas seal with shellac or primer recommended by the manufacturer to prevent bleeding through the new paint Do not commence painting in any area until pavement surfaces are dry and clean 3 2 APPLICATION Si BaL Testing for Moisture Apply pavement markings to dry pavement only The Contractor shall test the pavement surface for moisture before beginning work after each period of rainfall fog high humidity or cleaning or when the ambient temperature has fallen below the dew point Do not commence marking until the pavement is sufficiently dry and the pavement condition has been approved by the CO or authorized representative Employ the plastic wrap method to test the pavement for moisture as follows Cover the pavement with a 300 mm by 300 mm 12 inch by 12 inch section of clear plastic wrap and seal the edges with tape
298. g action or eccentric loading upon or against the structure Prepare ground surface on which backfill is to be placed as specified in paragraph GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION Provide compaction requirements for backfill materials in conformance with the applicable portions of paragraphs GROUND SURFACE PREPARATION Finish compaction by sheepsfoot rollers pneumatic tired rollers steel wheeled rollers vibratory compactors or other approved equipment 3b Trench Backfill Backfill trenches to the grade shown Do not backfill the trench until all specified tests are performed 3Sa LaL Replacement of Unyielding Material Replace unyielding material removed from the bottom of the trench with select granular material or initial backfill material 3 Dole 2 Replacement of Unstable Material Replace unstable material removed from the bottom of the trench or excavation with select granular material placed in layers not exceeding 6 inch loose thickness 3 5 1 3 Bedding and Initial Backfill Place initial backfill material and compact it with approved tampers to a height of at least one foot above the utility pipe or conduit Bring up the backfill evenly on both sides of the pipe for the full length of the pipe Take care to ensure thorough compaction of the fill under the haunches of the pipe Except as specified otherwise in the individual piping section provide bedding for buried piping in accordance with AWWA C600 Type 4 except as specified herein
299. g switch es e Manufacturer s published time current curves on full size logarithmic paper of the transformer high side fuses Lob a2 Regulatory Requirements In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of Similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer Equipment materials installation and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated L53 Standard Products Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2 year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2 year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be products of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufactu
300. gate source and notification on the selection of bituminous materials source The formula will indicate the definite percentage of each sieve fraction of aggregate the percentage of bituminous material and the temperature of the completed mixture as discharged from the mixer The JMF will be allowed the tolerances given in TABLE II at the end of this section Aggregate gradation and bitumen content may be adjusted as directed within the limits specified to improve paving mixtures 263 SAMPLING AND TESTING Submit certified copies of aggregate test results not less than 30 days before the material is required in the work 2 341 General Requirements Perform sampling and testing using an approved commercial testing laboratory or by facilities furnished by the Contractor No work requiring testing shall be permitted until the facilities have been inspected and approved The first inspection will be at the expense of the Government Cost incurred for any subsequent inspection required because of failure of the facilities to pass the first inspection will be charged to the Contractor Perform tests in sufficient numbers and at the locations and times directed to ensure that materials and compaction meet specified requirements Furnish copies of the test results to the Contracting Officer within 24 hours of the completion of the tests Dig Dd Samples Perform sampling in accordance with ASTM D 75 D 75M for aggregates A
301. gradation on the 0 45 power gradation chart SECTION 32 12 17 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 stating the nominal maximum size j Graphical plots of stability flow air voids voids in the mineral aggregate and unit weight versus asphalt content as shown in AI MS 02 k Specific gravity and absorption of each aggregate l Percent natural sand m Percent particles with two or more fractured faces in coarse aggregate n Fine aggregate angularity Oo Percent flat or elongated particles in coarse aggregate p Tensile Strength Ratio q Antistrip agent if required and amount r List of all modifiers and amount s Percentage and properties asphalt content binder properties and aggregate properties of RAP in accordance with paragraph RECYCLED HOT MIX ASPHALT if RAP is used Table II Marshall Design Criteria Test Property 50 Blow Mix Stability pounds minimum 1350 Flow 0 01 inch 8 18 Air voids percent S25 Percent Voids in mineral aggregate minimum See Table III TSR minimum percent 75 This is a minimum requirement The average during construction shall be significantly higher than this number to ensure compliance with the specifications Table III Minimum Percent Voids in Mineral Aggregate VMA Aggregate See Table 1 Minimum VMA percent Gradation 1 13 0 Gradation 2 14 0 Calculate VMA in accordance with AI MS 02 based on ASTM D 2726 bulk specific gravity for the
302. grams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location layout and arrangement control panels accessories piping ductwork and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation maintenance and replacement of operating equipment devices 1 5 2 Product Data SD 03 Submittal shall include performance and characteristic curves 1 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE TGs L Regulatory Requirements In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer Equipment materials installation and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated SECTION 26 00 00 00 20 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 al 6 2 Standard Products Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship Products shall have bee
303. grees F MC 70 120 225 degrees F RC 70 120 200 degrees F SECTION 32 12 10 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Paving Grade Asphalts 200 300 plus 265 degrees F AC 2 5 plus 270 degrees F AC 5 plus 280 degrees F AR 1000 plus 275 degrees F AR 2000 plus 285 degrees F Emulsions RS 1 70 140 degrees F MS 1 70 160 degrees F SS 1 70 160 degrees F CRS 1 125 185 degrees F CSS 1 70 160 degrees F These temperature ranges exceed the flash point of the material and care should be taken in their heating 3 4 APPLICATION 37 E General Following preparation and subsequent inspection of the surface apply the bituminous prime or tack coat with the Bituminous Distributor at the specified rate with uniform distribution over the surface to be treated Properly treat all areas and spots missed by the distributor with the hand spray Until the succeeding layer of pavement is placed maintain the surface by protecting the surface against damage and by repairing deficient areas at no additional cost to the Government If required spread clean dry sand to effectively blot up any excess bituminous material No smoking fires or flames other than those from the heaters that are a part of the equipment are permitted within 25 feet of heating distributing and transferring operations of bituminous material other than bituminous emulsions Prevent all traffic except for paving equipment used in constructing the surfacing from using the underlying
304. ground is muddy frozen snow covered or in an unsatisfactory condition for seeding If special conditions exist that may warrant a variance in the above seeding dates or conditions submit a written request to the Contracting Officer stating the special conditions and proposed variance Apply seed within twenty four hours after seedbed preparation Sow seed by approved sowing equipment Sow one half the seed in one direction and sow remainder at right angles to the first sowing 3 242 Seed Application Method Seeding method shall be broadcasted and drop seeding or hydroseeding EREA Broadcast and Drop Seeding Seed shall be uniformly broadcast at the rate of pounds per 1000 square feet Use broadcast or drop seeders Sow one half the seed in one direction and sow remainder at right angles to the first sowing Cover seed uniformly to a maximum depth of 1 4 inch in clay soils and 1 2 SECTION 32 92 19 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 inch in sandy soils by means of spike tooth harrow cultipacker raking or other approved devices 3 2 2 2 Hydroseeding First mix water and fiber Wood cellulose fiber paper fiber or recycled paper shall be applied as part of the hydroseeding operation Fiber shall be added at 1 000 pounds dry weight per acre Then add and mix seed and fertilizer to produce a homogeneous slurry Seed shall be mixed to ensure broadcasting at the rate of pounds per 1000 square feet When hydraulical
305. guaranteed to be free from defective materials and workmanship and meet AWWA New Meter Accuracy Standards for a period of five years from the date of installation At the expiration of this period meters shall be guaranteed to meet AWWA Repaired Meter Accuracy Standards for the following time periods 1 5 8 inch to 1 inch 5 to 15 years from the date of shipment 2 1 1 2 inch and larger 5 to 10 years from the date of shipment b All registers are guaranteed for a ten year period from the date of purchase Any defective register will be replaced at no cost to the Government c All brass maincases are guaranteed for life by the manufacturer Any defective maincase will be replaced at no cost to the Government 1 6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1 6 1 System Requirements The metering and reading system consisting of commercial off the shelf meters protocol modules and communications modules and communication channels will be used to record the water consumption and other values as described in the sections that follow and as shown on the drawings SECTION 33 12 33 00 30 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 I 6 2 Selection Criteria Metering components are part of a system that includes the physical meter data recorder function and communications method Every building site identified shall include sufficient metering components to measure the water parameters identified and to store and communicate the values as required in
306. h 1 3 4 Power Brooms and Power Blowers Provide brooms and blowers suitable for cleaning surfaces of the bases and the bituminous course 1 325 Straightedge Furnish and maintain at the site in good condition one 12 foot straightedge for each bituminous paver for use in testing the finished surface Construct the straightedges of aluminum or other approved lightweight metal with blades of box girder cross section and with flat bottom reinforced to insure rigidity and accuracy Straightedges shall be equipped with handles for operation on pavement 1 4 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 32 12 19 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SD 03 Product Data Job Mix Formula JMF Aggregates Bituminous Materials Waybills and Delivery Tickets SD 06 Test Reports Tests SD 07 Certificates Bituminous Material I5 QUALITY ASSURANCE No smoking or open flames will be permitted within 25 feet of heating distributing or transferring operations of bituminous materials other than bituminous emulsions When tar is used a full face organic vapor type respirator and protective creams shall be used by personnel exposed to fumes Protective creams shall not substitute for cover clothing 1 6 DELIVERY STORAGE
307. h ASTM D 2321 3 4 PIPE BEDDING 3 4 1 Bedding Minimum compacted bedding under installed pipe shall be one fourth of the pipe diameter in thickness and in no case less than 4 inches or more than 12 inches Bedding shall be placed in layers not exceeding 6 inches in depth and compacted Additional layers shall be added until a minimum elevation of 12 inches above the pipe is achieved 3 4 2 Compaction Puddling or jetting shall not be permitted when compacting bedding materials 325 JACKING PIPE Jacking pipe shall not be used 3 6 STORM SEWER CONNECTIONS AND WYES Pipe connections to existing conduit and manholes shall be provided Wyes for branch connections shall be provided Field cutting into conduit shall not be permitted Wyes shall be sprung into existing lines Entire wye shall be encased in concrete Epoxy shall be used to secure each interface connecting new and existing conduit Sid FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Sill Tests Contractor shall provide test equipment or engage the services of a firm to provide the necessary testing SECTION 33 40 00 00 40 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 327ele1 Hydrostatic Test on Watertight Joints Hydrostatic tests shall be upon one sample for each type of joint to be installed When the sample joint fails an additional joint of the same type shall be re tested Joints shall be protected from temperatures which adversely affect the joining materials Hydrostatic
308. h and shape of the joint and prior to finishing b When slip forming is used the contraction joints shall be cut in the top portion of the gutter curb hardened concrete in a continuous cut across the curb and gutter using a power driven saw The depth of cut shall be at least one fourth of the gutter curb depth and 1 8 inch in width ead Expansion Joints Expansion joints shall be formed by means of preformed expansion joint filler material cut and shaped to the cross section of curb and gutter Expansion joints shall be provided in curb and gutter directly opposite expansion joints of abutting portland cement concrete pavement and shall be of the same type and thickness as joints in the pavement Where curb and gutter do not abut portland cement concrete pavement expansion joints at least 1 2 inch in width shall be provided at intervals not less than 30 feet nor greater than 120 feet Expansion joints shall be provided in nonreinforced concrete gutter at locations indicated Expansion joints shall be sealed immediately following curing of the concrete or as soon thereafter as weather conditions permit Expansion joints and the top 1 inch depth of curb and gutter contraction joints shall be sealed with joint sealant The joint opening shall be thoroughly cleaned before the sealing material is placed Sealing material shall not be spilled on exposed surfaces of the concrete Concrete at the joint shall be surface dry and atmospheric and concrete
309. he aggregate to specified moisture requirements provide additional dryers 1 6 1 3 Plant Screens and Bins for Batch and Continuous Mix Plants Use screen to obtain accurate gradation and allow no bin to contain more than 10 percent oversize or undersize Inspect screens each day prior to commencing work for plugged worn or broken screens Clean plugged screens and replace worn or broken screens with new screens prior to beginning operations Divide hot aggregate bins into at least three compartments arranged to ensure separate and adequate storage of appropriate fractions of the aggregate 1 6 1 4 Testing Laboratory Provide a testing laboratory for control and acceptance testing functions during periods of mix production sampling and testing and whenever materials subject to the provisions of these specifications are being supplied or tested The laboratory shall provide adequate equipment space and utilities as required for the performance of the specified tests 1 6 1 5 Surge and Storage Bins Use for temporary storage of hot bituminous mixtures will be permitted SECTION 32 12 17 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 7A under the following conditions a When stored in surge bins for a period of time not to exceed 3 hours b When stored in insulated and heated storage bins for a period of time not to exceed 12 hours If it is determined by the Contracting Officer that there is an excessive amount of heat loss segregation an
310. he PACS design shall have the following attribute Allow Emergency Vehicles entry based upon a remote open signal produced by the Emergency Vehicl d S river Distance to enable this feature hall be limited to 150 feet from the ECP The PACS design shall have the following attribute Allow Emergency Vehicles entry based upon a remote open signal produced by the Emergency Vehicl driver Maximum time to open ECP shall not exceed 30 seconds he PACS design shall have the following ttribute Allow Emergency Vehicles ntry based upon a remote open signal roduced by the Emergency Vehicl river Any vehicles within the ECP ould be allowed to complete the transit hrough the ECP he PACS design shall have the following ttribute The PACS shall employ a etwork based architecture that uses industry standard protocols and ports to acilitate integration of future hanges he PACS shall use encrypted web rotocols and ports for transitioning hrough network firewall boundaries he PACS shal include sensors that nable ECPs to operate automatically and ly once access is granted T 50 The PACS design shall have the following attribute Allow Emergency Vehicles entry based upon a remote open signal produced by the Emergency Vehicl driver All automated lanes within the ECP shall be the manual mode allowing the first responder to sel
311. he air aggregates or water is below 35 degrees F placement and protection shall be approved in writing Approval will be contingent upon full conformance with the following provisions The underlying material shall be prepared and protected so that it is entirely free of frost when the concrete is deposited Mixing water shall be heated as necessary to result in the temperature of the in place concrete being between 50 and 85 degrees F Methods and equipment for heating shall be approved The aggregates shall be free of ice snow and frozen lumps before entering the mixer Covering and other means shall be provided for maintaining the concrete at a temperature of at least 50 degrees F for not SECTION 32 16 13 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 less than 72 hours after placing and at a temperature above freezing for the remainder of the curing period 4 2 Placing During Warm Weather The temperature of the concrete as placed shall not exceed85 degrees F except where an approved retarder is used The mixing water and or aggregates shall be cooled if necessary to maintain a satisfactory placing temperature The placing temperature shall not exceed95 degrees F at any time PART 2 PRODUCTS dis 1 CONCRETE Provide concrete conforming to the applicable requirements of Section 03 30 00 00 10 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE except as otherwise specified Concrete shall have a minimum compressive strength of 3500 psi at 28
312. he ballast 5 year warranty to be in service and energized The warranty shall state that the malfunctioning ballast shall be exchanged by the manufacturer and promptly shipped to the using Government facility The replacement ballast shall be identical to or an improvement upon the original design of the malfunctioning ballast SECTION 26 51 00 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 1 8 OPERATIONAL SERVICE Coordinate with manufacturer for maintenance agreement Collect information from the manufacturer about maintenance agreement options and submit to Contracting Officer Services shall reclaim materials for recycling and or reuse Services shall not landfill or burn reclaimed materials Indicate procedures for compliance with regulations governing disposal of mercury When such a service is not available local recyclers shall be sought after to reclaim the materials 9 SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 1 9 1 Local Regional Materials Use materials or products extracted harvested or recovered as well as manufactured within a 500 mile radius from the project site if available from a minimum of three sources T92 Environmental Data Submit Table 1 of ASTM E 2129 for the following products PART 2 PRODUCTS PAN FLUORESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES UL 1598 Fluorescent fixtures shall have electronic ballasts 2 1 1 Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts The electronic ballast shall as a minimum meet the following characteristics
313. he revolutions of the train output spindles shall be transmitted to the registers by means of magnetic couplings through the meter case When intermediate gear trains are located in the register compartments the revolutions shall be transmitted by magnetic coupling Automatic Valves The automatic valve shall be of a type suitable for such purpose It shall close by force The weight of the valve and any supplemental force imposed on it shall offer sufficient resistance to the incoming water to divert all small rates of flow through the bypass meter until such time as the rate of flow through the meter is great enough to ensure efficient operation of the main measuring section Valve hinge pins or spindles shall be bushed Valve sets shall be bronze or other corrosion resistant material shall have a satisfactory width of face and shall be held firmly in place A clapper or swing type valve shall be provided with a removable semi hard seat Bypass Meter The physical and operating characteristics and dimensions of the bypass meter shall be in accordance with the approved AWWA Standard for the type of meter used as the bypass Strainers Strainers if provided shall be rigid shall be easily removed and shall have an effective straining area at least double that of the water main case inlet Seal Wire Holes Register box screws shall be drilled for seal wires Seal wire holes shall be not less than 3 32 inch in diameter Cold Water Meter
314. he top of the case near the outlet for field testing purposes Registers Registers shall be straight reading and shall read in cubic feet cu ft Except for those instances when test conditions require the use of a different register the register provided with the meter shall be the same register that was on the meter when it was tested for accuracy The register lock and side SECTION 33 12 33 00 30 Page 9 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 gears shall be fastened securely to the number wheel discs and hubs The tumbler pins shall mesh accurately at the turnover points with the lock and side gears of the adjacent number wheels Both main and pinion shafts shall be so secured in the register frame and or register plates that they cannot get out of position The pinion shaft shall be so designed that there is no possibility of its bending and allowing the pinion to skip the turnover point The numerals on the number wheels shall not be less than 3 16 inch in height and should be readable at a 45 degree angle from vertical Registers that are hermetically sealed shall have gears and pinion which shall run free on fixed shafts or be fixed on shafts that run free in the register frame and or register plates and shall be constructed so that they cannot be unmeshed The registers shall have a center sweep test hand with a test circle located on the periphery of the register and graduated in 100 equal parts each tenth graduation numbered The maximu
315. hematical models a simulations algorithms charts graphs circ diagrams or scientific principles and proced provide evidence that stated requirements wer Examination E Verification shall be accomp inspection without the use of special labora equipment or procedures to determine conform specified requirements that can be determined investigators Examination shall be non destr can include sight hearing smell touch ta physical manipulation mechanical and electri and measurement and other forms of investiga ranted hed by nd uit ures to e met lished by tory ance to the by the uctive and ste cal gauging tion e Demonstration D Verification shall be accomplished by actual operation adjustment or re configurat items to provide evidence that the designed f were accomplished under specific scenarios T article may be instrumented and quantitative ion of unctions he test limits of performance monitored measured e Test T Verification shall be accomplished by systematic exercising of the applicable item appropriate conditions with instrumentation required parameters Collection analysis and of quantitative data shall determine that the parameters equal or exceed specified requirem under to measure evaluation measured nts ystems installed by the Contractor will be te
316. hmic paper of the main secondary breaker and largest secondary feeder device These shall be used by the designer of record to provide breaker settings that will ensure protection and coordination are achieved h Provisions for future extension 1 5 3 Regulatory Requirements In each of the publications referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these publications to the authority having jurisdiction or words of Similar meaning to mean the Contracting Officer Equipment materials installation and workmanship shall be in accordance with the mandatory and advisory provisions of NFPA 70 unless more stringent requirements are specified or indicated 1 5 4 Standard Products Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2 year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2 year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be produc
317. iability maintainability and supportability wn ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 36 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 ese MTBF MTBF MTTR MLDT wn ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 37 Submarine A School BQ 534 6 P This requi ERFORMANCE VERIFICATION 1127117 section defines the verifications envisioned by the Government to determine whether th system conforms rements delineated in Section 3 of this specific syst the 1 requi devel SRVM compo shall m Requirements Verification Matrix SRVM Table to all ation The 2 defines evel of verification required for each AVG L system rement listed in this specification The contractor shall op and execute a verification plan in accordance with the and the Task Order The verification plan shall describe how nent and system reliability shall be verified The plan identify sub system testing that must be accomp to system installation The plan shall also include a demonstration of whole system performance post insta verifies all performance parameters are satisfied 6 1 lished prior METHODS OF VERIFICATION llation that The methods utilized to accomplish verification include All s Syste used proce site e Not Applicable N A Verification is not war e Analysis A Verification shall be accomplis technical evaluation or mat
318. iate from the testing edge of a straightedge more than 1 4 inch in the transverse or longitudinal direction T6 TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall provide all necessary traffic controls during milling operations PART 2 PRODUCTS Not Applicable PART 3 EXECUTION 3 1 PREPARATION OF SURFACE The pavement surface shall be cleaned of excessive dirt clay or other foreign material immediately prior to milling the pavement 3 2 MILLING OPERATION A minimum of seven days notice is required prior to start work for the Contracting Officer to coordinate the milling operation with other activities at the site Sufficient passes shall be made so that the designated area is milled to the grades and cross sections indicated The milling shall proceed with care and in depth increments that will not damage the pavement below the designated finished grade Items damaged during milling such as manholes valve boxes utility lines pavement that is torn cracked gouged broken or undercut shall be repaired or replaced as directed The milled material shall be removed from the pavement and loaded into trucks Removed material shall have a minimum of SECTION 32 01 16 17 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 100 percent by weight passing a 3 4 inches sieve when tested in accordance with ASTM C 136 3 3 GRADE AND SURFACE SMOOTHNESS TESTING 3 431 Grade Conformance Tests The finished milled surface of the pavement shall be tested
319. ical and of such width as recommended in the manufacturer s printed installation manual Provide vertical trench walls where no manufacturer s printed installation manual is available Shore trench walls more than 5 feet high cut back to a stable slope or provide with equivalent means of protection for employees who may be exposed to moving ground or cave in Shore vertical trench walls more than 4 feet high Excavate trench walls which are cut back to at least the angle of repose of the soil Give special attention to slopes which may be adversely affected by weather or moisture content Do not exceed the trench width below the pipe top of 24 inches plus pipe outside diameter 0O D for pipes of less than 24 inch inside diameter and do not exceed 36 inch plus pipe outside diameter for sizes larger than 24 inch inside diameter Where recommended trench widths are exceeded provide redesign stronger pipe or special installation procedures by the Contractor The Contractor is responsible for the cost of redesign stronger pipe or special installation procedures without any additional cost to the Government 3 453 ok Bottom Preparation Grade the bottoms of trenches accurately to provide uniform bearing and support for the bottom quadrant of each section of the pipe Excavate bell holes to the necessary size at each joint or coupling to eliminate point bearing Remove stones of 3 inch or greater in any dimension or as recommended by the pi
320. icated otherwise Provide feed thru inserts as indicated C lLoad break switch Loop feed sectionalizer switches Provide three two position oil immersed type switches to permit closed transition loop feed and sectionalizing Each switch shall be rated at 15 kV 95 kV BIL witha continuous current rating and load break rating of 200 amperes anda make and latch rating of 10 000 rms amperes symmetrical Locate the switch handles in the high voltage compartment Operation of switches shall be as follows DESCRIPTION SWITCH POSITION ARRANGE OF SWITCH LINE A SW LINE B SW XFMR SW MENT NO ARRANGEMENT OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE OPEN CLOSE 1 Line A X X X connected to Line B and both lines connected to transformer 2 Transformer X X X connected to Line A only 3 Transformer X X X connected to Line B only 4 Transformer X X X open and loop closed 5 Transformer X X X open and loop open d Provide bayonet type oil immersed expulsion fuses in series with oil immersed partial range current limiting fuses Bayonet fuse SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 links shall sense both high currents and high oil temperature in order to provide thermal protection to the transformer Coordinate transformer protection with expulsion fuse clearing low current faults and current limiting fuse clearing high current faults beyond the interrupting rating of the expulsion fuse In order to elim
321. iency at any speed shall not be less than 96 percent k The controllers shall be capable of being restarted into a motor coasting in the forward direction without tripping l Protection of power semiconductor components shall be accomplished without the use of fast acting semiconductor output fuses Subjecting the controllers to any of the following conditions shall not result in component failure or the need for fuse replacement 1 Short circuit at controller output 2 Ground fault at controller output 3 Open circuit at controller output 4 Input undervoltage 5 Input overvoltage 6 Loss of input phase 7 AC line switching transients 8 Instantaneous overload 9 Sustained overload exceeding 115 percent of controller rated current 10 Over temperature PE Phase reversal m Solid state motor overload protection shall be included such that current exceeding an adjustable threshold shall activate a 60 second SECTION 26 29 23 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 timing circuit Should current remain above the threshold continuously for the timing period the controller will automatically shut down n A slip compensation circuit shall be included which will sense changing motor load conditions and adjust output frequency to provide speed regulation of NEMA B motors to within plus or minus 0 5 percent of maximum speed without the necessity of a tachometer generator o The VFD shall be factory set for manual restart af
322. in 0 1 foot of the grades and elevations indicated except that the degree of finish for subgrades specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION Finish gutters and ditches in a manner that will result in effective drainage Finish the surface of areas to be turfed from settlement or washing to a smoothness suitable for the application of turfing materials Repair graded topsoiled or backfilled areas prior to acceptance of the work and re established grades to the required elevations and slopes 3329 TESTING Perform testing by a Navy validated commercial testing laboratory or the Contractor s validated testing facility If the Contractor elects to establish testing facilities do not permit work requiring testing until the Contractor s facilities have been inspected Navy validated and approved by the Contracting Officer When test results indicate as determined by the Contracting Officer that compaction is not as specified remove the material replace and recompact to meet specification requirements Perform tests on recompacted areas to determine conformance with specification requirements Appoint a registered professional civil engineer to certify inspections and test results These certifications shall state that the tests and observations were performed by or under the direct supervision of the engineer and that the results are representative of the materials or conditions being certified by the tests The following number of tests if perfo
323. in writ eam SEIPT representativ ting of approval 1127117 The Government shall notify or disapproval of the deviation within thirty 30 days after receipt by the ACO 4 1 FEDERAL DIRECTIVES 4 1 1 Executive Orders NUMBER DATE TITLE HSPD 12 08 27 2004 Policy for a Common Identification Standard for Federal Employees and Contractors 4 1 2 Federal Law NUMBER DATE TITLE PL 100 235 01 08 1998 Computer Security Act PL 93 579 12 31 1974 Privacy Act PL 99 474 10 16 1986 Computer Fraud and Abuse Act PL 99 508 10 21 1986 Electronic Communications Privacy Act PL 107 347 12 17 2002 E Government Act Title Federal Information Security Management Act 4 1 3 National Security Directives Instructions NUMBER DATE TITLE NSDD 145 09 17 1984 National Policy on Telecommunications and AIS Security NSD 42 07 05 1990 National Policy for the Security of National Security Telecommunications and Information Systems NSTISSD 501 11 16 1992 Telecommunications and Automated Systems Security Education Training and Awareness NSTISSI 4002 06 05 1986 Classification Guide for COMSEC Information NSTISSI 4009 04 26 2010 National Informati
324. inal number to which the remote end of the wire is attached x3 MANUFACTURER S NAMEPLATE Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer s name address model number and serial number securely affixed ina conspicuous place the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable This nameplate and method of attachment may be the manufacturer s standard if it contains the required information 4 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES ASTM D 709 Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each switchboard equipment enclosure relay switch and device as specified in this section or as indicated on the drawings Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and when applicable the position Nameplates shall be melamine plastic 0 125 inch thick white with black center core Surface shall be matte finish Corners shall be square Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2 5 inches Lettering shall be a minimum of 0 25 inch high normal block style ne SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL eBid Equipment Test Schedule The Government reserves the right to witness tests Provide equipment test schedules for tests to be performed at the manufacturer s test facility Submit required test schedule and location and notify the Contracting Officer 30 calendar days before scheduled test date Notify Contracting Officer 15 calendar days in advance of changes to sched
325. inate or minimize oil spills the bayonet fuse assembly shall include an oil retention valve inside the housing which closes when the fuse holder is removed and an external drip shield Warning shall be conspicuously displayed within the high voltage compartment cautioning against removing or inserting fuses unless the load break switch is in the open position and the tank pressure has been released Bayonet fuse assembly 150 kV BIL Oil immersed current limiting fuses IEEE C37 47 50 000 rms amperes symmetrical interrupting rating at the system voltage specified Surge arresters IEEE C62 11 rated 15 kV fully shielded dead front metal oxide varistor elbow type with resistance graded gap suitable for plugging into inserts Provide three arresters for radial feed circuits Provide six arresters for loop feed circuits Parking stands Provide a parking stand near each bushing well Provide insulated standoff bushings for parking of energized load break connectors on parking stands 2 2 1 2 Low Voltage Low voltage compartment shall contain low voltage bushings with NEMA spade terminals accessories metering stainless steel or laser etched anodized aluminum diagrammatic transformer nameplate and ground pad a Accessories shall include drain valve with sampler device fill plug pressure relief device liquid level gage pressure vacuum gage and dial type thermometer with maximum temperature indicator Metering NEMA ANSI C12
326. inches below slab or grade ERA E Underground Conduit Other Than Service Entrance Plastic coated rigid steel plastic coated steel IMC PVC Type EPC 40 or fiberglass Convert nonmetallic conduit other than PVC Schedule 40 or 80 to plastic coated rigid or IMC steel conduit before rising through floor slab Plastic coating shall extend minimum 6 inches above floor 3 1 4 8 Conduit for Circuits Rated Greater Than 600 Volts Rigid metal conduit or IMC only 3 1 4 9 Conduit Installed Under Floor Slabs Conduit run under floor slab shall be located a minimum of 12 inches below the vapor barrier Seal around conduits at penetrations thru vapor barrier 3 1 4 10 Conduit Through Floor Slabs Where conduits rise through floor slabs curved portion of bends shall not be visible above finished slab Zels sL Conduit Installed in Concrete Floor Slabs Rigid steel steel IMC fiberglass or PVC Type EPC 40 PVC Type EPC 40 unless indicated otherwise Locate so as not to adversely affect structural strength of slabs Install conduit within middle one third of concrete slab Do not stack conduits Space conduits horizontally not closer than three diameters except at cabinet locations Curved portions of bends shall not be visible above finish slab Increase slab thickness as necessary to provide minimum one inch cover over conduit Where embedded conduits cross building and or expansion joints provide suitable SECTION 26 20 00 Page 23 Subma
327. inclusion into the as built drawings SD 03 Product Data Variable frequency drives G G Wires and cables Equipment schedule Include data indicating compatibility with motors being driven SD 06 Test Reports VFD Test Performance Verification Tests Endurance Test SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions Installation instructions SD 09 Manufacturer s Field Reports VFD Factory Test Plan G G Factory test results SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Variable frequency drives Data Package 4 Submit in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA Provide service and maintenance information including preventive maintenance assembly and disassembly procedures Include electrical drawings from electrical general sections Submit additional information necessary to provide complete operation repair and maintenance information detailed to the smallest replaceable unit Include copies of as built SECTION 26 29 23 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 submittals Provide routine preventative maintenance instructions and equipment required Provide instructions on how to modify program settings and modify the control program Provide instructions on drive adjustment trouble shooting and configuration Provide instructions on process tuning and system calibration 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 5 1 Schematic Diagrams Show circuits and device elements for each replaceable module Schematic diagrams of printed circuit
328. indicate total number of enclosures that contain service disconnect devices Provide laminated plastic labels conforming to paragraph FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES Use lettering of at least 0 25 inch in height and engrave on black on white matte finish Service entrance disconnect devices in more than one enclosure shall be provided only as permitted by NFPA 70 3 1 3 Wiring Methods Provide insulated conductors installed in rigid steel conduit IMC rigid nonmetallic conduit or EMT except where specifically indicated or specified otherwise or required by NFPA 70 to be installed otherwise Grounding conductor shall be separate from electrical system neutral conductor Provide insulated green equipment grounding conductor for circuit s installed in conduit and raceways Shared neutral or multi wire branch circuits are not permitted with arc fault circuit interrupters Minimum conduit size shall be 1 2 inch in diameter for low voltage lighting and power circuits Vertical distribution in multiple story buildings shall be made with metal conduit in fire rated shafts Metal conduit shall extend through shafts for minimum distance of 6 inches Conduit which penetrates fire rated walls fire rated partitions or fire rated floors shall be firestopped in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING SECTION 26 20 00 Page 21 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 rad eee ee Pull Wire Install pull wires in empty conduits Pull wire
329. ine A School BQ 534 WHO E 41O CQ y m Access pedestal Enter PIN As Required Access pedestal Driver presents System validates 1127117 authorized I D card to Reader Dus displays and annunciates message displays message Access Granted Drop arm is rais ed Drop arm barrier signal notifies driver to proceed and Security not z If after 60 seconds the vehicle does not exit the access pedestal area a Lane Blocked alarm is generated ified Drop arm is lowered as soon as vehicle clears the 5 1 2 1 4 6 Event access pedestal Second vehicle tailgates behind first vehicle a Alarm is generated and Security notified Security must assess and rectify I D Card Anti Passback Sequence JAU A wW FW Oo y Vehicle presenc Access pedestal Access pedestal Vehicle enters C Access pedestal redential Zone displays and annunciates message Please wait is detected via vehicle presence sensor displays and annunciates message Present I D Ca Driver presents System validates Access pedestal ra authorized I D card to Reader D displays and annunciates message Enter PIN As Required Drop arm is rais displays message Access Granted ed Drop arm barrier signal notifies
330. ing The 2 year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2 year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be products of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section 1 4 5 1 Alternative Qualifications Products having less than a 2 year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturers factory or laboratory tests is furnished 1 4 5 2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used unless specified otherwise PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 CONDUIT DUCTS AND FITTINGS Qe did Rigid Metal Conduit UL 6 2 1 1 1 Rigid Metallic Conduit PVC Coated NEMA RN 1 Type A40 except that hardness shall be nominal 85 Shore A durometer dielectric strength shall be minimum 400 volts per mil at 60 Hz and tensile strength shall be minimum 3500 psi 2 142 Intermediate Metal Conduit UL 1242 2 43261 Intermediate Metal Conduit PVC Coated NEMA RN 1 Type A40 except that hardness shall be nominal 85 Shore A duromet
331. ing cable support and cable termination 4 Verify that cable bends are not less than ICEA or manufacturer s minimum allowable bending radius 5 Inspect for proper fireproofing 6 Visually inspect jacket and insulation condition 7 Inspect for proper phase identification and arrangement SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 25 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 b Electrical Tests 1 Perform a shield continuity test on each power cable by ohmmeter method Record ohmic value resistance values in excess of 10 ohms per 1000 feet of cable must be investigated and justified 2 Perform acceptance test on new cables before the new cables are connected to existing cables and placed into service including terminations and joints Perform maintenance test on complete cable system after the new cables are connected to existing cables and placed into service including existing cable terminations and joints Tests shall be very low frequency VLF alternating voltage withstand tests in accordance with IEEE 400 2 VLF test frequency shall be 0 05 Hz minimum for a duration of 60 minutes using a sinusoidal waveform Test voltages shall be as follows CABLE RATING AC TEST VOLTAGE for ACCEPTANCE TESTING 5 kv 10kV rms peak 8 kV 13kV rms peak 15 kv 20kV rms peak 25 kv 31kV rms peak 35 kv 44kV rms peak CABLE RATING AC TEST VOLTAGE for MAINTENANCE TESTING 5 kv 7kV rms peak 8 kv 10kV rms peak 15 kv 16kV rms peak 25 kV 2
332. ing in devices possessing the strengths and clearances stated herein The final installation of pulling in devices shall be made permanent Cover and seal exterior projections of thru wall type pulling in devices with an appropriate protective coating In the floor the irons shall be a minimum of 6 inches from the edge of the sump and in the walls the irons shall be located within 6 inches of the projected center of the duct bank pattern or precast window in the opposite wall However the pulling in iron shall not be located within 6 inches of an adjacent interior surface or duct or precast window located within the same wall as the iron If a pulling in iron cannot be located directly opposite the corresponding duct bank or precast window due to this clearance limitation locate the iron directly above or below the projected center of the duct bank pattern or precast window the minimum distance required to preserve the 6 inch clearance previously stated In the case of directly opposing precast windows pulling in irons consisting of a 3 foot length of No 5 reinforcing bar formed into a hairpin may be cast in place within the precast windows simultaneously SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 17 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 2 72 with the end of the corresponding duct bank envelope Irons installed in this manner shall be positioned directly in line with or when not possible directly above or below the projected center of the duct bank patt
333. ing of mixture will not be permitted SaDa T Hand Spreading in Lieu of Machine Spreading In areas where the use of machine spreading is impractical spread the mixture by hand Spreading shall be in a manner to prevent segregation Spread mixture uniformly in a loose layer of thickness that when rolled SECTION 32 12 19 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 will conform to required thickness 3 6 COMPACTION Begin compaction immediately after placement Begin rolling at the outside edge of the surface and proceed to the center overlapping on successive trips at least one half the width of the roller Alternate trips of the roller shall be slightly of different lengths The speed of the roller shall be such that displacement of the material does not occur The density of the compacted mixture shall be at least 96 percent of that of laboratory specimens of the same mixture subjected to 50 blows of the standard Marshall hammer according to the test procedure Sad EDGES OF PAVEMENT The edges of the pavement shall be compacted to the required density and shall be straight and true to required lines Place approved material along the edges of the pavement in such quantity as will compact to the thickness of the course being constructed or to the thickness of each layer in a multiple layer course allowing at least a 1 foot width of the shoulder to be rolled and compacted simultaneously with the rolling and compacting of each lay
334. ing of the bituminous material and hand spreading of the aggregate is necessary PSA i Bituminous Material Measurement Methods The amount of bituminous material to be paid for will be measured in gallons at 60 degrees F Correct volumes measured at temperatures other than 60 degrees F in accordance with ASTM D 633 ed Aggregate Measurement Methods The amount of aggregate to be paid for will be measured in cubic yards of dry aggregate Measurement of the materials shall be by determining the volume capacity of each vehicle delivering the material to the site of the work or stockpiles 1 3 Payment The quantities of aggregate and bituminous material determined as specified above will be paid for at the respective contract unit prices Payment will constitute full compensation for all operations necessary to complete the work as specified herein 1 4 Waybills and Delivery Tickets Do not remove bituminous material from the tank car or storage tank until measurements of the remaining quantity have been taken Submit waybills and delivery tickets during the progress of the work Before the final statement is allowed file certified waybills and delivery tickets for all materials used in the work covered by this section 2 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only AMERICAN ASSOC
335. ing of the transformer with devices identified paragraph entitled Pad Mounted Transformer Drawings item a c ANSI nameplate data of the transformer paragraph entitled Pad Mounted Transformer Drawings item b d Manufacturer s published time current curves properly overlaid on one full size logarithmic paper of the transformer high side fuses paragraph entitled Pad Mounted Transformer Drawings item e with transformer damage curve inrush curve and thru fault current indicated e Routine and other tests in PART 2 see paragraph entitled Source Quality Control subparagraph entitled Routine and Other Tests shall be conducted by the manufacturer and may be witnessed by the government Provide transformer test schedule required by submittal item SD 11 Closeout Submittals Provide certified copies of the tests f Provide acceptance test reports required by submittal item SD 06 Test SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Reports g Provide operation and maintenance manuals required by submittal item SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE TSI Pad Mounted Transformer Drawings Drawings shall indicate but not be limited to the following a An outline drawing with front top and side views b ANSI nameplate data c Elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams with terminals identified of watthour meter and current transformers d One line diagram includin
336. io c No load losses NLL and excitation current d Load losses LL and impedance voltage e Dielectric 1 Impulse 2 Applied voltage 3 Induced voltage f Leak PART 3 EXECUTION 3 mal INSTALLATION Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 NFPA 70 and to the requirements specified herein Provide new equipment and materials unless indicated or specified otherwise 2 GROUNDING NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 except that grounding systems shall have a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding 5 ohms 240 Grounding Electrodes Provide driven ground rods as specified in Section 33 71 02 00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION Connect ground conductors to the SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 13 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 upper end of ground rods by exothermic weld or compression connector Provide compression connectors at equipment end of ground conductors 3 2 2 Pad Mounted Transformer Grounding Provide separate copper grounding conductors and connect them to the ground loop as indicated When work in addition to that indicated or specified is required to obtain the specified ground resistance the provision of the contract covering Changes shall apply 3 2 3 Connections Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression connector Exothermic welds and compression connectors shall be installed as specified in Section 33 71 02 00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SQ Gro
337. ipes have cured to a no track condition demonstrate compliance with the average retroreflective values specified herein Take a minimum of ten readings on each test stripe with a Mirolux 12 Retroreflectometer or similar instrument with the same measuring geometry and direct readout in millicandelas per square meter per lux mcd m2 1x 3 36325 Level of Performance Demonstration The Contracting Officer or authorized representative will be present the application demonstrations to observe the results obtained and to validate the operating parameters of the vehicle s and equipment If accepted by the Contracting Officer or authorized representative the test stripe shall be the measure of performance required for this project Work shall not proceed until the demonstration results are satisfactory to the Contracting Officer or authorized representative 3 4 TRAFFIC CONTROL AND PROTECTION Place warning signs near the beginning of the work site and well ahead of the work site for alerting approaching traffic from both directions Place small markers along newly painted lines to control traffic and prevent damage to newly painted surfaces Mark painting equipment with large warning signs indicating slow moving painting equipment in operation Do not use foil backed material for temporary pavement marking because of its potential to conduct electricity during accidents involving downed power lines 3 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Demonstrate
338. ire alarm control panel is manually reset and restored to normal The system shall provide the following functions and operating features a The FACP and fire alarm control units if used shall provide power annunciation supervision and control for the system b Provide Class B initiating device circuits for conductor lengths of 10 feet or less c Provide Class A signaling line circuits for each floor d Provide Class A signaling line circuits for the network e Provide Class A notification appliance circuits The visual alarm notification appliances shall have the flash rates synchronized f Provide electrical supervision of the primary power AC supply presence of the battery battery voltage and placement of system modules within the control panel SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 T1271 ag g Provide an audible and visual trouble signal to activate upon a single break or open condition or ground fault The trouble signal shall also operate upon loss of primary power AC supply absence of a battery supply low battery voltage or removal of alarm or supervisory panel modules Provide a trouble alarm silence feature which shall Silence the audible trouble signal without affecting the visual indicator After the system returns to normal operating conditions the trouble signal shall again sound until the trouble is acknowledged A smoke sensor in the process of being verified for the act
339. irements for Alternating Current Cable Terminations Used on Shielded Cables Having Laminated Insulation Rated 2 5 kv through 765 kV or Extruded Insulation Rated 2 5 kV through 500 kV 81 1983 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity Ground Impedance and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System C2 2012 National Electrical Safety Code INSULATED CABLE ENGINEERS ASSOCIATION ICEA S 94 649 2004 Standard for Concentric Neutral Cables Rated 5 Through 46 KV INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION NETA ATS 2009 Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Equipment and Systems NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA ANSI C119 1 ANSI NEMA WC 71 ICEA S 96 659 NEMA RN 1 NEMA TC 6 amp 8 NEMA TC 7 NEMA TC 9 NEMA WC 74 ICEA S 93 639 2011 Electric Connectors Sealed Insulated Underground Connector Systems Rated 600 Volts 1999 Standard for Nonshielded Cables Rated 2001 5000 Volts for use in the Distribution of Electric Energy 2005 Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit 2003 Standard for Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installations 2005 Standard for Smooth Wall Coilable Electrical Polyethylene Conduit 2004 Standard for Fittings for Polyvinyl Chloride PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for
340. is displaying correct and accurate water information SECTION 33 12 33 00 30 Page 15 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 432 Follow up Verification Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the Contract the Contracting Officer shall be given five working days advance notice of the dates and times of checking and testing 3 3 Training The Contractor shall conduct a training course for meter configuration operation and maintenance of the system as specified The training shall be oriented for all components and systems installed under this Contract Training manuals shall be delivered for 6 trainees with two additional copies delivered for archiving at the project site The Contractor shall provide all audiovisual equipment and all other training materials and supplies A training day is defined as eight hours of classroom instruction including two 15 minute breaks and excluding lunchtime Monday through Friday during the daytime shift in effect at the training facility For guidance in planning the required instruction the Contractor shall assume that attendees have a high school education or equivalent and are familiar with utility systems Approval of the planned training schedule shall be obtained from the Governme
341. isplay tal and vertical viewing angle in ambient t temperatures of 120 Self contained heating element for snow and ice removal Capable of fully functional operation in outdoor weather conditions Standard tactile feedback 3x4 PIN pad Ability to display user configurable graphics Ability to display user configurable animated graphics Animated arrow indicating access has been granted and it is safe to proceed through the ECP Animated U turn arrow indicating access has been denied and Ability to display user defined text Please Wait Present a Enter PIN Access Granted on a green background Access z Access Be capable of reading Denied the user must exit the ECP ID Card Denied a bar code contac Ww tless CAC Pleas messages Try Again on a red background Exit on a red background ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 26 Submarine A School BQ 534 P IN entry Allow Emergency Vehicles signal produced by the Em r n entry based upon a 1127117 remote open ECP shall not exceed 30 within the ECP shall be ing the first responder to select the most ough the ECP the ECP e through the ECP twork based archi and ports cols o Distance to enable t feet from the ECP o Maximum time to open o All automated lanes mode al
342. isting base fire reporting system Once these connections are made system shall be left energized and new audio visual devices deactivated Report immediately to the Contracting Officer coordination and field problems resulting from the connection of the above components SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 20 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 7A 3 4 FIRESTOPPING Provide firestopping for holes at conduit penetrations through floor slabs fire rated walls partitions with fire rated doors corridor walls and vertical service shafts in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 5 PAINTING Paint exposed electrical fire alarm conduit and surface metal raceway to match adjacent finishes in exposed areas Paint junction boxes conduit and surface metal raceways red in unfinished areas Painting shall comply with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS 6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 26 51 Tests a Megger Tests After wiring has been installed and prior to making any connections to panels or devices wiring shall be megger tested for insulation resistance grounds and or shorts Conductors with 300 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 250 VDC Conductors with 600 volt rated insulation shall be tested at a minimum of 500 VDC The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test b Loop Resistance Tests Measure and record the resistance of each circuit
343. isual indicator This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm supervision or trouble condition SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 14 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 7A 2 2 10 4 Non Interfering Power and supervise each circuit such that a signal from one device does not prevent the receipt of signals from any other device Circuits shall be manually resettable by switch from the FACP after the initiating device or devices have been restored to normal 2 2 10 5 Fire Alarm Voice Message A fire alarm shall activate notification appliance circuits Textual audible appliances shall produce a slow whoop tone for three cycles followed by a voice message which is repeated until the control panel is reset or silenced Automatic messages shall be broadcast through all speakers on appropriate floors The visual strobes and audible message shall automatically be broadcast on all floors A live voice message shall override the automatic audible output through use of a microphone input at the control panel The system shall be capable of operating all speakers at the same time The digitalized voice message shall consist of a non volatile EPROM microprocessor based input to the amplifiers The microprocessor shall actively interrogate circuitry field wiring and digital coding necessary for the immediate and accurate rebroadcasting of the stored voice data into the appropriate amplifier input Loss of operating power supervisor
344. ith finished wall surfaces without use of mats or similar devices Plaster fillings are not permitted Install plates with alignment tolerance of 1 16 inch Use of sectional type device plates are not permitted Provide gasket for plates installed in wet locations 3 1 12 Electrical Penetrations Seal openings around electrical penetrations through fire resistance rated walls partitions floors or ceilings in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 3 1 13 Grounding and Bonding Provide In accordance with NFPA 70 and NFPA 780 Ground exposed non current carrying metallic parts of electrical equipment metallic raceway systems grounding conductor in metallic and nonmetallic raceways telecommunications system grounds and neutral conductor of wiring systems Make ground connection at main service equipment and extend grounding conductor to point of entrance of metallic water service Make connection to water pipe by suitable ground clamp or lug connection to plugged tee If flanged pipes are encountered make connection with lug bolted to street side of flanged connection Supplement metallic water service grounding system with additional made electrode in compliance with NFPA 70 In addition to the requirements specified herein provide telecommunications grounding in accordance with TIA J STD 607 Where ground fault protection is employed ensure that connection of ground and neutral does not interfere with correct operation of fau
345. ithin the normal test flow limits specified on AWWA C700 the meter shall not register less than 98 5 percent and not more than 101 5 percent of the water that actually passes through it b Minimum Test Flow At the minimum test flow rate specified in AWWA C700 the meter shall not register less than 95 percent and not more than 101 percent of the water that actually passes through it 11 Markings The size model and direction of flow through the meter shall be marked permanently on the outer case of all meters All meters shall have the manufacturer s serial numbers stamped on the meter main case and top of the reading lid 12 Register Boxes The name of the manufacturer shall be marked permanently on the lid of the register box The serial number of the meter shall be imprinted on the lid and the main case Qe de 2 Cold Water Meters Compound Type 2 Inch 3 Inch 4 Inch and 6 Inch Size Compound meters shall consist of a combination of a main line meter of the turbine type for measuring high rates of flow and a meter of appropriate size for measuring low rates of flow The compound meter shall have an automatic valve mechanism for diverting low rates of flow through the bypass meter Both metering devices with registers shall be contained in the same case The operating and physical characteristics shall conform to those specified within AWWA C702 a Materials 1 Cases The main case of the meter shall be made of a coppe
346. ity Teslin card e g retiree and dependent Navy commercial Access Control System NCACS Locally managed visitor cards Other contactless FIPS 201 compliant credentials TWIC The Navy Physical Access Control System NPACS shall serve as the foundation for the site PACS The system design shall include badging registration station s with the attributes as described in section Be 223k The PACS design shall contain the following attribute the ability to store transaction data for a maximum of 30 days The PACS design shall contain the following attributes allow the Base to select cardholder validation requirements based on FPCON and local requirements including Card Only Card plus PIN and have all PACS access transactions validated against NACMS The PACS design shall contain the following attribute Shall allow for the entry of 4 6 digit PINs SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 42 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 E E E Description EEE The PACS design shall contain the following attribute allow the Base to quickly change the cardholder validation requirements at one or more readers based on local requirements 45 Bs Ze The 731 322 22 53 The PACS design shall have a single card reader with the attributes described in section 342 253 The PACS design shall have the following attribute use NACMS to authenticate the initial download of the card population T
347. k 2 Phase B red 3 Phase C blue b 120 240 volt single phase Black and red 6 3 Insulation Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70 power and lighting wires shall be 600 volt Type THWN THHN conforming to UL 83 or Type XHHW conforming to UL 44 except that grounding wire may be type TW conforming to UL 83 remote control and signal circuits shall be Type TW or TF conforming to UL 83 Where lighting fixtures require 90 degree Centigrade C conductors provide only conductors with 90 degree C insulation or better 6 4 Bonding Conductors ASTM B1 solid bare copper wire for sizes No 8 AWG and smaller diameter ASTM B8 Class B stranded bare copper wire for sizes No 6 AWG and larger diameter OA dl Telecommunications Bonding Backbone TBB Provide a copper conductor TBB in accordance with TIA J STD 607 The TBB shall be a minimum No 6 AWG and be sized at 2 kcmil per linear foot of conductor length up to a maximum size of 3 0 AWG Provide insulated TBB with insulation as specified in the paragraph INSULATION and meeting the fire ratings of its pathway 6 4 2 Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications Provide a copper conductor Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications between the telecommunications main grounding busbar TMGB and the electrical service ground in accordance with TIA J STD 607 The bonding conductor for telecommunications shall be sized the same as the TBB 26 5 Servi
348. k Immediately before starting work remove all loose material dirt clay or other objectionable material from the surface to be treated with power brooms or power blowers if needed Paint firmly bonded to the surface that has the chalk removed may remain Material removed from the surface shall not be mixed with the cover aggregate SECTION 32 0113 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 3 2 SEAL COAT APPLICATION raal Rate Spread the bituminous material in the quantities shown in TABLE III The exact quantities within the range specified which may be varied to suit field conditions will be determined by the Contractor and approved by the Contracting Officer prior to use TABLE III APPLICATION OF MATERIAL Quantities Per Square Yard Gradation No Bitumen gallons Aggregate pounds 3 0 10 0 15 10 15 lt 22 Temperature Asphalt application temperature shall provide an application viscosity between 10 and 60 seconds Saybolt Furol or between 20 and 120 centistokes kinematic Furnish the temperature viscosity relation to the Contracting Officer 3223 Application of Bituminous Material Following the preparation and inspection of the pavement surface apply the seal coat material at the specified rates Uniformly apply the bituminous material in a single pass of the distributor and with either a double or triple lap spray over the surface to be sealed Spread building paper on the surface for a suffi
349. k Asphalt Rapid Curing Type ASTM D 2397 2005 Standard Specification for Cationic Emulsified Asphalt ASTM D 2995 1999 R 2009 Determining Application Rate of Bituminous Distributors ASTM D 977 2005 Emulsified Asphalt 13 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Tesni General Requirements Plant equipment machines and tools used in the work are subject to approval and shall be maintained in a satisfactory working condition at all times Calibrated equipment such as asphalt distributors scales batching equipment spreaders and similar equipment should have been recalibrated by a calibration laboratory within 12 months prior to commencing work 12332 Bituminous Distributor Provide a distributor with pneumatic tires of such size and number that the load produced on the base surface does not exceed 650 psi of tire width to prevent rutting shoving or otherwise damaging the base surface or other layers in the pavement structure Design and equip the distributor to spray the bituminous material in a uniform coverage at the specified temperature at readily determined and controlled rates from 0 05 to 2 0 gallons per square yard with a pressure range of 25 to 75 psi and with an allowable variation from the specified rate of not more than plus or minus 5 percent and at variable widths Include with the distributor equipment a separate power unit for the bitumen pump full circulation spray bars tachometer pressure gauges volume measuring devices ade
350. k absorbing type where indicated Hangers shall allow fixtures to swing within an angle of 45 degrees Brace pendants 4 feet or longer provided in shops or hangers to limit swinging Single unit suspended fluorescent fixtures shall have twin stem hangers Multiple unit or continuous row fluorescent fixtures shall have a tubing or stem for wiring at one point and a tubing or rod suspension provided for each unit length of chassis including one at each end Rods shall be a minimum 0 18 inch diameter 6 SWITCHES bL Toggle Switches Provide toggle switches as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 6 2 Incandescent Dimmer Switch UL 20 single pole 600 watt 120 volt ac full range rotary on off type with built in electromagnetic interference filter SECTION 26 51 00 Page 11 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 7 LIGHTING CONTACTOR NEMA ICS 2 electrically held contactor Contacts shall be rated volts amperes and poles Coils shall be rated volts Provide in NEMA 1 enclosure conforming to NEMA ICS 6 Contactor shall have silver alloy double break contacts Provide contactor with hand off automatic selector switch 8 TIME SWITCH Astronomic dial type or electronic type arranged to turn ON at sunset and turn OFF at predetermined time between 8 30 p m and 2 30 a m or sunrise automatically changing the settings each day in accordance with seasonal changes of sunset and sunrise Provide switch rated
351. k filled characters PART 3 EXECUTION See INSTALLATION Install gas piping appliances and equipment in accordance with NFPA 54 Install distribution piping in accordance with ASME B31 8 Sail Meters Meters shall be installed in accordance with AGA ANSI B109 1 S232 Piping Cut pipe to actual dimensions and assemble to prevent residual stress Provide supply connections entering the buildings as indicated Within buildings run piping parallel to structure lines and conceal in finished spaces Terminate each vertical supply pipe to burner or appliance with tee nipple and cap to form a sediment trap To supply multiple items of gas burning equipment provide manifold with inlet connections at both ends 3 2L Cleanliness Clean inside of pipe and fittings before installation Blow lines clear using 80 to 100 psig clean dry compressed air Rap steel lines sharply SECTION 33 51 13 00 30 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 along entire pipe length before blowing clear Cap or plug pipe ends to maintain cleanliness throughout installation 3 204 242 Aboveground Steel Piping Determine and establish measurements for piping at the job site and accurately cut pipe lengths accordingly For 2 inch diameter and smaller use threaded or socket welded joints For 2 1 2 inch diameter and larger use flanged or butt welded joints a Threaded Joints Where possible use pipe with factory cut threads otherwise cut pipe ends square remo
352. kaged and identified by nameplate tagging or stamping Spare parts shall be delivered to the Contracting Officer at the time of the final acceptance testing 1 8 2 Spare Parts Furnish the following spare parts and accessories a 4audiovisual devices of each type installed b 4 fuses for each fused circuit c 1 electromagnetic door holders SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 d 1 manual stations f 2 smoke sensors and base of each type installed i 3 test magnets devices for each type of sensors installed 1 8 3 Parts List Furnish a list in duplicate of all other parts and accessories which the manufacturer of the system recommends to be stocked for maintenance Li 9 KEYS Keys and locks for equipment shall be identical Provide not less than six keys of each type required Keys shall be CAT 60 PART 2 PRODUCTS Qed EXISTING FIRE ALARM EQUIPMENT Existing fire alarm equipment shall be removed prior to installation of the new system Existing conduits may be used at the discretion of the installing contractor All wiring must be new Qed Equipment Removal After acceptance of the new system by the Contracting Officer the remaining existing equipment not connected to the new system shall be removed unused exposed conduit shall be removed and damaged surfaces shall be restored The material shall be removed from the site and disposed of by the Contractor 2 1 2 Other Divisions To
353. l equipment 6 WARRANTY The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render Satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract PART 2 PRODUCTS Zee 1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Materials equipment and devices shall as a minimum meet requirements of UL where UL standards are established for those items and requirements of NFPA 70 SECTION 26 20 00 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 2 CONDUIT AND FITTINGS Shall conform to the following 2st Rigid Metallic Conduit e Lv Rigid Threaded Zinc Coated Steel Conduit ANSI C80 1 UL 6 B22 Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit PVC Type EPC 40 and EPC 80 in accordance with NEMA TC 2 UL 651 8223 Intermediate Metal Conduit IMC UL 1242 zinc coated steel only 2 4 Electrical Zinc Coated Steel Metallic Tubing EMT UL 797 ANSI C80 3 22ie5 Plastic Coated Rigid Steel and IMC Conduit NEMA RN 1 Type 40 40 mils thick 2 6 Flexible Metal Conduit UL 1 2016 41 Liquid Tight Flexible Metal Conduit Steel UL 360 TZET Fittings for Metal Conduit EMT and Flexible Metal Conduit UL 514B Ferrous fittings shall be cadmium or zinc coated in accordance with UL 514B ATN Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and IMC Threaded type Split couplings unacceptable r2 a2 Fittings for EMT Ste
354. l Data Package 30 days after receipt of the Notice to Proceed The data package includes system descriptions analyses calculations used in sizing equipment specified manufacturer s data for all equipment and end devices provided under these specifications Descriptions and calculations shall show how the equipment will operate as a system to meet the performance of this specification The software data package consists of descriptions of the operation and capability of all subsystem software Key control plan for all Contractor provided enclosures requiring locks and all keyed control switches The key control plan shall include the following 1 Procedures that will be used to log and positively control all keys during installation 2 A listing of all keys and where they are used 3 A listing of all persons allowed access to the keys Quality Control Plan for approval The QC Plan shall describe all Contractor and subcontractor activities during design manufacture and installation of the ACPCS The QC Plan shall include all Contractor and subcontractor technical data reviews inspections certifications and approvals and the QC documentation procedures Certifications from the manufacturers of the following equipment shall be submitted with the data package Active Vehicle Barrier Traffic Con
355. l hangers so that they hang plumb and shall be located with no obstructions within the 45 degree range in all directions The stem canopy and fixture shall be capable of 45 degree swing Pendants rods or chains 4 feet or longer excluding fixture shall be braced to prevent swaying using three cables at 120 degree separation Suspended fixtures in continuous rows shall have internal wireway systems for end to end wiring and shall be properly aligned to provide a straight and continuous row without bends gaps light leaks or filler pieces Aligning splines shall be used on extruded aluminum fixtures to assure hairline joints Steel fixtures shall be supported to prevent oil canning effects Fixture finishes shall be free of scratches nicks dents and warps and shall match the color and gloss specified Pendants shall be finished to match fixtures Aircraft cable shall be stainless steel Canopies shall be finished to match the ceiling and shall be low profile unless otherwise shown Maximum distance between suspension points shall be 10 feet or as recommended by the manufacturer whichever is less 1 4 Ballasts E A Ase N Remote Ballasts Remote type ballasts or transformers where indicated shall be mounted in a well ventilated easily accessible location within the maximum operating distance from the lamp as designated by the manufacturer gadis 5 Exit Signs and Emergency Lighting Units Wire exit signs and emergency lighting u
356. l interior parts without disturbing the connections to the pipeline Turbine meters shall have readily accessible change gears adjustable vanes or other approved means to adjust meter registration Such adjustment feature shall be an integral part of the removable rotor register assembly and not of the main or bottom case of the meter Registration Accuracy Meters shall meet the following requirements for accuracy with water of a temperature of less than 27 degrees Centigrade a Normal Flow Limits The meter shall not register less than 97 percent and not more than 103 percent of the water actually passed through it at any rate of flow within the normal test flow limits specified in AWWA C702 except in the registration of flows within the changeover from bypass meter to main meter Turbine meters SECTION 33 12 33 00 30 Page 12 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 7 LA shall be designed to allow prolonged operation at or near the upper limit of the specified normal flow range without premature degradation of registration accuracy or other evidence of undue wear Meters shall also be capable of accepting sudden increases in flow at high rates of flow without decoupling the register 2 6 Vy TL ll Cold Water Meter Strainers 2 Inch 3 Inch 4 Inch and 6 Inch Size 2 General All strainers provided shall have top access Cases for 2 inch 3 inch 4 inch and 6 inch strainers shall be bronze Strainer plates for all sizes shall be 18 8 stainles
357. l length into the ground 3 2 6 Stacks Ground metal guy wires for stacks Metal guy wires or cables attached to steel anchor rods set in earth will be considered as sufficiently well grounded However ground metal guy wires or cables attached to anchor rods set in concrete or attached to buildings or nonconducting supports to a ground rod driven full length into the ground 3 2 6 1 Metal Stacks Make metal smokestacks electrically continuous and to ground Heavy duty metal stacks having a metal thickness of 3 16 inches or greater do not require air terminals or down conductors Otherwise provide two ground rods driven full length into the earth Locate ground rods approximately 180 degrees apart and set ground rods not less than 3 feet nor more than 8 feet from the nearest point of the stack foundation 3 2 6 2 Nonmetallic Stacks On nonmetallic smokestacks constructed of brick hollow tile or concrete make the air terminals solid copper copper alloy stainless steel or Monel metal Distribute uniformly about the rim of the stack at intervals not exceeding 8 feet and extending at least 30 inches above the rim of stack Electrically connect air terminal together by means of a metal band or ring to form a closed loop about 2 feet below the top of the stack Where the stack has a metal crown connect air terminals to the metal crown Where stacks have metal lining extending part way up connect lining to air terminal at its upper end and gro
358. l sided carbide tipped bits are used 2 2 Concrete Saw Provide a self propelled power saw with small diameter 6 inches or less water cooled diamond or abrasive saw blades for cutting cracks to the depths and widths specified and for removing filler that is embedded in the cracks or adhered to the crack faces The diameter of the saw blade shall be small enough to allow the saw to closely follow the trace of the crack Dies Sandblasting Equipment Include in the sandblasting equipment an air compressor hose and long wearing venturi type nozzle of proper size shape and opening The maximum nozzle opening shall not exceed 1 4 inch The air compressor shall SECTION 32 0117 16 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 be portable and shall be capable of furnishing not less than 150 cfm and maintaining a line pressure of not less than 90 psi at the nozzle while in use Demonstrate compressor capability under job conditions before approval The compressor shall be equipped with traps that will maintain the compressed air free of oil and water The nozzle shall have an adjustable guide that will hold the nozzle aligned with the crack about 1 inch above the pavement surface Adjust the height angle of inclination and the size of the nozzle as necessary to secure satisfactory results 1 2 4 Waterblasting Equipment Include with the waterblasting equipment a trailer mounted water tank pumps high pressure hose wand with safety release c
359. lab shall be placed on a 6 inch thick well compacted gravel base Top of concrete slab shall be approximately 4 inches above finished grade with gradual slope for drainage Edges above grade shall have 1 2 inch chamfer Slab shall be of adequate size to project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment Stub up conduits with bushings 2 inches into cable wells in the concrete pad Coordinate dimensions of cable wells with transformer cable training areas 3217 2 Sealing When the installation is complete the Contractor shall seal all conduit and other entries into the equipment enclosure with an approved sealing compound Seals shall be of sufficient strength and durability to protect all energized live parts of the equipment from rodents insects or other foreign matter 3 18 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 3 18 1 Performance of Field Acceptance Checks and Tests Perform in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests performed in accordance with NETA ATS 3 18 1 1 Medium Voltage Cables Perform tests after installation of cable splices and terminators and before terminating to equipment or splicing to existing circuits a Visual and Mechanical Inspection 1 Inspect exposed cable sections for physical damage 2 Verify that cable is supplied and connected in accordance with contract plans and specifications 3 Inspect for proper shield ground
360. le the position Nameplates shall be melamine plastic 0 125 inch thick white with black center core Surface shall be matte finish Corners shall be square Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core Minimum size of nameplates shall be one by 2 5 inches Lettering shall be a minimum of 0 25 inch high normal block style EL WARNING SIGNS Provide warning signs for the enclosures of electrical equipment including substations pad mounted transformers pad mounted switches generators and switchgear having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts a When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in accordance with IEEE C57 12 28 or IEEE C57 12 29 such as for pad mounted transformers provide self adhesive warning signs on the outside of the high voltage compartment door s Sign shall be a decal and shall have nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the legend DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch high letters The word DANGER shall be in white letters on a red background and the words HIGH VOLTAGE shall be in black letters on a white background Decal shall be Panduit No PPSO710D72 or approved equal 1 12 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 NFPA 70 and requirements specified herein 1 13 INSTRUCTION TO GOVERNMENT PERSONNEL Where specified in the technical sections furnish the services of competent instructors to give full instruction t
361. le and visible annunciation at the intercom workstation located at the primary and secondary monitoring locations TCP IP enabled devices Accessible via PSNet Located at all access pedestals Located on the driver s side of all lanes within the vehicle trap Located on the outbound lane approach to the vehicle trap from the secure side of the installation when the ECP is the only access point for the installation wn ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 29 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 5 2 2 5 Interfaces A common interface across the Navy Enterprise is required To achieve this several interfaces have been designated and defined Links to associated video o Live video display window Allows for the display of no less than 4 live video feeds Dedicated window for live video associated with alarm events Shall allow the user to interact directly with devices located in the window o GIS enabled maps with geo referenced devices shown on the map Shall allow the user to interact directly with devices located on the map Shall support the full integration of video analytics o Object Video Analytics integration desired but not required Sh all support the use of business rules in alarm validation Shall support the use of multiple alarm point validation of alarm conditions all a Sh reduce the num
362. le for rolling bituminous pavements The wheels of the rollers shall be equipped with adjustable scrapers Equip the rollers with water tanks and sprinkling apparatus for keeping the wheels wet in order to prevent adherence of the bituminous material to the wheels 1 3 10 Single Pass Surface Treatment Machines Provide machines capable of spraying bituminous material and spreading aggregate in one pass of distributing the bituminous material uniformly at even heat and in controlled amounts and immediately spreading aggregates uniformly in controlled amounts over the surface to be sealed HT se Vacuum Sweepers for Fog Seal Provide self propelled vacuum pickup sweeper capable of removing loose sand water and debris from pavement surface 1 4 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 03 Product Data Waybills and Delivery Tickets Equipment List Inspection Reports SD 04 Samples Bituminous Materials Aggregates Fog Seal G SD 06 Test Reports Tests SECTION 32 01 13 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 ake 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Perform sampling and testing using an approved commercial testing laboratory or facilities furnished by the Contractor No work requiring testing will be permitted until the facilities have
363. leaning loose material from the pavement surface SECTION 32 01 16 17 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3353 Straightedge The Contractor shall furnish and maintain at the site in good condition one 12 foot straightedge or other suitable device for each milling machine for testing the finished surface Straightedge shall be made available for Government use Straightedges shall be constructed of aluminum or other lightweight metal and shall have blades of box or box girder cross section with flat bottom reinforced to insure rigidity and accuracy Straightedges shall have handles to facilitate movement on the pavement 1 4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS Milling shall not be performed when there is accumulation of snow or ice on the pavement surface T5 GRADE AND SURFACE SMOOTHNESS REQUIREMENTS T54L Grade The finished milled surfaces shall conform to the lines grades and cross sections indicated The finished milled pavement surfaces shall vary not more than 1 4 inch from the established plan grade line and elevation Finished surfaces at a juncture with other pavements shall coincide with the finished surfaces of the abutting pavements The deviations from the plan grade line and elevation will not be permitted in areas of pavements where closer conformance with planned grade and elevation is required for the proper functioning of appurtenant structures involved 14542 Surface Smoothness Finished surfaces shall not dev
364. lent Where there is probability of unusual wear mechanical injury or corrosion provide conductors with greater electrical capacity than normal or protect the conductor Provide mechanical ties or pressure connectors between grounds and metal doors and windows 3 155 Ground Connections Securely connect conductor forming continuations of down conductors from structure to grounding electrode in a manner to ensure electrical continuity between the two Provide clamp type connections or welds including exothermic for continuation Provide a ground connection for each down conductor Attach down conductors to ground rods by welding including exothermic brazing or clamping Provide clamps suitable for direct burial Protect ground connection from mechanical injury Bond metal water pipes and other large underground metallic objects together with all grounding mediums In making ground connections take advantage of all permanently moist places where practicable although avoid such places when area is wet with waste water that contains chemical substances especially those corrosive to metal 3 1 6 Grounding Electrodes Provide grounding electrode for each down conductor Extend driven ground SECTION 26 41 00 00 20 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 rods into the existing undisturbed earth for a distance of not less 10 feet Set ground rods not less than 2 feet nor more than 10 feet from the structure After the completed i
365. lightning impulse tests shall include the primary windings only of that transformer 1 IEEE C57 12 90 paragraph 10 3 entitled Lightning Impulse Test Procedures and IEEE C57 98 2 State test voltage levels 3 Provide photographs of oscilloscope display waveforms or plots of SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 12 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 digitized waveforms with test report d Lifting and moving devices Basically the same design requirement 2 for the lifting and moving devices test means a test report confirming that the lifting device being used is capable of handling the weight of the specified transformer in accordance with IEEE C57 12 34 e Pressure Basically the same design for the pressure test means a pad mounted transformer with a tank volume within 30 percent of the tank volume of the transformer specified f Short circuit Basically the same design for the short circuit test means a pad mounted transformer with the same KVA as the transformer specified eT RE Routine and Other Tests IEEE C57 12 00 Routine and other tests shall be performed in accordance with IEEE C57 12 90 by the manufacturer on the actual transformer s prepared for this project to ensure that the design performance is maintained in production Submit test reports by serial number and receive approval before delivery of equipment to the project site Required tests and testing sequence shall be as follows a Phase relation b Rat
366. lk forms shall be of a height equal to the full depth of the finished sidewalk 22 612 Curb and Gutter Forms Curb and gutter outside forms shall have a height equal to the full depth of the curb or gutter The inside form of curb shall have batter as indicated and shall be securely fastened to and supported by the outside form Rigid forms shall be provided for curb returns except that benders or thin plank forms may be used for curb or curb returns with a radius of 10 feet or more where grade changes occur in the return or where the central angle is such that a rigid form with a central angle of 90 degrees cannot be used Back forms for curb returns may be made of 1 1 2 inch benders for the full height of the curb cleated together In lieu of inside forms for curbs a curb mule may be used for forming and finishing this surface provided the results are approved PART 3 EXECUTION Fal FORM SETTING Set forms to the indicated alignment grade and dimensions Hold forms SECTION 32 16 13 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 rigidly in place by a minimum of 3 stakes per form placed at intervals not to exceed 4 feet Corners deep sections and radius bends shall have additional stakes and braces as required Clamps spreaders and braces shall be used where required to ensure rigidity in the forms Forms shall be removed without injuring the concrete Bars or heavy tools shall not be used against the concrete in removing the for
367. ll be cast metal cadmium or zinc coated if of ferrous metal with gasketed closures and shall conform to UL 514A 2 LOW VOLTAGE INSULATED CONDUCTORS AND CABLES Insulated conductors shall be rated 600 volts and conform to the requirements of NFPA 70 including listing requirements Wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to the site shall not be accepted Service entrance conductors shall conform to UL 854 type USE paal Conductor Types Cable and duct sizes indicated are for copper conductors and THHN THWN unless otherwise noted Conductors No 10 AWG and smaller shall be solid copper Conductors No 8 AWG and larger shall be stranded copper All conductors shall be copper 2 2 Conductor Material Unless specified or indicated otherwise or required by NFPA 70 wires in conduit other than service entrance shall be 600 volt Type THWN THHN conforming to UL 83 Copper conductors shall be annealed copper complying SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 with ASTM B3 and ASTM B8 Aluminum conductors shall be Type AA 8000 aluminum conductors complying with ASTM B800 and ASTM B801 and shall be of an aluminum alloy listed or labeled by UL as component aluminum wire stock conductor material Type EC 1350 is not acceptable Intermixing of copper and aluminum conductors is not permitted 24233 Jackets Multiconductor cables shall have an overall PVC outer jacket 2 2 4 Di
368. ll be applied with equipment that is capable of providing continuous uniformity in the dimensions of the stripe 1 5 32 Application Equipment a Application equipment shall provide continuous mixing and agitation of the material Conveying parts of the equipment between the main material reservoir and the extrusion shoe or spray gun shall prevent accumulation and clogging All parts of the equipment which come into SECTION 32 17 23 00 20 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 V2 7 contact with the material shall be easily accessible and exposable for cleaning and maintenance All mixing and conveying parts up to and including the extrusion shoes and spray guns shall maintain the material at the required temperature with heat transfer oil or electrical element controlled heat b The application equipment shall be constructed to ensure continuous uniformity in the dimensions of the stripe The applicator shall provide a means for cleanly cutting off stripe ends squarely and shall provide a method of applying Skiplines The equipment shall be capable of applying varying widths of traffic markings c The applicator shall be equipped with a drop on type bead dispenser capable of uniformly dispensing reflective glass spheres at controlled rates of flow The bead dispenser shall be automatically operated and shall begin flow prior to the flow of composition to assure that the strip is fully reflectorized 1 5 3 3 Portable Application Equi
369. ll be secured to the embankment or foundation soil by pins to prevent movement prior to placement of revetment materials Other appropriate means to prevent movement such as staples sand bags and stone could also be used Securing pins shall be inserted through both strips of overlapped geotextile along the line passing through midpoints of the overlap Securing pins shall be removed as placement of revetment materials are placed to prevent tearing of geotextile or enlarging holes maximum spacing between securing pins depends on the steepness of the embankment slope The maximum pins spacing shall be equal to or less than the values listed in TABLE 2 MAXIMUM SPACING FOR SECURING PINS When windy conditions prevail at the construction site the number of pins should be increased upon the demand of the Contracting Officer Terminal ends of the geotextile shall be anchored with key trench or apron at crest toe of the slope and upstream and downstream limits of installation TABLE 2 MAXIMUM SPACING FOR SECURING PINS EMBANKMENT SPACING feet i STEEPER THAN 1V ON 3H E 1v oN 3H To 1v oN an a a E FLATTER THAN 1V oN 4H ti ti rt SECTION 31 05 22 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 2 INSPECTIONS VERIFICATIONS AND TESTING Qed Manufacturing and Sampling Geotextiles and factory seams shall meet the requirements specified in TABLE 1 MINIMUM PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR DRAINAGE GEOTEXTILE Geotextiles shall be randomly sampled
370. low expeditious route th o Any vehicles withi complete the transit The PACS shall employ an industry standard proto integration of future changes Th e PACS shall use encrypted web protocol would be ergency Vehicle driver his feature shall be limi ted to 150 seconds the manual allowed to tecture that uses to facilitate ls and ports for transitioning through network firewall boundaries The PACS shall include sensors that enable ECPS to operate automatically and safely once access is granted Shall be able to produce user requested reports o Be able to produce card transaction reports for all ECPs from one centralized physical and _ software location These reports shall be based on card transactions at a given ECP and shall include all electronically processed card transactions regardless of the source of the transaction Shall produce alarm reports e Da le Kal era Transaction information Alarm description te of Time of Location of transaction nsaction nsaction o Shall produce access granted reports Transact e Da Cardholder info tion information te of Time of Location of transaction tra tra o Cardholder dossier Transact e Da wn tion Cardholder info Links to stored SA video License plate image Drivers image info nsaction nsaction rmation te of Time of Lo
371. ls b sheets shall tion and at the s deli ude mo 1 incl checkout and acceptance Th copies of each manual to be delivered shall be as FORM 1423 3 5 2 Final System Drawings Maintain a separate el con ec elevations trol diagrams trical mechanical and details set of drawings structural elementary including si and architect diagrams wi and programming flow charts of vered after difications made e number of specified on D D ex VOTV ural plans ring diagrams the system to be used for final system drawings This set shall be accurately kept up to date with all changes and additions to the ACPCS and shall be delivered to the Government with the final endurance test report In addition to being complete and accurate this set of drawings shall be kept neat and shall not be used for installation purposes Final drawings submitted with the endurance test report AutoCAD 2010 format 4 The following specifications part of this specification to the extent cited herein REFERENCE DOCUMENTS standards and hand shall be finished drawings on CD ROM in books forma All reference documents are intended to be used for guidance only unless compliance is required within the body of this specification Guidance documents may be used as an aid in identifying appli
372. lt protection 2 rege Weer asi Ground Rods Provide cone pointed ground rods The resistance to ground shall be measured using the fall of potential method described in IEEE 81 The maximum resistance of a driven ground shall not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions If this resistance cannot be obtained with a Single rod provide additional rods not less than 6 feet on centers If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall notify the Contracting Officer who will decide on the number of ground rods to add Fe Dir 2 Grounding Connections Make grounding connections which are buried or otherwise normally inaccessible by exothermic weld or compression connector a Make exothermic welds strictly in accordance with the weld manufacturer s written recommendations Welds which are puffed up or which show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable Mechanical connectors are not required at exothermic welds b Make compression connections using a hydraulic compression tool to provide the correct circumferential pressure Tools and dies shall be as recommended by the manufacturer An embossing die code or other standard method shall provide visible indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground wire SECTION 26 20 00 Page 28 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 be1343 Ground Bus A copper ground bus shall be provided in the ele
373. ly The latest version is required when applied to this specification AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION AWWA AWWA C700 2009 Standard for Cold Water Meters Displacement Type Bronze Main Case AWWA C701 2007 Standard for Cold Water Meters Turbine Type for Customer Service AWWA C702 2010 Cold Water Meters Compound Type AWWA C707 2010 Encoder Type Remote Registration Systems for Cold Water Meters ASME INTERNATIONAL ASME ASME B1 20 1 1983 R 2006 Pipe Threads General Purpose Inch ASME B16 1 2010 Gray Iron Threaded Fittings Classes 25 125 and 250 INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE IEEE C2 2012 National Electrical Safety Code IEEE C37 90 1 2002 Errata 2003 Errata 2004 Standard for Surge Withstand Capability SWC Tests for Relays and Relay Systems Associated with Electric Power Apparatus INTERNATIONAL ORGANIZATION FOR STANDARDIZATION ISO ISO 9001 2008 Corr 1 2009 Quality Management Systems Requirements NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2011 TIA 11 1 Errata 2011 National Electrical Code SECTION 33 12 33 00 30 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 1 3 SUBMITTALS a Maintenance manual shall provide 1 Condensed description of how the equipment operates 2 Block diagram indicating major assemblies 3 Troubleshooting information 4 Preventive maintenance 5 Spare parts information b Provide operation and maintenance man
374. ly list e Information on metering f Design test reports g Production test reports Lied WARRANTY The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render Satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 PRODUCT COORDINATION Products and materials not considered to be switchboards and related accessories are specified in Section 33 71 02 00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION and Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 2 2 SWITCHBOARD NEMA PB 2 and UL 891 2 2os I Ratings The voltage rating of the switchboard shall be 208Y 120 volts AC 4 wire 3 phase The continuous current rating of the main bus shall be 2 500 amperes The short circuit current rating shall be 35 000 rms symmetrical amperes The switchboard shall be UL listed and labeled as service entrance equipment SECTION 26 23 00 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 2 2 Construction Switchboard shall consist of vertical sections bolted together to form a rigid assembly and shall be front and rear aligned All circuit breakers shall be front accessible Front and rear aligned switchboards shall have full accessible load connections Where indicated space for future or space shall mean to include bus device supports and connections Provide insulating barriers in acco
375. ly sprayed on the ground material shall form a blotter like cover impregnated uniformly with grass seed Spread with one application with no second application of mulch 3 2 3 Mulching 3 42431 Hay or Straw Mulch Hay or straw mulch shall be spread uniformly at the rate of 2 tons per acre Mulch shall be spread by hand blower type mulch spreader or other approved method Mulching shall be started on the windward side of relatively flat areas or on the upper part of steep slopes and continued uniformly until the area is covered The mulch shall not be bunched or clumped Sunlight shall not be completely excluded from penetrating to the ground surface All areas installed with seed shall be mulched on the same day as the seeding Mulch shall be anchored immediately following spreading 3 2 4 Rolling Immediately after seeding firm entire area except for slopes in excess of 3 to 1 with a roller not exceeding 90 pounds for each foot of roller width If seeding is performed with cultipacker type seeder or by hydroseeding rolling may be eliminated 3 2255 Watering Start watering areas seeded as required by temperature and wind conditions Apply water at a rate sufficient to insure thorough wetting of soil to a depth of 2 inches without run off During the germination process seed is to be kept actively growing and not allowed to dry out 3 23 PROTECTION OF TURF AREAS Immediately after turfing protect area against traffic a
376. ly with TIA 568 C 0 TIA 568 C 1 TIA 568 C 2 TIA 568 C 3 and NFPA 70 Provide a labeling system for cabling as required by TIA EIA 606 and UL 969 Ship cable on reels or in boxes bearing manufacture date for for unshielded twisted pair UTP in accordance with ICEA S 90 661 for all cable used on this project Cabling manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of installation shall not be used 23h Horizontal Cabling Provide horizontal cable in compliance with NFPA 70 and performance characteristics in accordance with TIA 568 C 1 2 3g Ve L Horizontal Copper Provide horizontal copper cable UTP 100 ohm in accordance with TIA 568 C 2 UL 444 ANSI NEMA WC 66 ICEA S 90 661 Provide four each individually twisted pair minimum size 24 AWG conductors Category 6 with a blue thermoplastic jacket Cable shall be imprinted with manufacturers name or identifier flammability rating gauge of conductor transmission performance rating category designation and length marking at regular intervals in accordance with ICEA S 90 661 Provide plenum CMP riser CMR or general purpose CM or CMG communications rated cabling in accordance with NFPA 70 Substitution of a higher rated cable shall be permitted in accordance with NFPA 70 Cables installed in conduit within and under slabs shall be UL listed and labeled for wet locations in accordance with NFPA 70 2 4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS SPACES Provide connecting hardware and termination equip
377. m quantity indicated by a single revolution of the test hand and the minimum capacity of the register shall be as listed in AWWA C702 The maximum indication on the test circle and the minimum register capacity of the bypass unit shall be in accordance with the approved AWWA Standard for the type of meter used as the bypass unit a Coordinator Registers The meter may be equipped with a coordinator so that the readings of both sections can record on a single register The register construction shall conform to previously mentioned requirements and the maximum quantity indicated by a single revolution of the test hand and the minimum capacity of the register shall conform to AWWA C702 Register Boxes The lid shall be recessed and shall overlap the register box to protect the lens Intermediate Gear Trains Intermediate gear trains may be mounted on the measuring chamber or cage or in the main casings When not exposed to water they may also be combined with or adjacent to the register gearing Gear trains exposed to water shall be the oil enclosed type shall have separate housings or shall form housings with the main casings or measuring chambers and shall operate in a suitable lubricant Gear trains made of non corrosive metals or synthetic polymers may be exposed to water Measuring Chambers or Cages The main line section chambers or cages shall be self contained units firmly seated and easily detached and removed from the main case
378. material whether primed or not until the surfacing is completed The bituminous coat shall conform to all requirements as described herein 3 4 2 Prime Coat Apply a prime coat at locations shown on the Drawings The prime coat is required if it will be at least 7 days before the surfacing Asphalt cement hot mix concrete layer is constructed on the underlying base course etc compacted material The type of liquid asphalt and application rate will be as specified herein Protect the underlying from any damage water traffic etc until the surfacing is placed If the Contractor places the surfacing within seven days the choice of protection measures or actions to be taken is at the Contractor s option Repair recompact or SECTION 32 12 10 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 7A replace damage to the underlying material caused by lack of or inadequate protection by approved methods at no additional cost to the Government If the Contractor opts to use the prime coat apply as soon as possible after consolidation of the underlying material Apply the bituminous material uniformly over the surface to be treated at a pressure range of 25 to 75 psi the rate shall be as specified above in paragraph APPLICATION RATE To obtain uniform application of the prime coat on the surface treated at the junction of previous and subsequent applications spread building paper on the surface for a sufficient distance back from the ends of each
379. mblies from floating during concrete pouring Anchoring shall be done by driving reinforcing rods adjacent to duct spacer assemblies and attaching the rods to the spacer assembly Provide color type and depth of warning tape as specified in Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK 3 6 8 1 Connections to Manholes Duct bank envelopes connecting to underground structures shall be flared to have enlarged cross section at the manhole entrance to provide additional shear strength Dimensions of the flared cross section shall be larger than the corresponding manhole opening dimensions by no less than 12 inches in each direction Perimeter of the duct bank opening in the underground structure shall be flared toward the inside or keyed to provide a positive interlock between the duct bank and the wall of the structure Use vibrators when this portion of the encasement is poured to assure a seal between the envelope and the wall of the structure 3 6 8 2 Connections to Existing Underground Structures For duct bank connections to existing structures break the structure wall out to the dimensions required and preserve steel in the structure wall Cut steel and bend out to tie into the reinforcing of the duct bank envelope Chip the perimeter surface of the duct bank opening to form a key or flared surface providing a positive connection with the duct bank envelope 3 6 8 3 Connections to Existing Concrete Pads For duct bank connections to concrete pads break a
380. ment in the telecommunications entrance facility to facilitate installation as shown on design drawings for terminating and cross connecting permanent cabling Provide telecommunications interconnecting hardware color coding in accordance with TIA EIA 606 2 40 Backboards Provide void free interior gradeA C plywood 3 4 inch thick4 by 8 feetas indicated Backboards shall be fire rated by manufacturing process Fire stamp shall be clearly visible Backboards shall be provided on a minimum of two adjacentwalls in the telecommunication spaces SECTION 27 10 00 Page 10 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 2 5 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET CONNECTOR ASSEMBLIES 5 1 Outlet Connector Copper Outlet connectors shall comply with FCC Part 68 TIA 568 C 1 and TIA 568 C 2 UTP outlet connectors shall be UL 1863 listed non keyed 8 pin modular constructed of high impact rated thermoplastic housing and shall be third party verified and shall comply with TIA 568 C 2 Category 6 requirements Outlet connectors provided for UTP cabling shall meet or exceed the requirements for the cable provided Outlet connectors shall be terminated using a Type 110 IDC PC board connector color coded for both T568A and T568B wiring Each outlet connector shall be wired T568A UTP outlet connectors shall comply with TIA 568 C 2 for 200 mating cycles awe Optical Fiber Adapters Couplers Provide optical fiber adapters suitable for duplex SC in Accordance
381. ments and allow for the rapid replacemen lar design module The modu J logistics flexibil accelerate implement To accommoda duplicate pa and have a p to allow for The AVG L impl PACS It is the responsibility of the systems and devices and accommodate their networks the PWS Tike thway ty Each of these modules tation of any f wil he individual 1127117 CG AVG L but to that make up the all l be self cont and integ concept is also i simplify maintenance o uture upgra te the possible expansion of the system underground conduits and raceways shall The second duplicate path inclu low for lementation shall integrate with CCTV string installed to al dedicated electrical and communications circu 100 percent growth subsystems and componen the cont 5 2 2 Primary Functions The AVG L security personnel wn ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 20 ra ntended f the system des all de a second way shall future its shal tained tion of a like to increase and be unused growth All l be sized existing government ts when directed by ractor to identify use within the AVG system shall have the following major components Entry Control Point Physical Access Control System PACS Communications and Signage Interface
382. minimum distance of 3 inches Stagger the joints of the conduits by rows horizontally and layers vertically to strengthen the conduit assembly Provide plastic duct spacers that interlock vertically and horizontally Spacer assembly shall consist of SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 19 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 base spacers intermediate spacers ties and locking device on top to provide a completely enclosed and locked in conduit assembly Install spacers per manufacturer s instructions but provide a minimum of two spacer assemblies per 10 feet of conduit assembly 3 6 7 Conduit Plugs and Pull Rope New conduit indicated as being unused or empty shall be provided with plugs on each end Plugs shall contain a weephole or screen to allow water drainage Provide a plastic pull rope having 3 feet of slack at each end of unused or empty conduits 3 6 8 Duct Encased in Concrete Construct underground duct lines of individual conduits encased in concrete Do not mix different kinds of conduit in any one duct bank Concrete encasement surrounding the bank shall be rectangular in cross section and shall provide at least 3 inches of concrete cover for ducts Separate conduits by a minimum concrete thickness of 2 1 2 inches except separate light and power conduits from control signal and telecommunications conduits by a minimum concrete thickness of 3 inches Before pouring concrete anchor duct bank assemblies to prevent the asse
383. mpact mixture by rolling Begin rolling as soon as placement of mixture will bear rollers Delays in rolling freshly spread mixture shall not be permitted Start rolling longitudinally at the extreme sides of the lanes and proceed toward center of pavement or toward high side of pavement with SECTION 32 12 17 Page 13 Submarine A School BQ 534 V2 7A a one way slope Operate rollers so that each trip overlaps the previous adjacent strip by at least one foot Alternate trips of the roller shall be of slightly different lengths Conduct tests for conformity with the specified crown grade and smoothness immediately after initial rolling Before continuing rolling correct variations by removing or adding materials as necessary If required subject course to diagonal rolling with the steel wheeled roller crossing the lines of the previous rolling while mixture is hot and in a compactible condition Speed of the rollers shall be slow enough to avoid displacement of hot mixture Correct displacement of mixture immediately by use of rakes and fresh mixture or remove and replace mixture as directed Continue rolling until roller marks are eliminated and course has a density of at least 98 percent but not more than 100 percent of that attained in a laboratory specimen of the same mixture prepared in accordance with ASTM D 1559 During rolling moisten wheels of the rollers enough to prevent adhesion of mixture to wheels but excessive water is prohibite
384. mple Graphic E S2 k Provide the completed meter data schedule for the installation See example Graphic E S3 Electrical tests a Apply voltage or current as appropriate to each analog input and verify correct measurement and indication b Confirm correct operation and setting of each auxiliary input output feature including mechanical relay digital and analog c After initial system energization confirm measurements and indications are consistent with loads present d Make note of and report any Error Code or Caution Code on the meter s display Provide meter configuration report b Current Transformers 1 Visual and mechanical inspection a Compare equipment nameplate data with specification and approved shop drawings b Inspect physical and mechanical condition c Verify correct connection including polarity d Inspect all electrical connections to ensure they are tight e Verify that required grounding and shorting connections provide good contact Electrical Tests Verify proper operation by reviewing the meter configuration report S222 System Functional Verification Verify that the installed meters are working correctly in accordance with the meter configuration report SECTION 26 27 14 00 20 Page 12 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 a The correct meter form is installed b All voltage phases are present c Phase rotation is correct d Phase angles are co
385. ms Any concrete found defective after form removal shall be promptly and satisfactorily repaired Forms shall be cleaned and coated with form oil each time before concrete is placed Wood forms may instead be thoroughly wetted with water before concrete is placed except that with probable freezing temperatures oiling is mandatory cc iene Nee Curbs and Gutters The forms of the front of the curb shall be removed not less than 2 hours nor more than 6 hours after the concrete has been placed Forms back of curb shall remain in place until the face and top of the curb have been finished as specified for concrete finishing Gutter forms shall not be removed while the concrete is sufficiently plastic to slump in any direction 3 2 CURB AND GUTTER CONCRETE PLACEMENT AND FINISHING 3 24 Formed Curb and Gutter Concrete shall be placed to the section required in a single lift Consolidation shall be achieved by using approved mechanical vibrators Curve shaped gutters shall be finished with a standard curb mule 3 2 2 Curb and Gutter Finishing Approved slipformed curb and gutter machines may be used in lieu of hand placement 34253 Concrete Finishing Exposed surfaces shall be floated and finished with a smooth wood float until true to grade and section and uniform in texture Floated surfaces shall then be brushed with a fine hair brush with longitudinal strokes The edges of the gutter and top of the curb shall be rounded with a
386. n 30 days before the material is required in the work A copy of the calibration test results before the bituminous distributor and aggregate spreader are used on the job Testing is the responsibility of the Contractor and shall be performed by an approved commercial laboratory The following number of tests if performed at the appropriate time will be the minimum acceptable for each type of operation 33411 Gradation Perform gradation tests in accordance with ASTM C136 Perform a minimum of one gradation for every 10 cubic yards of aggregate to be placed with a minimum of three gradations for each day s run When the source of materials is changed or deficiencies are found the gradation shall be repeated and the material already placed shall be retested to determine the extent of the unacceptable material Replace all in place unacceptable material at no additional expense to the Government 3434142 Abrasion Resistance Perform abrasion resistance tests in accordance with ASTM C131 Perform one test for every 10 cubic yards of aggregate placed 343 aula Stripping Perform stripping test on aggregate from each source in accordance with ASTM D 3625 prior to incorporation into the work and when the source is changed 3 3 2 Bituminous Material Sample Obtain a sample of the bituminous material used under the supervision of SECTION 32 0113 Page 9 Submarine A School BQ 534 T1277 3 the Contracting Officer Th
387. n edging tool to a radius of 1 2 inch Immediately after removing the front curb form the face of the curb shall be rubbed with a wood or concrete rubbing block and water until blemishes form marks and tool marks have been removed The front curb surface while still wet shall be brushed in the same manner as the gutter and curb top The top surface of gutter and entrance shall be finished to grade with a wood float S204 Joint Finishing Curb edges at formed joints shall be finished as indicated 3 2 5 Surface and Thickness Tolerances Finished surfaces shall not vary more than 1 4 inch from the testing edge of a 10 foot straightedge Permissible deficiency in section thickness will be up to 1 4 inch SECTION 32 16 13 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 23 CURB AND GUTTER JOINTS Curb and gutter joints shall be constructed at right angles to the line of curb and gutter worn Contraction Joints Contraction joints shall be constructed directly opposite contraction joints in abutting portland cement concrete pavements and spaced so that monolithic sections between curb returns will not be less than 5 feet nor greater than 15 feet in length a Contraction joints except for slip forming shall be constructed by means of 1 8 inch thick separators and of a section conforming to the cross section of the curb and gutter Separators shall be removed as soon as practicable after concrete has set sufficiently to preserve the widt
388. n flanges shall be made of cast iron b General Design 1 Pressure Requirements Meters supplied under this specification shall operate without leakage or damage to any part at a working pressure of 150 psi 2 Accessibility All 1 1 2 inch and 2 inch meters shall be designed for easy removal of all interior parts without disturbing the connections to the pipeline c Detail Design 1 Cases All meters shall have an outer case with separate removable measuring chambers Cases shall not be repaired in any manner The inlet and outlet shall have a common axis A meter case shall include the top case and bottom case or main case and bottom plate whichever is applicable Connection flanges shall be SECTION 33 12 33 00 30 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 parallel Connections Meter case connections for 5 8 inch x 3 4 inch and 1 inch meters shall be meter casing spuds on both ends Spuds shall have external straight threads conforming to ASME B1 20 1 as far as the specifications apply Pitch diameters shall be those shown in AWWA C700 Main case connections for 1 1 2 inch and 2 inch meters shall be oval flanged on both ends Flanges shall be faced and drilled and shall be the oval type The drilling shall be on a horizontal axis the number of bolt holes and the diameters of the bolt holes and bolt circle shall be as listed in AWWA C700 Two oval companion flanges gaskets bolts and nuts shall be provided with each m
389. n in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 2 years prior to bid opening The 2 year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the 2 year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be products of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in the technical section 6 Del Alternative Qualifications Products having less than a 2 year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturers factory or laboratory tests is furnished 0 s Que Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used unless specified otherwise 7 WARRANTY The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract 8 POSTED OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS Provide for each system and principal item of equipment as specified in the technical sections f
390. n opening in the pad out to the dimensions required and preserve steel in pad Cut the steel and bend out to tie into the reinforcing of the duct bank envelope Chip out the opening in the pad to form a key for the duct bank envelope 3 6 8 4 Connections to Existing Ducts Where connections to existing duct banks are indicated excavate the banks to the maximum depth necessary Cut off the banks and remove loose SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 20 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 concrete from the conduits before new concrete encased ducts are installed Provide a reinforced concrete collar poured monolithically with the new duct bank to take the shear at the joint of the duct banks Remove existing cables which constitute interference with the work Abandon in place those no longer used ducts and cables which do not interfere with the work 3 6 8 5 Partially Completed Duct Banks During construction wherever a construction joint is necessary in a duct bank prevent debris such as mud and and dirt from entering ducts by providing suitable conduit plugs Fit concrete envelope of a partially completed duct bank with reinforcing steel extending a minimum of 2 feet back into the envelope and a minimum of 2 feet beyond the end of the envelope Provide one No 4 bar in each corner 3 inches from the edge of the envelope Secure corner bars with two No 3 ties spaced approximately one footapart Restrain reinforcing assembly from moving during c
391. n to the system shall indicate a trouble condition on the FACP 2 2 10 9 Resetting Provide the necessary controls to prevent the resetting of any alarm supervisory or trouble signal while the alarm supervisory or trouble SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 15 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 7A condition on the system still exists 2 2 10 10 Instructions Provide a typeset printed or typewritten instruction card mounted behind a Lexan plastic or glass cover in a stainless steel or aluminum frame Install the instructions on the interior of the FACP The card shall show those steps to be taken by an operator when a signal is received as well as the functional operation of the system under all conditions normal alarm supervisory and trouble The instructions shall be approved by the Contracting Officer before being posted Py are Opal ee Walk Test The FACP shall have a walk test feature When using this feature operation of initiating devices shall result in limited system outputs so that the notification appliances operate for only a few seconds and the event is indicated on the system printer but no other outputs occur 2 2 10 12 History Logging In addition to the required printer output the control panel shall have the ability to store a minimum of 400 events in a log These events shall be stored in a battery protected memory and shall remain in the memory until the memory is downloaded or cleared manually Resetting of the con
392. nches in any dimension or as recommended by the pipe manufacturer whichever is smaller 1 2 10 Nonfrost Susceptible NFS Material Nonfrost susceptible material are a uniformly graded washed sand with a maximum particle size of 0 25 inch and less than 5 percent passing the No 200 size sieve and with not more than 3 percent by weight finer than 0 02 mm grain size 1 3 MEASUREMENT a Dee bere Piping Trench Excavation Measure trench excavation by the number of linear feet along the centerline of the trench and excavate to the depths and widths specified for the particular size of pipe Replace unstable trench bottoms with a selected granular material Include the additional width at manholes and similar structures the furnishing placing and removal of sheeting and bracing pumping and bailing and all incidentals necessary to complete the work required by this section 1523 42 Rock Excavation for Trenches Measure and pay for rock excavation by the number of cubic yards of acceptably excavated rock material Measure the material in place but base volume on a maximum 30 inch width for pipes 12 inch in diameter or less and a maximum width of 16 inch greater than the outside diameter of the pipe for pipes over 12 inch in diameter Provide the measurement to SECTION 31 00 00 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 7A include all authorized overdepth rock excavation as determined by the Contracting Officer For manholes and othe
393. nd Maintenance Data Lighting Control System Data Package 5 G Submit operation and maintenance data in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA and as specified herein showing all light fixtures control modules control zones occupancy sensors light level sensors power packs dimming ballasts schematic diagrams and all interconnecting control wire conduit and associated hardware Operational Service Submit documentation that includes contact information summary of procedures and the limitations and conditions applicable to the project Indicate manufacturer s commitment to reclaim materials for recycling and or reuse 6 QUALITY ASSURANCE 6 Fluorescent Electronic Ballasts Submit ballast catalog data as required in the paragraph entitled Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts contained herein As an option submit the fluorescent fixture manufacturer s electronic ballast specification information in lieu of the actual ballast manufacturer s catalog data This information shall include published specifications and sketches which covers the information required by the paragraph entitled Fluorescent Lamp Electronic Ballasts herein This information may be supplemented by catalog data if required and shall contain a list of vendors with vendor part numbers 6 2 Lighting Fixtures Complete With Lamps and Ballasts Submit one sample of each fixture type for inspection review and approval The sampl
394. nd other use 3 4 RENOVATION OF EXISTING TURF AREA 3 401 Dethatching Upon completion of aerating operation and Contracting Officer s approval to proceed dethatch turf areas indicated by approved device to a depth of 1 4 inch 1 2 inch below existing soil level to reduce thatch build up grain and surface compaction Keep clean at all times at least one paved pedestrian access route and one paved vehicular access route to each building Clean other paving when work is complete Remove all debris generated during this operation off site SECTION 32 92 19 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 BD RESTORATION Restore to original condition existing turf areas which have been damaged during turf installation operations at the Contractor s expense Keep clean at all times at least one paved pedestrian access route and one paved vehicular access route to each building Clean other paving when work in adjacent areas is complete End of Section SECTION 32 92 19 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 33 12 33 00 30 WATER UTILITY METERING 11 11 PART 1 GENERAL alin 1 DEFINITIONS Unless otherwise specified or indicated water terms used in this specification and on the drawings shall be as defined in AWWA C700 oi REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation on
395. nd receive a local long distance and DSN telephone call b Data Tests These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and are available to assist with testing Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network End of Section SECTION 27 10 00 Page 15 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 ANALOG ADDRESSABLE INTERIOR FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 10 07 PART 1 GENERAL alee 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only ASME INTERNATIONAL ASME ASME A17 1 CSA B44 2010 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators FM GLOBAL FM FM APP GUIDE updated on line Approval Guide http www approvalguide com INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE IEEE C62 41 1 2002 R 2008 Guide on the Surges Environment in Low Voltage 1000 V and Less AC Power Circuits IEEE C62 41 2 2002 Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low Voltage 1000 V and Less AC Power Circuits NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 101 2012 Life Safety Code NFPA 241 2009 Standard for Safeguarding Construction Alteration and Demolition Operations NFPA 72 2010 TIA 10 4 National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code NFPA 90A 2009 Errata 09 1
396. ndicated pathways Do not exceed manufacturer s recommended bending radii and pull tension Prepare cable for pulling by cutting outer jacket 10 inches leaving strength members exposed for SECTION 27 10 00 Page 12 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 approximately 10 inches Twist strength members together and attach to pulling eye Vertical cable support intervals shall be in accordance with manufacturer s recommendations Zelite Horizontal Cabling Install horizontal cabling as indicated on drawings Do not untwist Category 6 UTP cables more than one half inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry Provide slack cable in the form of a figure eight not a service loop on each end of the cable 10 feet in the telecommunications room and 12 inches in the work area outlet 3 152 Pathway Installations Provide in accordance with TIA 569 and NFPA 70 Provide building pathway as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM S213 Cable Tray Installation Install cable tray as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Only CMP type cable shall be installed in a plenum 3 1 4 Work Area Outlets Saab 450 Terminations Terminate UTP cable in accordance with TIA 568 C 1 TIA 568 C 2 and wiring configuration as specified Terminate fiber optic cables in accordance with TIA 568 C 3 Sel 342 Cover Plates As a minimum each outlet connector shall be labeled as to its function and a unique number to id
397. ne Spindles Measuring chamber spindles shall be made of phosphor bronze stainless steel ceramic or suitable synthetic polymer Intermediate Gear Trains Frames gears and pinions of intermediate gear trains exposed to water shall be made of copper alloy containing not less than 85 percent copper and suitable amounts of tin lead and zinc or suitable synthetic polymer When not exposed to water intermediate gear trains may be made of a suitable synthetic polymer External Fasteners casing bolts studs nuts screws and washers External fasteners shall be made of a copper alloy containing not less than 57 percent copper stainless steel or steel treated to resist corrosion by a process to be approved by the Government Fasteners for no pressure assemblies may be made of a suitable synthetic polymer All external case closures such as rings clamps screws bolts cap bolts nuts and washers shall be designed for easy removal following lengthy service Companion Flanges Companion flanges shall be made of cast iron b General Design 1 2 Pressure Requirements Meters supplied under this specification shall operate without leakage or damage to any part at a working pressure of 150 psi Pressure drop through turbine meters and strainers when operated within specified normal flow limits shall not exceed the characteristics outlined in AWWA C701 Accessibility All turbine meters shall be designed for easy removal of al
398. network installation within CONUS and OCONUS shall be conducted under the PSNet program managed by CNIC N6 The PSNet LAN is that portion of PSNet that connects AT FP systems on a given installation AVG L projects in non U S territories OCONUS shall use the ONE NET network vice PSNet As such all networks and connected devices shall conform to all specifications and regulations as defined by NETWARCOM for PSNET connectivity The system shall meet all require PSNet Information Assurance IA requirements It is desirable that all devices used within the AVG L be derived from the AVG L Platform IT PIT Risk Approval PRA list For devices that are desired but do not exists on the PRA list appropriate action will need to be taken to modify or amend the PRA to include these devices Wireless networks are permissible and shall be SECNAVTINST 2075 1 compliant and certified for use Networks shall be tested and baseline performance documented Network base lining consists of measuring and rating the performance of a network in real time situations Providing a network baseline requires testing and reporting of the following physical connectivity normal network utilization as installed individual device bandwidth requirements protocol usage peak network utilization average throughput of the netwo
399. nfiguration End of Section SECTION 26 29 23 Page 10 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 26 41 00 00 20 LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM 04 06 PART 1 GENERAL alee 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE IEEE 81 1983 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity Ground Impedance and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2011 TIA 11 1 Errata 2011 National Electrical Code NFPA 780 2011 Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL UL 467 2007 Grounding and Bonding Equipment UL 96 2005 Reprint Oct 2010 Standard for Lightning Protection Components UL 96A 2007 Reprint Oct 2010 Standard for Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems UL Electrical Constructn 2009 Electrical Construction Equipment Directory 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 26 00 00 00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to this section with additions and modifications specified herein Beck Verification of Dimensions Contractor shall become familiar with all details of work verify all dimensions in field and shall advise Contracting Officer of any discrepancy before performing work No departu
400. ng attributes o Shall match existing base architectural requirements o An ECP Automation together in a safe and efficient manner island with a minimum width of 36 used to au the following attributes o Shall be able to detect motorcycles tomate the various ECP elements This shall have 0p ECTION 34 41 2 vehicles ranging from licensed and scooters to AASHTO defined passenger 6 00 10 Page 22 Submarine A School BQ 534 vehicles Shall be for controllers and sof Shall not contain PL solutions to perform ga in compliance with tware C the API PACS or te au This does not include PLC con tomation field panel 1127117 ITE 2070 specifications based trollers imbedded in devices or PACS field panels used to perform identity management and validation Shall not contain site specific code imbedded in firmware Shall use Boolean logic for all programming Ladder logic programming is not allowed Programming to include fault tolerance and fault recovery Shall allow for authorized user changes to the gate automation software Shall be network accessible Shal allow for the monitoring of current ECP status across PSNet Shall support the NTCIP protocol www ntcip org Sha provide automatic notification of fault conditions
401. ng either by attachment to the object to be protected or by means of a substantial tripod or other braces which are permanently and rigidly attached to the building or structure Metal projections and metal parts of buildings such as smokestacks and other metal objects that are at least 3 16 inch thick and that do not contain hazardous materials need not be provided with air terminals However bond these metal objects to a lightning conductor through a metal conductor of the same unit weight per length as the main conductor Where metal ventilators are installed mount air terminals thereon where practical Bond air terminals erected by necessity adjacent to a metal ventilator to the ventilator near the top and bottom Where nonmetallic spires steeples or ventilators are present mount air terminals to the side In addition where spires or steeples project more SECTION 26 41 00 00 20 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 than 10 feet above the building continue conductor from air terminal to nearest down conductor securely connect thereto 3 1 2 Roof Conductors Connect roof conductors directly to the roof or ridge roll Avoid sharp bends or turns in conductors Do not make turns of less than 8 inches Preserve horizontal or downward course on conductors Rigidly fasten conductors every 3 feet along the roof and down the building to the ground Rigidly connect metal ventilators to the roof conductor at three places Make conne
402. ng of materials to the proper application temperature a thermometer for reading the temperature of tank contents and a hand held hose attachment suitable for applying bituminous material manually to areas inaccessible to the distributor Equip the distributor to circulate and agitate the bituminous material during the heating process Provide distributor with an adjustable both horizontally and vertically spray nozzle bar Make normal width of bar application at least 12 feet with provisions for lesser or larger width when necessary Equip distributor with a meter having a dial registering feet of travel min Make both dials visible to the distributor driver Provide a thermometer and well not in contact with any heating tubes for accurately indicating temperature of asphalt emulsion T233 Aggregate Spreader The aggregate spreading equipment shall be adjustable and capable of uniformly spreading aggregate at the specified rate in a single pass operation over the surface to be sealed 1 3 4 Pneumatic Tired Roller Provide a pneumatic tired roller of sufficient size to seat the cover aggregate into the bituminous material without fracturing the aggregate particles The rollers shall have a total compacting width of not less than 5 feet The gross weight shall be adjustable within 200 to 350 psi of compacting width EINS Power Brooms and Power Blowers Provide power brooms and power blowers suitable for cleaning
403. ng steel square head anchor bolts c Provide concrete spot insert at each anchor bolt location cast flush in structure wall Each insert shall have minimum 800 pound load rating Provide 5 8 inch diameter by 3 inch long steel square head anchor bolt at each anchor point Coat threads of anchor bolts with suitable coating immediately prior to installing bolts 3 25 3 Field Painting Cast iron frames and covers not buried in concrete or masonry shall be cleaned of mortar rust grease dirt and other deleterious materials and given a coat of bituminous paint 32 6 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT AND DUCT SYSTEMS 3 6 1 Requirements Depths to top of the conduit shall be in accordance with NFPA 70 Run conduit in straight lines except where a change of direction is necessary Numbers and sizes of ducts shall be as indicated Ducts shall have a continuous slope downward toward underground structures and away from buildings laid with a minimum slope of 3 inches per 100 feet Depending on the contour of the finished grade the high point may be at a terminal a manhole a handhole or between manholes or handholes Short radius manufactured 90 degree duct bends may be used only for pole or equipment risers unless specifically indicated as acceptable The minimum manufactured bend radius shall be 18 inches for ducts of less than 3 inch diameter and 36 inches for ducts 3 inches or greater in diameter SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 18 Submarine A Sch
404. ngs as needed for a complete installation Fabrication marks and holes shall be ground and finished to provide a smooth and neat appearance for each plate Each plate shall be primed and painted SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 17 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2a 2 2133 2 Visual Alarm Signals Provide strobe light visual alarm signals which operate on a supervised 24 volt DC circuit The strobe lens shall comply with UL 1971 and conform to the Americans With Disabilities Act The light pattern shall be disbursed so that it is visible above and below the strobe and from a 90 degree angle on both sides of the strobe The strobe flash output shall be a minimum of 15 candela based on the UL 1971 test The strobe shall have a xenon flash tube Visible appliances may be part of an audio visual assembly Where more than two appliances are located in the same room or corridor provide synchronized operation Stobe housing should be white and say Alert in lieu of Fire 224 oE Connections Provide screw terminals for each notification appliance Terminals shall be designed to accept the size conductors used in this project without modification 2 2 14 Valve Monitor Switches Tamper Switches Provide a tamper switch for each fire protection system control valve Tamper switches shall be UL listed as Extinguishing System Attachment for the location and type of valve supervised The device shall contain double pole double throw contacts Opera
405. nications contractor to work on this project All key persons shall be employed by the telecommunications contractor at the date of issuance of this solicitation or if not have a commitment to the telecommunications contractor to work on this project by the date that the bid was due to the Contracting Officer Note that only the key personnel approved by the Contracting Officer in the successful proposal shall do work on this solicitation s telecommunications system Key personnel shall function in the same roles in this contract as they functioned in the offered successful experience Any substitutions for the telecommunications contractor s key personnel requires approval from The Contracting Officer 1 6 2 3 Minimum Manufacturer Qualifications Cabling equipment and hardware manufacturers shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the manufacturing assembly and factory testing of components which comply with TIA 568 C 1 TIA 568 C 2 and TIA 568 C 3 SECTION 27 10 00 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 I 6 3 Test Plan Provide a complete and detailed test plan for the telecommunications cabling system including a complete list of test equipment for the components and accessories for each cable type specified 60 days prior to the proposed test date Include procedures for certification validation and testing 6 4 Regulatory Requirements In each of the publications referred to herein consider the
406. nician certified by NETA or the National Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies NICET with a minimum of 5 years experience inspecting testing and calibrating electrical distribution and generation equipment systems and devices 4 2 Acceptance Tests and Inspections Reports Submit certified copies of inspection reports and test reports Reports shall include certification of compliance with specified requirements identify deficiencies and recommend corrective action when appropriate Type and neatly bind test reports to form a part of the final record Submit test reports documenting the results of each test not more than 10 days after test is completed 4 3 Acceptance Test and Inspections Procedure Submit test procedure reports for each item of equipment to be field tested at least 45 days prior to planned testing date Do not perform testing until after test procedure has been approved PART 2 PRODUCTS Not used PART 3 EXECUTION 3 al ACCEPTANCE TESTS AND INSPECTIONS Testing organization shall perform acceptance tests and inspections Test methods procedures and test values shall be performed and evaluated in accordance with NETA ATS the manufacturer s recommendations and paragraph entitled Field Quality Control of each applicable specification section Tests identified as optional in NETA ATS are not required unless otherwise specified Equipment shall be placed in service only after completi
407. ning Provide a list of additional related courses and offers noting any courses recommended List each training course individually by name including duration approximate cost per person and location of course Unused copies of training manuals shall be turned over to the Government at the end of last training session Sits Le2 Operating Personnel Training Program Provide one 2 hour training session at the site at a time and place mutually agreeable between the Contractor and the Government Provide session to train 4 operation personnel in the functional operations of the system and the procedures that personnel will follow in system operation This training shall include a System overview b General theory of operation c System operation d Alarm formats e Failure recovery procedures f Troubleshooting Feba le Engineering Maintenance Personnel Training Accomplish the training program as specified Training shall be conducted on site at a location designated by the Government Provide a one day training session to train 4 engineering personnel in the functional operations of the system This training shall include SECTION 26 29 23 Page 9 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 a System overview b General theory of operation c System operation d System configuration e Alarm formats f Failure recovery procedures g Troubleshooting and repair h Maintenance and calibration i System programming and co
408. ning the conductors to the busbar and an anti oxidant shall be applied to the contact area to control corrosion and reduce contact resistance Provide a telecommunications main grounding busbar TMGB in the telecommunications entrance facility The telecommunications main grounding busbar TMGB shall be sized in accordance with the immediate application requirements and with consideration of future growth Provide telecommunications grounding busbars with the following a Predrilled copper busbar provided with holes for use with standard sized lugs b Minimum dimensions of 0 25 in thick by 4 in wide for the TMGB with length as indicated c Listed by a nationally recognized testing laboratory 2 21 MANUFACTURER S NAMEPLATE Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer s name address model number and serial number securely affixed ina conspicuous place the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable 2 22 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES ASTM D 709 Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure relay switch and device as specified or as indicated on the drawings Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and when applicable the position Nameplates shall be melamine plastic 0 125 inch thick white with black center core Surface shall be matte finish Corners shall be square Accurately align lettering and engrave into the core Minimum size of name
409. nits ahead of the switch to the normal lighting circuit located in the same room or area fe Ded Exit Signs Wire exit signs on separate circuits and serve from a separate breaker Signs shall have only one control which shall be the separate breaker Paint control device red and provide lockout 1 6 Photocell Switch Aiming Aim switch according to manufacturer s recommendations Set adjustable window slide for minimum 5 footcandles photocell turn on a17 Occupancy Sensor Provide quantity of sensor units indicated as a minimum Provide additional units to give full coverage over controlled area Full coverage shall provide hand and arm motion detection for office and administration type areas and walking motion for industrial areas warehouses storage rooms and hallways Locate the sensor s as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations to maximize energy savings and to avoid nuisance activation and deactivation due to sudden temperature or airflow changes and usage Set sensor on duration to 15 minutes SECTION 26 51 00 Page 16 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 1 8 Light Level Sensor Locate light level sensor as indicated and in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations Adjust sensor for 50 footcandles or for the indicated light level at the typical work plane for that area 22 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces
410. nnect down conductors midway between the top and bottom Where buried metal pipes enter tank or tower connect one down conductor to pipes approximately 1 foot below grade Ground metal guy wires or cables set in concrete or attached to buildings or nonconducting supports to a ground rod driven full length into the ground 3 2 5 2 Metal or Reinforced Concrete Tanks and Towers Make metal or reinforcing steel electrically continuous Electrical continuity may be provided by bolting riveting or welding metal and tying or clipping reinforcing bars unless a specific method is noted on the drawings Air terminals and down conductors are required except on bolted riveted or welded 3 16 inch minimum steel plate tanks Ground connections and grounding electrodes are not required on metal tanks that are electrically continuous with a metallic underground pipe system On other structures provide two ground connections approximately 180 degrees apart at the base of the structure Connect each buried metal pipe entering the SECTION 26 41 00 00 20 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 tank or tower to one ground connection approximately one foot below finished grade Ground metal guy wires on tanks and towers Metal guy wires or cables attached to steel anchor rods set in earth will be considered as grounded Ground metal guy wires or cables set in concrete or attached to buildings or nonconducting supports to a ground rod driven ful
411. ns outlets shall be mounted at height 60 inches above finished floor 1 9 Conductor Identification Provide conductor identification within each enclosure where tap splice or termination is made For conductors No 6 AWG and smaller diameter color coding shall be by factory applied color impregnated insulation For conductors No 4 AWG and larger diameter color coding shall be by plastic coated self sticking markers colored nylon cable ties and plates or heat shrink type sleeves Identify control circuit terminations in accordance with Section 23 09 53 00 20 SPACE TEMPERATURE CONTROL SYSTEMS Section 23 09 23 LONWORKS DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROL FOR HVAC AND OTHER BUILDING CONTROL SYSTEMS Provide telecommunications system conductor identification as specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEMS e Marking Strips White or other light colored plastic marking strips fastened by screws to each terminal block shall be provided for wire designations The wire numbers shall be made with permanent ink The marking strips shall be reversible to permit marking both sides or two marking strips shall be furnished with each block Marking strips shall accommodate the two sets of wire numbers Each device to which a connection is made shall be assigned a device designation in accordance with NEMA ICS 1 and each device terminal to which a connection is made shall be marked with a distinct terminal marking corresponding to th
412. nstallation measure the total resistance to ground using the fall of potential method described in IEEE 81 Maximum resistance of a driven ground rod shall be 10 ohms under normally dry conditions Use a ground loop when two of any three ground rods driven not less than 10 feet into the ground a minimum of 10 feet apart and equally spaced around the perimeter give a combined value exceeding 50 ohms immediately after having driven For ground loop provide continuous No 1 0 bare stranded copper cable or equivalent material having suitable resistance to corrosion Lay ground loop around the perimeter of the structure in a trench not less than 30 inches below grade at a distance not less than 2 feet nor more than 10 feet from the nearest point of the structure Install a ground loop in earth undisturbed by excavation not earth fill and do not locate beneath roof overhang or wholly under paved areas or roadways where rainfall cannot penetrate to keep soil moist in the vicinity of the cable Make connections between ground conductors and grounds or ground loop and between ground loop and grounds electrically continuous ee APPLICATIONS 3 el Nonmetallic Exterior Walls with Metallic Roof Bond metal roof sections together which are insulated from each other so that they are electrically continuous Connect air terminals so that they are electrically continuous with the metal roof as well as the roof conductors and down conductors Bond ridg
413. nt at least 30 days prior to the training a Training The course shall be taught at the project site within 30 days after completion of the installation for a period of one day s A maximum of 6 personnel will attend the course The training shall include 1 Physical layout of each piece of hardware 2 Meter configuration troubleshooting and diagnostics procedures 3 Repair instructions 4 Preventive maintenance procedures and schedules 5 Testing and calibration procedures End of Section SECTION 33 12 33 00 30 Page 16 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 33 40 00 00 40 STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 04 07 PART 1 GENERAL alee 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS AASHTO AASHTO M 288 2006 Standard Specification for Geotextile Specification for Highway Applications AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION AWWA AWWA C110 A21 10 2003 Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings for Water AWWA C111 A21 11 2000 Rubber Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings AWWA C210 2003 R 2004 Standard for Liquid Epoxy Coating Systems for the Interior and Exterior of Steel Water Pipelines ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM A 74 2006 Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe
414. ntermediate Tempers ASTM B801 2007 Standard Specification for Concentric Lay Stranded Conductors of 8000 Series Aluminum Alloy for Subsequent Covering or Insulation ASTM C139 2010 Standard Specification for Concrete Masonry Units for Construction of Catch SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM ASTM IEEE IEEE IEEE IEEE IEEE IEEE IEEE ICEA NETA Basins and Manholes C309 2011 Standard Specification for Liquid Membrane Forming Compounds for Curing Concrete C32 2011 Standard Specification for Sewer and Manhole Brick Made from Clay or Shale C478 2009 Standard Specification for Precast Reinforced Concrete Manhole Sections C857 2011 Standard Practice for Minimum Structural Design Loading for Underground Precast Concrete Utility Structures F 512 2006 Smooth Wall Poly Vinyl Chloride PVC Conduit and Fittings for Underground Installation INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE 100 2000 Archived The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms 386 2006 Standard for Separable Insulated Connector Systems for Power Distribution Systems Above 600V 400 2 2004 Guide for Field Testing of Shielded Power Cable Systems Using Very Low Frequency VLF 404 2006 Standard for Extruded and Laminated Dielectric Shielded Cable Joints Rated 2500 V to 500 000 V 48 2009 Standard for Test Procedures and Requ
415. ntrolled land before disposal of waste material thereon Stockpile and use coarse rock from excavations for constructing slopes or embankments adjacent to streams or sides and bottoms of channels and for protecting against erosion Do not dispose excavated material to obstruct the flow of any stream endanger a partly finished structure impair the efficiency or appearance of any structure or be detrimental to the completed work in any way 3 4 BURIED TAPE AND DETECTION WIRE 3 4 1 Buried Detection Wire Bury detection wire directly above non metallic piping at a distance not to exceed 12 inch above the top of pipe Extend the wire continuously and SECTION 31 00 00 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 unbroken from manhole to manhole Terminate the ends of the wire inside the manholes at each end of the pipe with a minimum of 3 feet of wire coiled remaining accessible in each manhole Furnish insulated wire over it s entire length Install wires at manholes between the top of the corbel and the frame and extend up through the chimney seal between the frame and the chimney seal For force mains terminate the wire in the valve pit at the pump station end of the pipe 365 BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION Place backfill adjacent to any and all types of structures and compact to at least 90 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesive materials or 95 percent laboratory maximum density for cohesionless materials to prevent wedgin
416. ny direction and 1 5 times the equipment weight in the downward direction 3 1 6 Telecommunications Cable Support Installation Install open top and closed ring cable supports on 4 ft to 5 ft centers to adequately support and distribute the cable s weight These types of supports shall be used to support a maximum of 50 0 25 in diameter cables Install suspended cables with at least 3 in of clear vertical space above the ceiling tiles and support channels T bars Open top and closed ring cable supports shall be suspended from or attached to the structural ceiling or walls with hardware or other installation aids specifically designed to support their weight SECTION 26 20 00 Page 25 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 7A 3 sli7 Boxes Outlets and Supports Provide boxes in wiring and raceway systems wherever required for pulling of wires making connections and mounting of devices or fixtures Boxes for metallic raceways shall be cast metal hub type when located in wet locations when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces when surface mounted on interior walls exposed up to 7 feet above floors and walkways and when specifically indicated Boxes in other locations shall be sheet steel except that aluminum boxes may be used with aluminum conduit and nonmetallic boxes may be used with nonmetallic conduit system Each box shall have volume required by NFPA 70 for number of conductors enclosed in box Boxes for mounting
417. o designated Government personnel in the adjustment operation and maintenance of the specified systems and equipment including pertinent safety requirements as required Instructors shall be thoroughly familiar with all parts of the installation and shall be trained in operating theory as well as practical operation and maintenance work Instruction shall be given during the first regular work week after the equipment or system has been accepted and turned over to the Government for regular operation The number of man days 8 hours per day of instruction furnished shall be as specified in the individual section When more than 4 man days of instruction are specified use approximately half of the time for classroom instruction Use other time for instruction with equipment or system When significant changes or modifications in the equipment or system are made under the terms of the contract provide additional instructions to acquaint the operating personnel with the SECTION 26 00 00 00 20 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 changes or modifications PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 FACTORY APPLIED FINISH Electrical equipment shall have factory applied painting systems which shall as a minimum meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion resistance test and the additional requirements specified in the technical sections PART 3 EXECUTION Bel FIELD APPLIED PAINTING Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent
418. o project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment Provide conduit turnups and cable entrance space required by the equipment to be mounted Seal voids around conduit SECTION 26 23 00 Page 10 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 openings in slab with water and oil resistant caulking or sealant Cut off and bush conduits 3 inches above slab surface Concrete work shall be as specified in Section 03 30 00 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE 35 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Contractor shall submit request for settings of breakers to the Contracting Officer after approval of switchboard and at least 30 days in advance of their requirement 3 5 1 Performance of Acceptance Checks and Tests Perform in accordance with the manufacturer s recommendations and include the following visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests performed in accordance with NETA ATS Zaoa eT Switchboard Assemblies a Visual and Mechanical Inspection 1 Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings 2 Inspect physical electrical and mechanical condition 3 Confirm correct application of manufacturer s recommended lubricants 4 Verify appropriate anchorage required area clearances and correct alignment 5 Inspect all doors panels and sections for paint dents scratches fit and missing hardware 6 Verify that circuit breaker sizes and types correspond to approved shop drawings 8 Inspect all bolted electrical conn
419. ocontrols for Use with Area Lighting 773A 2006 Reprint Mar 2011 Standard for Nonindustrial Photoelectric Switches for Lighting Control 924 2006 Reprint Feb 2011 Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment 935 2001 Reprint Jun 2010 Standard for Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts RELATED REQUIREMENTS Materials not considered to be lighting equipment or lighting fixture accessories are specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM Lighting fixtures and accessories mounted on exterior surfaces of buildings are specified in this section 3 a 4 4 gall DEFINITIONS Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE 100 Average life is the time after which 50 percent will have failed and 50 percent will have survived under normal conditions Total harmonic distortion THD is the root mean square RMS of all the harmonic components divided by the total fundamental current SYSTEM DESCRIPTION Lighting Control System Provide lighting control system as indicated Lighting control equipment shall include if indicated control modules power packs dimming ballasts occupancy sensors and light level sensors 5 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for information only or as otherwise designated When use
420. oducts extracted harvested or recovered as well as manufactured within a 500 mile radius from the project site if available from a minimum of three sources Tack and prime coat materials may be locally available 3 6 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Inspect the materials delivered to the site for contamination and damage Unload and store the materials with a minimum of handling 1 7 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS Apply bituminous coat only when the surface to receive the bituminous coat is dry Apply bituminous coat only when the atmospheric temperature in the shade is 50 degrees F or above and when the temperature has not been below 35 degrees F for the 12 hours prior to application unless otherwise directed PART 2 PRODUCTS Bie PRIME COAT Provide asphalt conforming to AASHTO M 82 Grade MC 30 and specified in the following two subparagraphs 2 1 1 Cutback Asphalt Provide cutback asphalt conforming to ASTM D 2027 Grade MC 30 2 1 2 Emulsified Asphalt Provide emulsified asphalt conforming to ASTM D 977 Type SS 1 or ASTM D 2397 Type CSS 1 SECTION 32 12 10 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 2 TACK COAT 2 2 1 Cutback Asphalt Provide cutback asphalt conforming to ASTM D 2027 Grade MC 30 or ASTM D 2028 Grade RC 70 2 2 2 Emulsified Asphalt Provide emulsified asphalt conforming to ASTM D 977 Type SS 1 or ASTM D 2397 Type CSS 1 Dilute the emulsified asphalt with equal parts of water The base asphal
421. odulated PWM output waveform d The VFD shall be capable of supplying 120 percent of rated full load current for one minute at maximum ambient temperature e The VFD shall be designed to operate from a 208 volt plus or minus 10 percent three phase 60 Hz supply and control motors with a SECTION 26 29 23 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 corresponding voltage rating f Acceleration and deceleration time shall be independently adjustable from one second to 60 seconds g Adjustable full time current limiting shall limit the current to a preset value which shall not exceed 120 percent of the controller rated current The current limiting action shall maintain the V Hz ratio constant so that variable torque can be maintained Short time starting override shall allow starting current to reach 175 percent of controller rated current to maximum starting torque h The controllers shall be capable of producing an output frequency over the range of 3 Hz to 60 Hz 20 to one speed range without low speed cogging Over frequency protection shall be included such that a failure in the controller electronic circuitry shall not cause frequency to exceed 110 percent of the maximum controller output frequency selected i Minimum and maximum output frequency shall be adjustable over the following ranges 1 Minimum frequency 3 Hz to 50 percent of maximum selected frequency 2 Maximum frequency 40 Hz to 60 Hz j The controller effic
422. oe oe The SMC a functional element within the Remote Dispatch Center RDC shall contain all the functionality as described in 3 2 2 6 2 Primary and Secondary monitor and control The maintenance interface shall have the attributes described in section B42 62 64 4 he PSIM shall provide the core apabilities described in section 32d Li ES n the event of power loss the AVG L hall Ensure that the installation erimeter remains secure and ighting signage shall notify the driver hat it is unsafe to proceed n the event of power loss the AVG L hall Notify the Local Dispatch Center LDC Regional Dispatch Center RDC of he power loss for AVG L system n the event of power loss the AVG L hall Continue to operate normally e g card readers access control panels CCTV all signage intercoms etc without interruption for 30 minutes In the event of power loss the AVG L shall Have a manual operation component that will allow for security personnel to manually open or close the gates Th manual operation components shall be in a locked enclosure to prevent unauthorized access The AVG L design shall be consistent with the latest approved version of the FP Enterprise Architecture Package Electrical power shall be in compliance with UFC 4 022 01 UFC 3 501 01 UFC 3 560 01 NFPA 70 and all applicabl local codes Unless stated otherwise in the PWS this system shall conne
423. of less than 5 seconds o Shall have a breakaway arm design to releas when impacted yet rest in place without the need for any tools o Signal devices shall be integrated with the drop arm to notify the vehicle operator that it is safe to proceed o Have position sensor s that are resistant to tampering o Have position sensor s that ensure the proper position is being reported to the system Vehicle presence sensor used to detect and track vehicles as they pass through the ECP These shall have the following attributes o Shall be able to detect vehicles ranging from licensed motorcycles and scooters to AASHTO defined passenger vehicles o Shal operate in all weather conditions with no decrease in performance o Shall be resistant to tampering through the use of objects other than an authorized vehicle metal plates chairs to activate the gate o Shall be in compliance with FHWA HRT 06 108 Traffic Detector Handbook 3rd Edition 0p ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 21 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Access pedestal used to provide access by vehicle operators of the credential verification and intercom devices The access pedestal shall have the following attributes o Shall match existing base architectural requirements o Shall have the following physi
424. of such products which are of equal material design and workmanship Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for 1 year prior to bid opening The 1 year period shall include applications of equipment and materials under similar circumstances and of similar size The product or an earlier release of the product shall have been on sale on the commercial market through advertisements manufacturers catalogs or brochures during the prior l year period Where two or more items of the same class of equipment are required these items shall be products of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section 1 4 3 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Data Products manufactured more than 1 year prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used unless specified otherwise SECTION 26 27 14 00 20 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 I T 5 MAINTENANCE 5 1 Additions to Operation and Maintenance Data In addition to requirements of Data Package 5 include the following on the actual electricity meters and accessories provided a A condensed description of how the system operates b Block diagram indicating major assemblies c Troubleshooting information d Preventive maintenance e Prices for spare parts and supply list 6 WARRANTY The equipment items and software shall be supported by service
425. olid copper having similar insulation Provide all wiring in rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit Electrical metallic tubing conduit is acceptable in dry locations not enclosed in concrete or where not subject to mechanical damage Conceal conduit in finished areas of new construction and wherever practicable in existing construction The use of flexible conduit not exceeding a 6 foot length shall be permitted in initiating device circuits Run conduit or tubing concealed unless specifically shown otherwise on the drawings Shielded wiring shall be utilized where recommended by the manufacturer For shielded wiring the shield shall be grounded at only one point which shall be in or adjacent to the FACP T taps are permitted in Style 4 circuits with interconnections occurring on terminal strips Color coding is required for circuits and shall be maintained throughout the circuit 2 2 9 4 Conductor Terminations Labeling of conductors at terminal blocks in terminal cabinets FACP and remote fire alarm control units shall be provided at each conductor connection Each conductor or cable shall have a shrink wrap label to provide a unique and specific designation Each terminal cabinet FACP and fire alarm control unit shall contain a laminated drawing which indicates each conductor its label circuit and terminal The laminated drawing shall be neat using 12 point lettering minimum size and mounted SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 13
426. ommercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard TIA 569 2004b Add 1 2009 Commercial Building 29 UL UL UL Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces U S NATIONAL ARCHIVES AND RECORDS ADMINISTRATION NARA CFR 1910 147 Control of Hazardous Energy Lock Out Tag Out UNDERWRITERS LABORATORIES UL 1 2005 Reprint Jul 2007 Standard for Flexible Metal Conduit 1063 2006 Machine Tool Wires and Cables 1242 2006 Reprint Jul 2007 Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit Steel 1449 2006 Reprint Feb 2011 Surge Protective Devices 1660 2004 Reprint Apr 2008 Liquid Tight Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit 1699 2006 Reprint Feb 2011 Arc Fault Circuit Interrupters 198M 2003 Reprint Oct 2007 Standard for Mine Duty Fuses 20 2010 General Use Snap Switches 360 2009 Reprint Jun 2009 Liquid Tight Flexible Steel Conduit 4248 2007 UL Standard for Safety Fuseholders 44 2010 Thermoset Insulated Wires and Cables 467 2007 Grounding and Bonding Equipment 486A 486B 2003 Reprint Feb 2010 Wire Connectors 486C 2004 Reprint Feb 2010 Splicing Wire Connectors SECTION 26 20 00 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 UL UL UL UL UL UL UL 489 498 50 506 508 510 514A 514B 514C 5A 651 67 797 817 83 854 869A 1127117 2009 Reprint Jun 2011 Molded Case Circuit Breakers Molded Case Switches
427. ompaction b Sidewalks Turfed or Seeded Areas and Miscellaneous Areas Deposit backfill in layers of a maximum of 12 inch loose thickness and compact it to 85 percent maximum density for cohesive soils and 90 percent maximum density for cohesionless soils Do not permit compaction by water flooding or jetting Apply this requirement to all other areas not specifically designated above 3 6 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS Special requirements for both excavation and backfill relating to the specific utilities are as follows Zabe L Electrical Distribution System Provide a minimum cover of 24 inch from the finished grade to direct burial cable and conduit or duct line unless otherwise indicated 3 6 2 Sewage Absorption Trenches or Pits Faban L Porous Fill Provide backfill material consisting of clean crushed rock or gravel having a gradation such that 100 percent passes the 2 inch sieve and zero percent passes the 1 2 inch sieve Sieh SUBGRADE PREPARATION 3 TeL Compaction BeTa t Subgrade for Pavements Compact subgrade for pavements to at least 95 percentage laboratory maximum density for the depth below the surface of the pavement shown 3 8 FINISHING Finish the surface of excavations embankments and subgrades to a smooth and compact surface in accordance with the lines grades and cross sections or elevations shown Provide the degree of finish for graded SECTION 31 00 00 Page 10 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 areas with
428. on Systems Security INFOSEC FIPS 140 2 12 03 2002 Security Requirements for Cryptographic Modules FIPS 201 06 23 2006 Personal Identity Verification PIV of Federal Employees and Contractors http www dhs gov xabout laws ge_1217616624097 shtm http csrc nist http csre nist ZOV gov n ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 9 Submarine A School BQ 534 4 2 DEPARTMENT OF DEFENSE DOD 4 2 1 DoD Regulations 1127117 NUMBER DATE TITLE DoDR 5200 1 R 01 14 1997 DoD Information Security Program DoDR 5200 8 R 05 27 2009 Physical Security Program DoDR 5400 11 5 14 2007 DoD Privacy Program R 4 2 2 DoD Directives NUMBER DATE TITLE DoDD 1000 25 07 19 2004 DoD Personnel Identity Protection Program DoDD C 5200 5 04 21 1990 Communications Security COMSEC DoDD 8100 2 04 14 2004 Use of Commercial Wireless Devices Services and Technologies in the Department of Defense DoD Global Information Grid GIG DoDD 8500 01E 04 23 2007 Information Assurance IA 4 2 3 DoD Instructions NUMBER DATE TITLE DoDI 2000 16 10 02 2006 DoD Antiterrorism AT Standards DoDI 5200 8 05 19 2010 Security of DoD Installations and Resources DoDI 8500 2 02 06 2003
429. on of required tests and evaluation of the test results have been completed Contractor shall supply to the testing organization complete sets of shop drawings settings of adjustable devices and other information necessary for an accurate test and inspection of the system prior to the performance of any final testing Contracting Officer shall be notified at least 14 days in advance of when tests will be conducted by the testing organization Perform acceptance tests and inspections on applicable equipment and systems specified in the following sections a Section 26 12 19 10 THREE PHASE PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS b Section 33 71 02 00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION SECTION 26 08 00 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 3 1127117 c Section 26 23 00 SWITCHBOARDS AND SWITCHGEAR r2 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE Final acceptance of the system is contingent upon satisfactory completion of acceptance tests and inspections ER PLACING EQUIPMENT IN SERVICE A representative of the approved testing organization shall be present when equipment tested by the organization is initially energized and placed in service End of Section SECTION 26 08 00 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 PART 1 ae L 1127117 SECTION 26 12 19 10 THREE PHASE PAD MOUNTED TRANSFORMERS GENERAL REFERENCES 08 11 The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced basic designation only
430. on or concentrated external loads PART 2 PRODUCTS 2 1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Conform to NFPA 54 and with requirements specified herein 2 2 PIPE AND FITTINGS 2 2 1 Aboveground and Within Buildings and Vaults a Pipe Black steel in accordance with ASTM A53 A53M Schedule 40 threaded ends for sizes 2 inches and smaller otherwise plain end beveled for butt welding b Threaded Fittings ASME B16 3 black malleable iron cC Socket Welding Fittings ASME B16 11 forged steel d Butt Welding Fittings ASME B16 9 with backing rings of compatible material e Unions ASME B16 39 black malleable iron Provide dielectric unions where cathodic protection is provided on steel gas mains and or service lines f Flanges and Flanged Fittings ASME B16 5 steel flanges or convoluted steel flanges conforming to ASME BPVC SEC VIII Dl Flange faces shall have integral grooves of rectangular cross sections which afford containment for self energizing gasket material 2e2d lt 2 Risers Manufacturer s standard riser transition from plastic to steel pipe with 7 to 12 mil thick epoxy coating Use swaged gas tight construction with O ring seals metal insert and protective sleeve Provide remote bolt on or bracket or wall mounted riser supports 2 2 3 Transition Fittings a Steel to Plastic PE As specified for riser except designed for steel to plastic with tapping tee or sleeve Coat or wrap exposed steel pipe with heavy plastic co
431. onal labor for installation of equipment or devices ordered and or procured prior to approval of the study SD 06 Test Reports Arc proofing test for cable fireproofing materials G Medium voltage cable qualification and production tests G Field Acceptance Checks and Tests G Arc proofing test for cable fireproofing tape G Cable Installation Plan and Procedure Six copies of the information described below in 8 1 2 by 11 inch binders having a minimum of three rings from which material may readily be removed and replaced including a separate section for each cable pull Sections shall be separated by heavy plastic dividers with tabs with all data sheets signed and dated by the person supervising the pull a Site layout drawing with cable pulls numerically identified b A list of equipment used with calibration certifications The manufacturer and quantity of lubricant used on pull C The cable manufacturer and type of cable d The dates of cable pulls time of day and ambient temperature e The length of cable pull and calculated cable pulling tensions f The actual cable pulling tensions encountered during pull SD 07 Certificates Cable splicer terminator G SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 72 T I Cable Installer Qualifications 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 4 1 Precast Underground Structures Submittal required for each type used Provide calculations and drawings for precast manholes and handholes
432. oncrete pouring 3 6 8 6 Removal of Ducts Where duct lines are removed from existing underground structures close the openings to waterproof the structure Chip out the wall opening to provide a key for the new section of wall SF CABLE PULLING Test existing duct lines with a mandrel and thoroughly swab out to remove foreign material before pulling cables Pull cables down grade with the feed in point at the manhole or buildings of the highest elevation Use flexible cable feeds to convey cables through manhole opening and into duct runs Do not exceed the specified cable bending radii when installing cable under any conditions including turnups into switches transformers switchgear switchboards and other enclosures Cable with tape shield shall have a bending radius not less than 12 times the overall diameter of the completed cable If basket grip type cable pulling devices are used to pull cable in place cut off the section of cable under the grip before splicing and terminating 3 7 1 Cable Lubricants Use lubricants that are specifically recommended by the cable manufacturer for assisting in pulling jacketed cables 3 8 CABLES IN UNDERGROUND STRUCTURES Do not install cables utilizing the shortest path between penetrations but route along those walls providing the longest route and the maximum spare cable lengths Form cables to closely parallel walls not to interfere with duct entrances and support on bracke
433. onforming to Section 32 12 10 BITUMINOUS TACK AND PRIME COATS 32 2 Existing Pavement Clean the existing pavement of loose and foreign matter Cracks 1 4 inch in width and larger shall be cleaned and filled with crack filler material Repair deteriorated areas of the pavement as directed Spray the surface with a thin coat of bituminous material conforming to Section 32 12 10 BITUMINOUS TACK AND PRIME COATS 3 62 GRADE CONTROL The finished and completed surface course shall conform to the lines grades cross sections and dimensions as indicated Place line and grade stakes at the site of the work in accordance with the SPECIAL CONTRACT REQUIREMENTS to maintain indicated lines and grades 3a MIXING 33 e1 Preparation of Mineral Aggregates Place each component of various sizes of aggregates blended in preparing bituminous mixtures in separate stockpiles in such manner that separate sizes will not be intermixed Feed aggregate into the cold elevator by means of separate mechanical feeders to produce a total aggregate graded within requirements specified 3 3 2 Preparation of Bituminous Mixtures Aggregates shall be measured and conveyed into the mixer in proportionate quantities of each aggregate size required to meet the JMF Introduce materials into the mixer in the following order aggregate lime flux oil liquefier and bituminous material unless otherwise directed The temperature of the bituminous material shall be 160
434. onics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE 100 1 4 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 26 23 00 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 a a an 5 5s 1 SD 02 Shop Drawings Switchboard Drawings G Include wiring diagrams and installation details of equipment indicating proposed location layout and arrangement control panels accessories piping ductwork and other items that must be shown to ensure a coordinated installation Wiring diagrams shall identify circuit terminals and indicate the internal wiring for each item of equipment and the interconnection between each item of equipment Drawings shall indicate adequate clearance for operation maintenance and replacement of operating equipment devices Submittals shall include the nameplate data size and capacity Submittals shall also include applicable federal military industry and technical society publication references SD 03 Product Data Switchboard G SD 06 Test Reports Switchboard design tests G Switchboard production tests G Acceptance checks and tests G SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Data Package 5 G SD 11 Closeout Submittals Assembled O
435. onnect lightning protection system to form the shortest distance to ground Do not use nonconducting parts of the structure as part of the building s lightning protection system Expose conductors on the structures except where conductors are required to be in protective sleeves Interconnect secondary conductors with grounded metallic parts within the building Make interconnections within side flash distances at or above the level of the grounded metallic parts EL Air Terminals Air terminal design and support conforming to NFPA 780 Rigidly connect terminals to and make electrically continuous with roof conductors by means of pressure connectors or crimped joints of T shaped malleable metal Provide pressure connector or crimped joint with a dowel or threaded fitting to connect ground rod conductor with air terminal Set air terminals at ends of structures not more than 2 feetfrom ends of ridges and corners of roofs Do not exceed 25 feet in spacing of 2 foot high air terminals on ridges parapets and around perimeter of building with flat roofs When necessary to exceed this spacing increase specified height of air terminals not less than 2 inches for each one foot of increase over 25 feet On large flat or gently sloping roofs as defined in NFPA 780 place air terminals at points of the intersection of imaginary lines dividing the surface into rectangles having sides not exceeding 50 feet in length Secure air terminals against overturni
436. ons are made Encase the underground portion of the conduit in a concrete envelope and bury as specified for underground duct with concrete encasement 3 5 UNDERGROUND STRUCTURE CONSTRUCTION Provide standard type cast in place construction as specified herein and as indicated or precast construction as specified herein Horizontal concrete surfaces of floors shall have a smooth trowel finish Cure concrete by applying two coats of white pigmented membrane forming curing compound in strict accordance with the manufacturer s printed instructions except that precast concrete may be steam cured Curing compound shall conform to ASTM C309 Locate duct entrances and windows in the center of end walls shorter and near the corners of sidewalls longer to facilitate cable racking and splicing Covers for underground structures shall fit the frames without undue play Steel and iron shall be formed to shape and size with sharp lines and angles Castings shall be free from warp and blow holes that may impair strength or appearance Exposed metal shall have a smooth finish and sharp lines and arises Provide necessary lugs rabbets and brackets Set pulling in irons and other built in items in place before depositing concrete 3 25 Pulling In Irons Provide steel bars bent as indicated and cast in the walls and floors Alternatively pipe sleeves may be precast into the walls and floors where required to accept U bolts or other types of pull
437. onstruction equipment list SD 08 Manufacturer s Instructions Paints for airfields Paints for roads and streets Thermoplastic compound Submit manufacturer s Material Safety Data Sheets 3 DELIVERY AND STORAGE Deliver paints paint materials and thermoplastic compound materials in original sealed containers that plainly show the designated name specification number batch number color date of manufacture manufacturer s directions and name of manufacturer Provide storage facilities at the job site only in areas approved by the Contracting Officer or authorized representative for maintaining materials at SECTION 32 17 23 00 20 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 temperatures recommended by the manufacturer Make available paint stored at the project site or segregated at the source for sampling not less than 30 days prior to date of required approval for use to allow sufficient time for testing Notify the Contracting Officer when paint is available for sampling 1 4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS Apply paint to clean dry surfaces and unless otherwise approved only when the air and pavement surface temperature is at least 5 degrees above the dew point and the air and pavement temperatures are above 40 degrees F and less than 95 degrees F for oil based materials above 50 degrees F and less than 110 degrees F for water based materials Maintain paint temperature within these same limits 15 EQUIPMENT Machines tool
438. ool BQ 534 1127117 Otherwise long sweep bends having a minimum radius of 25 feet shall be used for a change of direction of more than 5 degrees either horizontally or vertically Both curved and straight sections may be used to form long sweep bends but the maximum curve used shall be 30 degrees and manufactured bends shall be used Ducts shall be provided with end bells whenever duct lines terminate in structures 3 6 2 Treatment Ducts shall be kept clean of concrete dirt or foreign substances during construction Field cuts requiring tapers shall be made with proper tools and match factory tapers A coupling recommended by the duct manufacturer shall be used whenever an existing duct is connected to a duct of different material or shape Ducts shall be stored to avoid warping and deterioration with ends sufficiently plugged to prevent entry of any water or solid substances Ducts shall be thoroughly cleaned before being laid Plastic ducts shall be stored on a flat surface and protected from the direct rays of the sun 3 6 3 Conduit Cleaning As each conduit run is completed for conduit sizes 3 inches and larger draw a flexible testing mandrel approximately 12 inches long with a diameter less than the inside diameter of the conduit through the conduit After which draw a stiff bristle brush through until conduit is clear of particles of earth sand and gravel then immediately install conduit plugs For conduit sizes less than 3
439. ool BQ 534 1127117 coordinated for proper operation Submit coordination data for approval Fuses shall have voltage rating not less than circuit voltage 2 1021 Fuseholders Provide in accordance with UL 4248 2 10 2 Cartridge Fuses Current Limiting Type Class R UL 198M Class RK 1 RK 5 time delay type Associated fuseholders shall be Class R only 2 10 3 Cartridge Fuses High Interrupting Capacity Current Limiting Type Classes J L and CC UL 198M Class J for zero to 600 amperes Class L for 601 to 6 000 amperes and Class CC for zero to 30 amperes 2 10 4 Cartridge Fuses Current Limiting Type Class T UL 198M Class T for zero to 1 200 amperes 300 volts and zero to 800 amperes 600 volts 24 LI RECEPTACLES UL 498 hard use heavy duty grounding type Ratings and configurations shall be as indicated Bodies shall be of ivory as per NEMA WD 1 Face and body shall be thermoplastic supported on a metal mounting strap Dimensional requirements shall be per NEMA WD 6 Provide screw type side wired wiring terminals Connect grounding pole to mounting strap The receptacle shall contain triple wipe power contacts and double or triple wipe ground contacts 2 11 1 Switched Duplex Receptacles Provide separate terminals for each ungrounded pole Top receptacle shall be switched when installed 2 11 2 Weatherproof Receptacles Provide in cast metal box with gasketed weatherproof cast metal cover plate and gasketed ca
440. opper alloy other suitable non corrosive metals or other suitable materials 9 External Fasteners Casing Bolts Studs Nuts Screws and Washers External fasteners shall be made of a copper alloy containing not less than 57 percent copper stainless steel or steel treated to resist corrosion by a process approved by the Government Fasteners for no pressure assemblies may be made of a suitable synthetic polymer All external case closures such as rings clamps screws bolts cap bolts nuts and washers shall be designed for easy removal following lengthy service 10 Water Meter Coupling 5 8 Inch x 3 4 Inch A water coupling shall be composed of one meter coupling nut one meter coupling tail piece straight and one rubber type washer for meter coupling The meter coupling tailpiece and nut shall be a copper alloy containing not less than 57 percent copper The coupling nut shall have internal straight pipe threads conforming to ASME B1 20 1 Pitch diameter shall be that shown on AWWA C700 The coupling tailpiece shall have external taper pipe threads conforming to ASME B1 20 1 and an internal diameter approximately equal to the nominal thread size of the tailpiece Lengths and thread sizes shall be those listed in AWWA C700 One water meter coupling and one additional rubber type washer for meter coupling total of two rubber type washers shall be provided with each meter 11 Companion Flanges 1 1 2 Inch and 2 Inch Companio
441. or individual shall be marked for use with HACR type and UL listed as HACR type 2 12 3 4 Arc Fault Circuit Interrupters UL 489 UL 1699 and NFPA 70 Molded case circuit breaker shall be rated as indicated Two pole arc fault circuit interrupters shall be rated 120 240 volts The provision of two one pole circuit breakers for shared neutral circuits in lieu of one two pole circuit breaker is unacceptable Provide with push to test button 2 12 4 Fusible Switches for Panelboards NEMA KS 1 hinged door type Switches serving as motor disconnect means shall be horsepower rated Zig k3 ENCLOSED CIRCUIT BREAKERS UL 489 Individual molded case circuit breakers with voltage and continuous current ratings number of poles overload trip setting and short circuit current interrupting rating as indicated Enclosure type as indicated Provide solid neutral SECTION 26 20 00 Page 14 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 14 MOTORS NEMA MG 1 FIRE PUMPS hermetic type sealed motor compressors shall also comply with UL 984 Provide the size in terms of HP or kVA or full load current or a combination of these characteristics and other characteristics of each motor as indicated or specified Determine specific motor characteristics to ensure provision of correctly sized starters and overload heaters Motors for operation on 208 volt 3 phase circuits shall have terminal voltage rating of 200 volts and those for operation on 480
442. or use by operation and maintenance personnel The operating instructions shall include the following a Wiring diagrams control diagrams and control sequence for each principal system and item of equipment b Start up proper adjustment operating lubrication and shutdown procedures c Safety precautions d The procedure in the event of equipment failure e Other items of instruction as recommended by the manufacturer of each system or item of equipment Print or engrave operating instructions and frame under glass or in approved laminated plastic Post instructions where directed For operating instructions exposed to the weather provide weather resistant materials or weatherproof enclosures Operating instructions shall not fade when exposed to sunlight and shall be secured to prevent easy removal or peeling SECTION 26 00 00 00 20 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 149 MANUFACTURER S NAMEPLATE Each item of equipment shall have a nameplate bearing the manufacturer s name address model number and serial number securely affixed in a conspicuous place the nameplate of the distributing agent will not be acceptable 1 10 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATES ASTM D 709 Provide laminated plastic nameplates for each equipment enclosure relay switch and device as specified in the technical sections or as indicated on the drawings Each nameplate inscription shall identify the function and when applicab
443. ort ANSI C12 20 2010 Electricity Meters 0 2 and 0 5 Accuracy Classes ANSI C12 7 2005 Requirements for Watthour Meter Sockets SECTION 26 27 14 00 20 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 NEMA C12 19 2008 Utility Industry End Device Data Tables NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2011 TIA 11 1 Errata 2011 National Electrical Code 1 2 DEFINITIONS Unless otherwise specified or indicated electrical and electronics terms used in these specifications and on the drawings shall be as defined in IEEE Stds Dictionary Hla SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES the CONTRACT CLAUSES and DD Form 1423 SD 02 Shop Drawings Installation Drawings G SD 03 Product Data Electricity meters G The most recent meter product data shall be submitted as a Technical Data Package and shall be licensed to the project site Any software shall be submitted on CD ROM and hard copies of the software user manual shall be submitted for each piece of software provided Current transformer G Potential transformer G External communications devices G SD 06 Test Reports Acceptance checks and tests G System functional verification G Building meter installation sheet per building G Completed meter install
444. ourth proof test load Fasteners attached to concrete ceiling shall be vibration resistant and shock resistant Holes cut to depth of more than 1 1 2 inches in reinforced concrete beams or to depth of more than 3 4 inch in concrete joints shall not cut main reinforcing bars Fill unused holes In partitions of light steel construction use sheet metal screws In suspended ceiling construction run conduit above ceiling Do not support conduit by ceiling support system Conduit and box systems shall be supported independently of both a tie wires supporting ceiling grid system and b ceiling grid system into which ceiling panels are placed Supporting means shall not be shared between electrical raceways and mechanical piping or ducts Installation shall be coordinated with above ceiling mechanical systems to assure maximum accessibility to all systems Spring steel fasteners may be used for lighting branch circuit conduit supports in suspended ceilings in dry locations Support exposed risers in wire shafts of multistory buildings by U clamp hangers at each floor level and at 10 foot maximum intervals Where conduit crosses building expansion joints provide suitable watertight expansion fitting that maintains conduit electrical continuity by bonding jumpers or other means For conduits greater than 2 1 2 inches inside diameter provide supports to resist forces of 0 5 times the equipment weight in any direction and 1 5 times the equipment weight in the
445. ous material to be paid for will be measured in the number of gallons of the material used in the accepted work corrected to gallons at 60 degrees F in accordance with ASTM D 1250 Use a coefficient of 0 00025 degree F for asphalt emulsion 1 1 2 Payment Bituminous binder and wearing course constructed and accepted will be paid for at the applicable contract unit prices in the unit schedule No payment will be made for any material wasted used for the convenience of the Contractor unused or rejected 1 1 3 Waybills and Delivery Tickets Submit copies of waybills or delivery tickets during the progress of the work Before the final payment is allowed furnish waybills or certified delivery tickets for all bituminous materials and paving mixtures used in the construction Do not remove bituminous material from the tank car or storage tank until the initial outage has been taken nor release the car or tank until final outage has been taken 12 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only SECTION 32 12 19 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS AASHTO AASHTO M 226 1980 R 2008 Standard Specification for Viscosity Graded Asphalt Cement AASHTO T 40 2002 R 2006 Sampling Bituminous Materials ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM
446. p over each receptacle opening Provide caps with a spring hinged flap Receptacle shall be UL listed for use in wet locations with plug in use 2 11 3 Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter Receptacles UL 943 duplex type for mounting in standard outlet box Device shall be capable of detecting current leak of 6 milliamperes or greater and tripping per requirements of UL 943 for Class A GFI devices Provide screw type Side wired wiring terminals or pre wired pigtail leads 2 11 4 Special Purpose Receptacles See Drawings for special purpose receptacles Provide receptacles with the required ratings NEMA configuration rated amperes and volts as indicated on the plans SECTION 26 20 00 Page 12 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 7A 2 11 5 Plugs Provide heavy duty rubber covered three four five wire cord of required size install plugs thereon and attach to equipment Plugs shall be UL listed with receptacles complete with grounding blades Where equipment is not available turn over plugs and cord assemblies to the Government 2 11 6 Tamper Resistant Receptacles Provide duplex receptacle with mechanical sliding shutters that prevent the insertion of small objects into its contact slots 2 12 PANELBOARDS UL 67 and UL 50 having a short circuit current rating as indicated of 10 000 amperes symmetrical minimum Panelboards for use as service disconnecting means shall additionally conform to UL 869A Panelboards shall be cir
447. parate ground conductor across flexible connections Be LAA L7 Telecommunications and Signal System Pathway Install telecommunications pathway in accordance with TIA 569 a Horizontal Pathway Telecommunications pathways from the work area to the telecommunications room shall be installed and cabling length requirements in accordance with TIA 568 C 1 Size conduits wireways and cable trays in accordance with TIA 569 b Backbone Pathway Telecommunication pathways from the telecommunications entrance facility to telecommunications rooms and telecommunications equipment rooms backbone cabling shall be installed in accordance with TIA 569 Size conduits wireways and cable trays for telecommunications risers in accordance with TIA 569 313 5 Busway Installation Installation shall comply at minimum with NFPA 70 Install busways parallel with or at right angles to ceilings walls and structural members Support busways at 5 foot maximum intervals and brace to prevent lateral movement Hinges provided on risers shall be fixed type spring type are unacceptable Provide flanges where busway makes penetrations through walls and floors and seal to maintain smoke and fire ratings Provide waterproof curb where busway riser passes through floor Seal gaps with fire rated foam and calk Provide expansion joints but only where bus duct crosses building expansion joints Provide supports to resist forces of 0 5 times the equipment weight in a
448. pe manufacturer whichever is smaller to avoid point bearing 3 SeA Removal of Unyielding Material Where unyielding material is encountered in the bottom of the trench remove such material 4 inch below the required grade and replaced with suitable materials as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION SECTION 31 00 00 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 33143 53 Removal of Unstable Material Where unstable material is encountered in the bottom of the trench remove such material to the depth directed and replace it to the proper grade with select granular material as provided in paragraph BACKFILLING AND COMPACTION When removal of unstable material is required due to the Contractor s fault or neglect in performing the work the Contractor is responsible for excavating the resulting material and replacing it without additional cost to the Government 3 1 4 Underground Utilities The Contractor is responsible for movement of construction machinery and equipment over pipes and utilities during construction Excavation made with power driven equipment is not permitted withintwofeet of known Government owned utility or subsurface construction For work immediately adjacent to or for excavations exposing a utility or other buried obstruction excavate by hand Start hand excavation on each side of the indicated obstruction and continue until the obstruction is uncovered or until clearance for the new grade is assured Support un
449. pen position As an alternative provide a manually operated lockable nonfused switch which disconnects motor from supply source within sight of motor Overload protective devices shall provide adequate protection to motor windings be thermal inverse time limit type and include manual reset type pushbutton on outside of motor controller case Cover of combination motor controller and manual switch or circuit breaker shall be interlocked with operating handle of switch or circuit breaker so that cover cannot be opened unless handle of switch or circuit breaker is in off position Minimum short circuit withstand rating of combination motor controller shall be as indicated Provide controllers in hazardous locations with classifications as indicated 2w 15 1 Control Wiring All control wire shall be stranded tinned copper switchboard wire with 600 volt flame retardant insulation Type SIS meeting UL 44 or Type MTW meeting UL 1063 and shall pass the VW 1 flame tests included in those standards Hinge wire shall have Class K stranding Current transformer secondary leads shall be not smaller than No 10 AWG The minimum size of control wire shall be No 14 AWG Power wiring for 480 volt circuits and below shall be of the same type as control wiring and the minimum size shall be No 12 AWG Special attention shall be given to wiring and terminal arrangement on the terminal blocks to permit the individual conductors of each external cable to be t
450. peration Sensors shall be UL listed as smoke automatic fire sensors c Components shall be rust and corrosion resistant Vibration shall have no effect on the sensor s operation Protect the detection chamber with a fine mesh metallic screen which prevents the entrance of insects or airborne materials The screen shall not inhibit the movement of smoke particles into the chamber d Provide twist lock bases for the sensors The sensors shall maintain contact with their bases without the use of springs Provide companion mounting base with screw terminals for each conductor Terminate field wiring on the screw terminals The sensor shall have a visual indicator to show actuation e The sensor address shall identify the particular unit its location within the system and its sensitivity setting Sensors shall be of the low voltage type rated for use on a 24 VDC system f An operator at the control panel having a proper access level shall have the capability to manually access the following information for each initiating device Primary status Device type Present average value Present sensitivity selected Sensor range normal dirty etc Oo BWNE SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 11 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 2 6 2 Duct Smoke Sensors Duct smoke sensors shall be analog addressable photoelectric type as described in paragraph entitled Photoelectric Smoke Sensors and shall be provided in ductwork in accordance with N
451. peration and Maintenance Manuals G Equipment Test Schedule G Request for Settings G QUALITY ASSURANCE Switchboard Product Data Each submittal shall include manufacturer s information for each component device and accessory provided with the switchboard including As 5x 2 Circuit breaker type interrupting rating and trip devices including available settings Manufacturer s instruction manuals and published time current curves on full size logarithmic paper of the main secondary breaker and largest secondary feeder device Switchboard Drawings Drawings shall include but are not limited to the following SECTION 26 23 00 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 a One line diagram including breakers fuses current transformers and meters b Outline drawings including front elevation section views footprint and overall dimensions c Bus configuration including dimensions and ampere ratings of bus bars d Markings and NEMA nameplate data including fuse information manufacturer s name catalog number and ratings e Circuit breaker type interrupting rating and trip devices including available settings f Three line diagrams and elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams with terminals identified and indicating prewired interconnections between items of equipment and the interconnection between the items g Manufacturer s instruction manuals and published time current curves on full size logarit
452. plates shall be one by 2 5 inches Lettering shall be a minimum of 0 25 inch high normal block style 2 23 WARNING SIGNS Provide warning signs for flash protection in accordance with NFPA 70E and NEMA Z535 4 for switchboards panelboards industrial control panels and motor control centers that are in other than dwelling occupancies and are likely to require examination adjustment servicing or maintenance while energized Provide field installed signs to warn qualified persons of potential electric arc flash hazards when warning signs are not provided by the manufacturer The marking shall be clearly visible to qualified persons before examination adjustment servicing or maintenance of the equipment SECTION 26 20 00 Page 19 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 24 FIRESTOPPING MATERIALS Provide firestopping around electrical penetrations in accordance with Section 07 84 00 FIRESTOPPING 2 25 WIREWAYS UL 870 Material shall be steel epoxy painted 16 gauge for heights and depths up to 6 by 6 inches and 14 gauge for heights and depths up to 12 by 12 inches Provide in length required for the application with screw cover NEMA 1 3R enclosure per NEMA ICS 6 2 26 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES Provide parallel type surge protective devices which comply with UL 1449 at the service entrance panelboards Provide surge protectors in a NEMA 1 enclosure per NEMA ICS 6 Provide the following modes of protection FOR SINGLE PHASE A
453. pment The portable applicator shall be defined as hand operated equipment specifically designed for placing special markings such as crosswalks stopbars legends arrows and short lengths of lane edge and centerlines The portable applicator shall be capable of applying thermoplastic pavement markings by the extrusion method The portable applicator shall be loaded with hot thermoplastic composition from the melting kettles on the mobile applicator The portable applicator shall be equipped with all the necessary components including a materials storage reservoir bead dispenser extrusion shoe and heating accessories so as to be capable of holding the molten thermoplastic at a temperature of 375 to 425 degrees F of extruding a line of 3 to 12 inches in width and in thickness of not less than 0 120 inch nor more than 0 190 inch and of generally uniform cross section 1 5 4 Reflective Media Dispenser The dispenser for applying the reflective media shall be attached to the paint dispenser and shall operate automatically and simultaneously with the applicator through the same control mechanism The dispenser shall be capable of adjustment and designed to provide uniform flow of reflective media over the full length and width of the stripe at the rate of coverage specified in paragraph APPLICATION at all operating speeds of the applicator to which it is attached 1 55 Preformed Tape Application Equipment Mechanical application equi
454. pment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings b Inspect physical and mechanical condition Confirm the meter is firmly seated in the socket the socket is not abnormally heated the display is visible and the ring and seal on the cover are intact c Inspect all electrical connections to ensure they are tight For Class 200 services verify tightness of the service conductor terminations for high resistance using low resistance ohmmeter or by verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method d Record model number serial number firmware revision software revision and rated control voltage e Verify operation of display and indicating devices Record password and user log in for each meter g Verify grounding of metering enclosure h Set all required parameters including instrument transformer ratios system type frequency power demand methods intervals SECTION 26 27 14 00 20 Page 11 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 and communications requirements Verify that the CT ratio and the PT ratio are properly included in the meter multiplier or the programming of the meter Confirm that the multiplier is provided on the meter face or on the meter 1 Provide building meter installation sheet per building for each facility See example Graphic E S1 j Provide the completed meter installation schedule for the installation See exa
455. pment shall be used for the placement of preformed marking tape Mechanical application equipment shall be defined as a mobile pavement marking machine specifically designed for use in applying precoated pressure sensitive pavement marking tape of varying widths up to 12 inches The applicator shall be equipped with rollers or other suitable compactive device to provide initial adhesion of the preformed pressure sensitive marking tape with the pavement surface Additional hand operated rollers shall be used as required to properly seat the thermoplastic tape SECTION 32 17 23 00 20 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 7A 1 5 6 Surface Preparation Equipment Die 5 3 6 yo L Sandblasting Equipment Sandblasting equipment shall include an air compressor hoses and nozzles of proper size and capacity as required for cleaning surfaces to be painted The compressor shall be capable of furnishing not less than 150 cfm of air at a pressure of not less than 90 psi at each nozzle used and shall be equipped with traps that will maintain the compressed air free of oil and water 125 2652 Waterblast Equipment The water pressure shall be specified at 2600 psi at 140 degrees F in order to adequately clean the surfaces to be marked Water will be furnished at no cost to the Contractor from a fire hydrant designated by the Contracting Officer or authorized representative and located within a reasonable proximity to the work area The Contractor shall
456. present the average of at least four specimens c Cooling of Specimen After compaction is completed allow the specimen to cool in air to the same temperature approximately as that of the water 77 degrees F to be used in the specific gravity determination PART 3 EXECUTION 3 3 ell PREPARATION alts dt Preparation of Asphalt Binder Material The asphalt cement material shall be heated avoiding local overheating and providing a continuous supply of the asphalt material to the mixer at a uniform temperature The temperature of unmodified asphalts shall be no more than 160 degrees C 325 degrees F when added to the aggregates Modified asphalts shall be no more than 174 degrees C 350 degrees F when added to the aggregate TA 2 Preparation of Mineral Aggregates Store different size aggregate in separate stockpiles so that different Sizes will not mix Stockpile different sized aggregates in uniform layers by use of a clam shell or other approved method so as to prevent segregation The use of bulldozers in stockpiling of aggregate or in feeding aggregate to the dryer is prohibited Feed aggregates into the cold elevator by means of separate mechanical feeders so that aggregates are graded within requirements of the job mix formulas and tolerances specified Regulate rates of feed of the aggregates so that moisture content and temperature of aggregates are within tolerances specified herein Dry and heat aggregates to the temperatu
457. quate heaters for heating of materials to the proper application temperature a thermometer for reading the temperature of tank contents and a hand hose attachment suitable for applying bituminous material manually to areas inaccessible to the distributor Equip the distributor to circulate and agitate the bituminous material during the heating process 1 3 3 Heating Equipment for Storage Tanks The equipment for heating the bituminous material shall be steam electric or hot oil heaters Provide steam heaters consisting of steam coils and equipment for producing steam so designed that the steam cannot get into the material Fix an armored thermometer to the tank with a temperature range from 40 to 400 degrees F so that the temperature of the bituminous material may be determined at all times 1 3 4 Power Brooms and Power Blowers Use power brooms and power blowers suitable for cleaning the surfaces to SECTION 32 12 10 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 which the bituminous coat is to be applied 1 4 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 03 Product Data Waybills and Delivery Tickets Local Regional Materials SD 06 Test Reports Sampling and Testing 1 5 QUALITY ASSURANCE Use Local Regional Materials or pr
458. r alloy containing not less than 75 percent copper 2 Register Box Rings and Lids Register box rings and lids shall be made of a cast copper alloy containing not less than 75 percent copper forged or die cast copper alloy containing not less than 57 percent copper or a suitable synthetic polymer 3 Measuring Cages or Chambers Measuring cages or chambers shall be made of a copper alloy containing not less than 84 percent copper and suitable amounts of tin lead and zinc or of a suitable synthetic polymer 4 Measuring Turbines Pistons and Discs Turbines pistons and discs SECTION 33 12 33 00 30 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 shall be made of vulcanized hard rubber or a suitable synthetic polymer with specific gravity approximately equal to that of water They shall have sufficient dimensional stability to retain operating clearances at working temperatures of up to 27 degrees Centigrade and not warp or deform when exposed to operating temperatures of 37 degrees Centigrade Disc and Turbine Spindles Measuring chamber spindles shall be made of phosphor bronze stainless steel ceramic or suitable synthetic polymer Intermediate Gear Trains Frames gears and pinions of intermediate gear trains exposed to water shall be made of copper alloy containing not less than 85 percent copper and suitable amounts of tin lead and zinc or suitable synthetic polymer When not exposed to water intermediate gear trains ma
459. r any additional materials such as covering or adhesive It shall be designed for use with inline compression type connectors or indoor outdoor direct burial or submerged locations 5 MEDIUM VOLTAGE CABLE Cable conductor sizes are designated by American Wire Gauge AWG and Thousand Circular Mils Kcemil Conductor and conduit sizes indicated are for copper conductors unless otherwise noted Insulated conductors shall have the date of manufacture and other identification imprinted on the outer surface of each cable at regular intervals throughout cable length Wires and cables manufactured more than 12 months prior to date of delivery to the site shall not be accepted Provide single conductor type cables unless otherwise indicated St Cable Configuration Provide Type MV cable conforming to NEMA WC 74 ICEA S 93 639 and UL 1072 Provide cables manufactured for use in duct applications Cable shall be rated 15 kV with 133 percent insulation level 522 Conductor Material Provide concentric lay stranded Class B conductors Provide soft drawn copper cables complying with ASTM B3 and ASTM B8 for regular concentric and compressed stranding or ASTM B496 for compact stranding SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 10 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 7A 2 2543 Insulation Provide ethylene propylene rubber EPR insulation conforming to the requirements of ANSI NEMA WC 71 ICEA S 96 659 and AEIC CS8ICEA S 94 649 2 5 4 Shielding Cables rated for
460. r appurtenances compute volumes of rock excavation on the basis of 1 foot outside of the wall lines of the structures alee eae Select Granular Material Measure select granular material in place as the actual cubic yards replacing wet or unstable material in trench bottoms in authorized overdepth areas Provide unit prices which include furnishing and placing the granular material excavation and disposal of unsatisfactory material and additional requirements for sheeting and bracing pumping bailing cleaning and other incidentals necessary to complete the work 1 4 PAYMENT Payment will constitute full compensation for all labor equipment tools supplies and incidentals necessary to complete the work 1 4 1 Classified Excavation Classified excavation will be paid for at the contract unit prices per cubic yard for common or rock excavation Ain 2 Piping Trench Excavation Payment for trench excavation will constitute full payment for excavation and backfilling except in rock or unstable trench bottoms 1 4 3 Rock Excavation for Trenches Payment for rock excavation will be made in addition to the price bid for the trench excavation and will include all necessary drilling and blasting and all incidentals necessary to excavate and dispose of the rock Select granular material used as backfill replacing rock excavation will not be paid for separately but will be included in the unit price for rock excavation 1 4 4 Unclas
461. r holding device permitting the door to be closed by the door closer The device shall be UL listed based on UL 228 tests SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 18 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 De Deed T Automatic Transmitters 25251 7451 Radio Transmitter and Interface Panels Utilize existing radio transmitter 2626 L72 Signals To Be Transmitted to the Base Receiving Station The following signals shall be sent to the base receiving station a Sprinkler water flow b Manual pull stations c Smoke detectors d Duct smoke detectors e Sleeping room smoke detectors g Sprinkler valve supervision od NAMEPLATES Major components of equipment shall have the manufacturer s name address type or style model or serial number catalog number date of installation installing Contractor s name and address and the contract number provided on a new plate permanently affixed to the item or equipment Major components include but are not limited to the following a FACPs b Automatic transmitter Furnish to obtain approval by the Contracting Officer before installation Obtain approval by the Contracting Officer for installation locations Nameplates shall be etched metal or plastic permanently attached by screws to panels or adjacent walls 4 WIRING Provide wiring materials under this section as specified in Section 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM with the additions and modifications specified herein PART 3 EXEC
462. r phase to protect the voltage input to the watthour meter Size fuses as recommended by the meter manufacturer 8 Socket ANSI C12 7 Provide NEMA Type 3R box mounted socket having automatic circuit closing bypass and having jaws compatible with requirements of the meter Cover unused hub openings with blank hub plates Paint box Munsell 7GY3 29 1 5 green to match the pad mounted transformer to which the box mounted socket is attached The Munsell color notation is specified in ASTM D 1535 9 Current transformers IEEE C57 13 Provide butyl molded window type current transformers with 600 volt insulation 10 kV BIL and mount on the low voltage bushings Provide shorting type terminal blocks and route current transformer leads from the shorting type terminal blocks in a location as remote as possible from the power transformer secondary cables to permit current measurements to be taken with hook on ammeters Provide three current transformers per power transformer with characteristics listed in the following table kVA Sec Volt CT Ratio RF Meter Acc Class 750 208Y 120 2000 5 T5 0 3 thru B 1 8 2 2 2 Transformer a Less flammable liquid insulated two winding 60 hertz 65 degrees C rise above a 30 degrees C average ambient self cooled type b Transformer shall be rated 750 kVA 95 kV BIL C Transformer voltage ratings 13 800 V Delta 208 120 V GrdY d Tap changer shall be externally operated manual type for changing tap
463. r remove hot mixture and rake the mixture as required to obtain a course that when completed will conform to requirements specified herein Broadcasting or fanning of mixture over areas being compacted is prohibited When segregation occurs in the mixture during placing suspend spreading operation until the cause is determined and corrected Correct irregularities in alignment left by the spreader by trimming directly behind the machine Immediately after trimming compact edges of the course by tamping laterally with a metal lute or by other approved methods Distortion of the course during tamping is prohibited 2203 Hand Spreading in Lieu of Machine Spreading In areas where the use of machine spreading is impractical spread mixture by hand The range of temperatures of the mixtures when dumped onto the area to be paved shall be between 250 and 300 degrees F Mixtures having temperatures less than minimum spreading temperature when dumped onto the area to be paved will be rejected Spread hot mixture with rakes ina uniformly loose layer of a thickness that when compacted will conform to the required grade thickness and smoothness During hand spreading place each shovelful of mixture by turning the shovel over in a manner that will prevent segregation Do not place mixture by throwing or broadcasting from a shovel Do not dump loads any faster than can be properly handled by the shovelers and rakers a3 COMPACTION OF MIXTURE Co
464. racket shall be 4 inches by approximately 1 1 2 inch by 3 16 inch channel steel 48 inches long minimum in manholes Slots for mounting cable rack arms shall be spaced at 8 inch intervals 2305 52 Rack Arms Cable rack arms shall be steel or malleable iron or glass reinforced nylon and shall be of the removable type Rack arm length shall be a minimum of 8 inches and a maximum of 12 inches 2 15 3 Insulators Insulators for metal rack arms shall be dry process glazed porcelain Insulators are not required for nylon arms 2 16 CABLE TAGS IN MANHOLES Provide tags for each power cable located in manholes The tags shall be polyethylene Do not provide handwritten letters The first position on the power cable tag shall denote the voltage The second through sixth positions on the tag shall identify the circuit The next to last position shall denote the phase of the circuit and shall include the Greek phi symbol The last position shall denote the cable size As an example a tag could have the following designation 11 5 NAS 1 8 Phase A 500 denoting that the tagged cable is on the 11 5kV system circuit number NAS 1 8 underground Phase A sized at 500 kcmil 2 16 1 Polyethylene Cable Tags Provide tags of polyethylene that have an average tensile strength of 3250 pounds per square inch and that are 0 08 inch thick minimum non corrosive non conductive resistive to acids alkalis organic solvents and salt water and distor
465. radations Gradation 1 Gradation 2 Percent Passing Percent Passing Sieve Size inch by Mass by Mass 1 100 sae 3 4 76 96 100 1 2 68 88 76 96 3 8 60 82 69 89 No 4 45 67 53 73 No 8 32 54 38 60 No 16 22 44 26 48 No 30 15 35 18 38 No 50 9 25 11 27 SECTION 32 12 17 Page 7 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 No 100 No 200 W OV 1 OF W A i 1 OF 2 ASPHALT CEMENT BINDER Asphalt cement binder shall conform to AASHTO MP la AASHTO M 320 Performance Grade PG 70 22 M Test data indicating grade certification shall be provided by the supplier at the time of delivery of each load to the mix plant Copies of these certifications shall be submitted to the Contracting Officer The supplier is defined as the last source of any modification to the binder The Contracting Officer may sample and test the binder at the mix plant at any time before or during mix production Samples for this verification testing shall be obtained by the Contractor in accordance with ASTM D 140 D 140M and in the presence of the Contracting Officer These samples shall be furnished to the Contracting Officer for the verification testing which shall be at no cost to the Contractor Samples of the asphalt cement specified shall be submitted for approval not less than 14 days before start of the test section 3 MIX DESIGN The Contractor shall develop the mix design The asphalt mix shall be composed of a mixture of well graded
466. rading shall be performed in accordance with Section 31 00 00 EARTHWORK 3 PIPE INSTALLATION adre L Pipe Installation Excavations shall be trimmed to required elevations Objects which impair backfilling or compaction shall be removed Over excavation shall be corrected with fill material of coarse aggregate Pipe and fittings shall be inspected for defects before installing Defective materials shall be removed from site Pipe interior shall be cleaned before installation Pipe ends shall be sealed when work is not in progress Pipe shall be laid to line and grade with bell end upstream Maximum variation from true slope shall not exceed 1 8 inch in 10 feet Maximum deviation from design elevation shall not exceed 0 04 feet at any point in the system Maximum deviation from true line shall not exceed 0 20 feet for pipe 15 SECTION 33 40 00 00 40 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 inches in diameter and smaller 0 40 feet for pipe larger than 15 inches in diameter 3 3 2 Cast Iron and Ductile Iron Pipe Installation Install cast iron and ductile iron pipe and fittings in accordance with manufacturer s instructions 3 3 3 ABS Composite Plastic Pipe Installation ABS Composite plastic pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer s instructions 3 3 4 PVC Plastic Pipe Installation PVC pipe and fittings shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer s instructions and in accordance wit
467. rcent voids in mineral aggregate percent air voids unit weight g Asphalt absorption by the aggregate h Effective asphalt content as percent by weight of total mix i Temperature of the mixture immediately upon completion of mixing j Asphalt performance grade viscosity grade and k Curves for the binder and wearing courses ons Charts Plot and submit on a grain size chart the specified aggregate gradation band the job mix gradation and the job mix tolerance band 3 4 Selection of Optimum Asphalt Content Base selection on percent of total mix and the average of values at the following points on the curves for each mix a Stability Peak b Unit Weight Peak c Percent Air Voids Median 4 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Inspect materials delivered to the site for damage and store with a minimum of handling Store aggregates in such a manner as to prevent segregation contamination or intermixing of the different aggregate sizes v5 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS Place bituminous mixture only during dry weather and on dry surfaces Place courses only when the surface temperature of the underlying course is SECTION 32 12 17 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 greater than 45 degrees F for course thicknesses greater than one inch and 55 degrees F for course thicknesses one inch or less 1 6 CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT Calibrated equipment such as scales batching equipment spreaders and similar equipmen
468. rcuit 5 Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low resistance ohmmeter verifying tightness of accessible bolted electrical connections by calibrated torque wrench method or performing thermographic survey 6 Verify that all required grounding and shorting connections provide good contact Electrical Tests 1 Perform resistance measurements through all bolted connections with low resistance ohmmeter if applicable 2 Perform insulation resistance tests 3 Perform polarity tests 4 Perform ratio verification tests 4 Metering and Instrumentation Visual and Mechanical Inspection 1 Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings 2 Inspect physical and mechanical condition 3 Verify tightness of electrical connections Electrical Tests 1 Determine accuracy of meters at 25 50 75 and 100 percent of full scale 2 Calibrate watthour meters according to manufacturer s published data 3 Verify all instrument multipliers SECTION 26 23 00 Page 13 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 3 4 Electrically confirm that current transformer and voltage transformer secondary circuits are intact aera aes Grounding System a Visual and Mechanical Inspection 1 Inspect ground system for compliance with contract plans and specifications b Electrical Tests 1 IEEE 81 Perform ground impedance measurements utilizing the fall of potential m
469. rdance with NEMA LI 1 Type GPO 3 0 25 inch minimum thickness Apply moisture resistant coating to all rough cut edges of barriers Switchboard shall be completely factory engineered and assembled including protective devices and equipment indicated with necessary interconnections instrumentation and control wiring OREP AAN Enclosure The switchboard enclosure shall be a NEMA ICS 6 Type 1 Enclosure shall be bolted together with removable bolt on side and rear covers and sloping roof downward toward rear Bases frames and channels of enclosure shall be corrosion resistant and shall be fabricated of ASTM A167 type 304 or 304L stainless steel Base shall include any part of enclosure that is within 3 inches of concrete pad Galvanized steel shall be ASTM A123 A123M ASTM A653 A653M G90 coating and ASTM A153 A153M as applicable Galvanize after fabrication where practicable Paint enclosure including bases ASTM D 1535 light gray No 61 or No 49 Paint coating system shall comply WIithIEEE C57 12 28 for galvanized steel 2222 Bus Bars Bus bars shall be copper with silver plated contact surfaces Plating shall be a minimum of 0 0002 inch thick Make bus connections and joints with hardened steel bolts The through bus shall be rated at the full ampacity of the main throughout the switchboard Provide minimum one quarter by 2 inch copper ground bus secured to each vertical section along the entire length of the switchboard The neutr
470. rdous Liquids by Pipeline 1 3 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval information only When used a designation following the G designation identifies the office that will review the submittal for the Government Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 03 Product Data Pressure regulator G Valves Risers Transition fittings Gas meter G SD 07 Certificates Welder s qualifications Welder s identification symbols 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 4 1 Welder s Qualifications Comply with ASME B31 8 The steel welder shall have a copy of a certified ASME B31 8 qualification test report Submit each welder s identification symbols assigned number or letter used to identify work of the welder Affix symbols immediately upon completion of welds Welders making defective welds after passing a qualification test shall be given a requalification test and upon failing to pass this test shall not be permitted to work this contract SECTION 33 51 13 00 30 Page 3 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 1 4 2 Safety Standards Conform to 49 CFR 192 and 49 CFR 195 1 5 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Handle transport and store pipe and fittings carefully Plug or cap pipe ends during transportation or storage to minimize dirt and moisture entry Do not subject to abrasi
471. re permanently electrically bonded to vertical column members the TGB may be bonded to these horizontal members in lieu of the vertical column members All connectors used for bonding to the metal frame of a SECTION 26 20 00 Page 29 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 building shall be listed for the intended purpose 3 1 14 Equipment Connections Provide power wiring for the connection of motors and control equipment under this section of the specification Except as otherwise specifically noted or specified automatic control wiring control devices and protective devices within the control circuitry are not included in this section of the specifications but shall be provided under the section specifying the associated equipment Ske 5 Elevator Provide circuit to line terminals of elevator controller and disconnect switch on line side of controller outlet for control power outlet receptacle and work light at midheight of elevator shaft and work light and outlet receptacle in elevator pit 3 6 Government Furnished Equipment Contractor shall rough in for Government furnished equipment and shall make connections to Government furnished equipment to make equipment operate as intended including providing miscellaneous items such as plugs receptacles wire cable conduit flexible conduit and outlet boxes or fittings 3 1 17 Repair of Existing Work Repair of existing work demolition and modification of existing ele
472. re Efficiency Rating LER a Upward efficiency of 0 percent 1 150 399 watts minimum 41 LER for closed fixture 2 400 999 watts minimum 53 LER for closed fixture minimum 59 for open fixture SECTION 26 51 00 Page 10 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 2 3 1000 watts minimum 77 LER for closed fixture b Upward efficiency of 1 percent 10 percent 1 150 399 watts minimum 56 LER for closed fixture 2 400 999 watts minimum 62 LER for closed fixture minimum 64 for open fixture 3 1000 watts minimum 88 LER for open fixture c Upward efficiency greater than 20 percent 1 150 399 watts minimum 62 LER for closed fixture minimum 77 for open fixture 2 400 999 watts minimum 65 LER for closed fixture 23 INCANDESCENT LIGHTING FIXTURES Use of incandescent lamps and fixtures is prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise UL 1598 63 04 Incandescent Lamps Provide the number type and wattage indicated 4 RECESS AND FLUSH MOUNTED FIXTURES Provide type that can be relamped from the bottom Access to ballast shall be from the bottom Trim for the exposed surface of flush mounted fixtures shall be as indicated z9 SUSPENDED FIXTURES Provide hangers capable of supporting twice the combined weight of fixtures supported by hangers Provide with swivel hangers to ensure a plumb installation Hangers shall be cadmium plated steel with a swivel ball tapped for the conduit size indicated Hangers shall be shoc
473. re necessary to achieve the mixture determined by the job mix formula within the job tolerance specified Provide adequate dry storage for mineral filler I3 Preparation of Bituminous Mixture Accurately weigh aggregates and dry mineral filler and convey into the mixer in the proportionate amounts of each aggregate size required to meet the job mix formula In batch mixing after aggregates and mineral filler SECTION 32 12 17 Page 11 Submarine A School BQ 534 V2 7A have been introduced into the mixer and mixed for not less than 15 seconds add asphalt by spraying or other approved methods and continue mixing for a period of not less than 20 seconds or as long as required to obtain a homogeneous mixture The time required to add or spray asphalt into the mixer will not be added to the total wet mixing time provided the operation does not exceed 10 seconds and a homogeneous mixture is obtained When a continuous mixer is employed mixing time shall be more than 35 seconds to obtain a homogeneous mixture Additional mixing time when required will be as directed by the Contracting Officer When mixture is prepared ina twin pugmill mixer volume of the aggregates mineral filler and asphalt shall not extend above tips of mixer blades when blades are in a vertical position Overheated and carbonized mixtures or mixtures that foam or show indication of free moisture will be rejected When free moisture is detected in batch or continuous mix
474. re than 500 psi 3 5 2 2 Air Content Determine air content in accordance with ASTM C173 C173M or ASTM C231 C231M ASTM C231 C231M shall be used with concretes and mortars made with relatively dense natural aggregates Two tests for air content shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class of concrete placed during each shift Additional tests shall be made when excessive variation in concrete workability is reported by the placing foreman or the Government inspector If results are out of tolerance the placing foreman shall be notified and he shall take appropriate action to have the air content corrected at the plant Additional tests for air content will be performed on each truckload of material until such time as the air content is within the tolerance specified 3 54243 Slump Test Two slump tests shall be made on randomly selected batches of each class of concrete for every 250 cubic yards or fraction thereof of concrete placed during each shift Additional tests shall be performed when excessive variation in the workability of the concrete is noted or when excessive crumbling or slumping is noted along the edges of slip formed concrete 3 5 3 Thickness Evaluation The anticipated thickness of the concrete shall be determined prior to placement by passing a template through the formed section or by measuring the depth of opening of the extrusion template of the curb forming machine If a slip form p
475. rect Buried Single conductor and multi conductor cables shall be of a type identified for direct burial 2 DD In Duct Cables shall be single conductor cable Cables in factory installed coilable plastic duct assemblies shall conform to NEMA TC 7 2 2 6 Cable Marking Insulated conductors shall have the date of manufacture and other identification imprinted on the outer surface of each cable at regular intervals throughout the cable length Each cable shall be identified by means of a fiber laminated plastic or non ferrous metal tags or approved equal in each manhole handhole junction box and each terminal Each tag shall contain the following information cable type conductor size circuit number circuit voltage cable destination and phase identification Conductors shall be color coded Conductor identification shall be provided within each enclosure where a tap splice or termination is made Conductor identification shall be by color coded insulated conductors plastic coated self sticking printed markers colored nylon cable ties and plates heat shrink type sleeves or colored electrical tape Control circuit terminations shall be properly identified Color shall be green for grounding conductors and white for neutrals except where neutrals of more than one system are installed in same raceway or box other neutrals shall be white with a different colored not green stripe for each Color of ungrounded conductors in diffe
476. rement 1r6sle2 Testing Services or Laboratories Fire alarm and fire detection equipment shall be constructed in accordance with UL Fire Prot Dir UL Electrical Constructn or FM APP GUIDE 1 6 2 Standard Products Provide materials equipment and devices that have been tested by a nationally recognized testing laboratory such as UL or FM and listed or approved for fire protection service when so required by NFPA 72 or this specification Select material from one manufacturer where possible and not a combination of manufacturers for any particular classification of materials 1 6 3 Modification of References a In NFPA publications referred to herein consider advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall had been substituted for should wherever it appears interpret reference to authority having jurisdiction to mean the Naval Facilities Engineering Command MIDLANT Fire Protection Engineer b The recommended practices stated in the manufacturer s literature or documentation shall be considered as mandatory requirements 1 7 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Protect equipment delivered and placed in storage from the weather humidity and temperature variation dirt and dust and other contaminants 1 8 SPARE PARTS AND TOOLS 1 8 1 Interchangeable Parts Spare parts furnished shall be directly interchangeable with the corresponding components of the installed system Spare parts shall be suitably pac
477. removed and replaced with uncontaminated geotextile Any damage to the geotextile during its installation or during placement of bedding materials shall be replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Government The work shall be scheduled so that the covering of the geotextile with a layer of the specified material is accomplished within 3 calendar days after placement of the geotextile Failure to comply shall require replacement of geotextile The geotextile shall be protected from damage prior to and during the placement of riprap or other materials Before placement of riprap or other materials the Contractor shall demonstrate that the placement technique will not cause damage to the geotextile In no case shall any type of equipment be allowed on the unprotected geotextile 4 PLACEMENT OF CUSHIONING MATERIAL Placing of cushioning material shall be performed in a manner to insure intimate contact of the geotextile with the prepared surface and with the cushioning material The placement shall also be performed in a manner that shall not damage the geotextile including tear puncture or abrasion On sloping surfaces the cushioning material shall be placed from the bottom of the slopes upward During placement the height of the drop of riprap material shall not be greater than 12 inches Any geotextile damaged beneath the cushioning material shall be uncovered as necessary and replaced at no cost to the Government x5
478. rent voltage systems shall be as follows a 208 120 volt three phase 1 Phase A black 2 Phase B red 3 Phase C blue b 480 277 volt three phase 1 Phase A brown 2 Phase B orange 3 Phase C yellow SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 9 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 c 120 240 volt single phase Black and red 23 LOW VOLTAGE WIRE CONNECTORS AND TERMINALS Shall provide a uniform compression over the entire conductor contact surface Use solderless terminal lugs on stranded conductors a For use with copper conductors UL 486A 486B b For use with aluminum conductors UL 486A 486B For connecting aluminum to copper connectors shall be the circumferentially compressed metallurgically bonded type 4 LOW VOLTAGE SPLICES Provide splices in conductors with a compression connector on the conductor and by insulating and waterproofing using one of the following methods which are suitable for continuous submersion in water and comply ANSI C119 1 ee Heat Shrinkable Splice Provide heat shrinkable splice insulation by means of a thermoplastic adhesive sealant material which shall be applied in accordance with the manufacturer s written instructions 4 2 Cold Shrink Rubber Splice Provide a cold shrink rubber splice which consists of EPDM rubber tube which has been factory stretched onto a spiraled core which is removed during splice installation The installation shall not require heat or flame o
479. rer unless stated in this section Asie Bee Alternative Qualifications Products having less than a 2 year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturers factory or laboratory tests is furnished SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Lede 2 Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used unless specified otherwise 2 6 MAINTENANCE 1 6 1 Additions to Operation and Maintenance Data In addition to requirements of Data Package 5 include the following on the actual transformer s provided a An instruction manual with pertinent items and information highlighted b An outline drawing front top and side views c Prices for spare parts and supply list d Routine and field acceptance test reports e Fuse curves for primary fuses f Information on watthour demand meter CT s and fuse block g Actual nameplate diagram h Date of purchase 1 7 WARRANTY The equipment items shall be supported by service organizations which are reasonably convenient to the equipment installation in order to render satisfactory service to the equipment on a regular and emergency basis during the warranty period of the contract PART 2 PRODUCTS 241 PRODUCT COORDINATION Products and materials not considered to be pad mounted
480. res shall be made without prior approval of Contracting Officer 6 Ded System Requirements Materials shall consist of standard products of a manufacturer regularly engaged in production of lightning protection systems and shall be manufacturer s latest UL approved design Lightning protection system SECTION 26 41 00 00 20 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 ake al shall conform to NFPA 70 NFPA 780 UL 96 and UL 96A 3 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 02 Shop Drawings Overall lightning protection system G Each major component G SD 06 Test Reports Grounding system test G Lightning protection system inspection G SD 07 Certificates UL listing or label G 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE In each standard referred to herein consider the advisory provisions to be mandatory as though the word shall has been substituted for should wherever it appears Interpret references in these standards to authority having jurisdiction or words of similar meaning to mean Contracting Officer ne R Installation Drawings a Submit installation shop drawing for the overall lightning protection system Drawings shall include physical layout of the equipment mounting details relationship to other parts of the work
481. rim Policy Guidance for DoD 09 Physical Access Control MIL HDBK 12 22 2 Electromagnetic Radiated 235 1B 000 Environment Considerations for Design amp Procurement Of Electrical amp Electronic Equip Subsystems amp systems MIL HDBK 2 15 1 Design Guidance for Physical 1013 1A 993 Security Facilities MIL HDBK 2036 11 1 19 Electronic Equipment 99 Specifications Preparation of MIL HDBK 338B 10 1 19 Electronic Reliability Design 98 Handbook DISR 05 1 0 04 25 2 Department of Defense Information 005 Technology Standards Registry SEIWG JGS ICD 08 26 2 DRAFT Security Equipment v2 0 010 Integration Working Group SEIWG Interface Control Document ICD for XML Information Interchange version 2 0 SEIWG 0400 11 2008 Joint Anti Terrorism Force Protection Technical Standards Profile Technical View 1 TV 1 USACE 05 26 2 United States Army Corps of directive 009 Engineers Access Control Point ACP Standard Design and Criteria 4 2 6 Unified Facilities Criteria NUMBER DATE TITLE UEC 2300s 02 17 2011 Design Procedures with change 8 09N UFC 3 501 01 02 03 2010 Electrical Engineering UFC 3 550 01 02 03 2010 Exterior Electrical Power Distribution UFC 3 560 0 09 17 2009 Electrical Safety O amp M with change 3 UFC 3 520 01 12 14 2010 Interior Electrical Systems with change 1 UFC 3 530 01 12 10 2010 Design Interior Exterior Lighting and Controls with 7 https ace dau mil http
482. rine A School BQ 534 1127117 watertight expansion deflection fittings and bonding jumpers Expansion deflection fittings shall allow horizontal and vertical movement of raceway Conduit larger than one inch trade size shall be parallel with or at right angles to main reinforcement when at right angles to reinforcement conduit shall be close to one of supports of slab Where nonmetallic conduit is used raceway shall be converted to plastic coated rigid steel or plastic coated steel IMC before rising above floor unless specifically indicated 3 1 4 12 Stub Ups Provide conduits stubbed up through concrete floor for connection to free standing equipment with adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs set flush with finished floor Extend conductors to equipment in rigid steel conduit except that flexible metal conduit may be used 6 inches above floor Where no equipment connections are made install screwdriver operated threaded flush plugs in conduit end 3 1 4 13 Conduit Support Support conduit by pipe straps wall brackets hangers or ceiling trapeze Fasten by wood screws to wood by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units by concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or brick and by machine screws welded threaded studs or spring tension clamps on steel work Threaded C clamps may be used on rigid steel conduit only Do not weld conduits or pipe straps to steel structures Load applied to fasteners shall not exceed one f
483. rk usage This baseline performance documentation shall be provided to the government during SOVT 5 3 1 4 Data Cabling Data cables shall be in compliance with TIA ETA 568 B and UFC 3 wn ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 32 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 580 01 All cabling shall conform to Public Safety Network PSNet or ONE NET network standards for Continental United States CONUS and Outside the Continental United States OCONUS installations 5 3 2 Environmental Conditions The system will function in all climates and geographic environments in which installed Material for outdoor components shall be selected to prevent corrosion or deterioration All outdoor electronics shall be enclosed in lockable equipment cabinets that meet NEMA 4X requirements 5 3 3 Electromagnetic Environmental Effects E3 The individual electronic components and cables utilized in the system will be inter and intra system electromagnetically compatible IAW FRCB requirements The performance of the system will not be degraded when exposed to its natural or man made Operational Electromagnetic Environment OEE 5 3 4 Facilities Construction Facility modifications and improvements required in conjunction with the installation of automated gates may be required Any required facilities construction that must take place to install an automated gate is separately
484. rmed at the appropriate time will be the minimum acceptable for each type operation 3 9 1 Fill and Backfill Material Gradation One test per 100 cubic yards stockpiled or in place source material Determine gradation of fill and backfill material in accordance with ASTM C 136 3 952 In Place Densities a One test per location of each lift of fill or backfill areas compacted by hand operated machines Fara Moisture Contents In the stockpile excavation or borrow areas perform a minimum of two tests per day per type of material or source of material being placed during stable weather conditions During unstable weather perform tests as dictated by local conditions and approved by the Contracting Officer 3 9 4 Optimum Moisture and Laboratory Maximum Density Perform tests for each type material or source of material to determine the optimum moisture and laboratory maximum density values One representative test when any change in material occurs which may affect the optimum moisture content or laboratory maximum density 3 9 5 Tolerance Tests for Subgrades Perform continuous checks on the degree of finish specified in paragraph SUBGRADE PREPARATION during construction of the subgrades SECTION 31 00 00 Page 11 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 10 DISPOSITION OF SURPLUS MATERIAL Provide surplus material or other soil material not required or suitable for filling or backfilling and brush refuse stumps roots and NED
485. rrect e The new meter accurately measures power magnitude and direction and can communicate as required by paragraph entitled Communications Interfaces End of Section SECTION 26 27 14 00 20 Page 13 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 26 29 23 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE SYSTEMS UNDER 600 VOLTS 04 06 PART 1 GENERAL alee 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE IEEE 519 1992 R 1993 Errata 2004 Recommended Practices and Requirements for Harmonic Control in Electrical Power Systems IEEE C62 41 1 2002 R 2008 Guide on the Surges Environment in Low Voltage 1000 V and Less AC Power Circuits IEEE C62 41 2 2002 Recommended Practice on Characterization of Surges in Low Voltage 1000 V and Less AC Power Circuits NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA NEMA 250 2008 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 1000 Volts Maximum NEMA ICS 1 2000 R 2005 R 2008 Standard for Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements NEMA ICS 3 1 2009 Guide for the Application Handling Storage Installation and Maintenance of Medium Voltage AC Contactors Controllers and Control Centers NEMA ICS 6 1993 R 2006 Enclosures NEMA ICS 7 2006 Adjustable Speed Drives NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTI
486. ructions to test each ground or group of grounds The instrument shall be equipped with a meter reading directly in ohms or fractions thereof to indicate the ground value of the ground rod or grounding systems under test Submit the measured ground resistance of each ground rod and grounding system indicating the location of the rod and grounding system Include the test method and test setup i e pin location used to determine ground resistance and soil conditions at the time the measurements were made Follow Up Verification Upon completion of acceptance checks and tests the Contractor shall show by demonstration in service that circuits and devices are in good operating condition and properly performing the intended function As an exception to requirements stated elsewhere in the contract the Contracting Officer shall be given 5 working days advance notice of the dates and times of checking and testing End of Section SECTION 26 12 19 10 Page 17 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 PART 1 alee 1 SECTION 26 20 00 INTERIOR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 08 08 GENERAL REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to in the text by the basic designation only ASTM ASTM ASTM IEEE IEEE IEEE NETA ANSI ANSI ANSI NEMA NEMA ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM B1 2001 R 2007 Standard Specification for Hard Dra
487. ry condition until accepted by the Contracting Officer 3 14 TABLES TABLE I AGGREGATE GRADATIONS FOR PLANT MIXED COLD LAID BITUMINOUS PAVEMENTS Percent by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieve Sieve Size No 1 No 2 1 2 inch 100 3 8 inch 77 95 100 No 4 57 75 76 94 No 8 44 62 62 80 No 16 32 50 48 66 No 30 22 40 34 52 No 50 13 29 23 39 No 100 7 19 13 25 SECTION 32 12 19 Page 11 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 TABLE I AGGREGATE GRADATIONS FOR PLANT MIXED COLD LAID BITUMINOUS PAVEMENTS Percent by Weight Passing Square Mesh Sieve Sieve Size No 1 No 2 No 200 3 6 3 9 TABLE II JOB MIX TOLERANCES Tolerance Material Plus or Minus Aggregate passing No 4 sieve or larger 5 percent Aggregate passing Nos 8 16 30 and 50 sieves 4 percent Aggregate passing No 200 sieve 1 5 percent Bitumen 0 25 percent Liquefier 0 20 percent Temperature 25 degrees F End of Section SECTION 32 12 19 Page 12 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 32 16 13 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND CURBS AND GUTTERS 04 08 PART 1 GENERAL Tel REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS AASHTO AASHTO M 182 2005 R 2009 Standard Specification for Burlap Cloth Made from Jute or Kenaf and Cotton Mats
488. s Coordination Drawings in accordance with paragraph entitled Drawings of this section SD 03 Product Data Manufacturer s catalog data shall be submitted for the following Placing Pipe SD 04 Samples Samples shall be submitted for the following items Conduit Piping Gaskets Compression Joints Frames Covers and Gratings Precast Concrete Manholes Precast Concrete Base Sections Concrete Block Brick Bituminous Coating Cold Bituminous Mastic Sealer Concrete Block Pipe for Culverts and Storm Drains SD 05 Design Data Mix designs for Concrete shall be submitted in accordance with paragraph entitled Concrete Construction of this section SD 06 Test Reports SECTION 33 40 00 00 40 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Ty Test reports shall be submitted in accordance with paragraph entitled Tests of this section Infiltration Test Exfiltration Test Hydrostatic Test SD 07 Certificates Certificates for the following items shall be submitted in accordance with the applicable paragraphs of this section for Conduit Piping Concrete Mortar Brick Mortar Gaskets Compression Joints Frames Covers and Gratings Precast Concrete Manholes Precast Concrete Base Sections Concrete Block Brick Bituminous Coating Cold Bituminous Mastic Sealer Resin Certification Pipeline Testing Mydrostatic Test on Watertight Joints Determination of Density Frame and Cover for Gratings A Work Plan shall
489. s and equipment used in the performance of the work shall be approved by the Contracting Officer and maintained in satisfactory operating condition Submit construction equipment list for approval by the Contracting Officer TDL Mobile and Maneuverable Application equipment shall be mobile and maneuverable to the extent that straight lines can be followed and normal curves can be made in a true arc 1 5 2 Paint Application Equipment 5 21 Hand Operated Push Type Machines Provide hand operated push type applicator machine of a type commonly used for application of paint to pavement surfaces Paint applicator machine shall be acceptable for marking small street and parking areas Applicator machine shall be equipped with the necessary paint tanks and spraying nozzles and shall be capable of applying paint uniformly at coverage specified Applicator for water based markings shall be equipped with non stick coated hoses metal parts in contact with the paint material shall be constructed of grade 302 304 316 or equal stainless steel 1 5 3 Thermoplastic Application Equipment 15 23 dl Thermoplastic Material Thermoplastic material shall be applied to the primed pavement surface by spray techniques or by the extrusion method wherein one side of the shaping die is the pavement and the other three sides are contained by or are part of suitable equipment for heating and controlling the flow of material By either method the markings sha
490. s excepting register boxes and register box lids which shall be bronze or an approved plastic material Meter cases constructed of plastic will not be accepted 3 Register Box Rings and Lids Register box rings and lids shall be made of a copper alloy containing not less than 57 percent copper or all bronze or an approved suitable synthetic polymer 4 Measuring Chambers Measuring chambers shall be made of a copper alloy containing not less than 85 percent copper and suitable amounts of tin lead and zinc or of a suitable synthetic polymer 5 Discs Discs shall be made of vulcanized hard rubber or a suitable synthetic polymer with specific gravity approximately equal to that of water They shall have sufficient dimensional stability to retain operating clearances at working temperatures of up to 27 degrees Centigrade and not warp or deform when exposed to SECTION 33 12 33 00 30 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 operating temperatures of 37 degrees Centigrade 6 Measuring Chamber Diaphragms Measuring chamber diaphragms shall be made of phosphor bronze stainless steel hard rubber ora suitable synthetic polymer 7 Spindles Thrust Rollers and Thrust Roller Bearing Plates Spindles thrust rollers and thrust roller bearing plates shall be made of phosphor bronze stainless steel hard rubber or a suitable synthetic polymer 8 Intermediate Gear Trains Frames gears and pinions shall be made of a suitable c
491. s installed telecommunications cable system showing cabling CD s BD s FD s and the EF and ER for telecommunications keyed to floor plans by room number Mount the laminated schematic in the EF telecommunications space as directed by the Contracting Officer The SECTION 27 10 00 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 following drawings shall be provided as a minimum a Tl Layout of complete building per floor Building Area Serving Zone Boundaries Backbone Systems and Horizontal Pathways Layout of complete building per floor The drawing indicates location of building areas serving zones vertical backbone diagrams telecommunications rooms access points pathways grounding system and other systems that need to be viewed from the complete building perspective b T2 Serving Zones Building Area Drawings Drop Locations and Cable Identification ID S Shows a building area or serving zone These drawings show drop locations telecommunications rooms access points and detail call outs for common equipment rooms and other congested areas c T4 Typical Detail Drawings Faceplate Labeling Firestopping Americans with Disabilities Act ADA Safety Department of Transportation DOT Detailed drawings of symbols and typicals such as faceplate labeling faceplate types faceplate population installation procedures detail racking and raceways T6042 Telecommunications Space Drawings Provide T3 drawings in accordanc
492. s shall be designed for easy removal of all interior parts without disturbing the connections to the pipeline Registration Accuracy Meters shall meet the following requirements for accuracy with water of a temperature of less than 27 degrees Centigrade a Normal Flow Limits The meter shall not register less than 97 percent and not more than 103 percent of the water actually passed through it at any rate of flow within the normal test flow limits specified in AWWA C702 except in the registration of flows within SECTION 33 12 33 00 30 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 the changeover from bypass meter to main meter b Changeover Flow The beginning of the changeover is when the accuracy of registration falls below 97 percent due to the operation of the automatic valve mechanism and the end of changeover is when accuracy of registration again reaches 97 percent The registration of these changeover rates of flow shall not be less than 90 percent and not more than 103 percent The difference in the rate of flow at the beginning and at the end of the changeover shall not exceed the figures listed in AWWA C702 c Minimum Test Flow There shall not be less than 95 percent of actual flow recorded when a test is made at the minimum test flow shown in AWWA C702 Markings The size model and direction of flow through the meter shall be cast or stamped in the outer case of all meters a Register Boxes The name of the
493. s steel or bronze All strainers shall conform to AWWA C702 NOTE SeBiLOY is an acceptable substitute for bronze galis2 Meter Programming N A 3 3 Register Requirements for Remote Registration a Meters must have encoder type remote registration conforming to the latest version of AWWA C707 Registers using generator pulses or low voltage conversions are not permitted Power requirement for data transmission must be supplied by an interrogation device Registers must be compatible with various brands of interrogation equipment The register must provide at least six digit visual registration at the meter The units the month and year of manufacture and other identification information must clearly be printed on the face of the register The register must also have a full test sweep hand or dial The register must in a digital format simultaneously encode at least six significant digits of the meter reading for transmission through the remotely located receptacle A meter identification number must also be provided with each reading b All registers shall be easily upgraded to Automatic Meter Reading AMR which includes telephone radio cable Energy Management and Control System EMCS Direct Digital Control DDC and Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition SCADA with the substitution of the remote receptacle with a Meter Interface Unit MIU Data transmission shall be instantaneous and supplied in ASCII format without con
494. s systems and equipment The telecommunications contractor shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years of similar scope and size Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication system installations for the telecommunications contractor 1 6 2 2 Key Personnel Provide key personnel who are regularly and professionally engaged in the SECTION 27 10 00 Page 6 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 7A business of the application installation and testing of the specified telecommunications systems and equipment There may be one key person or more key persons proposed for this solicitation depending upon how many of the key roles each has successfully provided Each of the key personnel shall demonstrate experience in providing successful telecommunications systems within the past 3 years Supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall be Building Industry Consulting Services International BICSI Registered Cabling Installers Technician Level Submit documentation of current BICSI certification for each of the key personnel In lieu of BICSI certification supervisors and installers assigned to the installation of this system or any of its components shall have a minimum of 3 years experience in the installation of the specified copper and fiber optic cable and components They shall ha
495. s than 30 by 42 inches with 8 by 4 inch title block similar to contract drawings These drawings shall be submitted within 2 weeks after the final acceptance test of the system At least one set of as built marked up drawings shall be provided at the time of or prior to the final acceptance test Submit the installer s training history for the employees involved with this contract T5 ADDITIONAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 1 5 1 Battery Power Calculations Verify that battery capacity exceeds supervisory and alarm power requirements a Provide complete battery calculations for both the alarm and supervisory power requirements Ampere hour requirements for each system component shall be submitted with the calculations SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 VT 7 LA des b Provide data on each circuit to indicate that there is at least 25 percent spare capacity for notification appliances 25 percent spare capacity for initiating devices Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings c Provide data to indicate that the amplifiers have sufficient capacity to simultaneously drive fire alarm speakers at their 1 2 watt tap plus 50 percent spare capacity Annotate data for each circuit on the drawings d Provide a detailed description of the final acceptance testing procedures including equipment necessary for testing smoke detectors using real smoke 572 Qualifications of Installer Design shall be by a Na
496. s used to inform vehicle operators and Submarine A School 5 2 2 2 ECP AVG L ECPs shal Figure 1 Each series of gate intended vehic ll consist of inbound and ou openings and closings BOQ 534 1127117 tbound lanes see a vehicle trap consisting of a that only allows the and its passengers access The type of traffic hav lane shall expected for each gate wi The AVG L ECPs will be in compliance with all RFP sections of the section 2 0 ll be indicated in Appendix C of the applicable and UFC as defined in FHWA MUTCD SDDCTEA The ECP shall be able of processing no less than 60 vehicles per hour with 90 vehicles per hour being th layout and operation will be designed such that efficiency is o An ECP typically contains tiv Overall ECP ECP operational object f the upmost importance the following elements Drop arm used to control vehicle movement at each access pedestal containment gate and final denial barrier The drop arm shall have the following attributes o Shall match existing base architectural requirements o Shall be conspicuous in nature Shall employ retro reflective striping a Shall have LED lighting to enhance their visibility regardless of lighting conditions o Shall have a cycle time
497. sensors and a microprocessor based trip unit that will provide true rms sensing adjustable time current circuit protection The ampere rating of the current sensors shall be as indicated The trip unit ampere rating shall be as indicated Ground fault protectionshall be zero sequence sensing The electronic trip units shall have the following features as indicated b Main breakers shall have short delay pick up and time settings and instantaneous settings and ground fault settings as indicated c Distribution breakers shall have short delay pick up and time settings instantaneous settings and ground fault settings as indicated 2 0278 Heaters Provide 120 volt heaters in each switchboard section Heaters shall be of sufficient capacity to control moisture condensation in the section shall be 250 watts minimum and shall be controlled by a thermostat located in the section Thermostat shall be industrial type high limit to maintain sections within the range of 60 to 90 degrees F Supply voltage for the heaters shall be obtained from a control power transformer within the switchboard If heater voltage is different than switchboard voltage provide transformer rated to carry 125 percent of heater full load rating Transformer shall have 220 degrees C insulation system with a temperature rise not exceeding 115 degrees C and shall conform to NEMA ST 20 Energize electric heaters in switchboard assemblies while the equipment is in storage
498. shall be plastic having minimum 200 pound force tensile strength Leave minimum 36 inches of slack at each end of pull wire i lee Conduit Installation Unless indicated otherwise conceal conduit under floor slabs and within finished walls ceilings and floors Keep conduit minimum 6 inches away from parallel runs of fuel and steam or hot water pipes Install conduit parallel with or at right angles to ceilings walls and structural members where located above accessible ceilings and where conduit will be visible after completion of project Run conduits under floor slab as if exposed CEE i Restrictions Applicable to Aluminum Conduit a Do not install underground or encase in concrete or masonry b Do not use brass or bronze fittings c Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High altitude Electromagnetic Pulse HEMP 3 14 2 Restrictions Applicable to EMT a Do not install underground b Do not encase in concrete mortar grout or other cementitious materials c Do not use in areas subject to severe physical damage including but not limited to equipment rooms where moving or replacing equipment could physically damage the EMT d Do not use in hazardous areas e Do not use outdoors f Do not use in fire pump rooms g Do not use when the enclosed conductors must be shielded from the effects of High altitude Electromagnetic Pulse HEMP 3 1 4 3 Restrictions Applicable to Nonmet
499. sified Excavation Unclassified excavation will be paid for at the contract unit price per cubic yard for unclassified excavation di 43 5 Authorized Overhaul The number of station yards of overhaul to be paid for will be the product of number of cubic yards of overhaul material measured in the original position multiplied by the overhaul distance measured in stations of 100 feet and will be paid for at the contract unit price per station yard for overhaul in excess of the free haul limit as designated in paragraph DEFINITIONS Iys5 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SECTION 31 00 00 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Ty Submit 15 days prior to starting work SD 03 Product Data Utilization of Excavated Materials G Rock Excavation Opening of any Excavation or Borrow Pit Shoulder Construction Procedure and location for disposal of unused satisfactory material Notification of encountering rock in the project Advance notice on the opening of excavation Advance notice on shoulder construction for rigid pavements 6 CLASSIFICATION OF EXCAVATION No consideration will be given to the nature of the materials and all excavation will be designated as unclassified excavation 6 1 Common Excavation Inclu
500. signage shall not 1 BO 534 unsafe e Notify Center Contin contro to proceed RDC of the power l panels CCTV withou e Have a securi The ma enclos t interruption nual operation ure to prevent wn ECTION 34 all signage intercoms for 30 minutes components shall be ina 1127117 that the installation perimeter remains secure tify the driver that it is the Local Dispatch Center LDC Regional Dispatch loss for AVG L system ue to operate normally e g card readers access GEC manual operation component that will allow for ty personnel to manually open or close the gates locked unauthorized access 41 26 00 10 Page 31 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 5 3 SYSTEM INTERFACES 5 3 1 Facilities Interfaces 5 Seb Electrical Power Electrical power shall be in compliance with UFC 4 022 01 UFC 3 501 01 UFC 3 560 01 NFPA 70 and all applicable local codes Fagul 2 Public Safety Network PSNet Unless stated otherwise in the PWS this system shall connect directly to PSNet 5 3 1 3 Local Area Network LAN The AVG L design shall use existing network infrastructure when feasible The contractor shall coordinate with the local N6 and FECTL to identify locations and bandwidth requirements for AVG L components requiring connectivity when no suitable network infrastructure exists Any required
501. sily accessible for change out after removing the meter cover r The normal billing data scroll shall be fully programmable Data scroll display shall include the following Number of demand resets End of interval indication Maximum demand New maximum demand indication Cumulative or continuously cumulative Time remaining in interval Kilowatt hours NAN URBWNE s The register shall incorporate a built in test mode that allows it to be tested without the loss of any data or parameters The following quantities shall be available for display in the test mode 1 Present interval s accumulating demand 2 Maximum demand 3 Number of impulses being received by the register t Pulse module simple I O board with programmable ratio selection u Meters shall be programmed after installation via an optical port Optical display shall show TOU data peak kWh semi peak kWh off peak kWh and phase angles v Self monitoring to provide for Unprogrammed register RAM checksum error ROM checksum error Hardware failure Memory failure EPROM error Battery status fault condition or time in service NHN UBWDNEH w Liquid crystal alphanumeric displays 9 digits blinking squares confirm register operation 6 Large digits for data and smaller digits for display identifier x Display operations programmable sequence with display identifiers Display identifiers shall be selectable for each item Continuall
502. sonnel but unseen from normal viewing angles when lamps are in place Ballasts shall have clear markings indicating multi level outputs and indicate proper terminals for the various outputs 2e FACTORY APPLIED FINISH Electrical equipment shall have factory applied painting systems which shall as a minimum meet the requirements of NEMA 250 corrosion resistance test PART 3 EXECUTION St INSTALLATION Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 NFPA 70 and to the requirements specified herein ae lee Lamps Lamps of the type wattage and voltage rating indicated shall be delivered to the project in the original cartons and installed just prior to project completion Lamps installed and used for working light during construction shall be replaced prior to turnover to the Government if more than 15 percent of their rated life has been used Lamps shall be tested for proper operation prior to turn over and shall be replaced if necessary with new lamps from the original manufacturer Provide 10 percent spare lamps of each type from the original manufacturer 3152 Lighting Fixtures Set lighting fixtures plumb square and level with ceiling and walls in alignment with adjacent lighting fixtures and secure in accordance with manufacturers directions and approved drawings Installation shall meet requirements of NFPA 70 Mounting heights specified or indicated shall be to the bottom of fixture for ceiling mounted fixtures and to c
503. spection and Test Procedures for transformers dry type air cooled 600 volt and below as specified in NETA ATS Measure primary and secondary voltages for proper tap settings Tests need not be performed by a recognized independent testing firm or independent electrical consulting firm 355 4 Ground Fault Receptacle Test Test ground fault receptacles with a load such as a plug in light to verify that the line and load leads are not reversed SECTION 26 20 00 Page 31 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 3 5 5 Grounding System Test Test grounding system to ensure continuity and that resistance to ground is not excessive Test each ground rod for resistance to ground before making connections to rod tie grounding system together and test for resistance to ground Make resistance measurements in dry weather not earlier than 48 hours after rainfall Submit written results of each test to Contracting Officer and indicate location of rods as well as resistance and soil conditions at time measurements were made 3 5 6 Watthour Meter a Visual and mechanical inspection 1 Examine for broken parts shipping damage and tightness of connections 2 Verify that meter type scales and connections are in accordance with approved shop drawings b Electrical tests 1 Determine accuracy of meter 2 Calibrate watthour meters to one half percent 3 Verify that correct multiplier has been placed on face of meter where
504. ssure reduction indicated volume capacity not less than indicated and threaded ends for sizes 2 inches and smaller otherwise flanged 2 3 4 Earthquake Automatic Gas Shutoff Valves ASCE 25 06 and UL listed or AGA listed or International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials IAPMO listed The valve may be either pendulum or ball construction with remote electronic or electric actuator 2 4 GAS METER AGA ANSI B109 1 pipe mounted diaphragm or bellow style cast iron case Provide combined odometer type register totalizer index UV resistant index cover water escape hole in housing and means for sealing against tampering Meter shall be temperature compensated type and sized for the required CFM BTU HR flow rate Provide meters with a pulse switch initiator capable of operating up to speeds of 500 maximum pulses per minute with no false pulses and requiring no field adjustments Provide not less than one pulse per 100 cubic feet of gas Minimum service life shall be 30 000 000 cycles 2 4 1 Energy Monitoring and Control EMCS or Automatic Meter Reading Interfaces Gas meters shall be capable of interfacing output signal equivalent to flow rate with the existing Energy Management Control System EMCS for data gathering in units of CFM Meters shall not require power to function and deliver data Output signal shall be either a voltage or amperage signal with can be converted to a flow rate specification 25 HANGERS
505. stant start ballasts shall operate lamps in a parallel circuit configuration that permits the operation of remaining lamps if one or more lamps fail or are removed Programmed start ballasts may operate lamps in a series circuit configuration Provide series parallel wiring for programmed start ballasts where available Ballasts for compact fluorescent fixtures shall be programmed start Ballasts for T 5 and smaller lamps shall have end of life protection circuits as required by ANSI ANSLG C78 81 and ANSI C78 901 as applicable Ballast shall be capable of starting and maintaining operation at a minimum of 0 degrees F unless otherwise indicated Electronic ballast shall have a full replacement warranty of 5 years from date of manufacture as specified in paragraph entitled Electronic Ballast Warranty herein al T 8 Lamp Ballast Total harmonic distortion THD Shall be 20 percent maximum Input wattage 1 32 watts maximum when operating one F32T8 lamp 2 62 watts maximum when operating two F32T8 lamps 3 92 watts maximum when operating three F32T8 lamps Ballast efficacy factor 1 2 54 minimum when operating one F32T8 lamp 2 1 44 minimum when operating two F32T8 lamps 3 0 93 minimum when operating three F32T8 lamps A single ballast may be used to serve multiple fixtures if they are continuously mounted and factory manufactured for that installation with an integral wireway we F17T8 Lamp Ballast Total harmoni
506. sted by a m Operational Verification Test SOVT The SOVT that the newly installed system equipment or mod Document is to govern the SOVT process and to record the results of that ss The purpose of the SOVT process is to demonstrate to the ification is Ww ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 38 Submarine A School BQ 534 ready for site accept works as intended an installation of the s and in the in stallation The ance because it d can be operated and maintained ystem is demonstrated by conduct spections based on the installation standards The tha m 127117 has been properly installed proper ting tests t apply to SOVT shall con testin capabi g to fully exer lities Operati the system works as i equipment manuals are system and the equipm training plan and maintenance proce time of the SOVT The SOVT s One all encompassing to test the systems with a site represent representative presen system level testing documenting the person will be approved prior cise the system onal tests are ntended from end to end provided and inventoried ent can be operated nel trained turned over and the eq cond on dures will be and maintained operational to the si tain sufficient detailed uipment ucted to demonst Spare part trate that ts and to ensure tha The
507. sure Integrity for Coastal Environments IEEE C57 12 34 2009 Standard for Requirements for Pad Mounted Compartmental Type Self Cooled Three Phase Distribution Transformers 5 MVA and Smaller High Voltage 34 5 kV Nominal System Voltage and Below Low Voltage 15 kV Nominal System Voltage and Below IEEE C57 12 90 2010 Standard Test Code for Liquid Immersed Distribution Power and Regulating Transformers IEEE C57 13 2008 Standard Requirements for Instrument Transformers IEEE C57 98 1993 Errata 1998 R 1999 Guide for Transformer Impulse Tests IEEE C62 11 2005 Amd 1 2008 Standard for Metal Oxide Surge Arresters for Alternating Current Power Circuits gt 1kV INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION NETA NETA ATS 2009 Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA ANSI C12 1 2008 Electric Meters Code for Electricity Metering ANSI C12 7 2005 Requirements for Watthour Meter Sockets NEMA ANSI C12 10 2004 Physical Aspects of Watthour Meters Safety Standards NATIONAL FIRE PROTECTION ASSOCIATION NFPA NFPA 70 2011 TIA 11 1 Errata 2011 National Electrical Code ORGANISATION FOR ECONOMIC CO OPERATION AND DEVELOPMENT OECD OECD Test 203 1992 Fish Acute Toxicity Test U S ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY EPA EPA 712 C 98 075 1996 Fate Transport and Transformation Test Guidelines OPPT
508. surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS 32 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING Provide number location and letter designation of nameplates as indicated Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet metal screws or two rivets 343 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible Side but space the signs a maximum of 30 feet apart End of Section SECTION 26 00 00 00 20 Page 5 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 26 08 00 APPARATUS INSPECTION AND TESTING 08 08 PART 1 GENERAL alee 1 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION NETA NETA ATS 2009 Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems 2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS Section 26 00 00 00 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS applies to this section with additions and modifications specified herein 3 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval The following shall be submitted in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 06 Test Repor
509. t shall have been recalibrated by a calibration laboratory approved by the Contracting Officer within 12 months of commencing work Tebet Mixing Plant Design coordinate and operate the mixing plant to produce a mixture within the job mix formula tolerances and to meet the requirements of ASTM D 995 including additional plant requirements specified herein The plant shall be a batch type continuous mix type or drum dryer mixer type and shall have sufficient capacity to handle the new bituminous construction Minimum plant capacity shall be 100 tons per hour The mixing plant and equipment shall remain accessible at all times for inspecting operation verifying weights proportions and character of materials and checking mixture temperatures The plant and plant site shall meet the requirements of Section 01 57 19 00 20 TEMPORARY ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROLS pe ce bape Cold Aggregate Feeder Provide plant with a feeder or feeders capable of delivering the maximum number of aggregate sizes required in their proper proportion Provide adjustment for total and proportional feed and feeders capable of being locked in any position When more than one cold elevator is used feed each elevator as a separate unit and install individual controls integrated with a master control Peb Lice Dryer Provide rotary drum dryer which continuously agitates the mineral aggregate during the heating and drying process When one dryer does not dry t
510. t all times The equipment shall have the capability of producing the required product meeting grade controls thickness control and smoothness requirements as specified Use of the equipment shall be discontinued if it produces unsatisfactory results The Contracting Officer shall have access at all times to the plant and equipment to ensure proper operation and compliance with specifications 1 2 2 Slip Form Equipment Slip form paver or curb forming machine will be approved based on trial use on the job and shall be self propelled automatically controlled crawler mounted and capable of spreading consolidating and shaping the plastic concrete to the desired cross section in 1 pass 1 3 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval Submit the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 03 Product Data Concrete SD 06 Test Reports Field Quality Control 1 4 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1 461 Placing During Cold Weather Do not place concrete when the air temperature reaches 40 degrees F and is falling or is already below that point Placement may begin when the air temperature reaches 35 degrees F and is rising or is already above 40 degrees F Make provisions to protect the concrete from freezing during the specified curing period If necessary to place concrete when the temperature of t
511. t circuit breaker for correct mounting Operate circuit breaker to ensure smooth operation Inspect case for cracks or other defects Inspect all bolted electrical connections for high resistance using low resistance ohmmeter verifying tightness of accessible bolted connections and or cable connections by calibrated torque wrench method or performing thermographic survey Inspect mechanism contacts and arc chutes in unsealed units Electrical Tests T Perform contact resistance tests Perform insulation resistance tests Perform Breaker adjustments for final settings in accordance with Government provided settings Perform long time delay time current characteristic tests Determine short time pickup and delay by primary current injection Determine ground fault pickup and time delay by primary current injection Determine instantaneous pickup current by primary injection SECTION 26 23 00 Page 12 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 8 Verify correct operation of any auxiliary features such as trip and pickup indicators zone interlocking electrical close and trip operation trip free and anti pump function 37 5 1L 33 Current Transformers a Visual and Mechanical Inspection 1 Compare equipment nameplate data with specifications and approved shop drawings 2 Inspect physical and mechanical condition 3 Verify correct connection 4 Verify that adequate clearances exist between primary and secondary ci
512. t is pu n before the final acceptance tests anda s used for the final 30 day acceptance tests 1127117 r computers ndard lso on CD te image of configuration image shall t in ubsequent one after all pending corrections and adjustments have been implemented 3 4 6 So The soft ftware Manual ware manual shall describe the functions of and shall include all other information necessary to proper l a b C shu O Gs Bis dat of Ts 3 4 7 Ha The hardware manual shall describe all includin a b all software enable oading testing and operation The manual shall include Procedures for system initialization Definition of terms and functions Use of system and application software tdown Alarm reports Reports generation Directory of all disk files Database format and date entry requirements start up and Description of all communication protocols a formats command characters and a sample data transfer Interface definition rdware Manual g General description and specifications Equipment electrical schemat System schematics and layou Installation and checkout procedures t drawings Alignment and calibration procedures SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 6 including of each type equipment furnished tics and layout drawings Su
513. t spots unavoidably missed with the hand spray equipment Base bids on application of diluted emulsion at 0 14 gsy If the actual amount SECTION 32 01 13 Page 10 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 required is more or less than 0 14 gsy an adjustment in the contract price will be made as provided by the contract 3 6 SITE PROTECTION During applications protect adjacent buildings structures vehicles manhole covers inlet grates and trees to prevent being spattered or marred Baer TRAFFIC CONTROL Protect freshly placed coatings from damage by traffic Provide sufficient warning signs and barricades to prevent traffic over freshly treated surfaces Protect treated areas from traffic for at least 24 hours after final application of coatings or for such time as necessary to prevent picking up Immediately prior to opening to traffic roll the entire treated area with a self propelled pneumatic tired roller Provide warning signs and barricades for proper traffic control in accordance with MUTCD End of Section SECTION 32 01 13 Page 11 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 32 01 16 17 COLD MILLING OF BITUMINOUS PAVEMENTS 04 06 PART 1 GENERAL ae iL REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM C 136 2006 Standard Test Metho
514. t unit prices Payment shall constitute full compensation for all operations necessary to complete the work as specified herein 1 3 Waybills and Delivery Tickets Submit waybills and delivery tickets during progress of the work Before the final statement is allowed file with the Contracting Officer certified waybills and certified delivery tickets for all bituminous materials used in the construction of the pavement covered by the contract These submittals are required for Unit Pricing bid only Do not remove bituminous material from storage until the initial outage and temperature measurements have been taken The delivery or storage units will not be released until the final outage has been taken 2 REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS AASHTO AASHTO M 82 1975 R 2008 Standard Specification for Cutback Asphalt Medium Curing Type AASHTO T 102 2009 Standard Method of Test for Spot Test of Asphaltic Materials AASHTO T 40 2002 R 2006 Sampling Bituminous Materials SECTION 32 12 10 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM D 140 D 140M 2009 Standard Practice for Sampling Bituminous Materials ASTM D 2027 2010 Cutback Asphalt Medium Curing Type ASTM D 2028 2010 Cutbac
515. t used to manufacture the emulsion shall show a negative spot when tested in accordance with AASHTO T 102 using standard naphtha PART 3 EXECUTION 3 40 PREPARATION OF SURFACE Immediately before applying the bituminous coat remove all loose material dirt clay or other objectionable material from the surface to be treated by means of a power broom or blower supplemented with hand brooms The surface shall be dry and clean at the time of treatment 3 2 APPLICATION RATE The exact quantities within the range specified which may be varied to suit field conditions will be determined by the Contracting Officer 325d Tack Coat Apply bituminous material for the tack coat in quantities of not less than 0 05 gallon nor more than 0 15 gallon per square yard of pavement surface S422 Prime Coat Apply bituminous material for the prime coat in quantities of not less than 0 18 gallon nor more than 0 35 gallon per square yard of pavement surface 3 43 APPLICATION TEMPERATURE 34 361 Viscosity Relationship Asphalt application temperature shall provide an application viscosity between 10 and 60 seconds Saybolt Furol or between 20 and 120 centistokes kinematic Furnish the temperature viscosity relation to the Contracting Officer 3 3 2 Temperature Ranges The viscosity requirements determine the application temperature to be used The following is a normal range of application temperatures Liquid Asphalts MC 30 85 190 de
516. tailgate violation has occurred This message shall be protected and not allowed to be modified by local personnel o Additional verbiage may be added by the site Fixed signs shall be provided o Be approved for use by the SDDCTEA o Be clear concise and use internationally recognized icons unless otherwise directed o Be retro reflectiv o At the entrance to the ECP Sign shall say POVs Only MUTCD R5 11 Pavement markings shall be provided o IAW MUTCD Barrier signals to notify users when it is safe to proceed o The barrier signal shall show a flashing yellow light only when the drop arm vehicle trap gate vehicle trap barrier is in the fully deployed position o At all other times the barrier signal shall show red Examples of this are when the drop arm vehicle trap gate vehicle trap barrier is deployed or not in the fully retracted position 2 way communications intercom ability between the vehicl operator and security personnel shall be provided All intercoms within the ECP shall have the following attributes wn ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 28 Submarine A School BQ 534 oo0o0o o m 127117 Shall be accessible by the vehicl operator without having to exit the vehicle Illuminated push button on th vehicl operator s interface Suitable for outdoor use in the environment for which it is intended Audib
517. taneously p Where the fire alarm system is responsible for initiating an action in another emergency control device or system such as an HVAC system an elevator system the addressable fire alarm relay shall be within 3 feet of the emergency control device q An alarm signal shall automatically initiate the following functions 1 Transmission of an alarm signal to the fire department 2 Visual indication of the device operated on the fire alarm control panel FACP 3 Continuous actuation of all alarm notification appliances except those in stairs or in elevator cabs SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 9 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 5 Release of doors held open by electromagnetic devices 8 Operation of a smoke sensor in an elevator lobby or other location associated with the automatic recall of elevators shall recall the elevators in addition to other requirements of this paragraph 9 Operation of a duct smoke sensor shall shut down the appropriate air handler in accordance with NFPA 90A in addition to other requirements of this paragraph 11 Operation of a sprinkler waterflow switch serving an elevator machinery room shall operate shunt trip circuit breaker s to shut down power to the elevators in accordance with ASME A17 1 CSA B44 r A supervisory signal shall automatically initiate the following functions 1 Visual indication of the device operated on the FACP and sound the audible alarm at the resp
518. ter the first protective circuit trip for malfunction overcurrent undervoltage overvoltage or overtemperature or an interruption of power The VFD shall be capable of being set for automatic restart after a selected time delay If the drive faults again within a specified time period adjustable 0 60 seconds a manual restart will be required p The VFD shall include external fault reset capability All the necessary logic to accept an external fault reset contact shall be included q Provide critical speed lockout circuitry to prevent operating at frequencies with critical harmonics that cause resonant vibrations The VFD shall have a minimum of three user selectable bandwidths r Provide the following operator control and monitoring devices mounted on the front panel of the VFD 1 Manual speed potentiometer 2 Hand Off Auto HOA switch 3 Power on light 4 Drive run power light 5 Local display s Provide properly sized NEMA rated by pass and isolation contactors to enable operation of motor in the event of VFD failure Mechanical and electrical interlocks shall be installed between the by pass and isolation contactors Provide a selector switch and transfer delay timer 2 2 ENCLOSURES Provide equipment enclosures conforming to NEMA 250 NEMA ICS 7 NEMA ICS 6 Lied WIRES AND CABLES All wires and cables shall conform to NEMA 250 NEMA ICS 7 NFPA 70 2 4 NAMEPLATES Nameplates external to NEMA enclosures shall
519. than 12 inches below the ceiling In raised floor spaces the smoke sensors shall be installed to protect 225 square feet per sensor Install smoke sensors no closer than 5 feet from air handling supply outlets f Water Flow Detectors and Tamper Switches Locate water flow detectors and tamper switches where shown on the drawings sprinkler valve station h The modification of any fire alarm system and the procedures shall comply with the requirements of NFPA 241 32 DISCONNECTION AND REMOVAL OF EXISTING SYSTEM Fire alarm control panels and fire alarm devices disconnected and removed shall be turned over to the Contracting Officer a The existing fire alarm and smoke detection system shall remain in operation at all times during the installation and commissioning of the new system Once this new system is on line and accepted by the Government remove the old system As new equipment is installed label it NOT IN SERVICE Upon acceptance remove labels b Disconnect and remove the existing fire alarm and smoke detection systems where indicated and elsewhere in the specification c Properly dispose of fire alarm outlet and junction boxes wiring conduit supports and other such items Fe CONNECTION OF NEW SYSTEM The following new system connections shall be made during the last phase of construction at the beginning of the preliminary tests New system connections shall include c Connection of new system transmitter to ex
520. the driver shall be directed via the access control reader on screen display to exit the ECP For egress vehicles approaching the ECP shall trigger the vehicle detection sensor allowing the vehicle to exit the ECP Intercoms shall be provided at both the access pedestal and within the vehicle traps allowing drivers to request further assistance if required 5 1 2 1 2 Manual Operation The sentry shall have the ability to configure one or more lanes for manual operation This mode shall place all gates arms and barriers in the open position allowing unrestricted access through the ECP 5 1 2 1 3 Closed The Sentry shall have the ability to configure one or more lanes as closed All gates shall be in the closed position with the ECP automation disabled When a vehicl nters the approach area of an ingress or egress lane the driver shall be informed that the gate is closed 5 1 2 1 4 Required Operational Sequence 5 1 2 1 4 1 Valid ID card and PIN access is granted Event Sequence Vehicle enters Credential Zone Access pedestal displays and annunciates message Please wait 2 Vehicle presence is detected via vehicle presence sensor 3 Access pedestal displays and annunciates message Present I D Card 4 Driver presents authorized I D card to Reader 5 System validates I D 6 Access p
521. the following in accordance with Section 01 33 00 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES SD 03 Product Data Installation of Sealant SD 04 Samples Materials G SD 06 Test Reports Test Requirements SECTION 32 01 17 16 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE Test the crack sealant and backup material when required for conformance with the referenced applicable material specification Conformance with the test requirements of the laboratory tests specified will not constitute final acceptance of the materials Submit reports of all tests Perform testing of the materials in an approved independent laboratory submit certified copies of the test reports for approval 30 days prior to the use of the materials at the job site Samples will be retained by the Government for possible future testing should the materials appear defective during or after application Final acceptance will be based on the performance of the in place materials 15 DELIVERY STORAGE AND HANDLING Inspect materials delivered to the job site for defects unload and store them with a minimum of handling to avoid damage Provide storage facilities at the job site to protect materials from weather and to maintain them at the temperatures recommended by the manufacturer L6 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS The ambient air temperature and the pavement temperature within the joint wall shall be a minimum of 50 degrees F and rising at the time of application of
522. the following limits Silt 25 50 percent Clay 10 304 to 12 percent Sand 20 35 percent pH 5 5 to 7 0 Soluble Salts 600 ppm maximum me SOIL CONDITIONERS Add conditioners to topsoil as required to bring into compliance with Composition standard for topsoil as specified herein awl Peat Natural product of peat moss derived from a freshwater site and conforming to ASTM D 4427 Shred and granulate peat to pass a 1 2 inch mesh screen and condition in storage pile for minimum 6 months after excavation Pec ee Sand Clean and free of materials harmful to plants eee Perlite Horticultural grade 3 4 Composted Derivatives Ground bark nitrolized sawdust humus or other green wood waste material free of stones sticks and soil stabilized with nitrogen and having the following properties poe Ae L Particle Size Minimum percent by weight passing No 4 mesh screen 95 No 8 mesh screen 80 2324 2 Nitrogen Content Minimum percent based on dry weight Fir Sawdust 0 7 Fir or Pine Bark 150 SECTION 32 92 19 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 4 FERTILIZER 2 4 1 Granular Fertilizer synthetic granular controlled release fertilizer containing the following minimum percentages by weight of plant food nutrients percent available nitrogen percent available phosphorus percent available potassium percent sulfur percent iron 2i4 42 Hydroseeding Fertilizer Con
523. tion SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 23 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 SECTION 31 00 00 EARTHWORK 07 06 PART 1 GENERAL ae iL REFERENCES The publications listed below form a part of this specification to the extent referenced The publications are referred to within the text by the basic designation only AMERICAN ASSOCIATION OF STATE HIGHWAY AND TRANSPORTATION OFFICIALS AASHTO AASHTO T 180 2001 R 2004 Moisture Density Relations of Soils Using a 4 54 kg 10 1b Rammer and an 457 mm 18 in Drop AASHTO T 224 2001 R 2004 Correction for Coarse Particles in the Soil Compaction Test AMERICAN WATER WORKS ASSOCIATION AWWA AWWA C600 2005 Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their Appurtenances ASTM INTERNATIONAL ASTM ASTM C 136 2006 Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Fine and Coarse Aggregates ASTM D 1140 2000 R 2006 Amount of Material in Soils Finer than the No 200 75 micrometer Sieve ASTM D 1557 2002e1 Standard Test Methods for Laboratory Compaction Characteristics of Soil Using Modified Effort 56 000 ft lbf f t3 2700 kN m m3 ASTM D 2434 1968 R 2006 Permeability of Granular Soils Constant Head ASTM D 2487 2006 Soils for Engineering Purposes Unified Soil Classification System ASTM D 422 1963 R 2002e1 Particle Size Analysis of Soils ASTM D 4318 2005 Liquid Limit Plastic Limit and Plasticity Index of Soils ASTM D 698 2007e1 Labor
524. tion c Communication protocols used must be OPC compliant such as MODUBUS LonWorks and BACnet System must be nonproprietary open architecture and able to interface with third party vendor software d Meter shall be equipped with one pulse output channel Pulse in Metering Systems Schedule that can be configured for operation 2 3 SPARE PARTS Qu ded Parts List Provide spare parts as follows a Water meters one for every 20 installed b Communications modules one for every 20 used c Protocol modules one for every 20 used d Other electronic and power components one for each type used 2 4 METERING SYSTEM SCHEDULE METERING SYSTEM SCHEDULE Bldg Type of Meter Communication Meter Remarks Location 1 IR RS232 Bldg Small building displacement Consumption reimbursable billing only 102 2 turbine BaseT Bldg Interval recording 103 3 4 Local Bldg displacement Metering System Schedule Notes by column position SECTION 33 12 33 00 30 Page 14 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 PART 3 EXECUTION Zeal INSTALLATION Water meter installations shall conform to AWWA C700 AWWA C701 and AWWA C702 Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 NFPA 70 National Electrical Code and to the requirements specified herein Provide new equipment and materials unless otherwise indicated or specified 3 41 1 Existing Condition Survey The Contractor shall perform a field survey including inspe
525. tion of the material will not be allowed until the instructions are received 3 3441 Time of Application Seal cracks immediately following final cleaning of the crack walls and following the placement of the backup material when required Cracks that cannot be sealed under the conditions specified or when rain interrupts sealing operations shall be recleaned and allowed to dry prior to installing the sealant 3 3 2 Sealing the Crack Immediately preceding but not more than 50 feet ahead of the crack sealing operations perform a final cleaning with compressed air Fill the cracks from the bottom up to 1 8 inch below the pavement surface Remove excess or spilled sealant from the pavement by approved methods and discard it Install the sealant in a manner which prevents the formation of voids and entrapped air Several passes with the applicator wand may be necessary to obtain the specified sealant depth from the pavement surface Do not use gravity methods or pouring pots to install the sealant material Traffic shall not be permitted over newly sealed pavement until authorized by the Contracting Officer Cracks shall be checked frequently to ensure that the newly installed sealant is cured to a tack free condition within 3 hours 3 4 CRACK SEALANT INSTALLATION TEST SECTION Prior to the cleaning and sealing of the cracks for the entire project construct a test section at least 200 feet long using the specified m
526. tion of the switch shall cause a supervisory signal to be transmitted to the FACP upon not more than two complete turns of the valve wheel or a closure of 10 percent whichever is less Tamper switches shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor 2 2 15 Waterflow Detectors a Provide vane type waterflow detectors for wet pipe sprinkler systems The device shall contain double pole double throw contacts Equip the detector with a pneumatic time delay field adjustable from 0 to 90 seconds The time delay shall be set initially to 30 seconds The device shall be a UL listed extinguishing system attachment rated for the particular pressure and location at which it is installed Flow switches shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor b Provide pressure type waterflow detectors for dry pipe sprinkler systems The device shall contain double pole double throw contacts The device shall be a UL listed extinguishing system attachment rated for the particular pressure and location at which it is installed Switch shall be equipped with screw terminals for each conductor 2 2 16 Electromagnetic Door Holders Where indicated on the drawings provide magnetic fire door hold open devices The electromagnetic holding devices shall be designed to operate on 120 VAC and require not more than 3 watts of power to develop 25 psi of holding force The initiation of any fire alarm shall cause the release of the electromagnetic doo
527. tion outlets and patch panel connections shall be labeled using color coded labels with identifiers in accordance with TIA EIA 606 353 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS 3 3 1 Painting Backboards If backboards are required to be painted then the manufactured fire retardant backboard must be painted with fire retardant paint so as not to increase flame spread and smoke density and must be appropriately labeled Label and fire rating stamp must be unpainted 3 4 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING Provide number location and letter designation of nameplates as indicated Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet metal screws or two rivets 35 TESTING 3 5 1 Telecommunications Cabling Testing Perform telecommunications cabling inspection verification and performance tests in accordance with TIA 568 C 1 TIA 568 C 2 TIA 568 C 3 Test equipment shall conform to TIA 1152 Perform optical fiber field inspection tests via attenuation measurements on factory reels and provide results along with manufacturer certification for factory reel tests Remove failed cable reels from project site upon attenuation test failure eo ray Inspection Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for UL or third party certification
528. tion resistant to 170 degrees F Provide 0 05 inch minimum thick black polyethylene tag holder Provide a one piece nylon self locking tie at each end of the cable tag Ties shall have a minimum loop tensile strength of 175 pounds The cable tags shall have black block letters numbers and symbols one inch high on a yellow background Letters numbers and symbols shall not fall off or change positions regardless of the cable tags orientation SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 15 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 res PROTECTIVE DEVICES AND COORDINATION Provide protective devices and coordination as specified in Section 26 28 01 00 10 COORDINATED POWER SYSTEM PROTECTION 2 18 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL 2 18 1 Arc Proofing Test for Cable Fireproofing Tape Manufacturer shall test one sample assembly consisting of a straight lead tube 12 inches long with a 2 1 2 inch outside diameter and a 1 8 inch thick wall and covered with one half lap layer of arc and fireproofing material per manufacturer s instructions The arc and fireproofing tape shall withstand extreme temperature of a high current fault arc 13 000 degrees K for 70 cycles as determined by using an argon directed plasma jet capable of constantly producing and maintaining an arc temperature of 13 000 degrees K Temperature 13 000 degrees K of the ignited arc between the cathode and anode shall be obtained from a dc power source of 305 plus or minus 5 amperes and 20 plus or minus 1
529. tion system SECTION 26 41 00 00 20 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 using main size conductors and a bonding plate having a surface contact area of not less than 3 square inches Make provisions to guard against the corrosive effect of bonding dissimilar metals Bond metal bodies at their closest point to the lightning protection system using bonding conductors and fittings Independently ground any metal body that exceeds 5 feet in any dimension that is situated wholly within a building and that does not at any point come within 6 feet of a lightning conductor or metal connected to a lightning protection system 34342 Exterior Overhead Pipe Lines Properly ground overhead pipes conduits and cable trays on the exterior of the building that enter a building preferably to building grounds at points where pipes enter the building Where a separate ground is provided bond the pipes to the building ground at points where the pipes are closest to the ground connections In addition bond pipes to any metallic masses that are within 6 feet of the pipe 3 4 RESTORATION Where sod has been removed place sod as soon as possible after completing the backfilling Restore to original condition the areas disturbed by trenching storing of dirt cable laying and other work Include necessary topsoiling fertilizing liming seeding sodding sprigging or mulching in any restoration Maintain disturbed surfaces and replacements until
530. tional Institute for Certification in Engineering Technologies NICET Level III or Level IV Technician Installer shall have an office which has been in existence for at least 3 years Installation shall be accomplished by an electrical contractor with a minimum of 5 years experience in the installation of fire alarm systems The Contracting Officer may reject any proposed installer who cannot show evidence of such qualifications The services of a technician provided by the control equipment manufacturer shall be provided to supervise installation adjustments and tests of the system The Contractor shall furnish evidence that the fire alarm equipment supplier has an experienced and effective service organization which carries a stock of repair parts for the system to be furnished The Contractor shall guarantee labor materials and equipment provided under this contract against defects for a period of one year after the date of final acceptance of this work by the Contracting Officer and the receipt of as built drawings and schematics of all equipment Prior to installation submit data for approval by the Naval Facilities Engineering Command MIDLANT Fire Protection Engineer showing that the Contractor has successfully installed addressable analog intelligent interior fire alarm systems of the same type as specified herein or that the Contractor has a firm contractual agreement with a subcontractor having such required experience Include the nam
531. tire transformer assembly Munsell 7GY3 29 1 5 green Paint coating system shall comply with IEEE C57 12 28 and IEEE C57 12 29 regardless of base cabinet and tank material The Munsell color notation is specified in ASTM D 1535 Ea WARNING SIGNS Provide warning signs for the enclosures of pad mounted transformers having a nominal rating exceeding 600 volts a When the enclosure integrity of such equipment is specified to be in accordance with IEEE C57 12 28 such as for pad mounted transformers provide self adhesive warning signs on the outside of the high voltage compartment door s Sign shall be a decal and shall have nominal dimensions of 7 by 10 inches with the legend DANGER HIGH VOLTAGE printed in two lines of nominal 2 inch high letters The word DANGER shall be in white letters on a red background and the words HIGH VOLTAGE shall be in black letters on a white background Decal shall be Panduit No PPSO710D72 or approved equal 4 Arc Flash Warning Label Provide warning label for the enclosure of pad mounted transformers Locate this self adhesive warning label on the outside of the high voltage compartment door warning of potential electrical arc flash hazards and appropriate PPE required The label format shall be as indicated WD GROUNDING AND BONDING UL 467 Provide grounding and bonding as specified in Section 33 71 02 00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 6 CAST IN PLACE CONCRETE Concrete associated with
532. trol panel shall not clear the memory 2 2 10 13 RS 232 C Output Each local control panel shall be capable of operating remote service type cathode ray tubes CRTs printers and or modems The output shall be paralleled ASCII from an EIA RS 232 C connection with a baud rate of 1200 or 2400 to allow use of any commonly available CRT printer or modem age ae bell Amplifiers Preamplifiers Tone Generators Any amplifiers preamplifiers tone generators digitalized voice generators and other hardware necessary for a complete operational textual audible circuit conforming to NFPA 72 shall be housed in a fire alarm control unit terminal cabinet or in the fire alarm control panel The system shall automatically operate and control all building fire alarm speakers except those installed in the stairs and within elevator cabs The speakers in the stairs and elevator cabs shall operate only when the microphone is used to deliver live messages Each amplifier shall have two channels one to broadcast a message and the other for paging Die Di Me Les Construction Amplifiers shall utilize computer grade solid state components and shall be provided with output protection devices sufficient to protect the amplifier against any transient up to 10 times the highest rated voltage in the system 2 2 11 2 Inputs Each system shall be equipped with separate inputs from the tone generator digitalized voice driver and panel mounted microphone
533. trolled release fertilizer to use with hydroseeding and composed of pills coated with plastic resin to provide a continuous release of nutrients for at least 6 months and containing the following minimum percentages by weight of plant food nutrients J percent available nitrogen __ percent available phosphorus ___ percent available potassium ihe percent sulfur ___J percent iron 2 5 MULCH Mulch shall be free from noxious weeds mold and other deleterious materials 2 91 Straw Stalks from oats wheat rye barley or rice Furnish in air dry condition and of proper consistency for placing with commercial mulch blowing equipment Straw shall contain no fertile seed 2 5 2 Hay Air dry condition and of proper consistency for placing with commercial mulch blowing equipment Hay shall be sterile containing no fertile seed Dies Wood Cellulose Fiber Mulch Use recovered materials of either paper based 100 percent or wood based 100 percent hydraulic mulch Processed to contain no growth or germination inhibiting factors and dyed an appropriate color to facilitate visual metering of materials application Composition on air dry weight basis 9 to 15 percent moisture pH range from 5 5 to 8 2 Use with hydraulic application of grass seed and fertilizer 2 6 WATER Source of water shall be approved by Contracting Officer and of suitable quality for irrigation containing no elements toxic to plant life SEC
534. troller Unit Traffic Arm Warning Signal Annunciator Sequence of Events Recorder Alarm Panels CCTV system and all sensors including over speed wrong way vehicle presence intrusion detection and tamper The data package shall include the following a Functional System Block Diagram identifying all major equipment interconnecting wire types and quantities approximate distances and communications protocols b Block and Wiring Diagrams of each subsystem n ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 c Drawing showing layout and dimensions of the Gatehous Control Console with the Alarm Display CCTV monitor and controls and the barrier Master Control Panel d Drawing showing equipment layout in the Gatehous including the Gatehouse Control Console UPS and other hardware intended to be located in the Gatehous e Drawing showing equipment layout around the active vehicle barriers including the active vehicle barriers active vehicle barrier control box es vehicle presenc detectors Stop Lines Traffic Signals Wig Wag warning signals if applicable and Traffic Arms if applicable f Device wiring and installation drawings g Point to point wiring diagram of complete interconnected system including database listing of wire numbers to and from designations and wire characteristics h Details of connections
535. trolyte The battery system shall be maintained in a fully charged condition by means of a solid state battery charger Provide an automatic transfer switch to transfer the load to the batteries in the event of the failure of primary power 2 2 8 2 Capacity Provide the batteries with sufficient capacity to operate the system under supervisory and trouble conditions including audible trouble signal devices for 48 hours and audible and visual signal devices under alarm conditions for an additional 15 minutes 25208 3 Battery Chargers Provide a solid state fully automatic variable charging rate battery charger The charger shall be capable of providing 150 percent of the connected system load and shall maintain the batteries at full charge In the event the batteries are fully discharged the charger shall recharge the batteries back to 95 percent of full charge within 48 hours Provide pilot light to indicate when batteries are manually placed on a high rate SECTION 28 31 63 00 20 Page 12 Submarine A School BQ 534 V2 7A of charge as part of the unit assembly if a high rate switch is provided 2 2 9 System Field Wiring 2 2 9 1 Wiring Within Cabinets Enclosures Boxes Junction Boxes and Fittings Provide wiring installed in a neat and workmanlike manner and installed parallel with or at right angles to the sides and back of any box enclosure or cabinet Conductors which are terminated spliced or otherwise interrupte
536. ts Acceptance tests and inspections G SD 07 Certificates Qualifications of organization and lead engineering technician G Acceptance test and inspections procedure G 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 4 1 Qualifications Contractor shall engage the services of a qualified testing organization to provide inspection testing calibration and adjustment of the electrical distribution system and generation equipment listed in paragraph entitled Acceptance Tests and Inspections herein Organization shall be independent of the supplier manufacturer and installer of the equipment The organization shall be a first tier subcontractor No work required by this section of the specification shall be performed by a second tier subcontractor a Submit name and qualifications of organization Organization shall have been regularly engaged in the testing of electrical materials devices installations and systems for a minimum of 5 years The organization shall have a calibration program and test instruments SECTION 26 08 00 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Ts used shall be calibrated in accordance with NETA ATS b Submit name and qualifications of the lead engineering technician performing the required testing services Include a list of three comparable jobs performed by the technician with specific names and telephone numbers for reference Testing inspection calibration and adjustments shall be performed by an engineering tech
537. ts and cable insulators Support cable splices in underground structures by racks on each side of the splice Locate splices to prevent cyclic bending in the spliced sheath Install cables at middle and bottom of cable racks leaving top space open for future cables except as otherwise indicated for existing installations Provide one spare three insulator rack arm for each cable rack in each underground structure SECTION 33 71 02 00 20 Page 21 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 328 1 Cable Tag Installation Install cable tags in each manhole as specified including each splice Tag wire and cable provided by this contract Install cable tags over the fireproofing if any and locate the tags so that they are clearly visible without disturbing any cabling or wiring in the manholes 309 CONDUCTORS INSTALLED IN PARALLEL Conductors shall be grouped such that each conduit of a parallel run contains 1 Phase A conductor 1 Phase B conductor 1 Phase C conductor and 1 neutral conductor 3 2 10 LOW VOLTAGE CABLE SPLICING AND TERMINATING Make terminations and splices with materials and methods as indicated or specified herein and as designated by the written instructions of the manufacturer Do not allow the cables to be moved until after the splicing material has completely set Make splices in underground distribution systems only in accessible locations such as manholes handholes or aboveground termination cabinets ee ba MEDIUM V
538. ts of a single manufacturer however the component parts of the item need not be the products of the same manufacturer unless stated in this section 1 5 4 1 Alternative Qualifications Products having less than a 2 year field service record will be acceptable if a certified record of satisfactory field operation for not less than 6000 hours exclusive of the manufacturers factory or laboratory tests is furnished SECTION 26 23 00 Page 4 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Lepa Ae Material and Equipment Manufacturing Date Products manufactured more than 3 years prior to date of delivery to site shall not be used unless specified otherwise T6 MAINTENANCE 1 6 1 Switchboard Operation and Maintenance Data Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals in accordance with Section 01 78 23 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 1 6 2 Assembled Operation and Maintenance Manuals Manuals shall be assembled and bound securely in durable hard covered water resistant binders The manuals shall be assembled and indexed in the following order with a table of contents The contents of the assembled operation and maintenance manuals shall be as follows a Manufacturer s O amp M information required by the paragraph entitled SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data b Catalog data required by the paragraph entitled SD 03 Product Data c Drawings required by the paragraph entitled SD 02 Shop Drawings d Prices for spare parts and supp
539. ts which include results of production tests performed on the actual equipment for this project These tests include a 60 hertz dielectric tests b Mechanical operation tests c Electrical operation and control wiring tests d Ground fault sensing equipment test PART 3 EXECUTION 3 sL INSTALLATION Electrical installations shall conform to IEEE C2 NFPA 70 and to the requirements specified herein R2 GROUNDING NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 except that grounds and grounding systems shall have a resistance to solid earth ground not exceeding 5 ohms 2a Grounding Electrodes Provide driven ground rods as specified in Section 33 71 02 00 20 UNDERGROUND ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION Connect ground conductors to the SECTION 26 23 00 Page 9 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 upper end of the ground rods by exothermic weld or compression connector Provide compression connectors at equipment end of ground conductors 3 2 2 Equipment Grounding Provide bare copper cable not smaller than No 4 0 AWG not less than 24 inches below grade connecting to the indicated ground rods When work in addition to that indicated or specified is directed to obtain the specified ground resistance the provision of the contract covering Changes shall apply 3 2 3 Connections Make joints in grounding conductors and loops by exothermic weld or compression connector Exothermic welds and compression connectors shall be installed as specified in Section 33
540. tt 2 1 3 2 Reflector Type Bulb Retrofits Replace 50 watt incandescent bulbs 550 lumens with 17 to 19 watt compact fluorescent bulbs 33 lumens per watt Replace 60 watt incandescent bulbs 675 lumens with 20 to 21 watt compact fluorescent bulbs 40 lumens per watt Replace 75 watt incandescent bulbs 875 lumens with 22 watt or greater compact fluorescent bulbs 40 lumens per watt 2 2 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE HID LIGHTING FIXTURES UL 1598 Provide HID fixtures with tempered glass lenses when using metal halide lamps 221 HID Ballasts UL 1029 and ANSI C82 4 and shall be constant wattage autotransformer CWA or regulator high power factor type minimum 90 percent Provide single lamp ballasts which shall have a minimum starting temperature of minus 30 degrees C Ballasts shall be a Designed to operate on the voltage system to which they are connected b Designed for installation in a normal ambient temperature of 40 degrees oP c Constructed so that open circuit operation will not reduce the average life High pressure sodium HPS ballasts shall have a solid state igniter starter with an average life in the pulsing mode of 3500 hours at the intended ambient temperature Igniter case temperature shall not exceed 90 degrees C in any mode 222 Metal Halide Lamps a Double ended 70 watt conforming to ANSI C78 1381 b Single ended wattage as indicated conforming to ANSI ANSLG C78 43 22 Ded Luminai
541. tures shall be identified with the manufacturer s name embedded in or otherwise permanently attached to an interior wall face 2 TAL DD Construction Structure top bottom and wall shall be of a uniform thickness of not less than 6 inches Thin walled knock out panels for designed or future duct bank entrances shall not be permitted Quantity size and location of duct bank entrance windows shall be as directed and cast completely open by the precaster Size of windows shall exceed the nominal duct bank envelope dimensions by at least 12 inches vertically and horizontally to preclude in field window modifications made necessary by duct bank misalignment However the sides of precast windows shall be a minimum of 6 inches from the inside surface of adjacent walls floors or ceilings Form the perimeter of precast window openings to have a keyed or inward flared surface to provide a positive interlock with the mating duct bank envelope Provide welded wire fabric reinforcing through window openings for in field cutting and flaring into duct bank envelopes Provide additional reinforcing steel comprised of at least two No 4 bars around window openings Provide drain sumps a minimum of 12 inches in diameter and 4 inches deep for precast structures 22 LA 23 Joints Provide tongue and groove joints on mating edges of precast components Shiplap joints are not allowed Design joints to firmly interlock adjoining components and to provi
542. twork and software security measures The system components and software shall have the attributes outlined in section 33 8 AVG L shall satisfy the Net ready KPP DoD mandated Pd of ttempting to hicle Pd2 0 95 Accurately Validate Credential Rate AVCR Limit read time tos 5 seconds AVCR 2 0 90 Probability of Detection unauthorized personnel a enter Restricted Area V MTTR S 90 min MTBM 2 Mean Time To Repair Mean Time Between Maintenance 500 hrs operating time ECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 47 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 Paragraph 3 4 2 3 4 2 32462 3 4 2 B43 2 342 4 2 m Verification Method Description Time to update local database after local data entry Within Installation T lt 7 seconds Shall be able to detect vehicles ranging from licensed motorcycles and scooters to AASHTO defined passenger vehicles Low Volume Operation vehicle through put X 60 vehicles per hour Emergency Vehicle Operation 30 seconds to retract all barriers Security personnel can operate system while wearing tactical cold weather gloves Satisfaction Rate2 0 80 Capacity of system to store SA video 2 X 30 days Probability that alarms associated with X unauthorized entry attempts shall function properly Pa 99 9 SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 48 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 APPENDIX 1 AVG L CONFIGURATION ITEM CI
543. ual presence of smoke shall not initiate a trouble condition h Provide a notification appliance silencing switch which when activated will silence the audible signal appliance but will not affect the visual alarm indicator the liquid crystal display or the automatic notification of the fire department This switch shall be overridden upon activation of a subsequent alarm i Provide alarm verification capability for smoke sensors Alarm verification shall initially be set for 30 seconds j Provide program capability via switches in a locked portion of the FACP to bypass the automatic notification appliance circuits fire reporting system air handler shutdown elevator recall door release features Operation of this programming shall indicate this action on the FACP display and printer output k Alarm supervisory and or trouble signals shall be automatically transmitted to the fire department l Alarm functions shall override trouble or supervisory functions Supervisory functions shall override trouble functions m The system shall be capable of being programmed from the panel s keyboard Programmed information shall be stored in non volatile memory n The system shall be capable of operating supervising and or monitoring both addressable and non addressable alarm and supervisory devices O There shall be no limit other than maximum system capacity as to the number of addressable devices which may be in alarm simul
544. uals required by submittal item SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data SD 02 Shop Drawings SD 03 Product Data Protocol modules G Data recorder G Submittals shall include manufacturer s information for each component device and accessory provided with the meters protocol modules or communications modules SD 06 Test Reports Acceptance checks and tests G SD 10 Operation and Maintenance Data Water meters G Communications modules G Protocol modules G Data recorder G 1 4 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 4 1 Installation Drawings Drawings shall indicate but not be limited to the following a Elementary diagrams and wiring diagrams with terminals identified of protocol modules communications modules Ethernet connections telephone lines For each meter installation provide a diagram identified by the building number b One line diagram including meters protocol modules communications modules Ethernet connections telephone outlets and fuses For each meter installation provide a diagram identified by the building number 1 4 2 Standard Products Provide materials and equipment that are products of manufacturers regularly engaged in the production of such products which are of equal SECTION 33 12 33 00 30 Page 2 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 material design and workmanship Products shall have been in satisfactory commercial or industrial use for five years prior to bid opening The five year period shall include appli
545. ubing made of wood or nonmagnetic material When metallic conduit or tubing is provided electrically bond conductor to conduit or tubing at the upper and lower ends by clamp type connectors or welds including exothermic Lst Main and Bonding Conductors NFPA 780 and UL 96 Class I Class II or Class II modified materials as applicable i2 Copper Provide copper conductors on nonmetallic stacks that do not weigh less than 319 pounds per thousand feet and provide cable such that the size of any strand in the cable is not less than No 15 AWG Provide thickness of web or ribbon on stacks that is not less than No 12 AWG Provide loop conductors that are comprised of copper conductors not smaller than No 1 0 AWG abs 3 Aluminum Do not allow aluminum to contact the earth and do not use in any other manner that will contribute to rapid deterioration of the metal Observe appropriate precautions at connections with dissimilar metals in accordance with NFPA 70 Article 110 14 Provide aluminum cable conductors for bonding and interconnecting metallic bodies to main cable that are at least equivalent to strength cross sectional area of a No 4 AWG aluminum wire When perforated strips are provided use strips that are much wider than solid strips Use a strip width that is at least twice that of the diameter of the perforations Use an aluminum strip which has a thickness of not less than the diameter of No 12 AWG and at least 1 1 2 inches wid
546. uled date a Test Instrument Calibration 1 The manufacturer shall have a calibration program which assures that all applicable test instruments are maintained within rated accuracy 2 The accuracy shall be directly traceable to the National Institute of Standards and Technology 3 Instrument calibration frequency schedule shall not exceed 12 months for both test floor instruments and leased specialty equipment 4 Dated calibration labels shall be visible on all test equipment SECTION 26 23 00 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 5 Calibrating standard shall be of higher accuracy than that of the instrument tested 6 Keep up to date records that indicate dates and test results of instruments calibrated or tested For instruments calibrated by the manufacturer on a routine basis in lieu of third party calibration include the following a Maintain up to date instrument calibration instructions and procedures for each test instrument b Identify the third party laboratory calibrated instrument to verify that calibrating standard is met s542 Switchboard Design Tests NEMA PB 2 and UL 891 SEA Design Tests Furnish documentation showing the results of design tests on a product of the same series and rating as that provided by this specification a Short circuit current test b Enclosure tests c Dielectric test 5 3 Switchboard Production Tests NEMA PB 2 and UL 891 Furnish repor
547. und at the bottom Provide at least two down conductors on opposite sides of the stack leading from the ring or crown at the top to the ground When the stack is an adjunct of building near or touching the building perimeter extend one of the conductors directly to a ground connection while the other may be connected to lightning protection system on the building On stacks exceeding 160 feet in height cross connect down conductors approximately midway between the top and bottom Reduce joints in conductors to a minimum and make joints to have the same tension strength as the conductors that are joining Space fasteners of copper or copper bronze alloy not over 3 feetapart for vertical conductors and not over 2 feet apart for horizontal conductors To prevent gases from corroding copper air terminals provide conductors and fasteners within 25 feetof the top of stack with continuous coating of hot dipped lead or an equivalent coating Provide conductors conforming to the requirements for nonmetallic stacks for stacks partly or wholly of reinforced concrete For nonmetallic stacks electrically connect reinforcing steel to down conductors at top and bottom of concrete 3e INTERFACE WITH OTHER STRUCTURES cee L Interconnection of Metal Bodies Protect metal bodies when not within the zone of protection of air terminal Bond metal bodies having an area of 400 square inches or greater or a volume of 1000 cubic inches or greater to lightning protec
548. unding and Bonding Equipment UL 467 except as indicated or specified otherwise 3 3 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES Install and connect pad mounted transformers furnished under this section as indicated on project drawings the approved shop drawings and as specified herein co res eee Meters and Current Transformers ANSI C12 1 3 4 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING Where field painting of enclosures is required to correct damage to the manufacturer s factory applied coatings provide manufacturer s recommended coatings and apply in accordance with manufacturer s instructions 3 3 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible side but space the signs a maximum of 30 feet apart 3 6 FOUNDATION FOR EQUIPMENT AND ASSEMBLIES Mount transformer on concrete slab Unless otherwise indicated the slab shall be at least 8 inches thick reinforced with a 6 by 6 W2 9 by W2 9 mesh placed uniformly 4 inches from the top of the slab Slab shall be placed on a 6 inch thick well compacted gravel base Top of concrete slab shall be approximately 4 inches above finished grade with gradual slope for drainage Edges above grade shall have 1 2 inch chamfer Slab shall be of adequate size to project at least 8 inches beyond the equipment Stub up conduits with bushings 2 inches into cable wells in the concrete pad Coordinate dimensions of cable wells with transformer cable training areas
549. unds Repeat the sampling when the material source changes or when testing reveals unacceptable deficiencies or variations from the specified grading of materials SDM 2 Cold Feed Aggregate Sampling Take two samples daily from the belt conveying materials from the cold feed Collect materials in three increments at random to make a representative composite sample of not less than 50 pounds Take samples in accordance with ASTM D 75 D 75M 3 54103 Coarse and Fine Aggregates Take a 50 pound sample from the cold feed at least once daily for sieve analyses and specific gravity tests Additional samples may be required to perform more frequent tests when analyses show deficiencies or unacceptable variances or deviations The method of sampling is as specified herein for aggregates 3 5 1 4 Mineral Filler ASTM D 546 Take samples large enough to provide ample material for testing ore LaS Pavement and Mixture Take plant samples for the determination of mix properties and field samples for thickness and density of the completed pavements Furnish tools labor and material for samples and satisfactory replacement of pavement Take samples and tests at not less than frequency specified hereinafter and at the beginning of plant operations for each day s work as a minimum each change in the mix or equipment and as often as directed Accomplish sampling in accordance with ASTM D979 D979M Bb 2 Testing 375 26a Aggregates Tests a
550. utoff control nozzle and auxiliary water resupply equipment The water tank and auxiliary resupply equipment shall be of sufficient capacity to permit continuous operations The hose wand and nozzle shall be capable of cleaning the crack faces and the pavement surface on both sides of the crack for a width of at least 1 2 inch A pressure gauge mounted at the pump shall show at all times the pressure inpsi at which the equipment is operating 1 2 5 Hand Tools Hand tools may be used when approved for removing defective sealant from cracks and repairing or cleaning the crack faces T26 Crack Sealing Equipment Provide unit applicators used for heating and installing the hot poured crack sealant materials that are mobile and equipped with a double boiler agitator type kettle with an oil medium in the outer space for heat transfer a direct connected pressure type extruding device with a nozzle shaped for inserting in the crack to be filled positive temperature devices for controlling the temperature of the transfer oil and sealant and a recording type thermometer for indicating the temperature of the sealant Allow the sealant to circulate through the delivery hose and return to the inner kettle when not in use due to the applicator unit design 1 3 SUBMITTALS Government approval is required for submittals with a G designation submittals not having a G designation are for Contractor Quality Control approval Submit
551. ve factory or factory approved certification from each equipment manufacturer indicating that they are qualified to install and test the provided products Submit documentation for a minimum of three and a maximum of five successful telecommunication system installations for each of the key personnel Documentation for each key person shall include at least two successful system installations provided that are equivalent in system size and in construction complexity to the telecommunications system proposed for this solicitation Include specific experience in installing and testing telecommunications systems and provide the names and locations of at least two project installations successfully completed using copper telecommunications cabling systems All of the existing telecommunications system installations offered by the key persons as successful experience shall have been in successful full time service for at least 18 months prior to the issuance date for this solicitation Provide the name and role of the key person the title location and completed installation date of the referenced project the referenced project owner point of contact information including name organization title and telephone number and generally the referenced project description including system size and construction complexity Indicate that all key persons are currently employed by the telecommunications contractor or have a commitment to the telecommu
552. ve fins and burrs and cut taper pipe threads in accordance with ASME B1 20 1 Provide threads smooth clean and full cut Apply anti seize paste or tape to male threads portion Work piping into place without springing or forcing Backing off to permit alignment of threaded joints will not be permitted Engage threads so that not more than three threads remain exposed Use unions for connections to valves meters for which a means of disconnection is not otherwise provided b Welded Joints Weld by the shielded metal arc process using covered electrodes and in accordance with procedures established and qualified in accordance with ASME B31 8 c Flanged Joints Use flanged joints for connecting welded joint pipe and fittings to valves to provide for disconnection Install joints so that flange faces bear uniformly on gaskets Engage bolts so that there is complete threading through the nuts and tighten so that bolts are uniformly stressed and equally torqued d Pipe Size Changes Use reducing fittings for changes in pipe size Size changes made with bushings will not be accepted e Painting Paint new ferrous metal piping including supports in accordance with Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS Do not apply paint until piping tests have been completed f Identification of Interior Piping Identify interior piping aboveground in accordance with MIL STD 101 using adhesive backed or snap on plastic labels and arrows In lieu of labels
553. versal operation drop arms signage signals or other devices as required shall be used to notify drivers of the change in traffic direction he AVG L shall perform the required perational sequence for Valid ID Card nd Pin access granted as described in ection 3 1 2 6 he AVG L shall perform the required perational sequence for Valid ID Card nvalid Pin access is denied as escribed in section 3 1 2 6 2 he AVG L shall perform the required operational sequence for Invalid ID Card access is denied as described in section 3 1 2 6 3 The AVG L shall perform the required operational sequence for No ID Card access is denied as described in section 3 1 2 6 4 The AVG L shall perform the required operational sequence for Gate Crash as described in section 3 1 2 6 5 The AVG L sha perform the required operational sequence for Vehicle A valid Tailgated by Vehicle B invalid or vehicle with trailer as described in section 3 1 2 6 6 The AVG L shall perform the required operational sequence for ID Card Anti Passback as described in section Sd Oas All AVG L projects shall be designed around a common interoperable architecture The number type and placement of AVG L components shall be tailored to each location based upon existing infrastructure local restrictions and other design constraints SECTION 34 41 26 00 10 Page 40 Submarine A
554. version or modification The register must operate reliably down to at least 3 0 volts Color coded wire terminals red green and black shall be provided however only the red and black terminals will be utilized for a two wire connection to the interface ScanPad The green terminal shall only be utilized to convert to AMR via the use of a MIU A suitable wire terminal cover shall be provided and be factory potted when ordered for underground pit installations c All registers must be removable without disassembly of the meter or depressurizing the service line The register must be free of openings to protect the internal electronics of the register Lens covers shall be made of polycarbonate or other suitable engineering polymer for indoor installations and mineral glass for underground pit installations All other register assembly and material requirements stated herein shall also apply SECTION 33 12 33 00 30 Page 13 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 2 COMMUNICATIONS 2 21 Energy Monitoring and Control EMCS or Automatic Meter Reading Interfaces a Water meters shall be capable of interfacing output signal equivalent to flow rate with the existing Energy Management Control System EMCS and Automatic Meter Reading systems for data gathering in units of GPM b Meters shall not require power to function and deliver data Output signal shall be either a voltage or amperage signal which can be converted to a flow rate specifica
555. vice personnel while responding to the service request The provisions of this Section are not in lieu of nor relieve the Contractor of warranty responsibilities covered in this specification Should the result of the service request be the uncovering of a system defect covered under the warranty provisions all costs for the call including the labor necessary to identify the defect shall be borne by the Contractor PART 2 PRODUCTS Zhe 1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES VFD Provide frequency drive to control the speed of induction motor s The VFD shall include the following minimum functions features and ratings a Input circuit breaker per UL 489 with a minimum of 10 000 amps symmetrical interrupting capacity and door interlocked external operator b A converter stage per UL 508C shall change fixed voltage fixed frequency ac line power to a fixed dc voltage The converter shall utilize a full wave bridge design incorporating diode rectifiers Silicon Controlled Rectifiers SCR are not acceptable The converter shall be insensitive to three phase rotation of the ac line and shall not cause displacement power factor of less than 95 lagging under any speed and load condition c An inverter stage shall change fixed dc voltage to variable frequency variable voltage ac for application to a standard NEMA design B squirrel cage motor The inverter shall be switched in a manner to produce a sine coded pulse width m
556. ving no more than two unit mounted lamps may be rated 6 volts Equip units with brown out sensitive circuit to activate battery when ac input falls to 75 percent of normal voltage Provide integral self testing module 2 12 2 Fluorescent Emergency System Each system shall consist of an automatic power failure device test switch operable from outside of the fixture pilot light visible from outside the fixture and fully automatic solid state charger in a self contained power pack Provide self testing module integral to the fixture Charger shall be either trickle float constant current or constant potential type ora combination of these Battery shall be sealed electrolyte type with capacity as required to supply power to the number of lamps shown for each system for 90 minutes at a minimum of 1100 lumens per lamp output Battery shall operate unattended and require no maintenance including no additional water for a period of not less than 5 years Emergency ballasts provided with fixtures containing solid state ballasts shall be fully compatible with the solid state ballasts Zoid SELF TESTING MODULE Self testing module for exit signs and emergency lighting equipment shall perform the following functions a Continuous monitoring of charger operation and battery voltage with visual indication of normal operation and of malfunction b Monthly discharge cycling of battery with monitoring of transfer circuit function battery capa
557. viously laid course to expose an even vertical surface for the full thickness of the course When required rake fresh mixture against joints thoroughly tamp with hot tampers smooth with hot smoothers and roll Transverse joints in adjacent lanes shall be offset a minimum of 2 feet 3 4 2 Longitudinal Joints Space 6 inches apart Do not allow joints to coincide with joints of existing pavement or previously placed courses Spreader screed shall overlap previously placed lanes 2 to 3 inches and be of such height to permit compaction to produce a smooth dense joint With a lute push back mixture placed on the surface of previous lanes to the joint edge Do not scatter mix Remove and waste excess material When edges of longitudinal joints are irregular honeycombed or poorly compacted cut back unsatisfactory sections of joint and expose an even vertical surface for the full thickness of the course When required rake fresh mixture SECTION 32 12 17 Page 14 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 against joint thoroughly tamp with hot tampers smooth with hot smoothers and roll while hot 3 5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 32 501 Sampling yao ee eae Aggregates At Source Prior to production and delivery of aggregates take at least one initial sample in accordance with ASTM D 75 D 75M at the source Collect each sample by taking three incremental samples at random from the source material to make a composite sample of not less than 50 po
558. volt 3 phase circuits shall have terminal voltage rating of 460 volts Motors shall be designed to operate at full capacity with voltage variation of plus or minus 10 percent of motor voltage rating Unless otherwise indicated motors rated 1 HP and above shall be continuous duty type Where fuse protection is specifically recommended by the equipment manufacturer provide fused switches in lieu of non fused switches indicated sL I High Efficiency Single Phase Motors Single phase fractional horsepower alternating current motors shall be high efficiency types corresponding to the applications listed in NEMA MG 11 In exception for motor driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency rating such as a SEER rating provide equipment with motor to meet the overall system rating indicated 14 2 Premium Efficiency Polyphase Motors Polyphase motors shall be selected based on high efficiency characteristics relative to typical characteristics and applications as listed in NEMA MG 10 In addition continuous rated polyphase squirrel cage medium induction motors shall meet the requirements for premium efficiency electric motors in accordance with NEMA MG 1 including the NEMA full load efficiency ratings In exception for motor driven equipment with a minimum seasonal or overall efficiency rating such as a SEER rating provide equipment with motor to meet the overall system rating indicated 14 3 Motor Si
559. volts The arc shall be directed toward the sample assembly accurately positioned 5 plus or minus 1 millimeters downstream in the plasma from the anode orifice by fixed flow rate of argon gas 0 18 g per second Each sample assembly shall be tested at three unrelated points Start time for tests shall be taken from recorded peak current when the specimen is exposed to the full test temperature Surface heat on the specimen prior to that time shall be minimal The end point is established when the plasma or conductive arc penetrates the protective tape and strikes the lead tube Submittals for arc proofing tape shall indicate that the test has been performed and passed by the manufacturer 2 18 2 Medium Voltage Cable Qualification and Production Tests Results of AEIC CS8 qualification and production tests as applicable for each type of medium voltage cable PART 3 EXECUTION 3al INSTALLATION Install equipment and devices in accordance with the manufacturer s published instructions and with the requirements and recommendations of NFPA 70 and IEEE C2 as applicable In addition to these requirements install telecommunications in accordance with TIA 758 and RUS Bull 1751F 644 32 CABLE INSPECTION Prior to installation each cable reel shall be inspected for correct storage positions signs of physical damage and broken end seals If end seal is broken moisture shall be removed from cable prior to installation in accordance with
560. wer source keeping the conductors as short and straight as practically possible 352 FIELD FABRICATED NAMEPLATE MOUNTING Provide number location and letter designation of nameplates as indicated Fasten nameplates to the device with a minimum of two sheet metal screws or two rivets 363 WARNING SIGN MOUNTING Provide the number of signs required to be readable from each accessible Side Space the signs in accordance with NFPA 70E 3 4 FIELD APPLIED PAINTING Paint electrical equipment as required to match finish of adjacent surfaces or to meet the indicated or specified safety criteria Painting shall be as specified in Section 09 90 00 PAINTS AND COATINGS 35 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL Furnish test equipment and personnel and submit written copies of test results Give Contracting Officer 5 working days notice prior to each test Jeon 1 Devices Subject to Manual Operation Each device subject to manual operation shall be operated at least five times demonstrating satisfactory operation each time 3 5 2 600 Volt Wiring Test Test wiring rated 600 volt and less to verify that no short circuits or accidental grounds exist Perform insulation resistance tests on wiring No 6 AWG and larger diameter using instrument which applies voltage of approximately 500 volts to provide direct reading of resistance Minimum resistance shall be 250 000 ohms 345 3 Transformer Tests Perform the standard not optional tests in accordance with the In
561. with each pair of conductors in the circuit short circuited at the farthest point from the circuit origin The tests shall be witnessed by the Contracting Officer and test results recorded for use at the final acceptance test c Preliminary Testing Conduct preliminary tests to ensure that devices and circuits are functioning properly Tests shall meet the requirements of paragraph entitled Minimum System Tests After preliminary testing is complete provide a letter certifying that the installation is complete and fully operable The letter shall state that each initiating and indicating device was tested in place and functioned properly The letter shall also state that panel functions were tested and operated properly The letter shall include the names and titles of the witnesses to the preliminary tests The Contractor and an authorized representative from each supplier of equipment shall be in attendance at the preliminary testing to make necessary adjustments d Request for Formal Inspection and Tests When tests have been completed and corrections made submit a signed dated certificate with a request for formal inspection and tests to the Contracting Officer e Final Testing Notify the Contracting Officer in writing when the system is ready for final acceptance testing Submit request for test at least 15 calendar days prior to the test date A final acceptance test will not be scheduled until the operation and maintenance O amp M
562. wn Copper Wire B8 2011 Standard Specification for Concentric Lay Stranded Copper Conductors Hard Medium Hard or Soft D 709 2001 R 2007 Laminated Thermosetting Materials INSTITUTE OF ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONICS ENGINEERS IEEE 100 2000 Archived The Authoritative Dictionary of IEEE Standards Terms 81 1983 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity Ground Impedance and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System C2 2012 National Electrical Safety Code INTERNATIONAL ELECTRICAL TESTING ASSOCIATION NETA ATS 2009 Standard for Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems NATIONAL ELECTRICAL MANUFACTURERS ASSOCIATION NEMA I2 T 2008 Electric Meters Code for Electricity Metering C80 1 2005 American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit ERSC C80 3 2005 American National Standard for Electrical Metallic Tubing EMT 250 2008 Enclosures for Electrical Equipment 1000 Volts Maximum FU 1 2002 R 2007 Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses SECTION 26 20 00 Page 1 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 NEMA ICS 1 2000 R 2005 R 2008 Standard for Industrial Control and Systems General Requirements NEMA ICS 2 2000 R 2005 Errata 2008 Standard for Controllers Contactors and Overload Relays Rated 600 V NEMA ICS 4 2010 Terminal Blocks NEMA ICS 6 1993 R 2006 Enclosures NEMA KS 1 2001 R 2006 Enclosed and Miscellaneous Distribution Equipment Switch
563. y SECTION 26 27 14 00 20 Page 8 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 e 2 2 sequence with time selectable for each item The meters shall support three modes of registers Normal Mode Alternate Mode and Test Mode The meter also shall support a Toolbox or Service Information accessible in the field through an optocom port to a separate computer using the supplied software to allow access to instantaneous service information such as voltage current power factor load demand and the phase angle for individual phases Meter shall have a standard 4 year warranty Disconnect Method Provide a 10 pole safety disconnect complete with isolation devices for the voltage and current transformer inputs including a shorting means for the current transformers Disconnecting wiring blocks shall be provided between the current transformer and the meter A shorting mechanism shall be built into the wiring block to allow the current transformer wiring to be changed without removing power to the transformer The wiring blocks shall be located where they are accessible without the necessity of disconnecting power to the transformer Voltage monitoring circuits shall be equipped with disconnect switches to isolate the meter base or socket from the voltage source Provide fuse protection in accordance with paragraph entitled Voltage Requirements Installation Methods Transformer Mounted XFMR in Metering Systems Schedule Meter base
564. y including outlet boxes conduits with pull wires wireways cable trays and other accessories for telecommunications outlets and pathway in accordance with TIA 569 and as specified herein Additional telecommunications requirements are specified in Section 27 10 00 BUILDING TELECOMMUNICATIONS CABLING SYSTEM 2 19 COMMUNITY ANTENNA TELEVISION CATV SYSTEM Additional CATV requirements are specified in the following two paragraphs 22191 CATV Outlets Provide flush mounted 75 ohm F type connector outlet rated from 5 to 1000 MHz in standard electrical outlet boxes with isolation barrier with mounting frame 2 19 2 CATV Faceplates Provide modular faceplates for mounting of CATV Outlets Faceplate shall include designation labels and label covers for circuit identification Faceplate color shall match outlet and switch coverplates 2 20 GROUNDING AND BONDING EQUIPMENT 2201 Ground Rods UL 467 Ground rods shall be copper clad steel with minimum diameter of 3 4 inch and minimum length of 10 feet SECTION 26 20 00 Page 18 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 2 20 2 Ground Bus A copper ground bus shall be provided in the electrical equipment rooms as indicated 2 20 3 Telecommunications Grounding Busbar Provide corrosion resistant grounding busbar suitable for indoor installation in accordance with TIA J STD 607 Busbars shall be electro plated for reduced contact resistance If not plated the busbar shall be cleaned prior to faste
565. y be made of a suitable synthetic polymer External Fasteners Casing Bolts Studs Nuts Screws and Washers External fasteners shall be made of a copper alloy containing not less than 57 percent copper stainless steel or steel treated to resist corrosion by a process approved by the Government Fasteners for no pressure assemblies may be made of a suitable synthetic polymer All external case closures such as rings clamps screws bolts cap bolts nuts and washers shall be designed for easy removal following lengthy service Companion Flanges Companion flanges shall be made of cast iron Automatic Valves The valve weights shall be lead or a copper alloy containing not less than 75 percent copper or a copper alloy shell loaded with lead The valve and supplemental hinge pins or spindles shall be a copper alloy containing not less than 75 percent copper or stainless steel and all valve and supplemental weight hinge bearings shall be bushed with hard rubber or bronze or other suitable bushing material If the valve contains a clapper it shall be faced with a removable semi hard seat Valve seats shall be made of a copper alloy containing not less than 75 percent copper and suitable amounts of tin lead and zinc b General Design 1 2 Pressure Requirements Meters supplied under this specification shall operate without leakage or damage to any part at a working pressure of 150 psi Accessibility All compound meter
566. y power or any other malfunction which could render the digitalized voice module inoperative shall automatically cause the slow whoop tone to take over all functions assigned to the failed unit Messages shall utilize a female voice and shall be as follows May I have your attention please May I have your attention please A fire emergency has been reported in the building Please leave the building by the nearest exit or exit stairway Do not use the elevators Provide a 2 second pause May I have your attention please repeat tones and message 2 2 10 6 Memory Provide each control unit with non volatile memory and logic for all functions The use of long life batteries capacitors or other age dependent devices shall not be considered as equal to non volatile processors PROMS or EPROMS POPPARI RE Field Programmability Provide control units and control panels that are fully field programmable for control initiation notification supervisory and trouble functions of both input and output The system program configuration shall be menu driven System changes shall be password protected and shall be accomplished using personal computer based equipment 2 2 10 8 Input Output Modifications The FACP shall contain features which allow the bypassing of input devices from the system or the modification of system outputs These control features shall consist of a panel mounted keypad Any bypass or modificatio
567. y working it back and forth across the roadbed in order to get the mixture to the proper condition for compaction TREE General Requirements for Use of Mechanical Spreader When mechanical spreaders are used the bituminous mixture shall be dumped into an approved mechanical spreader and placed as nearly continuous as possible Adjust the speed of placing to permit proper rolling 3 5 4 Offsetting Joints Between Succeeding Courses Perform placing of a succeeding course in such a manner that the longitudinal joints of the succeeding course will not coincide with joints of the previous course and will be offset from joints in the previous course by at least 1 foot Transverse joints in the succeeding course shall be offset by at least 2 feet from transverse joints in the previous course 3 5 5 Special Requirements for Laying Strips Succeeding Initial Strip In laying each succeeding strip after the initial strip has been spread and compacted as specified the blade of the motor grader or the screed of the mechanical spreader shall overlap previously placed strip 3 to 4 inches at a height required for compaction to produce a smooth dense joint 3 556 Shoveling Raking and Tamping After Machine Spreading Shovelers and rakers shall follow the spreading machine raking removing and adding mixture as required to obtain a course that when completed will conform to all specified requirements Excessive handwork and broadcasting or fann
568. zes Provide size for duty to be performed not exceeding the full load nameplate current rating when driven equipment is operated at specified capacity under most severe conditions likely to be encountered When motor size provided differs from size indicated or specified make adjustments to wiring disconnect devices and branch circuit protection to accommodate equipment actually provided Provide controllers for motors rated 1 hp and above with electronic phase voltage monitors designed to protect motors from phase loss undervoltage and overvoltage Provide protection for motors from immediate restart by a time adjustable restart relay 14 4 Wiring and Conduit Provide internal wiring for components of packaged equipment as an integral part of the equipment Provide power wiring and conduit for field installed equipment and motor control equipment forming part of motor control centers or switchgear assemblies the conduit and wiring connecting such centers assemblies or other power sources to equipment as specified herein Power wiring and conduit shall conform to the requirements specified herein Control wiring shall be provided under and SECTION 26 20 00 Page 15 Submarine A School BQ 534 1127117 conform to the requirements of the section specifying the associated equipment 2 15 MOTOR CONTROLLERS UL 508 NEMA ICS 1 and NEMA ICS 2 Controllers shall have thermal overload protection in each phase and shall have one spare

1127117 - [PROJECT.TOC] - Performance Heating & Plumbing

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

1127117 - [PROJECT.TOC] - Performance Heating &amp; Plumbing

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

1127117 - [PROJECT.TOC] - Performance Heating & Plumbing